T

SANSKRIT GRAMMAR

FOR BEGINNERS,

IN

DEVANAGARl AND ROMAN LETTERS THROUGHOUT,

BY

F. MAX MtiLLER, M.A.,

FOREIGN MEMBER OF THE FRENCH INSTITTTTB,

ETC.

SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND ACCENTUATED.

LONDON:

GREEN, AND CO.

LONGMANS,

1870.
 AND E. PICKARD HALL,
T. M.A., E. B. GARDNER,-
COMBE,

TO TH.E UNIVERSITY.
PRINTERS
 PREFACE

TO THE FIRST EDITION.

J.HE present grammar, which is intended

chiefly for beginners,
is

believed to contain all the information that a student of Sanskrit

is likelyto want during the first two or three years of his reading.
Rules referringto the language of the Vedas have been entirely
excluded, for it is not desirable that the difficulties of that ancient

dialect should be approachedby any one who has not fullymastered

the grammar of the ordinarySanskrit such as it was fixed by Panini

and his successors. All allusions to cognate forms in Greek, Latin,

or Gothic, have likewise been suppressed,because, however esting

inter-

and useful to the advanced student, they are apt to deprive

the beginnerof that clear and firm grasp of the grammaticalsystem
peculiarto the language of ancient India, which alone can form a

solid foundation for the study both of Sanskrit and of Comparative

Philology.
The two objectswhich
principal I have kept in view while posing
com-

this grammar, have been clearness and correctness. With

regardto clearness, my chief model has been the grammar of Bopp ;

with regardto correctness, the grammar of Colebrooke. If I may

hope, without presumption,to have a few

simplified of the intricacies

of Sanskrit grammar which were but partiallycleared up by Bopp,

Benfey, Flecchia, and others, I can hardly flatter myself to have

reached, with regardto correctness, the high standard of Colebrooke's

great, though unfinished work. I can onlysay in self-defence,that it

is far more difficult to be correct on every minute point,if one vours

endea-

to re-arrange, as I have done, the materials collected by Panini,

and to adapt them to the grammatical system current in Europe,
than if one follows so closely
as Colebrooke, the system of native
grammarians, and adoptsnearlythe whole of their technical nology.
termi-

The grammaticalsystem elaborated by native grammarians

is,in itself,most perfect;and those who have tested P"ninTs work,
will readilyadmit that there is no in any language that
grammar
a 2
iv PEEFACE TO THE

could vie with the wonderful mechanism of his eight books of

grammaticalrules. But unrivalled as that system is,it is not

suited to the wants of Englishstudents,least of all to the wants

of beginners.While availingmyselftherefore of the materials
collected in the grammar of P"nini and in later works, such as the

Prakriy"-Kaumudi,the Siddh"nta-Kaumudi, the Sarasvati Prakriya,

I have abstained,as much
and the Madhaviya-dhatu-vritti, as sible,
pos-
from
introducing any more of the peculiarsystem and of
the terminology of Indian grammarians*than has alreadyfound
admittance into our Sanskrit grammars ; nay, I have frequently
rejected the grammaticalobservations supplied ready to hand
in their works, in order not to overwhelm the memory of the
student with many rules and too many
too exceptions. Whether
I have always been successful in drawing a line between what
is essential in Sanskrit grammar and what is not, I must leave
to the judgment of those who enjoy the good fortune of being
engaged in the practicalteaching of a language the students
of which may be counted no longerby tens, but by hundreds f.
I onlywish it to be understood that where I have left out rules

* The made
few alterations that I have made in the usual terminologyhave been

solelywith a view of the work

facilitating of the learner. Thus instead of numbering
the ten classes of verbs,I have called each by its first verb. This relieves the memory
of much unnecessary trouble,
as the very name indicates the character of each class ;
and though the names
may at first sound somewhat uncouth,they are after all the only
names recognizedby native grammarians.Knowing from my experienceas an examiner,
how difficult
it is to remember the merelynumerical distinction between the first,
second,
or third preterites,
or the firstand second futures,I have kept as much as to the
possible
terminology with which classical scholars are familiar, callingthe tense corresponding
to

the Greek Imperfect, Imperfect; that corresponding t o the Perfect,ReduplicatedPerfect;

that corresponding to the Aorist, Aorist;and the mood correspondingto the Optative,
Optative. The names of
PeriphrasticPerfect and Periphrastic Future tell their own

story; and if I have retained the merely numerical distinction between the First and
Second Aorists,
it was because this distinction seemed to be more intelligible
to a

classical scholar than the six or seven forms of the so-called multiform Preterite. If it
were possible
to make a change in the established grammaticalnomenclature,I should
much preferto call the First the Second,and the Second the First Aorist;the former

being a secondaryand compound, the latter a primary and simple tense. But First
and Second Aorists have become almost proper names, and will not easilyyieldtheir
placeto mere argument.
t In the of Leipzig alone, as
University many as fiftypupilsattend every year
the classes of Professor Brockhaus in order to acquirea knowledge of the elements of

Sanskrit,
previousto the study of Comparative Philologyunder Professor Curtius.
 FIRST EDITION. v

or contained
exceptions, in other grammars, whether native or

European, I have done so after mature consideration,deliberately

the
preferring less
completeto the more complete,
but, at the same

time, more bewildering

statement of the anomalies of the Sanskrit

language. Thus, to mention one or two cases, when givingthe

rules on the employment of the suffixes vat and mat ("187),I have
left out the rule that bases endingin m, though the m be preceded
by other vowels than a, always take vat instead of mat. I did so

partlybecause there are very few bases endingin m, partly

because,
if a word like kim-vdn should occur, it would be easy to discover
the reasonwhy here preferred to m, viz. in order to avoid
too v was

the clashingof twom's. Again, when givingthe rules on the

formation of denominatives ("495), I passed over, for very much
the same reason, the prohibition givenin Pan. m. i, 8, 3, viz. that
bases ending in m are not allowed to form denominatives. It is

true, no doubt, that the omission exceptionsmay of such rules or

be said to involve an actual misrepresentation,and that a pupil

might be misled to form such words as kim-mdn and kim-yati.

But this cannot be avoided in an elementary grammar ; and
the student who is likelyto come in contact with such dite
recon-

forms, will no doubt be advanced

sufficiently to be able to
consult for himself the rules of Panini and the explanations
of his
commentators.

My own fear is that, in writingan elementarygrammar, I have

erred rather in givingtoo much than in givingtoo little. I have
therefore in the table of contents marked with an asterisk all
such rules as may be safelyleft out in a first course of Sanskrit

grammar*, and I have in different placesinformed the reader

whether certain portionsmight be passedover quickly,or should
be carefullycommitted to memory. Here and there,as for instance
in " 103, a few extracts are introduced from Panini, simply in
order to give the student a foretaste of what he may expect in
the elaborate works of native grammarians,while lists of verbs
like those contained in $ 332 or " 462 are given,as everybody
will see, for the sake of reference only. The somewhat elaborate

treatment of the nominal bases in i and #, from " 220 to " 226,

*
In the second edition all these paragraphsare printedin smaller type.
 vi PEEFACE TO THE

became necessary, partlybecause in no grammar had the different

paradigms of this class been correctlygiven, partlybecause it

was impossibleto bring out clearlythe principle on which the
and apparent irregularities
peculiarities of these nouns are based
withoutenteringfullyinto the systematicarrangement of native

grammarians. Of portionslike this I will not say indeed,

TIS but I feel that I may
n$,\\ov $ fiiftrjo-eTai, say, *t%^ra
sfts^ ^ta:; and I know that those who will take the trouble to

examine the same mass of evidence which I have weighed and

examined, will be the most lenient in their judgment,if hereafter

they should succeed better than I have done, in unravellingthe
intricate argumentationsof native scholars *.
But while acknowledgingmy to the great
obligations marians
gram-
of India, it would be ungratefulwere I not to

acknowledgeas fullythe assistance which I have derived from

the works of European scholars. My first acquaintancewith the
elements of Sanskrit was gained from Bopp's grammar. Those

only who know the works of his predecessors,of Colebrooke,

Carey, Wilkins, and Forster, can appreciatethe advance made

by Bopp explaininginthe difficulties,and in lighting up, if I
may say so, the dark lanes and alleys of the Sanskrit language.
I doubt whether Sanskrit scholarship would have flourished as
it has, if students had been obliged to learn their grammar from
Forster or Colebrooke,and I believe that to Bopp'slittle grammar
is due a great portionof that success which has attended the study
of Sanskrit literature in Germany Colebrooke, Carey,Wilkins, .

and Forster worked independently of each other. Each derived

his information from native teachers and from native grammars.
Among these four scholars,Wilkins seems to have been the first
to compose a Sanskrit grammar, for he informs us that the first

printedsheet of his work w^as destroyedby fire in 1795. The

*
To those who have the same faith in the accurate and never swerving argumen-
tations
of Sanskrit commentators, it may be a saving of time to be informed that in

the new and very useful edition of the Siddhanta-Kaumudi by S'ri Taranatha-tarkava-
there
chaspati are two misprintswhich disturb
hopelessly the order of the rules on the

proper declension of nouns in i and tt. On page 136, 1. 7, read ^JNr^ instead of ^sffcl^
this is corrected in the and
Corrigenda, the rightreading is found in the old edition.
On the same page, 1. 13, insert "f after fa^IT,
or joinfanitrfl^tasnrK
 FIRST EDITION. vii

whole grammar, however, was not publishedtill 1808. In the

mean time Forster had finished his grammar, and had actually
delivered his MS. to the Council of the Collegeof Fort William
in 1804. But it was not publishedtill 1810. The first part of
Colebrooke's published
grammar in 1805, and therefore stands
was

first in point of time of publication. Unfortunately it was not

finished,because the grammars of Forster and Carey were then

in course and would, as Colebrooke
of publication, imagined, supply
the deficient part of his own. Carey'sgrammar was publishedin
1806. Among these four publications, which as first attempts at

making the ancient language of India accessible to European

scholars, deserve the highest credit, Colebrooke's grammar is

facileprinceps. It is derived at first hand from the best native

grammars, and evinces a familiarity with the most intricate pro-
blems
of Hindu grammarians such as few scholars have acquired
after him. No one can understand and
the merits
appreciate of this

grammar who has not acquireda knowledgeof the

previously matical
gram-
system of P"nmi, and it is a great loss to Sanskrit ship
scholar-
that so valuable a work should have remained unfinished.
I owe most, indeed, to Colebrooke and Bopp, but I have derived

many useful hints from other grammars also. There are some tions
por-
of Wilson's grammar which show that he consulted native

grammarians,and the fact that he possessedthe remainingportion

of Colebrooke's * his list of verbs, with the exception
MS., givesto
of the Baft class,which was publishedby Colebrooke, a peculiar
interest. Professor Benfey in his largegrammar performeda most
useful task in working up independently the materials supplied by
Panini and ; and his smaller grammars
Bhattojidlkshita too, pub-
lished
both in German English,and
have rendered good service
in
to the cause of sound scholarship. There are besides,the grammars
of Boiler in German, of Oppert in French, of Westergaardin Danish,
of Flecchia in Italian,each supplyingsomething that could not be
found elsewhere, and containingsuggestions,
many of which have

proved useful to the writer of the presentgrammar.

But while thus renderingfull justiceto the honest labours of

my I am
predecessors, bound to say, at the same time, that with

*
See Wilson's Sanscrit and first edition,preface,
EnglishDictionary, p. xlv.
 viii PEEFACE TO THE

regard to doubtful or difficult forms, of which there are many in

the grammar of the Sanskrit language,not one of them can be
appealed to as an ultimate authority.Every grammar contains,
as is well known, a number of forms which occur but if ever,
rarely,
in the literarylanguage. It is necessary, however, for the sake of

systematiccompleteness,to give these forms ; and if they are to be

given at all,theymust be given on competent authority.Now it

might be
supposedthat a mere reference to any of the numerous

grammars alreadypublishedwould be sufficient for this purpose,

and that the lists of irregular or unusual forms might safelybe

copiedfrom their pages. But this is by no means the case. Even

with regardto regular forms,whoever should trust implicitly in the

correctness of any of the grammars, hitherto published,

would never

be certain of having the rightform. I do not say this lightly, or

without being able to produceproofs. When I began to revise my

manuscriptgrammar which I had composed for my own use many

years ago, and when on pointson which I felt doubtful, I con-
sulted

other grammars, I soon discovered either that,with a strange

kind of
sequacity,they all repeatedthe same mistake, or that they "

varied widely from each other, without assigningany reason or

authority. I need not say that the grammars which we possess

differ very much in the degreeof their trustworthiness ; but with

theexceptionof the first volume of Colebrooke and of Professor

Benfey'slargerSanskrit grammar, it would be

impossibleto appeal

to any of my predecessors
as an authorityon doubtful points.
Forster and Carey, who evidently depend almost entirelyon
materials suppliedto them by native assistants,give frequently
the most difficultforms with accuracy, while
perfect they go wildly
immediatelyafter,without, it would seem, any power of
wrong
their
controlling authorities. The frequent inaccuracies in the

grammars of Wilkins and Wilson have been pointed out by

others ; and however useful these works may have been for

practical they were never intended as authorities on

purposes,
contested pointsof Sanskrit grammar.
Nothing remained in fact,in order to arrive at any satisfactory
result,but to collate the whole of my grammar, with regard not
only to the but likewise to the regular
irregular forms, with Pftnini
and other native grammarians, and to supply for each doubtful case,
 FIRST EDITION. U

and for rules that might seem to differ from those of any of
my
a reference
predecessors, to P"nirii or to other native authorities.
This I have done, and in so doing I had to re -write nearlythe
whole of my grammar ; but though the time and trouble expended

on this work have been considerable,I believe that they have not
been bestowed in vain. Ionlyregret that I did not give these
authoritative references the whole
throughout of my work*, because,
even where there cannot be any difference of opinion,
some of my
readers might thus have
saved the time and
been trouble of

lookingthrough Panini to find the Sutras that bear on every

form of the Sanskrit language.

By this process which I have adopted,I believe that on many

pointsa more settled and authoritative character has been imparted
to the grammar of Sanskrit than it possessedbefore ; but I do by

no means pretend to have arrived on all pointsat a clear and

definite view of the meaning of Panini and his successors. The

grammaticalsystem of Hindu grammariansis so peculiar,that rules

which we
group should together,
are scattered about in different

partsof their manuals. We may have the rule

general in the last,
and the exceptionsin the first book, and even then we are by no

means certain that exceptions to these exceptions may not occur

somewhere else. I shall give but one instance. There is a root

which
*wijdgri, forms its Aorist by adding^q isham, f: th, fi^it.
Here simplestrule would be that final ^ ri before ^ isham
the
becomes ^ r (Pan.vi. i, 77). This, however, is prevented by another
rule which requiresthat final ^ ri should take Guna before ^t isham

(Pan.vii. 3, 84). This would give us 'smmfts ajdgar-isham.But

now comes another generalrule (Pan. vii. i) which prescribes
2,
Vriddhi of final vowels before ^ isham, i.e.v"uii(XM ajdgdrisham.
Againstthis change,however, a new rule is cited (Pan.vn. 3, 85),
and this secures for
"*W[jdgri exceptionfrom Vriddhi, and
a special

leaves its base againas Wf^jdgar. As soon as the base has been
changedto IJPTJjdgar,it fallsunder a new rule (Pan.vn. 2, 3),and
is forced to take Vriddhi,until this rule is againnullifiedby Pan. vn.

2, 4, which does not allow Vriddhi in an Aorist that takes interme-

diate

5 i,like ^MinfiH ajdgarisham.There is an however,

exception,

*
They have been given in the second edition.
b
x PEEFACE TO THE

to, this rule also,for bases with short ^r a, beginningand ending

with a consonant, may take
optionally Vriddhi (Pan.vn. 2, 7). This
and
optionis afterwards restricted, roots with short ^r a, beginning
with a consonant and ending in ^r, like have
vtm^jagar, no option
left,but are restricted afresh to Vriddhi (Pan.vn. 2, 2). However,
even this is not yet the final result. Our base
vtin^jdgar is after
all not to take Vriddhi, and hence a new rule (P"n.vn.
special 2, 5)
settles the pointby grantingto *rnr jdgria specialexceptionfrom
Vriddhi,and therebyestablishing its Guna. No wonder that these
manifold changesand chances in the formation of the First Aorist of

in7! jdgri should have inspireda grammarian, who celebrates them

in the following
couplet:

"r"r u

"
Guna, Vriddhi,Guna, Vriddhi, prohibition,
option,againVriddhi
and then these,with
exception, the change of ri into a semivowel
in the first instance,
are the nine results."
Another consists
difficulty in the want of critical accuracy in
the editions which we of Panini, the Siddhanta-Kaumudi,
possess
the Laghu-Kaumudi,the Sarasvati,and Vopadeva. Far be it from

me to wish to detract from the merits of native editors,like

Dharanldhara, Kasinatha, Taranatha, still less from those of
Professor Boehtlingk,
who publishedhis text and notes nearly
thirty
years ago, when few of us were able to read a singleline of
Panini. But during those thirtyyears considerable progress has
been made in unravelling the mysteriesof the grammaticalliterature
of India. The commentary of Sayana to the Rig-veda has shown us

how practicallyto apply the rules of Panini ; and the translation of

the Laghu-Kaumudi by the late Dr. Ballantynehas enabled even

beginnersto find their way through the labyrinth of native grammar.

The time has come, I believe,for new and criticaleditions of Panini
and his commentators. A few instances may suffice to show the

insecurity
of our ordinary
editions. The commentary to Pan. vn. 2,42,
as well as the Sarasvati n. 25, i, givesthe Benedictive Atmanepada
^Mte varishishta and ^rtfrrtestarisMshta ; yet a reference to Pan. vil.

2, 39 and 40, shows that these forms are impossible.Again,if

Panini (vm.3,92)is right " and how could the Infallible be wrong? "
 FIKST EDITION. xi

in agragdminiwith
using^ii'iifrfa a dental n in the last syllable,
it is clear that he extends the given in vm.
prohibition 4, 34,
with regardto to other compounds. It is useless to
Upasargas,
whether
inquire in doingso he was rightor wrong, for it is an article
of faith with every Hindu grammarian that whatever word is used

by Panini in his Sutras,is eo ipso correct. Otherwise,the rules

affectingcompoundswith Upasargasare by no means identical with
those that affect ordinarycompounds ; and thoughit may be right to

argue a fortiori from HJiifaPnpragdmini to tujinrnfnagragdmini,it

would not be right to argue from mij^M agraydna to inrR praydna,
this beingnecessarily TRTCT praydna. But assuming^UMifHfH agra-
gdmini
to be correct,it is
quiteclear that the compounds ^A"
svargakdminau,ymtfmtft vrishagdminau,gfXchmifluharikdmdni, and
harikdmena, given in the commentary to vm.
^(X"H*)"ii 4, 13, are all

wrong, though most of them occur not onlyin the printededitions

of Panini and the Siddh"nta-Kaumudi, but may be traced back to

the MSS. of the the

Prakriy4-Kaumudi, source, though by no means

the model, of the Siddhanta-Kaumudi. I glad to learn from

was

my friend Professor Goldstticker,

who is preparing
an edition of the
KMk4 -Vritti,and whom I consulted on these forms,that the MSS.
of Vamana which he possesses, avoid
carefully these faulty
examples
to Pan. vm. 4, 13.
After these I need hardlyadd
explanations that I am not so guine
san-

as to suppose that I could have escapedscot free where so many

men of knowledgeand
superior talent have failed to do so. All I can

say is,that I shall be trulythankful to any scholar who will take

the trouble to pointout
any mistakes into which I may have fallen ;
and I hope that I shall never so far forget
the regarddue to truth

as to attempt to representsimplecorrections, the declension

touching
of nouns or the conjugation of verbs,as matters of opinion,or so far
lower the character of true scholarship as to appeal,
on such matters,
from the verdict of the few to the opinionof
the many.

Hearingfrom my friend Professor Btihler that he had finished

a Sanskrit Syntax,
based on the works of Patnini and other native

grammarians,which will soon be I gladlyomitted

published, that

portionof my grammar. The rules by on the derivation of nouns,

means of Krit,Unadi, and Taddhita suffixes,

do not properly belong
to the sphereof an elementarygrammar. If time and health permit,
b2
xii PEEFACE TO THE FIEST EDITION.

I hope to publish hereafter, as a separate treatise, the chapter of

the Prakriya-Kaumudi bearing on this subject.

In the list of verbs which I have given as an Appendix,
244-285, I have chieflyfollowed the Prakriya-Kaumudi and
pp.
the Sarasvati. These do not conjugate every verb that
grammars
occurs in the Dhatupatha, but those only that serve to illustrate

certain grammatical rules. Nor do they adopt, like the Siddhanta-

Kaumudi, the order of the verbs as given in Panini's Dhatupatha,

but they the verbs of each class according to their voices,
group

treatingtogether those that take the terminations of the Parasmai-

pada, those that take the terminations of the Atmanepada, and,

lastly,those that admit of both voices. In each of these visions,

subdi-

again, the singleverbs are so arranged as best to illustrate

certain grammatical rules. In making a new selection

among
the verbs selected by Eamachandra and Anubhutisvarupacharya,
I have given a preference to those which occur more frequently
in Sanskrit literature, and to those which illustrate some points
of grammar of peculiar interest to the student. In this manner

I hope that the Appendix will serve two : it will not

purposes
only help the student, when doubtful as to the exact forms

of certain verbs, but it will likewise serve as a useful practical

exercise to those who, taking each verb in turn, will try to

account for the exact forms of its persons, moods, and tenses by a

reference to the rules of this In some cases references

grammar.
have been added to guide the student, in others he has to find by
himself the for each particularform.
proper warranty
My kind friends Professor Cowell and Professor Kielhorn have

revised some of the proof-sheets of for which I beg to

my grammar,

express to them sincere thanks.

my

F. MAX MULLEE.

PARIS,
5th April, 1866.
|": - PREFACE

TO THE SECOND EDITION.

JLHE alterations
principal in the new edition of
my Sanskrit grammar
consist in a number of additional references to Panini, in all cases

where an appeal to his authorityseemed likelyto be useful, and in

the introduction of the marks of the accent. I have also been able

to remove a number of mistakes and misprintswhich, in spiteof all

the care I had taken, had been overlooked in the first edition. Most

of these I had corrected in the German translation of my grammar,

publishedat Leipzig in 1868; some more have now been corrected.

I feel most gratefulto several of my reviewers for having pointed

out these oversights,and most of all to Pandit Rajaramasastri,
whose list of notes and queries to my grammar has been of the

greatest value to me. It seems almost hopelessfor a European

scholar to acquire that familiaritywith the intricate system of

Panini which the Pandits of the old school in India still possess ;
and although some of their refinements in the interpretation
of

Panini's rules may seem too subtle, yet there can be no doubt that

these livingguides are invaluable to us in exploringthe gigantic

labyrinthof ancient Sanskrit grammar.
There is,however, one which
difficulty we have to contend with,
and which does not exist for them. They keep true throughout to
one system, the system of Panini ; we have to transfer the facts of

that system into our own system of grammar. What accidents are

likelyto happen during this process I shall try to illustrate by

one instance. E^j^r4mas4strlobjectsto the form Tpxpunsu as the

locative pluralof gm^ pumdn. From his point of view, he is perfectly

rightin his for accordingto
objection, P"nini the locative pluralhas
Anusvara, TJ*J But in our own Sanskrit grammars we first
pumsu.
have a general rule that ^ s is changed to ^ sh after any vowel
except *r and ^r #, in spiteof intervening Anusvara (see " 100);
and it has even been maintained that there is some kind of

physiological
reason for such a change. If then, after having laid
xiv PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

down this rule, we yet write ^g pumsu, we simply commit a matical

gram-
blunder ; and I believe there is no Sanskrit grammar, except
Colebrooke's,in which that blunder has not been committed. In

order to avoid it, I wrote ^ punsu, thus, by the retention of the

dental ^ n, making it grammaticallyand physicallypossiblefor

the ^5 to remain unchanged. It may be objectedthat on the same
ground I ought to have written Instr. iprr punsd, Gen. ipr: punsah,
"c. ; but in these cases the ^s is radical,and would therefore not be

liable to be changed into * sh after a vowel and Anusvara (Pan.vin.

3, 59). Professor Weber evidentlyoverlooked
had these simple

rules, or he would have been less forward in blaming Dr. Keller

for having followed my example in writing^ punsu, instead of

33 pumsu. In Panini's grammar (as may be seen from my note

appended to " TOO) the rule on the change of ^s into ^ sh is so fully

care-

worded that it just excludes the case of g*j pumsu, althoughthe

*j su of the loc. plur.is precededby an Anusvara. I have now, by
making in my second edition the same reservation in the general

rule, been able to conform to P"nini's authority,and have written

TJ*Jpumsu, instead of ip" punsu, though even thus the fact remains
that if the dot is reallymeant for Anusv"ra, and if the g su is the
termination of the locative plural,the ^ s would be sounded as

^ sh,accordingto the generaltendency of the ancient Sanskrit

pronunciation.
I have mentioned this one instance in order to show the peculiar
difficulties which the writer of a Sanskrit has to contend
grammar
with in tryingto combine the technical rules of P"nini with the

more rational principles

of European grammar ; and I hope it may
convince my readers, and perhaps even Professor Weber, that where
I have deviated from the ordinaryrules of our European grammars,
or where I seem to have placedmyself at variance with some of the
native authorities, I have not done so without having carefully
weighed the advantages of the one against those of the other

system.

F. MAX MULLER.
PARKS END, OXFORD,
August, 1870.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE

CHAPTER I." THE ALPHABET. Monophthongs and diphthongs 12

.

The Devanagari letters Nasalized vowels .12

. .

" i. The Devandgari alphabet Light and heavy vowels .13

. .

2. Direction of Sanskrit alphabet .

Acute, grave, and circumflexed

3. How to write the letters vowels .13

. . . . .

4. Sounds represented by the De- Guna and Vriddhi .13

. .

vandgari alphabet Gunaof d, d .13

. . . . .

5. Number of letters
.
Combination of vowels at the

6. The letter It end and beginning of words.

.

7. Jihvamuliya and Upadhma"niya No hiatus .13

. . .

8. Signs of nasals and their tute

substi- Vowels meeting the same vowels 13

Vowels d and d, followed by

9. The three nasal semivowels different vowels .14
. .

10. Consonants without ing

correspond- Vowels d and d, followed by
nasals
....
diphthongs . . .
.14

1 1. Auusvara before /, sh, s, h

Vowels I,#, A, followed by similar
dis-

% 1 2. Names of letters vowels .15

. . . . .

1 Vowel signs, initial,medial, and Vowels e and o, followed by

3. any
final vowel except d .15
. .
.....

Consonants followed by vowels Vowels ai and au, followed by

14.

15. Virama any vowels .16

. . .
.....

1 6. Combination of consonants Treatment of final and v .16

y

The sign for The hiatus occasioned by Sandhi 17

17. r

1 8. The Virama used as a stop-gap Vowels e and o before d .17

.

19^ The signs for a

pause Unchangeable or Pragrihya
20. The Avagraha. List of pound
com-
vowels .17
. . .

consonants Irregular Sandhi ; prepositions

21. Numerical figures ending in d or d, followed by

.

22. Rules of pronunciation e or o

. . . .
.18

Prepositions ending in d or A,
CHAPTER II." RULES OF SANDHI. followed by ri .
.18
.

"23. Object and use of Sandhi The o of osJithah and otah 18

. .

24. Distinction between External Irregular compounds .

.19

and Internal Sandhi The final " of indeclinable words 19

25. Classification of vowels, long, Monosyllabic indeclinable words 19

short, protracted . . .
Sandhi of the particled .
.19
XVI TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE

* "50. Particles unaffected by Sandhi The onlyfinal sibilant inpausd,

% 51. Protracted vowels unaffected by Visarga,and itsmodifications

Sandhi Visarga before a sonant letter

52. Table showing the combination changed to r, and exceptions

of final with initial vowels .
Final radical r

of final and initial Final before initial

53. Combination r r .

consonants Pronouns sah and eshah,syah

eleven final consonants JShoh
54. The . . . . . .

55. No word ends in two consonants Exceptionsin compound words

56 .
Classificationof consonants, cording
ac- Nouns ending in radical r

to their place Initial chh and medial chh .

5 7. Classificationof consonants, cording

ac- Initial s changeableto chh "

to their i.e.
quality, Final h,gh, dh, dh, bh,throw-
ing

contact, approach,opening .
their back
aspiration on

58. Surd and sonant consonants .

initial g, d, d, b.

unaspirated Table showing the tion

combina-
59. Aspiratedand sonants
con-

.
of final with initialcon-
sonants

60. Changes of place,and changes . "

of quality .... Nati, or change of n into n,

6 1 .
Changes of placeaffectDentals, and s into sh .

Anusvara, and Visarga Change of n into n

62. Final t before Palatals ch, chh, Tripnotiand kshubhndti

j,jh,n, s .
Table. . . ,./. .

63. Final n before jtjh,n, s . Change of n into n in a pound

com-

64. Final t before t, th, d, dh, n

....

(notsh) Optionalchangesof n into n in

65. Final n before d, dh,n (notsh) the prepositionni

66. Changes of quality . . Change of s into sh
67. Final k, t,t,p before nasals . Change of s into sh in the duplicative
re-

% 68. Final k, t, t,j" before may a or syllable .

mdtra Change of s into sh after pre-

positions
""r 69. Initial h after final k, t,t,p . ....

70. Final t before I Extracts from Panini on tain

cer-

71. Final n before I changes of s into sh .

72. Final n, n, n after a short vowel Change of s into sh in pounds

com-

73. Final n before the firsts and ....

seconds .... Change of dh into dh .

74. Final n and n before s, sh, s .

RULES OF INTERNAL SANDHI

75. Final n before s or s (notsh) .

Final vowels. No hiatus

76. Final t before s Final d and d, followed by

77. Anusvara and final m vowels ....

78. Mm pausd, and before nants

conso- Verbal bases in d

.
Final i,i, u, d, ri changed to

79. Final m before hn, hm, hy,hi,hv y, v, r; final *, i,u, d, ri,ri

50. Sam before kri,samskri . changed to iy,uvt ri, ir
51. Sam before rdj,samrdj .
Final ri, before consonants,
8.2. Visargaand final s or r . changed to ir or fir .
XV111 TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE

*"i68. Anehas, purudamsas . ."" Optional feminine compounds 88

* 169. Usanas ....

Pathin, ribhukshin, maihin .

Bases in s ; B. bases ending in Ahan . . . .

radical s ; pindagras,supis, Ahan at the end of compounds

sutus f
Ahan at the end of compounds
Pipathis . . .
Svan, yuvan
* 172- Asis, sajus; list of bases in s .
Maghavan ....

* 173- DJivas, sras .

Pdshan, aryaman
% 174- Bases ending in s, sh,chh,ksh,h Han .....

1. Dis, dris,spris Bases in in, dhanin

2. Nas . . .
in
Participles vas .

3. Vis in
Participles ivas

4. Dhrish .
Bases in tyas,gariyas .

5. Dvish .
Miscellaneous nouns with
6. Prdchh .
changeable bases, pdd
7. Taksh .
Vdh .

8. X/ihfguli fevetavdh ....

g. Duh, ushnih .
Anaduh . . . "\
'
'

10. Druh, muh, snih,snuh Ap . . .

, ,"

11. Nah . . . . .
Pums .....

* 175- Turdsdh Div, dyu ....

* I76- Asan and other Metaplasta .

*I77- Ukthasds .
II. Bases ending in vowels,

* 178. Prasdm . .
subdivided . . .

179- I. 2. Nouns with changeable II. i .

Bases ending in any vowel
bases ; A. nouns with two except d . . . .

bases, adat Bases in ai and au . .

1 80. Prdch .
Bases in o . . . .

181. B. Nouns with three bases, Dyo .... .

pratyach . . .
Bases in i and ft . . .

182. Bases in at and ant; adat 1. Monosyllabicbases in i and

The nasal in the nom. and ace. $, being both masc. and fern.

dual of neuters, and in the A. By themselves ; dhi, krt,M

feminine base B. At the end of compounds .

% 184- The nasal in of

participles duplicated
re- 2. bases
Polysyllabic in t and d,

verbs .
-

.
being both masc. and fern. .

* 185. Brihat, prishat . .

The five fuller feminine nations
termi-

186. Mahat . . . . .

187. Bases in mat and vat .

1. Monosyllabicbases in I and

% 188. Bhavat, Your Honour .

d, being feminine only,dhi,
* 189- Arvat and arvan .
IM

* Kiyat 2. bases
Polysyllabic in i and
190. . . .
.
.

191. Bases in an, man, van; rdjan, $, being feminine only,nadi,

ndman . . .
vadhd ....

192. Brahman, divan .

Compounds ending in syllabic
mono-

* 193- Feminines of bases of nouns in feminine bases in i

an, van, man and d, subhrii .

..; .
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xix

PAGI

#"227. Compounds ending in poly CHAPTER VI." PRONOUNS.

syllabicfeminine bases in i Personal pronouns . .
127
and d, bahuJreyast .
Sah, sd,tat. .128
. .

228. Strt . . . .
Syah, syd, tyat .128
. .

* 229. Atistrl Possessive pronouns

. . .

.
.128
230. Bases in iand M, masc. fern.neut. 109 Reflexive pronouns, svayam .
129
* 231. Kati . . . . .
Atman ....
129

232. Sakhi .....

Svah, svd, warn 129
. . .

233. Pad Demonstrative

.....
pronouns,e*AaA,
* 234. Akshi, asthi,dadhi, sakthi .
eshd,etat . . . .
129

235. Bases in ri,masc. fern, neut., Ayam, iyam, idam .

.129
naptri,pitri . . .
Enam, endm, enat .
.130
^ 236. Kroshfu . . . .
Asau, asau, adah . . .
130

* 237. Nri .....

Yah, yd, yat ...
131

238. II. 2. Bases endingin a and d, Kah, kd, kim . . .

131

kdntah, td, tarn . .

Pronouns modified by ak .
131

* 239. Bases in d, masc. and fern., Compound tddris"c. 132

pronouns,
visvapd . . . .
Tdvat "c .....
132

* 240. Ifdhd .....

Ka^chit"LC 132
.....

Pronominal adjectives,
sarva,
CHAPTER IV." ADJECTIVES.
visva,"c. . . .
.133
"241. Declension of adjectives .

Any ah, anyd, any at .

.134
242. Formation of feminine base .
Ubhau, ubJie,ubke .
.134
243. Priyah, fern, priyd . .

Ubhayah, yi, yam .

.134
244. Pdchakah, pdchikd . .
Pilrva and its optionalforms 134
.

245. Feminines formed by t . .

Pratharva and its optional
246. Exceptional
feminines in t nominative
.
plural .
.134
.247. Irregularfeminines its optionalforms
. .
Dvitiya and 135
248. Formation of feminine stantives
sub-
Adverbial declension .135
.

. . . .

249. Degreesof comparison CHAPTER Vn." CONJUGATION.

. .

250. Tara and tama, how added . "286. Active and passive . .
137

251. lyas and ishtha,how added . 287. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada 137

252. Exceptionalcomparativesand 288. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

superlatives . . .
in derivative verbs . .
138
Passive . . . .
138
CHAPTER V." NUMERALS.
The thirteen tenses and moods 138
"253. Cardinals and declension of
Significationof tenses and
eka
cardinals, moods
. . .

. . . .
139

254. Dvi ..... Numbers and 140

persons . .

255. Tri, tisri . . . .

256. Chatur, chatasri CHAPTER VIII." THE TEK CLASSES.

. .
.

257. Panchan, shash,ashtan . "293. Special and general tenses, in

258. Construction of cardinals .
the ten classes . .
.140

259. Ordinals .... Specialor modified,generalor

260. Numerical adverbs and other unmodified tenses .
.140

derivatives . 295. Division of verbal bases . .

141

C 2
XX TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE PAGE

I. First division; Bhu, Tud, "327. Strong and weak tions

termina-
"296.
Div, Chur classes .
.141 160

297. II. Second division,and divisions

sub- 328. Weakening of base . .
160

.142 329. Bases ending in d and thongs,

diph-
. .
.

II Su, Tan, Kri classes 143 how changed .161

298. a. . .

299. 116. Ad, Hu, Rudh classes .

143 330. Bases ending in i,i,ri,u, d, ri,
how changed . .
.161
CHAPTEK IX. " AUGMENT, TION,
REDUPLICA-

AND TERMINATIONS. CHAPTER XI." INTERMEDIATE i.

and reduplication 145 "331. When it be omitted,

"300. Augment . must

145 when it may be omitted,

301. Augment a . . . .

302.
in
Keduplication the perfect, when it must be inserted .
162

and in the Hu verbs .

.145 #332. List of verbs in which the inter-
mediate

303. General rules of reduplication

^46 i must be omitted .
163

Aspirated initials .146 Verbs in which the diate

interme-
304. . .
^"333.

305. Guttural initials . .

.146 i must be omitted in

306. Double initials . .

.146 certain tenses . . .
.165

307. Initial sibilant followed by a

"* 334- Specialrules for the cated
redupli-
tenuis . . .
.146 perfect .167
. .

308. The vowel of the reduplicative Specialrules for the 2nd pers.
^"335.
syllableis short . .
.146 sing.Par. of the red. perf. .
167

309. Medial e and ai are cated

redupli- #336. Table showing when diate
interme-

by i, o and au by u .
146 i must be omitted .
168

310. Final e, ai,o are reduplicated #337. Optional insertion of i .

.168

by 146 of i
a #338. Necessary insertion .
170

311. Irregular reduplication by 339. The intermediate i never liable

Samprasarana . .
.147 to Guna ....
171

312. Short initial a 147 Insertion of long t .171

. . .
340. .

Initial followed by two 171

313. a sonants
con-
3t 341. Optional insertion of long i .

.148 .172
. . .
342. perfect
Periphrastic .

Initial ri .148
314. . . .
#343. Periphrasticperfectof inten-
315. Short initial i and u .
.148 sives and desideratives 172
.

316. Specialrules of reduplication148 .

Paradigms of the reduplicated
* 317. Nij,vij,vish . .
.148
perfect . . .
.172

% 318. Mdjhd ....

148
CHAPTER XII." STRENGTHENING AND
% 319. Han, hi,ji,chi . . .
148

Terminations .149 WEAKENING.

320. . .

321. Terminations of first and cond

se- "344. Two classes of terminations,
divisions . .
.149 strengtheningor weakening
322. Regular conjugation .
.150 a verbal base . .
.175

#345- Specialforms of strengthening

CHAPTER X." GENERAL TENSES.
and weakening certain bases 177

"323. General or unmodified tenses .

159
CHAPTER XIII." AORIST.
324. Reduplicatedperfect .
.159

325. Verbs which may form the duplicated

re- "346. First and second aorist . .
179

perfect .
.159 347. Four forms of the first aorist .
179

326. The periphrastic

perfect .
159 348. Rules for the first form .
.180
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xxi

PAGE

*"349- Rules for inten-

desideratives, Conditional . . .
.193

sives,"fec. " Periphrastic

future .
.194

350- Rules for the second form Benedictive . . .

.195

Terminations beginningwith Bases ending in ay .

.195

at or ath Weakening in benedictive Pa-

352. Roots in d and diphthongs .

in
rasmaipada,strengthening
* 353- Mi, mi, di, li benedictive Atmanepada .
195

* 354- Han Intermediate i . .

.195
Gam Weakening of base before y 196
* 355- ..... .

*35"5. Yam .....

Verbs ending in t, u, ri,rt .196

Rules for the third form Verbs ending in n .196

357- .

*358. Mi, mi, li .

Verbs ending in d . .
.196

Yam, ram, nam Verbs which take SampraszU

* 359- .

360. Rules for the fourth form rana 197

* 361. Stish Other verbs which take Sam-

* 362. Duh, dih,lih,guh prasarana ....

197

Paradigms ....
Sds changed to fish .
.197

363- Second aorist Benedictive Atmanepada .

198

364- Roots ending in d, e, i,ri; dris 187

CHAPTER XV." PASSIVE.
365- Roots with penultimatenasal .
187

366. Irregularforms Atmanepada terminations .

198

*3""7- Verbs which take the second Specialtenses of passive .

198

aorist ....
Causative, denominative, in-
tensive

Verbs which take the second bases . .

.198

aorist in the Par. only Weakening of base. Paradigm 199

* 369- The Tan verbs General tenses of passive .

199

Reduplicatedsecond aorist The aorist passive .200

370. . . .

* 37i- Sri, dru, sru, kam; 6vi,dhe .

The 3rdpers. sing,
aorist passive 200

372. Shortening of bases ending in Aorist of verbs endingin d .200

Aorist of verbs ending in ay 200

ay .... .

373- Bases that cannot be shortened Aorist of intensive and desi-

374- Compensation between base derative bases . . .

200

and syllable
reduplicative .
Irregularforms . .
.201

375- Vowels syllable190

of reduplicative Verbs ending in am .
.201

* 376. Verbs beginning and ending Paradigm . . .

.201

with double consonants Future, conditional,

and dictive
bene-

*377- Verbs with penultimateri,ri .

passive . .
.201

378. Verbs beginningwith vowels .

Their optionalforms .
.201

*379- Irregularreduplicatedaorist .
Aorist passiveof intransitive

Paradigm ....
verbs ....
203

380. When the different forms of Optional forms . . .

203
the aorists are used .

CHAPTER XVI. " PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,

CHAPTER XIV." FUTURE, CONDITIONAL, AND INFINITIVE.

PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE, AND BENEDICTIVE. Participlepresent Parasmai-

.

"381. Future pada. . . .

203

382. Changes of the base 415. future Parasmaipada

Participle 204
 XX11 TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE PAGE
of reduplicated
"416. Participle fect
per- ^"447. Gerund of causatives 211
Parasmaipada .
.204 #"448. Ghu verbs,md, sthd,gd, pd,
#417. Participle
of reduplicated
fect
per- hd, so, take final d 211
with i 205 % Verbs ending in nasals 211
. . . .
449. . *

of reduplicated
418. Participle fect
per- % 450. Verbsending in ri 211

Atmanepada .
.205 * 451. Ve,jyd,vye . .
211
'

419. Participle
present Atmanepada 205 % 452. Mi, mi, di, li .
"

.' 211

420. Participlefuture Atmanepada 206

421. Participlepresent and future CHAPTER XVII." VERBAL ADJECTIVES.

passive 206
....
"453- Verbal adjectives,
Kritya .
211
422. Past participlepassive and
454. Adjectives
in ta vya
, , .
212
gerund 206
....

455. Adjectives
in cmiya, .
.212
423. Gerund in tvd .206
. .

456. Adjectives
in ya . . .
212
#424. I. The terminations tah and
^457. Exceptional verbal adjectives .

tvd, with intermediate i .207

in ya and 214
tya . . .

^425. Penultimate u with optional

% 458. Verbs changing final ch andj
Guna .207
. . .
into k and g .
.214
.

#426. Tvd with intermediate i and

459. Infinitive in turn . .
.214
Guna .207
. . .

460. Verbal adverbs in am .

.214
^427. Tvd with intermediate i and

without Guna .
.207
.
CHAPTER XVIII." CAUSATIVE VERBS.
^428. Nasal lost before th,ph; vanch,
"461. Causal bases,how formed .215
lunch ....
207
% 462. Guna or Vriddhi 215
^429. II. The terminations tah and . , .

tvd,without intermediate i. 207

463. Exceptionalcausative bases,I.
*II. 217
^430. Final nasal dropt before tah . .
, .

of causative verbs
464. Conjugation 219
and tvd .
207
465. Passive of causative verbs 219
^431. Final n dropt and vowel ened
length- .

466. General tenses of the passive 219

; final chh,v, rchh,and 208 .

rv

^432. Roots changing v to u . .

208
CHAPTER XIX. DESIDERATIVE VERBS.
Final ai
"

#433. changed to d or i .
208

^434. Do, so, md, sthd,dhd, hd change "467. Desiderative bases,how formed 220

their final into i .

.208 468. Desiderative bases,how jugated
con-

"* 435- /So and chho take i or d . .

208 . . . .
220

#"436. Exceptionalforms 208 469. Desiderative bases, with or

:fc 437. Verbs which take Samprasa- without intermediate i .220

rana .....
208 % 470. Strengtheningof base . .
220

#438. Verbs which lose penultimate ^"471. Exceptional strengthening or

nasal ....
209 weakening. . . .
220

439. Causal verbs 209 #472. Desiderative bases,treated as

440. Desiderative verbs 209 Bhu verbs. . .

.221

441. Intensive verbs 209 473. Reduplication of desiderative

442. in
Participles nah .
209 bases ....
222

jfc 443. Adjectivalparticiples 210 ^t 474. Bases in av and dv . .

222

444. Vat added to participles 210 "* 475- $ru" sru" d", pru, plu,chyu .
222

445. Gerund in ya 210 476. Internal reduplication .

.222

446. Gerund in tya 210 #477. Exceptionalforms .

.222
TABLE OF CONTENTS. x\in
XXIV TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE PAGE

"529. IV. Adverbial compounds 242 Tan Class (Tanvadi, VIII Class) 272
. .

% 530. Exceptional compounds .

243 Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

#531. Modifications of the final letters Verbs 272

. . .

of adverbial compounds 243 Kri Class (Kryadi, IX Class) .273

. .

I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

Verbs .273
. . .
^

II. Parasmaipada Verbs .274

.

APPENDIX I.
III. Atmanepada Verbs .274
.

PAGE
Ad Class (Adadi, II Class) 275
LIST OF VERBS 244-285 . .

...

I. Parasmaipada Verbs .275

Bhft Class (Bhvadi, I Class) .
245 .

II. Atmanepada Verbs .279

I. Parasmaipada Verbs 245 .

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

II. Atmanepada Verbs
.
260
Verbs .280
III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada . . .

Verbs .263
Hu Class (Juhotyadi, III Class) .
281
. . .

I. Parasmaipada Verbs .281

Tud Class (Tudadi, VI Class) . .
265 .

II. Atmanepada Verbs .282

I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada "

Verbs .265
III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada
. . .

II. Verbs Verbs 283

Parasmaipada .
266 . . . .
.

Itmanepada Verbs Rudh Class (Rudhadi, VII Class) 284

III. .267 .

I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

Div Class (Divadi, IV Class) . .
267

I. Verbs Verbs .284

Parasmaipada .
.267 . , .

II. Verbs II. Parasmaipada Verbs .284

Atmanepada .
.269 .

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

III. Atmanepada Verbs .285
.

Verbs 269
....

Chur Class (Churadi, X Class) .

.
270

Parasmaipada Verbs only .270

APPENDIX II.
.

Su Class (Svadi, V Class) 270

. .
PAGE

I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT 286-292

.

Verbs 270
....

INDEX OF NOUNS 293-297

. . .

"II. Parasmaipada Verbs .271

.

III. Itmanepada Verbs .271 INDEX OF VERBS

.
297-300
. .
 DEVANiGARI LETTEKS.
THE

CONSONANTS.
VOWELS.

Initial. Medial nitial. Medial. Equivalent.

k P
a

kh ph

T b
W g

bh

T
f
m
n

ch (or k)

chh(orM)

j (or 9)

jh

ri (or ri)

n(orri) t (or t) s (or s)

th (or th)
sh

d (or d)
s
dh (or dh)

n} h
7 (or

t m (or m)
TT
vfil
ai th m (or m)

d h (or h)
^
o
dh (Jihvamuliya), x

n
(Upadhmamya), "

au

1 Sometimes represented in the Veda by } (or 0-

2 in the Veda by lh ("r

Sometimes represented "
 CHAPTER I.

THE ALPHABET.

" i. SANSKRIT is properly written with the Devanagari alphabet; but the

Bengali, Grantha, Telugu, and other modern Indian alphabets are commonly
employed for writing Sanskrit in their respectiveprovinces.
Note "
Devandgarf means the Ndgart of the gods, or, possibly,of the Brahmans. A more

current styleof writing, used by Hindus in all common transactions where Hindi is the lan-
guage

employed, is called simply Ndgarf. Why the alphabet should have been called Ndgarl,
is unknown. If derived from nagara, city,it might mean the art of writing as first practised

in cities. (Pan. iv. 2, 128.) No authorityhas yet been adduced from ancient author for
any

the employment of the word Devandgari. In the Lalita-vistara (a life of Buddha, translated
from Sanskrit into Chinese 76 A. D.), where a list of alphabets is given, the Devandgart is

not mentioned, unless it be intended by the Deva alphabet. (See History of Ancient

Sanskrit Literature, p. 518.) Albiruni, in the nth century, speaks of the Nagara alphabet
as current in Malva. (Reinaud, Memoire sur 1'Inde, p. 298.)
Beghram (bhagdrdma, abode of the gods) is the native name of one or more of the most

important cities founded by the Greeks, such as Alexandria ad Caucasum or Nicaea. (See
Mason's Memoirs in Prinsep's Antiquities,ed. Thomas, vol. I. 34^-350.) Could
pp.

Devanagari have been meant as an equivalent of Beghrami?

No inscriptionshave been met with in India anterior* to the rise of Buddhism. The

earliest authentic specimens of writingare the inscriptionsof king Priyadarsi or Asoka, about

250 B.C. These are written in two different alphabets. The alphabetwhich is found in the

inscription
of Kapurdigiri, and which in the main is the same as that of the Arianian coins,
is written from right to left. It is clearlyof Semitic origin,and most closelyconnected with

the Aramaic branch of the old Semitic or Phenician alphabet. The Aramaic letters,how-
ever,

which we know from Egyptian and Palmyrenian inscriptions,have experiencedfurther

changes since they served as the model for the alphabet of Kapurdigiri,and we must have

recourse to the more primitive types of the ancient Hebrew coins and of the Phenician

inscriptions
in order to explain some of the letters of the Kapurdigirialphabet.
But while the transition of the Semitic into this ancient Indian alphabet can be
types
proved with scientific precision, the second Indian alphabet, that which is found in the

inscriptionof Girnar, and which is the real source of all other Indian alphabets,as well as of

those of Tibet and Burmah, has not as yet been traced back in a satisfactory
manner to any

Semitic prototype. (Prinsep'sIndian Antiquitiesby Thomas, vol. n. p. 42.) To admit,

however, the independent invention of a native Indian alphabet is impossible. Alphabets_were

never invented, in the usual sense of that word. They were formed gradually, and purely
phonetic alphabetlfalways
point back to earlier,syllabic
or ideographic,stages. There are no

such traces of the of Indian soil ; and it is to be hoped that

growth an alphabet on
new-

discoveries still bring to light the intermediate links by which the alphabet of Girnar,
may
and through it the modern be connected with of the leading Semitic
Devanagari, may one

alphabets.
B 2
 THE ALPHABET.

$ 3. Sanskrit is written from left to right.

Note " Samskrita (u**jjd) what means is rendered fit or perfect.But Sanskrit is not called

so because the Brahmans, or still less,because the first Europeans who became acquainted
with it,considered it the most perfectof all languages. Samskrita meant what is rendered

fit for sacred purposes ; hence sacred.

purified, A vessel that is a sacrificial victim
purified,
that is properlydressed,a man who has passed through all the rites
initiatory or samskdras;
all these are called samskrita. Hence the language which alone was fit for sacred acts, the
ancient idiom of the Vedas, was called Samskrita, or the sacred language. The local spoken
dialects received the general name of prdkrita. This did not mean vulgar,but
originally
second-rate,literallywhat
derived,secondary, has a source or type,'this source or type
(prakriti)
being the Samskrita or sacred language. (See Vararuchi's Prakrita-Prakasa,ed.
Cowell,p. xvii.)
The former explanationof prdkritain the sense of 'the natural, originalcontinuations of

the old language (bhdshd),'

is untenable, because it the
interpolates idea of continuation.
'
If prdkritahad to be taken in the sense of originaland natural,'a language so called would

mean, as has been well shown by D'Alwis (An Introduction to Kachchayana'sGrammar,

p. Ixxxix),the originallanguage,and samskrita would then have to be taken in the sense of
*

purposes.'This
refined for literary view, however, of the meaning of these two names, is

opposed to the view of those who framed the names, and is rendered impossibleby the
character of the Vedic lang*1^; ..

" 3. In writingthe Devanagarialphabet,the distinctive portion of each

letter is written then

first, the and
perpendicular, lastlythe horizontal line.

Ex. k; "?, i\g; *, n, "c.

,

Beginnerswill find it useful to trace the letters on transparent paper, till

they know them well,and can write them and correctly.

fluently
j 4. The following
are the sounds which are representedin the Devanagari
alphabet:

Hard and Soft and

Hard,aspirated, Soft, aspirated, Nasals. Vowels.
Liquids. Sibilants. Short, Long.
(tenues.) (tenues (mediae.) (media? Diphthongs.
aspiratae.) aspiratae.)

1. Gutturals,
2. Palatals,
3.Linguals,
4. Dentals, Jft -Hth Mdh H/ US

5. Labials, H bh

*
Unmodified Nasal or Anusvara, m or m.

Unmodified Sibilant or Visarga, t h.

1 In the Veda "5 d and "? dh, if between two vowels, are in certain schools written

35 I and 335 lh.

2
"% h is not properly but
a liquid, a soft breathing.
3 ^ is sometimes called Dento-labial.
v

4 The labial sibilants have become

signsfor the gutturaland obsolete,and are replaced
by the two dots : h.
 -" 8. THE ALPHABET. 5

Students should be cautioned againstusing the Roman letters instead of

the Devanagariwhen beginning to learn Sanskrit. The paradigms should
be impressedon the memory in their real and native form, otherwise their

first impressionswill become unsettled and indistinct. After some progress

has been made in masteringthe grammar and in readingSanskrit,the Roman

alphabetmay be used safelyand with advantage.

f 5. There are fiftyletters in the Devanagari alphabet,thirty-
seven

consonants and thirteen vowels, representing

every sound of the Sanskrit

language.
$ 6. One the long 7" li,is merely a grammatical invention
letter, ; it

never occurs in the spoken language.

f 7. Two sounds, the guttural and labial sibilants,
are now without
distinctive in
representatives the Devanagarialphabet. They are called

formed
Jihvdmdliya,the tongue-root sibilant, near the base of the tongue ;

and Upadhmdniya, i.e. afflandus,the labial sibilant. They are said to have

been by
represented the signsX having the shape of
(calledVajrdkriti, the

thunderbolt)and (calledGajakumbhdkriti, having the shape of an

m

elephant'stwo frontal bones). [SeeVopadeva's Sanskrit Grammar, i. 185

Historyof Ancient Sanskrit Literature,p. 508.] Sometimes the sign X,

called Ardha-visarga, half -Visarga,is used for both. But in common

writingthese two signsare now replacedby the two dots, the Dvivindu, :,
(dvi,two, vindu, dot,)properlythe sign of the unmodified Visarga. The

old sign of the Visargais described in the Katantra as like the figureS 4 ;

in the Tantrabhidhana as like two 3 th's. (SeePrinsep,Indian Antiquities,

vol. i. p. 75.)
j 8. There are five distinct letters for the five nasals,^ n, *r n, iff n, "jn,
there five
originally distinct signsfor the five sibilants. When,
*Tx
m, as were

in the middle of words, these nasals are followed by consonants of their own

class,(n by k, kh, ff,gh ; n by ch, chh, j,jh ; n by /, th, d, dh ; n by t, th,

d, dh ; m by p, pht b, bh,)they are often, for the sake of more expeditious
writing,
replacedby the dot, which is properlythe sign of the unmodified
nasal or Anusvara. Thus we find

instead of ^f^dl ankitd.

instead of ^ fWrtI1anchitd. * "N \ """ V * I
^

instead of ^fertlkunditd.
"H f"j
rii instead of H^dl nanditd.
\
4fljrfT
instead of cfffujril
kampitd.
The pronunciationremains unaffected by this styleof writing. ^f"*HI

must be pronounced as if it were written ^HfffrU

ankitd, "c.
The same appliesto final IT m at the end of a sentence. This too,
6 THE ALPHABET. 9-

written
though frequently and printedwith the dot above the line,is to

be pronounced as H m. 'snr, I, is to be pronounced ^r*w aham. (SeePreface

to Hitopades'a,
in M. M/s Handbooks for the Study of Sanskrit,p. viii.)
Note "

Accordingto the Kaumaras final *T m in pausd may be pronouncedas Anusvara j

cf. ed. Bombay,

Sarasvati-Prakriya, 1829*,pp. 12 and 13.
T I ^IWI% TOTWig^ntfr*RflT 33. I ^ I ^* II The Kaumaras are the

followers of Kumara, the reputed author of the Katantra or Kalapa grammar. (See
Colebrooke, Sanskrit Grammar, Preface; and page 315, note.) S'arvavarman is quotedby
mistake as the author of this grammar, and a distinction is sometimes made between the

Kaumaras and the followers of the Kalapa grammar.

$ 9. Besides the five nasal expressingthe

letters, nasal sound as modified

by guttural,
palatal, dental, and
lingual, labial there
pronunciation, are still

three nasalized letters,the IT, r|,^, or ^, 77, "4,y, I, v, which are used to

final *T w, if followed initial T{y, and modified

represent a by an
7^ /,^v,
by the of
pronunciation these three semivowels. (Pan.vm. 4, 59-)
Thus instead of "if*rrfTT
tarn ydti we may write Tf^rifTf
toy ydti;
instead of w cjvnr tarn labhate we write TlWHff tal labhate
may ;

instead of if^ffirtarn vahati we may write Tflhrfa

tav vahati.

Or in composition,
^TJlrf
samydnam or ^CTR sayydnam;
^c53f \amlabdham or ^l%3tf
sallabdham;
^N^frTsamvahati or ^^f? savvahati.

But never if the stands in the body of word, such as cfiruj: kdmyah ;
^ m a

nor if the semivowel represents an vowel, e.

original g. Rig-veda x. 132, 3.
*W T ^TR"T sam u dran, changed to ^Tt'T sam varan.

" 10. The only consonants which have no correspondingnasals are T r,

before of these letters at

Sl^^, ^ sh, ^ s, ^ h. A final
3^ m, therefore, any
the beginningof words, can by
only be represented the neutral or fied
unmodi-

nasal,the Anusvara.
IT t^"fir
tarn rakshati. Or in ^UjPrfsamrakshati.
composition,
if SHlfrflT
tarn srinoti. ^nrftflT
samsrinoti.

W ^RTT tarn shaMram. ^J/l^rrf

samshthivati.

if^tfrrtarn sarati. TOT^firsamsarati.

3 ^flT tarn harati. M$*Sfisamharati.
J1 1 .
In the body of a word the only letters which can be precededby

* This edition,which has contains

latelybeen reprinted, the text " ascribed either to Vani

herself,i.e. Sarasvati,the goddessof speech(MS. Bodl. 386),or to Anubhuti-svarupa-acharya,

whoever that may be " and a commentary. The in
commentary printed the Bombay editions is
called J^hrrt or in MS. Bodl. 382. tl^nft,
i.e. IT^Rft. In MS. Bodl. 382.Mahidhara or

Mahidasabhatta is said to have written the Sarasvata in order that his children might read it,
and to pleaseIs'a,
the Lord. The date given is 1634,the placeBenares, (S'ivarajadhani.)
-$ l6. THE ALPHABET. 7

Anusvara are 9^,^*A,^s, ^A.Thus^r. amfah, vffidhanumshi, ijjriftr

yatdmti,
Before the semivowels v, the in the
ftff
: simhafy. ^ y, t r, ^ /,^ * m, body
of a word, is never changed into Anusvara. Thus ifJirb
gamy ate
,
"ro namrah,

*ry: amlah. In $nft:bamyoh (Rv. i. 43, 4, "c.)the m stands 'padante/but

not in ^iHjfd"dmyati. (See f 9.)
J J 2. With the exceptionof JihvdmiiUyaX x letter),
(tongue-root Upadh-
*

mdniya X ""(tobe breathed upon),Anusvara m (after-sound),

Visarga: "
(emission,
see Taitt.-Brahm. in. p. 23 a),and Repha r (burring),
all letters

are named in Sanskrit by adding kdra (making) to their sounds. Thus

^ a is called ^raRTC: akdrah ; "9R ka, "**K: kakdrah, "c.

" 13. The vowels, if initial,

are written,

a, d, e, r, H, H, /i, (/Q, w, tf, e, az, o, aw;

if they follow a consonant, they are written with the followingsigns "

^ *
T f ^
'"
M "
'"
1 '
"
" '" 'i e" t" """ Vcj/^ v*" cv" ' "

a, a, t, ^, H, rt /", (^0" M" ^ "" ai" "" OM-

There is one exception. If the vowel ^ ri follows the consonant ^ r, it

retains its initial form, and the r is written over it. Ex. PH^fHlnirritify.
In certain words which tolerate an hiatus in the body of the word, the
second vowel is written in its initial form. Ex. Tft^jj
goagra, adj.preceded
by cows, instead of ifts?I
go 3gra or 'NliJ gavdgra ; ift^rtgoa"vam, cows and

horses ; in7! prauga, yoke ; fdri^J^7"w, sieve.

J 14. Every consonant, if written is supposed to

by itself, be followed by
a short a. Thus OR is not pronounced k, but Ara ; ^ not y, but ya. But "| k

or any other consonant, if followed by any vowel except a, is pronounced

without the inherent a. Thus

^FT ^ ku, ^ ATM,% ke, % Arai,

kdy far ki, ctf ki, ^ /5rn,c" kri, -9jkli,(w Ar/z),
^t ^ro,^ kau.
The is
only peculiarity that short ft is apparentlywritten before the sonant
con-

after which it is sounded. This arose from the fact that in the

earliest forms of the Indian alphabet the long and short t's were both

written over the consonant, the short i incliningto the left,the long t

incliningto the right. Afterwards these top-marks were, for the sake of

drawn
distinctness, across the top-line,
so as to become fti and instead
sift,
of % and ^. ed. Thomas,
(SeePrinsep'sIndian Antiquities, vol. n. p. 40.)
J 15. If a consonant is to be pronounced without any vowel after it,the
consonant is said to be followed by Virdma, i. e. stoppage, which is marked

by Thus ak must be written ^TC^; kar, w^ ; ik, ^.

v

the
J 1 6. If a consonant is followed immediatelyby another consonant,

two or three or four or five or more consonants are written in one group
 8 THE ALPHABET. " 17-

(samyoga). Thus atka is written ^Trfi ; alpa is written ^T3T ; kdrtsnya is

written "*|f^. These groups or compound consonants must be learnt by
practice. It is easy, however, to discover some generallaws in their forma-
tion.

Thus the perpendicularand horizontal lines are generallydropt in

one of the letters: ^r + ^R ^M0; ft + ^ ?%nda !f + ^ r* tva ; + ^
= = ; =
^
= -"skha; ^ + -Q = ^chya; ^+-n = Kpta; o^+ U = *R kta; c(T+ Tr + ^ =

^j ktva ; c(r+ Wx+ T\ =

^ ktya.
$17. The T: r followinga consonant is written by a short transverse

stroke at the foot of the letter; as ^kra;

^ + ^="35 or
J^+T = 3T$r#/

r^+^=^or "* tra; ^ + ^ = ~$dra; T{+^ + T.= 'g shtra.

The ^r precedinga consonant is written by *"
placed at the top of the
consonant before which it is to be sounded. Thus
^+ -31;
= ^rifi
arka ; ^+
"^+?T = ^"" varshma. This sign for ^r is placed to the rightof any other

marks at the top of the same letter. Ex. ^nijarkam ; ^fer arkena ; ^FJ
arkendu.

followed by sh is written ksha.

c^k *t Sf or ^

*^jfollowed by *T n is written ^jna.

T^jh is sometimes written v^jh.
r followed by T u and g" ti is written ^ ru, ^ rd.
^
is written
^ d followed by 7 u and "gi it ^ duy "* dd.
in combination with
^^, particularly other letters,is frequently
written *r.

Ex. ^J"M; i^tol; Vl6ra.

J 1 8. The sign of Virdma which

(stoppage), if placed at the foot of a
N

consonant, shows that its inherent short a is stopped,is sometimes,when it

is difficult to write (orto print)two or three consonants in one group, placed

after one of the consonants : thus Tp^fi
instead of
ipjfyunkte.
$ 19. The use of the Virama, however, is at the end of a sentence,
proper
or portionof a sentence, the last word of which ends in a consonant.

At the end of a sentence, or of a the sign I

half-verse, is used ; at the

end of a verse, or of a longersentence, the sign n.

$ 20. The sign s (Avagraha or Arddhakdra) is used in most editions to

mark the elision of an initial W a, after a final wfr o or ^ e. Ex. sftsfxrso 'pi
for Ft ^Tft so api,i.e. TO ^rfosas api ; %sftrte 'pifor K ^fq te api.

List of Compound Consonants.

\
^ k-ka, cRj k-kha, SRI k-cha, "^ k-ta, ^ k-t-ya,^ k-t-ra, ^gf-k-t-r-ya,

k-t-va}"R k-na, ^f k-n-ya}^F"T k-ma, "SR k-ya, JR or ^ k-ra, ^f or ^=pjk-r-ya,

k-la, J" k-va, "%% k-v-ya, "Sf k-sha, ^{ k-sh-ma, ^r k-sh-ya,^ k-sh-va ; "

r kh-ya, ^ kh-ra ; "

HT g-ya, TJ g-ra, v% g-r-ya ; "
H gh-na, " gh-n-ya,
f gh-ma, "oy gh-ya, TJ gh-ra ; "
^" n-ka, ^ n-k-t-ya9^"J n-k-yat
n-k-ta, "j"Jf
10 THE ALPHABET. 22-

Thus ^ stands for TJ e of f"Rl eM, one.

^ stands for If cfo of ""T cfocm,two.

3 stands for ^ "r of ^TJ trayah,three.
8 stands for ^T ch of ^r^THS chatvdrah, four.
M stands for ^p of Tfarpancha, five.
The similarity
becomes more evident by comparing the letters and numerals as used in
'
ancient inscriptions.
See Woepcke, Memoire sur la Propagation des Chiffres Indiens,*
in Journal Asiatique,
vi serie,tome i ; Prinsep'sIndian Antiquitiesby Thomas, vol. n.

p. 705 Chips from a German Workshop, vol. n. p. 289.

Pronunciation.

$ 2,2,. The Sanskrit letters should be pronounced in accordance with the

transcription
given The following rules, however, are to be
page 4.
observed :

i. The vowels should be pronounced like the vowels in Italian. The short ^ a,

however, has rather the sound of the English a in '

America/

2,. The of
aspiration the consonants should be heard Thus
distinctly. H kh

is said,by English scholars who have learnt Sanskrit in India,to sound

almost like kh in e
inkhorn / ^ th like th in e
pothouse / ifiph like ph
in '
topheavy / TI gh like gh in '
loghousef V dh like dh in
'
madhouse f H bh like bh in *
Hobhouse/ This, no doubt, is a

somewhat but
exaggerateddescription, it is well in learningSanskrit
to distinguish
from the first the aspiratedfrom the unaspiratedletters
by pronouncing the former with an unmistakable emphasis.
3. The
*
guttural^ n has the sound of ng in king/
4. The palatalletters ^ ch and *fj have the sound of ch in 'church' and

of j in 'join/
5. The lingualletters are said to be pronounced by bringingthe lower

surface of the tongue againstthe roof of the palate. As a matter of

fact the ordinarypronunciationof t, d, n in English is what Hindus

would call and

lingual, it is essential to the
distinguish Sanskrit dentals

by bringingthe tip of the tongue againstthe very edge of the upper

front-teeth. In transcribingEnglish words the natives naturally

represent the English dentals by their linguals,not by their own

dentals ; e. g. fiX*^ Direktar,Jimi*U!dGavarnment, "c. *

6. The Visarga,Jihvdmuliya and Upadhmdniya are not now articulated

audibly.
7. The dental ^r s sounds like s in '
sin/ the lingual"^ sh like sh in '
shun/
the palatal^f " like ss in '
session/

* '
Biihler,Madras Literary
Journal,February,1864. RajendralalMitra, On the Origin
of the Hindvi Language,' Journal of the Asiatic Bengal, 1864, p. 509.
Society,
-$ 24. RULES OP SANDHI. 11

The real Anusvara is sounded as a very slightnasal,like n in French '

bon.*
If the dot is used as a graphicsign in placeof the other five nasals it

must, of course, be pronounced like the nasal which it represents*.

CHAPTER IT.

RULES OF SANDHI OR THE COMBINATION OP LETTERS.

$ 23. In Sanskrit every sentence is considered as one unbroken chain

of syllables.Except where there is a stop, which we should mark by

the
interpunction, final letters of each word are made to coalesce with the

initial letters of the followingword. This coalescence of final and initial

(of vowels
letters, with vowels, of consonants with consonants, and of

consonants with vowels,)

is called Sandhi.

As certain letters in Sanskrit are incompatiblewith each other, i.e.

cannot be pronounced one immediatelyafter the other,they have to be

modified or assimilated in order to facilitate their pronunciation.The rules,

accordingto which either one or both letters are thus modified, are called

the rules of Sandhi.

As accordingto a generalrule the words in a sentence must thus be glued

the
together, mere absence of Sandhi is in many cases sufficient to mark the

stopswhich in other languageshave to be marked by stops. Ex. ^

""TMi H^Ht astvagnimdhdtmyam,indrastu devdndm mahattamah, Let

there bte'the greatness of Agni; nevertheless Indra is the greatest of the

gods.
Distinction between External and Internal Sandhi.

" 24. It is in
essential, order to avoid between
confusion, to distinguish
the rules of Sandhi which determine the changes of final and initial letters

of words (pada),and between those other rules of Sandhi which apply to

the final letters of verbal roots (dhdtu)
and nominal bases (prdtipadikd)
when

followed by certain terminations or suffixes. Though both are based on the

same phoneticprinciples
and are sometimes their application
identical, is

different. For shortness3 sake it will be best to apply the name of External

* the
Accordingto Sanskrit grammarians the real Anusvara is pronouncedin nose only,
the five nasals by their respectiveorgans and the nose. Siddh.-Kaum. to Pan. i. i, 9.

The real Anusvara is therefore ndsikya,nasal; the five nasals are anunasika, nasalized,
i.e. pronounced by their own of speech,and uttered through the nose.
organ

C 2
12 RULES OP EXTERNAL SANDHI. " 25-

Sandhi or Pada Sandhi to the changes which take placeat the meeting of
final and initial letters of words, and that of Internal Sandhi to the changes
produced by the meeting of radical and formative elements.

The rules which applyto final and initialletters of words (pada)apply,with

few exceptions,
to the final and initial letters of the component parts of pounds,
com-

and likewise to the final letters of nominal bases (prdtipadika)

when lowed
fol-

by the so-called Pacto-terminations ("ri

bhydm, fa: bhih,wr: bhyah, ?Jsu),

or suffixes beginningwith
by secondary(taddhita) any consonants except ^ y.
The changes produced by the contact of incompatibleletters in the body
of a word should properly be treated under the heads of declension,
and
conjugation, derivation. In many cases it is far easier to remember

the words ready-made from the dictionary,

or the grammaticalparadigms
from the grammar, than to acquire the complicated rules with their

numerous exceptionswhich are generallydetailed in Sanskrit grammars

under the head of Sandhi. It is easier to learn that the participle
passive
of fe^ lih,to lick,is cTte: lidhah,than to remember the rules accordingto
which ^ + J^h+ 1 are changed into ^ + TT dh -f t,3 + ^ d + dh, and T + "%d + dh;
^ d is dropt and the vowel lengthened: while in "j(V^+ IT: parivrih+ tafy,
the vowel, under the same circumstances,remains short ; parivrih+ tah =

parivridh+ tah, parivrid+ dhah =parivrid + dhah = parivridhah. In Greek

and Latin no rules are given with regard to changes of this kind. If they
are to be given at all in Sanskrit grammars, they should,to avoid confusion,
be distinct from
kept perfectly the rules the
affecting final and initialletters
of words as broughttogetherin one and the same sentence.

of Vowels.
Classification

" 25. Vowels are divided into short (hrasva), and protracted
long (dirgha),
(pluta)
vowels. Short vowels have one measure (mdtrd),long vowels two,
vowels
protracted three. (Pan.i. 2, 27.) A consonant is said to last half

the time of a short vowel.

Short vowels
1. : ^ a, ^ iy T u, ^ ri,c" li.

2. Long vowels : ^rr d, $t, "" d, ^ ri,u e, ^ ai, ^ft 0, ^ au.

3. Protracted vowels are indicated by the figure3 3 ; ^r$ a 3, ^T 3 d 3, ^ 3 i 3,

^3 ^ 3) ^ 3 e 3" ^TC 3 ou 3. Sometimes we find ^r $ ^, a 3 i,instead of
^ 3, e 3 ; or ^n 3 ^, d 3 u, instead of ^ 3, au 3.

" 26. Vowels are likewise divided into

1. Monophthongs (samdndkshara)
: "* a, ^?T d,\it^^u^H^ ri,^ri, o" li.

2. Diphthongs (sandhyakshara)
: ^ e, ^ ai, ^ o, *$hau.

" 27. All vowels are liable to be nasalized,

or to become anundsika : ^fa,^f
d.
-$ 33- BULBS OP EXTERNAL SANDHI. 13

J 28. Vowels are again divided into light(laghu)and heavy (guru).This

division is importantfor metrical purposes only.
1. Lightvowels are V a, ^ i,Tw,^ if not followed by a double
ri,75 li, consonant.

Heavy vowels $ i,T" A, ^ r*,* at, wt w"

2. are *? a, *, * o, at/, and any
short vowel, if followed by more than one consonant.

J 29. Vowels are, divided accordingto

lastly, accent, into acute (udatta),
grave (anudatta),
and circumflexed(svarita).
The acute vowels are pronounced
with a raised tone, the grave vowels with a low, the circumflexed with an even

tone. (Pan.i. 2, 29-32.) Accents are marked inVedic literature only.

Guna and Vriddhi.

J 30. Guna is the of

strengthening "^i, ^ z, 3" M, g; u, ^ ri,^ ri, "$ It,by
means of a preceding^w a, which raises ^ i and ^ i to ^ e, ? u and n u to wt o,

^ ri and ^ ri to ar, "" li to al. (Pan.i. 2.)

^ ^ i,

By a of
repetition the same process the Vriddhi (increase)
vowels are

formed, viz. ^ ai instead of F et ^n au instead of ^fto, ^TTT dr instead of ^T ar,

and
^n?^ dl instead of ^Tc5 al. (Pan.i. i, i.)
Vowels are thus divided again into :

1. Simplevowels :

2. Guna vowels:

3. Vriddhi vowels : w d *di a+i), ^aw (a+a+w),

(a-f
J 31, ^T a and ^n a do not take Guna, or, as other grammarians say,
remain unchanged after taking Guna. Thus in the first person sing,of the
reduplicated which
perfect, requiresGuna or Vriddhi,^i? han forms with

Guna ^T^jaffhana, or with Vriddhi "niT"T jaghdna, I have killed.

Combination of Vowels at the end and beginningof words.

J 32. As a general rule, Sanskrit allows of no hiatus (vivritti)

in a

sentence. If a word ends in a vowel, and the next word begins with a

vowel, certain modifications take placein order to remove this hiatus.

$ 33. For the purpose of explainingthe combination of vowels, they

may be divided into two classes :

1. Those which are liable to be changed into semivowels,^ i, ^ i,"su, gi w,

^ ri"^ " "

also the diphthongs,* e, ^ at, ^ o, ^rr au.
2. Those which are not, ^r a, ^T d.

Callingthe former liquid*, the latter hard vowels, we may say : If the

*
The Pratis'akhya
calls them ndmin, for a different reason ; see Rig-veda-pratis'akhja
ed. M. M., p. xxiii.
14 RULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI. " 34-

same vowel (longor short)occurs at the end and beginningof words, the

result is the long vowel. (Pan.vi. i, 101.) Thus

^sr or ^rr + ^ or wr = ^n a + CL "

d.

^ or ^+ 3[or ^= ^ ? -{-" "

z.

" c *

Ex. "3W ^Ttpraflf = ^IM-M^rd uktvd + apagachchhati uktvdpagachchhati, =

having spoken he goes away.

ft nadi + idrisi = nadidrisi,such a river.

= oJuNrkartri + riju "

doing (neuter)
kartriju, right.
kintu + udeti = but
kintudeti, he rises.

Or in compounds, *T^t4- ^t = *T^$rimahi + Uah " mahisah, lord of the earth.

$ 34. If hard vowels (longor short)occur at the end of a word, and the

next begins with a liquidvowel (exceptdiphthongs), the result is Guna of

the liquidvowel. (Pan.vi. I, 87.) Thus

^ ^ / *\
". w

^T or ^TT + T or "gjm^ft a + u = o (du).

^T ^3TT + ^ m d + ri (Pan.i. i, 5 ! ")
or or
^= = ar.

Ex. cf^ ^5: = KT5;: tava + indrafy = tavendrah, thine is Indra.

^TT ^W1^ ^ftw sd + uktvd = soktvdyshe having spoken.
t *TT ^fe: = ^f%t sd + riddhih "
sarddhih, this wealth.
rf^ oSoRT^: = ri^^Kt ^"v" + likdrah = tavalkdrah,thy letter /z.

Or in compounds, "*1WJ + ^%J = "*l*-Mfy:kdmya-[-ishtih kdmyeshtih, = an

offeringfor a certain boon.

f^lT+ ^M^i: = f^7ftaRf5K

A^a + upadesah = hitopadesah,good advice.

^ 35. If hard vowels (longor short)occur at the end of a word, and the

next beginswith a diphthong,the result is Vriddhi. (Pan.vi. i, 88.) Thus

^T or ^rr H- ^ = ^ a + e = di.

^T or ^TT + 5j $ = d-{- di = di.

Ex. if^ H3 = i^( tava + eva = tavaiva, of thee only.

m + aikshishta = she
saikshishta, saw.

* The letter ~3lU is left out, because it is of no practical It is

utility. treated like ^ ri,only
substitutingc^I for T r in Guna and Vriddhi. Thus "^-J-W*J"5Ni
li-\-anubandhah becomes

cTfJ^Klanubandhah, i. e. having U as indicatory

letter.

t Some grammarians consider the Sandhi of a with ri optional,but they require the
shortening of the long d. Ex. WSTT-f^jfabrahmd-\-rishik==?mfa Irahmarshih or W5f

brahma rishih,Brahma, a Rishi.

-"37- RULES OP EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 15

r: = mrro: tava + oshthah = tavaushthah, thy lip.

*TT TOT7W4"H"fl= *flrW*Hcf1
sd -f autsukyavail = sautfukyavatt,
she desirous.

Or in compounds, TJ*T -f ^R = tl^R rdma + aisvaryam ramaibvaryam, =

the lordshipof Rama.

*rfafT
+ WH"J = *X\A\m*l8itd+ aupamyam = sitaupamyam, similarity
with

Sita,the wife of Rama.

J 36. If a simple liquidvowel (longor short)occurs at the end of a

word, and the next begins with any vowel or diphthong,the result is

change of the liquidvowel into a semivowel. (Pan.vi. i, 77.) Thus

" or ^n = *T or TTT

f or
^= ^ or
^
r or "31= ^ or
^
r or *j = ^ or ^ e, ai = ye, yai.
SM or TOT = 'H or ^ o, au =
yo9 yau.

!T or TOT = t or TJ

[ or ^="ftcor ift i=ri.'

r or -31= ^ or ^ ri \t =

e9 ai =
re, rat.

fftor TO^ ^ = or 5 L o, au =
ro, ran.

J or TOT~^ or ^T = va.

; or ^ = f% or ^
or % or ^ ri vn.
or ^"= ^ =

[ or ^ = ^ or % e, ai =
ve, vai.

sn or TOT = ^ or ^ L o, au =
vo, van.

Ex. dadhi + atra = dadhyatra, milk here.

TH = kartri + uta = kartruta, doing moreover.

madhu + iva = madhviva, like honey.
= "f"U*4jnadi + aidasya "

nadyaidasya,the river of A Ida.

In compounds, t^ + ^f" = tTirSnadi + artham = nadyartham9 for the sake

of a river.

Note " Some native grammarians allow, except in compounds, the omission of this

Sandhi, but they requirein that case that a long final vowel be shortened. Ex. ^ft """
chakrf atra may be ^-sfcJWchakryatra or
^if^i^T^ chakri atra.

" 37. If a Guna- vowel occurs at the end of a word, and the next begins
with any vowel or diphthong (excepta),the last element of the Guna-vowel

is changed into a semivowel. If a follows,a is elided,and no change takes

placein the diphthong; see $ 41. (Pan.vi. i, 78.) Thus
^(e)+ any vowel (excepta) ^r^(ay). =

^ (o)+ any vowel (excepta) ^T^ (av). =

16 KULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI. " 38-

Ex. *rif-^MNsd. = sakhe

*U?miJ|"ad. dgachchha = sakhaydgachchha, Friend, come !

sakhe iha = sakhayiha,Friend, here !

= TW%f^prabho ehi =prabhavehi, Lord, come near !

llVRfav prabho aushadham=prabhavaushadham, Lord,

medicine.

In compounds, ift+ -|$i: TT^H =

go + Uah = gavisafy.There are various

exceptionsin compounds where iftgo is treated as *re gava. ("41.)

J 38. If a Vriddhi-vowel occurs at the end of a word, and the next

begins with vowel or diphthong, the last element is changed into a

any
semivowel. (Pan.vi. i, 78.) Thus
% (ai)
+ any vowel =
^TH^ (ay),
^T (au)+ any vowel =
w^ (dv).
Ex. fafl ^r": = rwwS: sriyaiarthah = sriydyarthah.
friyairite = sriydyrite.
H ravau astamite = ravdvastamite,after sunset.

m ^frf 'rfTrMfrf
= tau iti ~
tdviti.

In composition,tfr
+ ^T^ = "TR^ nau + artham = ndvartham, for the sake of

ships.
" 39. These two rules,however, are liable to certain modifications :

The final rule for

1.
i^y and
^v of^tnay, ^r^av,which stand accordingto
?? e, ^fto, may be dropt before all vowels a, $ 41); not, however,
(except
in composition. Thus most MSS. and printededitions change
^ '-HNI^ sakhe dgachchha,not into *K"WI-ed sakhay dgachchha,but into

TO WT35 sakha dgachchha.

TOf ^ sakhe iha,not into *R^fM^ sakhayiha, but into ^?T ^5 sakha iha.

IWt nfe prabho ehi,not into TW%fi|

prabhavehi,but into iw itf^prabhaehi.
H*ft ^W prabho aushadham, not into TpT^rNv prabhavaushadham, but into

TW WW prabha aushadham.

2. The final
^y of which
*%r*{dy, stands for ^ di, may be dropt before all

vowels, and it is usual to drop it in our editions. Thus

fo**l^T": sriyaiarthah, is more usuallywritten foRT ^: 6riyd arthah instead

of ftsnrnr^t
Sriydyarthah .

^rr^dv, for ^
3. The final ^ v of au, may be dropt before all vowels,but is

more usuallyretained in our editions. Thus

^ ^fir
tau iti is more usuallywritten rilfcPri and
tdviti, not HT ^TT id iti.

Note" Before the particle

T u the dropping of the final \y and \v is obligatory.
It is without that the final of Guna and Vriddhi and the final ^u of
any reason
^y
Guna are dropt,while
generally the final ^v of Vriddhi is retained.
generally It would be

more consistent either always to retain the final semivowels or always to drop them. See

Rig-veda-pratis'akhya,
ed. M. M., Sutras 129, 132, 135 : Pan. vi. i, 78; vm. 3, 19.
 18 EULES OF EXTEENAL SANDHI. " 43-

IrregularSandhi.
" 43. The following
are a few cases of Sandhi
irregular which requireto
be stated. When a preposition
ending in ^r or ^TT a is followed by a verb

beginningwith Tj e or ^ o, the result of the coalescence of the vowels is

^ e or ^ft0, not $ ai or ^r au. (Pan. vi. I, 94.)

Ex. jf -f-1T3TTT = JHT^ pra + ejate=prejate.
^TT + ^Wff = T^Nw upa + eshate = upeshate.
U + ^^rfrr = iNlfifpra + eshayati"pr eshayati*.
TO + TOfir = TJTJsrflT
para + ekhati =parekhati.
^T + ^"WrT = ^iftafTTupa + oshati = uposhati.
TO + ^f^frT ^T^flTpara = + ohati =parohati.
This is not the before the verbs and to go, if raised
case two
TT^ec?A,
to grow, 3[", by Guna
to ^ e. (Pan. vi. i, 89.)

Ex. "3T + TJViT = "^Vff upa-\-edhate

= upaidhate.

In verbs derived from nouns, and beginning with TT or ^ffr

e or o, the elision of the final

^T or ^TT a of the prepositionis optional.

" 44. If a root beginningwith ^j ri is preceded by a preposition

ending
in ^? a or ^rr a, the two vowels coalesce into WHC ur instead of (Pan.
^ ar.

vi. i, 91.)
Ex. "SHr + ^TTRtflf apa
^"ed.frf = -f-richchhati = apdrchchhati.
^ft + ^Ullfff vS^|iSlfri
ava = + rindti "
avdrndti.

IT + ^prff = in^rwpra + rijate"prdrjate.

tm + ^qfff TO^fa =
j9"m + rishati =pardrshati.
In verbs derived from nouns and beginning with ^ ri,this lengthening of the ^FT a of

the preposition
is optional. (Pan. vi. i, 92.)
In certain compounds ^TOT rinam, debt, and ^TlTtritah,affected,take Vriddhi instead of

Guna if preceded by ^aj H + ^$18 = TR^ pra+rinam=prdrnam, principaldebt ; ^JW +

^CJ = ^fUMW rina+rinam = rindrnam,debt contracted to another

liquidate debt ; ^ftW+
^Wt = ^n^l'^t affected by
soka-{-ritah-=sGkdrta.h, sorrow. Likewise uh,
"3!^ the substitute

for ^Tf vdh, forms

carrying, Vriddhi with a preceding^ a in a compound. Thus f%^T-f
"^t visva+uhah, the ace. plur.of fqiyqT^
visvavdh, is fmyi^: visvauhah. (Pan. vi. i, 89,
vart.)
" 45. If the initial ^fto in ^Ft oshthah, lip,and Wtg*otuh, cat, is preceded in a pound
com-

by ^ or ^TTa, the two vowels may coalesce into ^5n au or ^fto. (Pan. vi. i, 94,

vart.)
}Ex. ^WC + ^fVffl
= '^IMClSt
or viMOst adhara+ oshthah =.adharaushtJiah or adharoshthah,
the lower lip.

^y"*) + ^rVfft
=
W^T?n or t^^lrft
sthula-\-otuh = sthulautuh or sthulotuh,a big cat.

* In nouns derived from U^ ^res^,the rule is optional. Ex. ifa?or 9*51preshya or

praisJiya, messenger. a IR presha, a gleaner,is derived from ITp-a and ^["A.

-" 51. RULES OP EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 19

If *iW oshtha and WlJ o/a are preceded by ^ or ^JT a in the middle of a sentence,
they follow the generalrule.
Ex. *T*T + ^ffat = THTOJ mama + oshthaJi = mumau8ht hah, my lip.

compounds the following

" 46. As irregular are mentioned by native grammarians :
"Satsvairam, wilfulness,and Jflfi^roairtfi, from
self-willed, ^f + ^ ma+ira.

"2f"fliy"UT
akshauhini,
a complete
army, from ^ftlf4- ^tfigil
aksha -\-uhini.
: praudhah, from IT 4- TO? pra+ddhah, full-grown.
j^

HT?[:prauhati, from
investigation, IT + "31^:pr a -\-uhah.
ifa praishah,a certain prayer, from IT -f '"?. pra + eshah. (See " 43.)
uW. praishyah,a messenger.

" 47. The final ^fto of indeclinable words is not liableto the rules of Sandhi. (Pan. 1. 1,15.)
Ex. "SHft
^nrf^aho apehi,Halloo,go away !

" 48. Indeclinables consisting

of a singlevowel,with the exceptionof Vf d (" 49),arc
not liable to the rules of Sandhi. (Pan. i. i, 14.)
Ex. ^ ^ i indra,Oh Indra ! T "3H^| u umesa, Oh lord of Uma !

^TT ^^"a evam, Is it so indeed ?

" 49. If ^TT"2 (which is written by Indian grammarians W^ dh) is used as a preposition
before verbs,or before nouns in the sense of so far as' (inclusively
or exclusively)
or a

it is liable to the rules of Sandhi.

little,'

Ex. ^\ until the readingbegins.

^U|lMli^= ^mmHTf^a adhyayandt=ddhyayandt,
ekadesdt
^||f^a = aikadesdt,to a certain place.
n = ^ Id\ P"l
ri d dlochitam = dlochitam,regardeda little.
d ushnam = oshnam, a little warm.

^TT ^l^ = *f" d ihi = ehi,come here.

If ^TT d is used as an it is not

interjection, liable to Sandhi, accordingto " 48.

Ex. ^TT ^ f^R7 (TiTd, evam kila tat,Ah, "

now I recollect,it is justso.
"

" 50. Certain particles

remain unaffected by Sandhi.
Ex. ^ ^" he indra. Oh Indra.

" 51. A protractedvowel remains unaffected by Sandhi, because it is always supposed

to stand at the end of a sentence. (Pan. vi. i, 125 ; viu. 2, 82.)
Ex. ^ei^rU $ I ^f^ devadattd 3 ehi, Devadatta,come here !

D 2
 20 EXTERNAL SANDHI.

1 I

""

tfr

48
"

1 e

UTS-
5*1*

S
tr* fcr" " " 9 f
"*"
tr "c 'C- "C. 'C. "C
,l" T!S
T. S- s; a
5s;
1C"
-

I rfip*
p
^

$1
II
ri

**' " t**

IW' I ur
tvf

ft

F
*
r
-$54- EXTERNAL SANDHI. 21

Combination of Final and Initial Consonants.

$ 53. Here, as in the case of vowels, the rules which apply to the final

consonants of words each

following other in a sentence are equallyapplicable
to the final consonants of words followingeach other in a compound. The

final consonants of nominal bases too, before the so-called Pa"/a-terminations

bhydrn,fa bhih, wi: bhyah, g su)and

(wit before secondary(taddhita)
suffixes

beginningwith consonant but treated according to the

any i^ y, are same

rules. But the derivatives formed by means of these and other suffixes

are best learnt from the dictionaryin their ready-made state ; while
the changes of nominal and verbal bases ending in consonants, before
the terminations of declension and conjugationand other suffixes,are
regulatedby different laws, and are best acquiredin learningby heart the

paradigms of
principal nouns and verbs.

J 54. In order to simplifythe rules concerning the changes of final

consonants, it is importantto state at the outset that eleven only out of the

thirty-five
consonants can ever stand in Sanskrit at the end of a word ; viz.

"^k, ^ "^n,^/?,i{m, "^/, : h,

"

n, ^t, is^n,j^t, m.

1. There are five classes of consonants, consistingof five letters each ;

thus givingtwenty-five.In every one of these five classes the aspirates,
if final,are their
correspondingunaspiratedletters: ^M
replacedby
by ^ k / -^gh by IT g ; ^ chh, however, not by ^ ch, but by 7 /,"c.
Ex. f^ y PC* chitralikh,painter;voc. fad fc"5
"^ cldtralik. This reduces
^
the letters
twenty-five to fifteen.

2. In every class the sonant (J58) letters,if final, are replacedby their responding
cor-

surd letters; i\^gby c^Ar;^d by TT", "c. Ex. hnd,

^
heart ; nom. ^ir hrit. This reduces the fifteen to ten *.

3. No palatal^ch can ever be final; hence the only remaining palatal,

the ^cA, is replacedby the corresponding
guttural^ k f. Ex. '^T^vdch,
Final This reduces the
speech; voc. "^T^vdk. *{n does not occur.

ten to eight. In a few roots the final *^/is replaced by a lingual

instead of a guttural.
4. Of the semivowels,(TI
y, T r, "^ /,\v3)^l is the only one that is found at

the end of words. This raises the eightto nine letters.

5. "^ h cannot be but

final, is changed into ^t / sometimes into ^ k or K^t.

* Some grammarians allow the soft or sonant letters as but

final, the MSS. and editions

generallychange them into the hard

corresponding letters.

t The onlyexceptionsare technical terms such as "3^ acfc,a vowel ; -*"in;ajantah,

ending in a vowel, instead of ^^t?n agantah.
22 EXTERNAL SANDHI. " 55-

6. Of the sibilants,
the only one that is found at the end of words is Visarga.

For, radical v^shcannot be but

final, is replacedby " 1. Thus fg^dvish
becomes In
fgz^dvit. a few words final "S sh is changed into cir k.

Radical cannot be but

final, is replacedby " t. Thus f^^visbecomes
^s
fe"Tvit. In some words final ^rs is changed into cF k. ("174.)

Final radical is treated Visarga.

^ s as

The raises
Visarga,therefore, the nine to ten ; and the Anusvara, to eleven

the only ones

letters, that can ever stand at the end of real words.

Hence the rules of Sandhi final

affecting consonants are reallyreduced to

eleven heads.

$ 55. It is important to observe that no word in Sanskrit ever ends in

more than one consonant, the only exceptionbeing when an T r precedesa

final radical tenuis cjf", 7tf,i^t,T^p. Thus

If = ^fsfH^abibhar + t = abibhar,3. p. sing.impf.of H bhri,to carry.

^rfe*n:abibhar + s = abibhar,2. p. sing.impf.of H bhri,to carry.
=
^p"^ suvalg+ s = suval,nom. sing,well jumping.
But "3fi(r
urk, strength,
nom. sing,of ^f^urj.
impf.intens. of ^ffvrit'OT ^^vridh.
avarivart,3. p. sing.
amdrt, from ?n^ mrij. (Pan.vin. 2, 24.)
The nom. is f%"sh chikih,because
sing,of fqpjft*(chikfrsh here the r is

not followed by a tenuis.

of Consonants.
Classification

" 56. Before we can examine the changes of final and initial consonants,

accordingto the rules of external Sandhi, we have to explainwhat is meant

by the placeand the qualityof consonants,

i. The throat,the palate,

the roof of the palate, and
the teeth, the lips, the

nose are called the placesor organs of the letters. (See $ 4.)
a. By contact between the tongue and the four roof,
places, throat,palate,
"

teeth, " the guttural,

palatal, and
lingual, dental consonants are formed.

Labial consonants are formed by contact between the lips.

3. In forming the nasals of the five classes the veil which separates the
nose from the pharynx is withdrawn *. Hence these letters are called

Anundsika, i. e. co-nasal or nasalized.

4. The real Anusvara is formed in the nose only,and is called Ndsikya,i.e.

nasal.

5. The Visargais said to be pronounced in the chest (urasya); the three or

five sibilants in their respective

places.

* Lectures the Science of Language, Second

on Series,p. 145.
-
$ 59- EXTERNAL SANDHI. 23

6. The semivowels,too, are referred to these five places,and three of them,

ly" "* l"iv* can be nasalized,and are then called Anundsika. (3,"$,
^, or 4, "*,^,y, /*,
v.) *r cannot be nasalized in Sanskrit.

$ 57. Accordingto their letters are

quality(prayatna*,effort) divided into,
1. Letters formed by complete contact (sjmshta)
of the organs: "*k, wM,

Tiff, Vffh, Trc; *ch, -^chh9 *lj,T$j/i,

*tn; */, 7#, T"" *dh, *r n ;

K /, ^f /A, ^d, vdh^n ; TJ/?, iR/?A,

* b, * bh, urn. These are called

Spar"a in Sanskrit,and, if they did not comprehend the nasals,would

correspondto the classical mutes.

2. Letters formed by slight

contact (ishat
sprishta):
^y, *r, "* /,^ v (not^ h).
These are called A ntahsthd i.e.intermediate between
(fern.), Sparsasand
Cshmans, which has been freelytranslated by semivowel or liquid.

3. Letters
formed by slightopening (ishadvivrita)
: X X" ^^" ^8^ * *"

o
^ h.
(f"} These are called Cshman (flatus)
in Sanskrit,
which may be

rendered by sibilant or flatus.

4. Vowels are said to be formed by completeopening (vivrita)^.
" 58. A second division,
accordingto quality,
is,
1. Surd letters : ^R ", ^ kh, ^ch, -^chhy zt, *th, *", Vth, vp, TXph; X X"

^T ^, W sh9 Its, X $* an(i Visarga: h. In their formation the is

glottis
They are called Aghosha, non-sonant.
open.

2. Sonant letters : JT#, ^d^dh,

Vffh,^/, T(jh, ^ d, vdh, ib, *bh, *n,*n9

3JTn9 "f n, "T m ; ^ h, ny, T^r, T5/,"3V, the Anusvara *

m, and all vowels.

In their formation the is closed.

glottis They are called Ghoshavat.

J 59. Lastly,consonants are into,

divided,accordingto quality,
1. Aspirated(mahdprdna)
: ^ kh, Tf ffh,"^chh, "%jh97 th, "% dh, "nth, v dh9

T*ph, * bh; X X, ^ ", V shy * s, g 0; ^ h; the Visarga : h and

*
Anusvara m.

2. Unaspirated(alpaprdna)
: all the rest.

It will be seen, that

therefore, the change of ^ch into ^ k is a change of
and
place, that the change of ^ch into ^J is a change of quality
; while in the

* Sanskrit grammarians call this ^i*sn"; M"4"7t. dbhyantarahprayatnah,mode of articu-

lation

preparatoryto the utterance of the sound, and distinguishit from "M*I; HM"^; rdhyah
prayatnah,mode of articulation at the close of the utterance of the sound, which produces
the of
qualities and
surd, sonant, aspirated, unaspirated,
as explainedin " 58, 59.
t Some grammarians differ in their of the degreesof closingor opening
description of

the organs. Some ascribe to the semivowels imperfectcontact,

duhsprishta, or ishadasprishta,
slightnon-contact, or fshadvivrita,
slightopening ; to half-contact,
the sibilants nemasprishta,

i.e. greater opening than is requiredfor the semivowels, or completeopening ; while

vivrita,

theyrequirefor the vowels either vivrita, non-contact.

completeopening,or asprishta, Siddh.-

Kaum. vol. I. p. 10. Rig-veda-pratis'.

xin. 3. In the Atharva-veda-pratisakhyai. 33. we

ought to read ^fiS^JI? instead

eke 'sprishtam of ^"5 FJT?eke sprishtam.
24 EXTEENAL SANDHI. " 60-

transition of ^ ch into TT g, or of TT^into IT n, we should have a change both

of placeand of quality.
" 60. The changeswhich take placeby the combination of the eleven final

letters with initial vowels or consonants be divided therefore into two

may
classes.
Final letters are changed,I with regardto their placesor organs, 2. with
.

regardto their quality.

i. Changes of Place.

" 61. The only final consonants which are liable to change of place are
the Dentals,the Anusvara, and Visarga. The Dentals,being incompatible
with Palatals and Linguals,become palataland lingualbefore these letters.

Anusvara and Visargaadapt themselves as much as possibleto the placeof

the letter by which they are followed. All other changes of final consonants

are merely changes of quality

; these in the case of Dentals, Anusvara, and
Visarga,being superaddedto the changes of place.
$ 62. Final ^ t before (^ ch, "^ chh, *(j,T"Jh,
palatals *T n, 3)is changed
SIN
into a palatal.(Pan. vm. 4, 40.)

Ex. "fTW + ^ = 1TW tat + cha = tachcha,and this.

TFrT + f^Rf% = ri(W'H(Vftat + chhinatti = tachchhinatti,he cuts this.

W^sniflPd' he hears this *.

TTfT + SJJUlfri tat += srinoti = tachsrinoti,
rTcT+ ^rnT^1 = d-nJUH tat + jayate = this
tajjdyate, is born. The final

7^t is changed into ^ ch and then into ^ j accordingto $ 66.

In composition,"T"r?T + WlfT= WTWifT jagat +jetd =jagajjetd,conqueror of

the world.

The same change would take place before an initial T(jh; and before an

initial "r n, i^t might become either *{j or *{n. ("68.)

" 63. Final "T n before *{j,T^jh,*{n, and 3^ is changed to palatal"^n.
Ex. + "nrfir rtiy^frf
Trif^ tan +jayati = = he
tdnjayati, conquers them. (Pan.
vin. 4, 40.)
Note " Rules on the changes of final "f" before and "S^swill
^cA, TS^chh, be given

hereafter. See " 73, 74.

j 64. Final i^tbefore 7#, 7 th, T d, ^ dh, w n (not\sh, Pan. vm. 4, 43)
is changed into a lingual.(Pan.vm. 4, 41.)
Ex. TTif + T*Tff = tat +dayate
TT!"qTT = taddayate. The final T{t is changed
into T t and then into
^ d accordingto "J66.
In composition,
ffff + ^^1 = 1^^1 tat + tikd = a glosson
tattikd, this.

t etat + thakkurah =
the
etatthakkurah, idol of him.

*
ST 4,accordingto " 92, is generally
changed to "$ chh : ri^lififri
tachchhrinoti.
26' EXTERNAL SANDHI. " 67-

before sonants, changed into

kakup + atra = kakubatra, a regionthere,(inflectional
base '3ftt^kakubh.)
= ^T3TJ: ajo + ghatah = abghatah, a water-jar.
^HT + "nK = ^M*K ap -\-jayah abjayah, obtainingwater.
=

may ah = ammayah, watery. ("69.)

+ bhih = kakubbhih, instrum. plur.
before sonants, changed into "* d, except before sonant palatalsand
linguals"
when (accordingto $ 62) it is changed into *(J and T$:
+ ^3 = *rft^Wsarit + atra = saridatra,the river there.

"R1T + ^r: = jagat + Uah =jagadisah,lord

*lJ|"fl3i; of the world.

: mahat + dhanuh = mahaddhanuh, a largebow.

mahat + 6A^ = mahadbhih, instrum. plur.

"ff/ before sonant changed into "S^/:see

palatals, $62:
*rfci^-f
'STF? = *cftWc3 sarit +jalam = sarijjalam,water of the river.

II t before sonant linguals,

changed into T d: see $ 62 :

^W?T + TRT: = etat + ddmarah,

^rf|THT:t = etadddmarah, the uproar of them.

Note " There are exceptionsto this rule,but they are confined to Taddhita derivatives

which are found in dictionaries. Thus final Tt^tbefore the suffixes

possessive Tt^maf,
^i(vat, fV"Ttfw,
3c5 vala is not changed. Ex. fq^rt^
+ ^^= fa^i*i
\vidyut+ ca^ =

vidyutvat,possessed of lightning. Final ^ s too, which represents Visarga, remains

unchanged before the same Taddhitas. Thus TT"f^+ f^T"T=IMftjlt^"c/as+rtn=tejasvin,

instead of H "ft
f"4
H^tejovin j see " 84.3. WlTn*^
+ HW = 'aifi
Pri1^
1(fyotis-}-mat=jyotishma
instead of **4\fa*i!{jyotirmat;
" 84. (Pan. I. 4, ip?)

J 67. Additional changes take placeif the final surds ^ k, 7 t, T{t,

^p are

followed by initial nasals,chiefly and H The nasals being sonant,

^ n m.

they requirethe change of o^k, ^ t, Ji^t,

and "q jo into JT g, T d, ^ d, and ^ ^";
but these final sonants be further infected by the nasal character of the
may
initial nasals,and
may be written ^ n9 ^ n, ^ n, *{m. (Pan.viu. 4, 45.)
Ex. f^oF+ "TPT: = f^nn: or f^ni: dik + ndgah "
dignagafyor dihndgah,
a world-elephant.
'Tvf^+ 7Tff7Tnvfej|fif
or H^f^rt^ = madhulit + nardati = madhu-

lidnardati or madhulinnardati,the bee hums.

: or ^NTVJ: jagat + ndthah ^jagadndthah,or jagan-

ndthah,lord of the world. -

or *%"$ ap + nadi = abnadi or amnadi, water-river.

-f-H^: =
TTT^^: or m^TO: prdk + mukhah =prdgmukhah or prdnmu-
khah, facingthe east.

or ^^ bhavat+matam = bhavadmatam or b

vanmatam, your opinion.

-" 72. EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 27

Note If word should begin with guttural,palatal, lingualn (^

" a a or ", *^ff,
or

then a final T^/would change its placeor organ at the same time that it became a nasal. It
would become "^/i,*^fl,
or ^n. There are, however, no words in common use beginning
withTri, *f3, or Tffn.

" 68. Before the suffix TO maya and before HTO mdtra the change into the nasal is not

but
optional, (Pan.
obligatory. vm. 4, 45, vart.)

Ex. ^T^T + *HI =

^T^pT rdk-\-mayam=.vdhmayam, consistingof speech.
+ *n^
*Ojf"$^ = wfrt"i"iidmadhulit+mdtram = mntlhulinmdtram,merelya bee.

"HI -f-TTpT = CT*HI^ tat-}-mdtram = tanmdtram, element.

Note "
is always muqfif shannavati,
Ninety-six never Mflliqfrt
shadnavati.

" 69. The initial ^ h, if brought into immediate contact with a final ^ Jt (*ty),
^( (\"f)t
1(f(1 ^)f^P (^^)"^ commonly, not changed into
necessarily, the sonant aspirateof the

class of the final letter,viz. into Igh, "Zdh, VrfA, H6A. (Pan. vm. 4, 62.)
Ex. fVcf + ^(Vsrit
= ftl'^tW'iJ
or fvrirfttnfl
dhik-\-hastinah=dhighastinah
or dhiggha$-
tinah,Fie on the elephants!
"QHC3T7 -f ^1H = ^fCsfT^Tft ^iVctrsFn!parivrdt-j-hut ah
or ^parivrddhaiah or jjari-
vrdddhatah, the mendicant is killed.

inr + "?iT = W^.Sff or TTSTiTtat-\-hutam= tadhutam or taddhutam, this is sacrificed.

^T^-f-^""i( = ^i "3"u or vi"H"u ap+haranam = abharanam or abbharanam, water-

fetching.

J 70. if ^ before c^"is not changed into "* d, but into "^/.(Pan.vm. 4, 6O.)1
Ex. TTWW ^"^ + labdham tallabdham, this is taken.
Wf^4-75W = =

^T^+ c3c3T? =
^d'cftl? brihat + laldtam = brihallaldtam,a large fore-
head.

J 71. Final
T^TIbefore "^/ is changed into "^/; but this c^/is pronounced
through the nose, and is written with the Anusvara dot over it. It is usual

in this case to write the Anusvara as a half-moon,called Ardha-chandra.

Ex. H^l^+ HTH: = Hgl|fl*T:

mahdn + Idbhah = mahdl Idbhah, largegain.

J 72. Final n, ur n, and tT n, preceded by a short vowel and followed

^
by any vowel, are doubled. (Pan.vm. 3, 32.)
Ex. vre^-f ^ng: = "n^*Sf: dhdvan + asvah =. dhdvannaSvah,a running horse.
U7TT + ^rr^" = HW^I^d
pratyah + dste = pratyahhdste,he sits turned

toward the west.

*J*TW4- ^mir = gnWT^ sugan + dste = he

suganndste, sits countingwell *.
If ^ n, T^ n, and precededby a long vowel and followed by any
^ n are

vowel, no change takes place.

Ex. ^SThT + ^idgma kavin + dhvayasva,call the poets.

*
Technical terms like ^tUlty
unddi,a list of suffixes beginningwith un, or filTW tihanta,
words endingin tin,are exempt from this rule. See also Wilkins, Sanskrita Grammar, "30.

E 2
28 EXTERNAL SANDHI. " 73-

J 73. Final
"^n before initial cp k, ^kh, and IT p, T"ph,remains unchanged.
Final tT w before ^(ch, "^ chh, requiresthe intercession of 5^s.

Final f^n before T ty ^ th, requiresthe intercession of "^sh.

Final before I(t9 i(th9 requiresthe intercession of (Pan.
7^ n ^s.
vin. 3, 7.)
Before these inserted sibilants the original
^w is changed to Anusvara.

Ex. ^n^+^flRTC^^^aRTR hasan + chakdra = hasam$chakdra, he did it

laughing.
vrf^gNH dhdvan + chhdgah dhdvamschhdgah, a
*Tre"^+
'$Tn: = = ning
run-

goat.
tq^TT + frfjvr: ^cfffefpr:
chalan
= + tittibhah "
chalamshtittibhah, a

moving tittibha-bird.

HgR + Tips = H^i"a":mahdn + thakkurah = mahdmshthakkurafi,a great

idol.

"^1^+ IT^t = HAW^:patan + taruh, =patamstaruh} a falling

tree.

Note "
TT^nw prasdm,quiet,forms the nom. U$| ['^prasdn
; but this final "^n,beingthe
representationof an original*^w, is not allowed before "^ch, ^chh, 7f, ^th,T^t,^th to
take a sibilant. Ex. *K^H*t + fW"iTfif H^lTi%*ltrfT prasdn -\-chinoti
= =prasdnchinoti; not

"firrr
prasdmschinoti.
(Pan. vin. 3, 7.)

J 74. Final ^ n and ^n may be followed by initial "5{s,^shy^s without

causing any change ; but it is optional

to add a OF k after the ^ n and a

^ # after the HT n. Thus T$F nsa becomes ^r nksa (orljr"nkchha, " 92);
W5^a becomes nksha; becomes "^r nksa; TT$T ?M" becomes
^ ^ ^T w^a

ntsa (or TP"5 ntchha);TR ws^a becomes K?TR ntsha; ^T ws# becomes

/5fl. (Pan.vin. 3, 28.)

Ex. TTTT + ^W^Trr^^W or Wl^iJM(or Mli^ri)prdn + sete=prdnsete or

prdnksete(orprdnkchhete).
or *pni#*rcfr
sugan + sarati = sugansaratior

$ 75. The same rule appliesto final

7^w before
. s^ ^ and ^ s, but not

before \sh, where it remains unchanged. Before 3^ s it is first changed

into palatal^ n* (^63); and ^ ns may again be changed to 355^nchs,
s"5 nchchh (J72, 92),or 's^nchh. Before ^s, f^n may remain unchanged,
be
or -^(ns may changed into '^nts. (Pan.vin. 3, 30.)
Ex. rTHT -f "^7 = ifT^M? /a/z + shat = tdnshat,those six.

or rfincci* or rti""aLic*"i" or ni""tirti^f

tan + sdrddldn = tdn"drduldn or tdnchsdrduldn or tdnchchhdrduldn

or tdnchhwrddldn,
those tigers.(Pan.vni.3, 31.)

* To allow "^w to remain unchanged before ^s was a mere misprint in Benfey'slarge

grammar, and has long been corrected by that scholar.
-$ 77- EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 29

or HlfH^rt tan + sahate = tdnsahate or tdnttahate,

he bears them.

f^ (fi[^)
+ *J f^g = or H$rr"Ain (hints)
+ *M = /a//*w or hintsu, among
enemies. (The base f^9[
hims, before the
*Jsu of the loc. plur.,
is

treated as a Pada.) See J 53, 55.

J 76. A final
^ f before ^a must remain unchanged,and ift may be inserted.

Ex. TO + *finr. MZ"fCff:or

= M^rHiXd:
shat + saritafy shatsaritah= or shatjsa-
ritahtsix rivers. (Pan.vm. 4, 42 ; 3, 29.)

Anusvdra and Final i^m.

$77. i^m at the end of words remains unchanged if followed by any
initial vowel.

Ex. f^T -f ^ra kim + atra = faHd kimatra, What is there ?

Before consonants it may, without be changed to Anusvara.

exception, (Pan.
vm. 3, 23.)
This is the generalrule. The exceptionsare simply optional(Pan.vm.
4" 59)"v12-
Before ^ ", -^kh,i{"/9\gh" ^n" t^e fin"l *^m or Anusvara may be

changed into ^ n.

Before ^ch, -"chh, *{j,T^jh,

*{n, to ^n.
Before 7/, ^th, ^d, ^dhy iffw, to Tffw.

Before ^th9 ^d, ^dh, ^w,

tt^t, to ^n.
Before ^p9 T^ph,^b, ^bh9 ^m, to urn.

Before T{y9 7^1,^v, to ^y, ^T,1(v. See J 56. 6.

Hence it follows that final J^m may be changed into Anusvara before all

consonants, and must be so changed only before \sh, ^s, ^h, and ^r,
si s,

i.e. the five consonants which have no correspondingnasal class-letter.

It would be most desirable if scholars would never avail themselves of the optional
changeof final Anusvara into ^", ^ n, We
H^n, "^n,*TN?n. should then be spared a number
of compound letters which are troublesome both in writing and printing; and we should
avoid the ambiguityas to the originalnature of these class-nasals when followed by initial

sonant and
linguals,
palatals, dentals. Thus if 1R *H4fH tarn jayati,he conquers her, is '

written riiy^fri
tan jayati,it may be taken for WT^ ^^frifan jayati,he conquers them,
which, accordingto " 63, must be changed into m^qPn tan jayati. In the same manner

tan damayati may be either UTT ^*iMfntan damayati, he tames them, or TITT

tarn damayati,he tames her. All this is at

uncertainty once removed if final \m is

alwayschanged into Anusvara, whatever be the initial consonant of the followingword.

Ex. fcwv+oM"fa = f% ohOfM (or fa^OfM) kim + karoshi = kirk karoshi (or
kin karoshi),
What doest thou ?

^T 4- ^ =
5RJ ^ff?(or^Tf^%)satrum +jahi = satrumjahi (orsatrun
jahi),
kill the enemy.
30 EXTERNAL SANDHI. " 78-

" :"T^fIRflf(orr^^Tfncfif)
nadim -f tarati = nadiih tarati (or
he
tarati), crosses the river.

+ H H frl =
g% "T*rfifr
(or *T^wrfir)
gurum -\-namati-gurum namati
N

(orgurun namati),he salutes the teacher.

far* + Tfic5 = fa W5 (or PcM-Mie^)

kirn + phalam = kiih phalam (or kirn

phalam),What is the use ?

31HdH + *ftafaff
= (or ^n^Ffhrni'ff)
STT^1*rfafaffi sdstram + mimdmsate =

bdstram mimdmsate (orsdstram mimdmsate),he studies the book.

Before i^y, e^/,^v.1

^H^CH + TTTfrf TR?rt TTfcf(or ^RT^iiffr)
= satvaram +ydti = satvaram ydti
(orsatvaray ydti),
he walks quickly.
+ c5HW = frot cW^ (or fwrS"^) vidydm + labhate = vidydm la-
^
he acquireswisdom.
(orvidydl labhate),
TO + $^ = 7 ^ (or 1T^^) tarn + veda "
tarn veda (or tav veda),I
know him.

Before
^r, ^s, \sh, T^S, ^h:
Or^fd "R^T!JXtf^fw
karunam + roditi karunam he
roditi, cries
flR^T]r^+ = =

piteously.
3luimraN+3r? $|aimf$ff sayydydm-\-sete=-sayydydmsete, he
= lies on

the couch.

4- ^%1T
*fft^r = ir^H moksham
iftet + 5eve/a = moksham seveta, let a man

cultivate freedom.
spiritual
TVT^+^rfw =
Tgt '^ufifmadhuram + hasati = madhuram hasati, he
laughssweetly.
$ 78. Jf^m at the end of a word m pausd, i. e. at the end of a sentence,
is pronounced as m, not as Anusvara. It may be written,however, for the

sake of with
brevity, the simple dot ($8, note),and it is so written out
through-
in this grammar. Ex. *r=r evam, thus, (orT"ft^evam.)
$ 79. Final
^m before ^ h, if^h be immediatelyfollowed by ^n9 *^w,
\y" "^ ^" ^[ v" may be treated as if it were immediately followed by these
letters (Pan.vin. 3, 26; 27). See, however, J 77.
Ex. foiw + Fff= f$ ^W or fofi^ff
kim + A/iw^e = A:z/^hnute or Am hnute,What
does he hide ?

f^ + ^r: = f^; -3: or foh^:^m + hyah " kim hyah or kiy hyah, What
about yesterday\
f^TH + ^Tc^rfif
= f% ^TH^firT
or fch'i^rM^fir
kim + hmalayati= kim hmalayati
or kimhmalayati,What does he move ?

J 80. If ^ Ari is preceded by the preposition

^T sam, an ^[s is inserted,
and Hm changed to Anusvara. (Pan.VT. i, 137; vin. 3, 2"5.)
Ex. TO + cpn: = Tlff: 5am + kritah = samskritah, hallowed.
-J 83. EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 31

$ 81. In WTr^ samrdj, nom. fmi^ samrdt, king, i^m is never changed.
(Pan.vin. 3, 25.)

Visarga and Final ^s and ^r.

$ 82. The phoneticchanges of final sibilants,

which are considered the

most difficult,
may be reduced to a few very simple rules. It should only
be borne in mind :

1. That there are reallyfive sibilants,and not three ; that the signsfor the

gutturaland labial sibilants became obsolete,and were replacedby

the two dots (:)which properlybelong to the Visargaonly,i.e. to the

unmodified sibilant.

2. That all sibilants and Visargaare surd,and that their

proper corresponding
sonant is the ^ r.

" 83. The only sibilant which can be final in pausd is the Visarga. If

Visarga is followed by a surd it

letter, is changed into the sibilant of that
class to which the surd
following letter belongs,providedthere is a sibilant.
It should be observed,however, that the gutturaland labial sibilants are

now written by : h, and that the same sign may also be used instead of any

sibilant,if followed by a sibilant.

Ex. mr. + ^TC = Hif: ^FTC (originally

cHT X ^w:) tatafy
+ kamab = tatah kdmah

(originally
tata%kdmah), hence love.

^jS:
+ ^: = MJ"^":purnah + chandrah = purnaS chandrah, the full

moon.

W = riOw*n taroh + chhdyd = taros chhdyd, the shade of

the tree.

T. -f 375f7f WlriEMfri bhitah

= + talati = bhitashtalati,the frightened
man is disturbed.

HH"^: bhagnah + thakkurah the

bhagnashthakkurah,
T^t: = =

broken idol.

r: -f fftt = "nrrefttnadydfy+ tiram = nadydsttram,the border of the

river.

tnt=TOT: TOTX^ni) nadydh+pdram

(originally mt = nadydk
par am nadyd "f"pdram),
(originally the oppositeshore of a river.

Visargabefore sibilants (Pan.vin. 3, 36):

H 4- f^: =
*prf35TST:
or grr: f^rsj:
suptah + "isuh = supta" tiiuh or

suptah bisuh,the child sleeps.

t or

shoda"ah or bhdgaJj,
shodasah,a sixteenth part.
: or inw: *ni: prathamafy
sargah or prathamah sargah,the first section.
32 EXTERNAL SANDHI. " 84-
Note i "
If Visarga is followed by an initial ?f(ts, it is not changed into dental ^s,
but remains Visarga,as if followed by ^s. (Pan. vm. 3, 35.)
Ex. ^HK + rovPff $T3t W^Pff sathah+tsarati
= = sathah a wicked
tsarati, man cheats.

"FJ + W^J = "K W^J kah-\-tsaruh= kah tsaruh,Which is the handle of the sword ?

Note 2 "
If,on the contrary,Visarga is followed by a sibilant with a surd the
letter,
Visarga is droptin MSS.
frequently (Pan. vm. 3, 36, vart.)

Ex. t^TC + ^ej = ^Tt ^r or ^^T "W devdh-\-stha=.devdh stka or devd stha, you are gods;
(also"^IH?i|devds stha.)
^ftt4-^fCfw ^fct^firflT1[fT"*jj"Jn
harih+ = or sphurati=harih sphuratior hari

sphurati,Hari appears ; (also?Tpr^Wjn haris sphurati.)

Note 3 "
If nouns ending in ^"s or "T^ws,like ^f%thavih or V"JJdhanuh, are followed

by words beginning with off", ^(kh,^p, tf(ph,and are governedby these words, "^shmay
be substituted for final Visarga. *U"jf"iH^Tir
or ^TPtftfs"iFnsarpishpibati
or sarpihpibati,
he drinks ghee ; but ^It ftr"r
flH?jJ j^H^^T
tishthatu sarpih,
piba tvam udakam, let the ghee
stand,drink thou water. (Pan. vui. 3, 44.)

" 84. If final Visargais followed by a sonant letter,

consonant or vowel,
the generalrule is that it be changed into ^r. (See,however, $ 86.) This rule

admits,however, of the followingexceptions

:

1. If the Visarga is preceded by ^rr a, and followed by a sonant letter

(vowelor consonant),
the Visargais dro'pt.

2. If the Visargais precededby ^r a, and followed by any vowel except ^ a,

the Visargais dropt.
3. If the Visarga is preceded by ^r a, and followed by a sonant consonant,
the Visargais dropt,and the ^T a changed to ^fto.
4. If the Visarga is preceded by ^r a, and followed by ^r a, the Visarga is
dropt,^ a changed into ^fto, after which,accordingto "41, the initial

^1 a must be elided. The sign of the elision is s, called Avagraha.

Examples of the generalrule :

= ohfaiji
kavih + ay am = kavirayam, this poet.
: + ^Pri1 ift'^fri
ravih = + udeti = ravir udeti, the sun rises.

n^33fifgauh + gachchhati = gaur the

gachchhati, ox walks.

: + ^nrffT fVuu^NPrf vishnuh

= +jayati = vishnur jayati,Vishnu is victo-
rious.

= ti^lv: pafofi+ bandhah, =pasorbandhah, the binding of the

cattle.

91* "*"SI* =
oltl*
muhuh + muhuh = muhurmuhuh, gradually.
^TRJ 4- ^Tfw =
^T^frrff
vdyuh,+ vdti =
vayur vdti,the wind blows.

%f^fTT "isuh + hasati = sisur hasati,the child laughs.

:= fVf"rf:
ni h + dhanah = nirdhanah, without wealth.

5: + THfr: =
JiuTPri:
duh + nitih = durnttih,of bad manners.

+ ftr: vffffiffiljyotifr
aiftflT: instrum.
+ bhih =jyotirbhify,
= plur.
34 EXTERNAL SANDHI. $ 86-

follows all the rules the Visarga except

affecting the rules " 84.
exceptional
2, 3, 4 ; i.e. if preceded by w a, and followed by any sonant vowel
letter,
or consonant, the "tr is retained.

Ex. + ^rfa
"jrf: = g"Rftr
punah + api =punarapi, even again,
n -f ^T= TnOtSprdtah
+ eva =prdtareva, very early.
^ = "TfT^ bhrdtah + dehi = bhrdtar dehi,Brother, give!

$ 86. No Tcr can ever be followed by another ^ r (Pan.vin. 3, 14). Hence

final Visarga,whether etymologicaUy^ s or
^ r, if followed by initial ^ r,

and by " 84 changed

therefore to ^r, is dropt, and its preceding vowel
lengthened. (Pan.vi. 3, 1 1 1 .)
Ex. "fag:
+ UlTH =
f^"Wri vidhuh + rdjate = vidhd rajate, the moon shines.

"Tlf: + T^f = *m TT^ bhrdtah + raksha "

bhrdtd raksha, Brother,protect!

5"T:+ tfaft *pTTft^punah = + rogi=pund rogi,ih1 again.

These are the generalrules on the Sandhi of final Visarga,^ s and
^ r.

The followingrules refer to a few exceptional

cases.

$ 87. The two pronouns *c: safy and ^m eshah, this,become *f sa and

^TET esha before consonants and vowels, except before short ^r a and at the

end of a sentence. (Pan.vi. i, 132.)

Ex. *: + ^ifff = *C ^Tflfsafy+ daddti = sa daddti,he gives.
^r: ^5: = ^[ ^5: sah indraft = sa indrah, this Indra. The two vowels

are not liable to Sandhi.

But TO + "JW^fT = ^sn^rr safy+ abhavat "

50 'bhavat,he was.

TO
JJIT: mritah sah} he is dead.

Sometimes Sandhi takes for

place,particularly the sake of the metre

Thus *c ^ sa esha becomes ffasaisha,he, this

occasionally person.
sa indrah appears as ^hj:
sendrafy. (Pan. vi. i, 134.)
The pronoun ^q: syah,he, follows the same rule in poetry. (Pan
optionally

$ 88. Ht: bhoh, an vocative

irregular thou, drops its Visarga
of
vc%i(bhavat,
before all vowels and all sonant consonants. (Pan.vui. 3, 22.)
Ex. H^: 4- ^TR = Ht f$n"Tbhoh + Udna = bho Udna, Oh lord!

*Tfc+ ^Ti: = Ht ^i: bhoh + devdfr = bho devdh, Oh gods !

The same appliesto the H*ft:bhagoh
interjections and ^nft: aghoh, really
irregular
vocatives of God,
v(TFR(bhagavat, and sinner.
^SWRJ^aghavat,
$ 89. Numerous which
exceptions, are best learnt from the dictionary
occur in compound and derivative words. A few of the more importanl
may here be mentioned.
-jj89. EXTERNAL SANDHI. 35

I. Nouns in ^is, ^^
^Bft^as, us, forming the first
part of a Compound.

1. Before derivatives of tfkri,to do (e.g.IRkara, ITT kdra),before derivatives ofW(kam,

to desire (e.g. "aRTTTkdnta, WTT kdma), before WH karhsa,goblet,^"?kumbha, jar,
counter, board,
TfT"pdtra,vessel,gi^iiJttt^, muFfkarnt,
ear, the final Visargaof bases
in "W^a5 is changedto ^s. (Pan.VIH. 3, 46.)
Ex. ^Rt 4- oRI ^M*"O 6reyah+karah = = sreyaskarah,
making happy.
^T^fJ 4- "WS = ^n^T^iC ahah-\-karah= ahaskaraht sun.
^Hi: -\- ^W = *tM*"jiH:
ayah+kumbhah = aya8kumbhah, iron-pot.
There several words of the kind which best learnt from the
are same " are
dictionary
in _

which the Visarga is changed into dental sibilant. (Pan. vm. 3, 47.)
Ex. ^nn 4~ ^J =
vnitMtj adhah+padam " adhaspadam, below the foot.

divah+patih = lord of heaven.

divaspatih,
J H- ^rt = qi'qt^nJ vdchah+patih = lord of speech.
vdchaspatih,
Hi: + "an::= *TCRT. bhdh+karah = bhdskarah,sun, "c.

2. Nouns in ^"s and "^(us,such as ^f^lhavih, V^t dhanuh, "c.,before words beginning
with ^Ar,?^ kh, ^p, and t$ph, always take ^sh. (Pan.vm. 3, 45.)

Ex. ?fr4t + TT"T ^ ^TiM'mT sarpih-\-pdnam=^sarpishpdnam,

ghee-drinking.
WJJ! + cRTHt = dyuh+kdmah
^TTJKRTlTt = dyushkdmah1 fond of life.

Note ^TTJ^JWibhrdtushputrah,
nephew, is used instead of
"

J^I bhrdtuh putrah,the

WTjJJ
son of the brother.

II. Words in ^is, T^us,

^SH^as, treated as Prepositions.

1. The words rHTt namah, purah, ftRttirak,

"JTJ if compounded prepositionally
with ifkri,

change Visarga into ^Ts. (Pan.vm. 3, 40.)

Ex. "?Wt + "KRt = n"i"5hiO namah-\-kdrah = namaskdrah, adoration; (but "W ^HT
namah kritvd,having performed adoration.)
purah+kritya=puraskritya, having preferred.
= frR*?hlOtirah-\-kdri= despising. In f?TTJ
tiraskdri, tirah the change
is considered optional.(Pan.vm. 3, 42.)

2. The words f^f

\ nih,Jtduh,"^f^t
vahih, ^iPMJ a"z^,Tttglprddufi,
^TJtchatuh, if compounded
with words beginning with cF Ar,
^ fcA,
"T p or TRpA, take ^sh instead of final Visarga.

(Pan. vm. 3, 41.)

Ex. f^TJ+ oFRt = ftT^fiTTt
nih+kdmah = nishkdmah, loveless.
f%t + "^Rc^I= P^Ufcc^:
nih+phalah = fruitless.
nishphalah,
t + ^IIT" ^if"i"*fljiii
dvih+kritam = dvishkritam,made manifest.

=
J^fffduh+kritam = dushkritam, badlydone, criminal.

chatuh+konam-=chatushkonam, square.

Taddhita Suffixes.
III. Nouns in ^is, T^us, beforecertain
^PR[as,
r. Before the Taddhita suffixes ^mat, 'Zitvat, f^Ttnn,and ^Jra/a, the final ^s appears

as ^5 or ^sh (" icx").

Ex. W*T: 4- f^ = H "f Pf*f
"^tejah+vin= with splendour.
tejasvin,
: 4- TrT= a*ft
Pel + mat =jyotishmat,with light.
"" AJyotih

t 4- W(9 = "="H"M rajafr+vala

= a buffalo.
rajasrala,
F 2
36 EXTEBNAL SANDHI. $ 90 -

2. Before Taddhita suffixes beginningwith \t, the ^s, preceded by ^i or ^w, is changed
into \sh, after which the 7^t becomes 7 t .

Ex. vtpqt+ ?t= viPqgarcMh-\-tvam = archishtvam,brightness.

^Wt + TnT =
^IJBflchatuh-\-tayam=chatushtayam,the aggregate of four.

3. Before the Taddhita suffixes tTT^f

pdsa, "K^T kalpa, cfika, and in composition with the

verb "^i**(^nkdmyati, in ^T^ nouns as retain their final ^ s, while nouns in ^^is and

~^^us change it into \sh (" 100). (Pan.vm. 3, 39.)

Ex. TT*n + ^Tni? = TfMW i ^r payah+pd"am =payaspdsam, bad milk.

JTOi + cR^I= H*|t*h"34 p ay ah -\-

k alpam = pay ask alpam j
a little milk.

K + "K = yasah+kah
M^lt^ti*. = yasaskah,glorious.
n + cni^Pn = 1^T*5hi*"|f7f
yasah+kdmyati=:yasaskdmyati, he is ambitious.

n + ^n^T= (M""" I ^r sarpih+pdsam

tf bad ghee.
sarpishpdsam, =

l+ ^R^T = tiPM^snttH sarpik+kalpam sarpishkalpam,a little ghee. =

V"J*+ "RJ = dhanuh+kah

^^"x=n; dhanushkah,belonging to the bow. =

V"J*+ "*!*"" fn fn dhanuh+kdmyati=dhanushkdmyati,he

V"Jl*am*'H = desires a bow.

$ 90. Nouns ending in radical *.r ("85) retain the ^r before the g su of

and
the loc. plur., in compositionbefore nouns even though beginningwith
surds.

Ex. 3T^ + *J = ^T" vdr + su = vdrshu,in the waters.

+ ilftf: llMfff:
fh^: =girpatih, lord
gir -\-patih = of speech.
In compounds,however, like inQfii:girpatih,
the optional
use of Visargais sanc-
tioned

(Pan.vm. 3, 70, vart.),

and we meet with Jftrprfjn
gihpatih,vttjfTT:
dhuh-

patih, and ^fir:dhurpatifr;^fqfin svahpatih and ^Rfin svarpatih,lord of

heaven ; ^:"qfir:
ahahpatifyand ^qfrf: aharpatih,lord of the day.
v"^". ahar, the Pada base of ^I^"^ahan, day,is further irregular,
because its final """
r is

treated likens before the Pada-terminations,

and in composition before words beginning
with ^": hence ^IffJ + f*Tt
= vt^lfatahah-\-bhih "
ahobhih ; ^T^J + ^ =
^n?^J ahah+su =

ahahsu; ^?^t + -CTsft= 4l^ilc|t

ahah+rdtrah = ahordtrah, day and night. (Pan. vm. 2,

68, vart.)

$ 91. ^chh at the beginning of a word, after a final short vowel, and

after the particles

^TT d and ITT md, is changed to ^55 chchh.

Ex. 1T^ + "5THT = TPf ^3TRT tava + chhdyd = tava chchhdyd,thy shade.

*H + f^lTN=
*n fsa^H ma + chhidat "
md chchhidat, let him not cut.

^T + "gT^TflTm =
Wl^ Tn a + chhddayati= dchchhddayati,he covers.

After any other long vowels, this change is optional.

or badarichhdydor badarichchhdyd,shade
cj^O'Q"mi of Badaris,

In the body of a word, the change of t$ chh into ^5 chchh is necessary

both after long and short vowels.

Ex. S^arfir
ichchhati,he wishes, fra: mlechchhafy,a barbarian. (Pan.vi.
i, 73-7^.)
_$ 93.
EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 37

f 92.
Initial $T 6, not followed by a
hard consonant, may
be changed

into chh, if the final letter of the preceding word is a

hard consonant
*5 or

(for ^rc). (Pan. vm. 4, 63.)

Ex. + vdk + Mam vdktatam vdkchhatam,

^T^ 5ITT = TTOfnr or TO"[W "
or a

hundred speeches.

i|(Xfll^ fft or nfldl"("^ parivrdf + "ete = parivrd( tete

or parivrdf chhete, the beggar lies down.

H^^r^3 or H^^^"s mahat + 6aka(am =

mahach fakatam

or
mahach chhakafam, a great car.

rf-^t^H ^a/ + blokena

"
tachchhlokena, by that verse.

VT3R+ dhdvan + sasafy dhdvan sasafy

^nn = VN^f^K or VN^ft^lt = or

dhdvan chhasah, a running hare.

+ babdah babdah apchhabdah,

^HJ + $1^! = ^u^|""": or ^^"^; ap = ap or

the sound of water.

$ If stand the end of syllable which

93. ^ /i, i{gh, ^dh, \^dh, or v^bh at a

with and lose their aspiration final

begins IT^, ^"/, ^ d, or ^", as or

changed into
otherwise, the initial consonants
T^, ^c?, ^ c?, or ^" are

Ex. C?M^, milker, becomes dhuk.

^ a "p|r

visvagudh, all attracting, becomes

wise, becomes
,
 EXTERNAL SANDHI. I 94-

"

( 33

.'1 33

*
"3 O
Sfe;

I** " S

2 s ll '" 0

"i ,0
s 0

-6 1

"*"*
^S
U| 0

3'

3*3.

4 "I
33

3'
33 "i

Eh.s" 1R
*l
41 *
" 94- EXTERNAL 8ANDHI.

"

"" I II
~ V

.2 "
"2 "%

I?

(fT
S3
.f
I
r tr If
.'*'
nr fr
r IF S
"

? ": .2

II
- -2

00 "T

ir* I* I*
*" K" 41
11?
17 r jj
vo p" r P^P

"3. I
S 5

K*
CO If
If

15 g " is
lu-

11 S} I i
-2 2
"

^ "
z
^
03
x "
40 EXTERNAL SANDHI. I 94-

|u/ tov
ir ** tr /w

fl^
a*
IB-
:a ra
" "

ra ra

|rr fir
IT

1C 1C
"IS e MS

17

e *"
,"* PS
tr lr

[1
ar Jr

IB- Ur
5
"r

I
IS5

x "

t-

i r"C3 ^3
 CHANGE OF INTO $97-

f 97. The
r^w of
"JWM, the sign of the Su conjugation,and the ^n of

iftnd,the sign of the Kri conjugation,

are not changed into H{n in the two

verbs lf{tnpand Tg*^kshubh (Pan.vin. 4, 39). Hence

TTTTfrfTT kshubhndti,he
he pleases*. TJtfrfiT
tripnoti, shakes.

But JNuflfk he hears.

brinoti, Tf^trnfrf
pushndti,he nourishes.
kshubhdna, imper.shake.

Table showing the Changes of^n into wn.

. " 98. The changes here explainedof tTw in the middle of simplewords,
(whetherit belongsto a suffix or a termination,)
are the most importantto
is likewise liable to it
remember. But tT n be changed into TQ^n when
occurs in the second part of a compound the first part of which contains

one of the letters ^ri} ^rt, \sh, and after

particularly certain
^r, or

prepositions.Here, however, the rules are much more uncertain,and we

must depend on the dictionaryrather than on the grammar for the right
employment of the dental or lingualnasals. The followingrules are the

most important:
i. The change of ^n into T^n does not take place unless the two members

of the compound are combined so as to a singleconception.

express
Hence "^nff bdrdhri, a leathern thong,+ rpa nasa, nose, gives ^nffaran
bdrdhrinasah,
if it is the name of a certain animal ; accordingto Wilson,
of a goat with long ears ; accordingto others,of a rhinoceros,or a bird.

(Unadi-Sutras,
ed. Aufrecht,s. v. Pan. w^ charman,
vin. 4, 3.) But

leather,
+ HlfUcM ndsikd,nose, gives^HHlf"^: charmandsikah, if it means
havinga leathern nose. An importantexceptionis ^%rnw"T sarvandman,

a technical term for pronouns, (^% sarva being the list,)

first in their

which Panini himself employs with the dental ^n only. (Pan.i. i, 27.)
Other proper names not following rule,are
the general

* In the Veda we find "iTOgf^ Rv.

tripnuhi, n. 16, 6 ; ITW^t Rv.
tripnavah, in. 42, 2,

"
t The Sarasvati says ^RT ^T, that the n is optionallychanged when Trinayanah is
a name. Hence f^tfTTttrinayanahor fi^T'f:trinayanah. "\.^ ^.
-$ 98- CHANGE OF
^n INTO l^n. 43

three-eyed,name of Siva; ig "{{"!:

raghunandanah, name of Rama;
^f'Anj:
svarbhdnuh, name of Rahu, "c.

Words to be remembered :

\l agranih, from
principal,
first, HTJ agra, front,and ?ftn/, to lead.

\lgrdmanih,head borough, from ?JTR grama, multitude,and fftn1t

to lead.

H Indra, killer
vritraghnah, of Vritra ; but ^nptfvritrahanam, ace. of

-itrahan. (Pan.vm. 4, 12 ; 22.)

or Pj|Puu"{l mountain-stream.
girinadior girinadi,
jrpardhnam, afternoon,from TTTT para, over, and ^RfT ahan, day ; but
^%T^o: sarvdhnafy,the whole day, from *r% sarva, all,and W^ ahan,
day ; and the same whenever the firstword ends in *R a. (Pan.vm.4, 7.)
There are minute distinctions,
according to which, for instance, "/Uni"i
kshirapdnamif it means the drinkingof milk, or a vessel for drinking
milk, ojw: K/knn: kamsah kshirapdnah,
may be pronounced with dental

or lingual
n (^ n or T^rc)
; but if it is the name of a tribe who live on milk,
it must be pronounced HfkMUli:kshirapdnah,milk-drinking.(Pan.vm.
4, 9 and 10.) In the same manner "*vNl^iU darbhavdhanam, a hay-
cart, is speltwith lingual^n; while in ordinarycompounds, such as

$"m^"i indravdhanam, vehicle belonging to Indra, the dental

a
t^n
remains unchanged. (Pan.viu. 4, 8.)
2. In a compound consisting
of more than two words the "T n of any one

word can only be affected by the word immediatelypreceding.Hence

mtHTUtll mdsha-vdpena .
bv sowing: beans : but ^r^'W^ri^mdsha-kumbha-
"""'"/
^

vdpena, by sowing from a bean-jar.(Pan.viu. 4, 38.)

3. In a compound the change of ^n into TFT n does not take placeif the first

word ends in IT g.
Ex. ^cjr + W*r4 =
^'I4H rik + ayanam = rigayanam.
Some grammarians restrict this to proper names. (Pan.vm. 4, 3, 5.)
Or if it ends in \sh, and the next is formed by a primary suffix \vith "^n.
Ex. fa: + in"T "
PH^MH nih -\-pdnarn nishpdnam. =

T^t + MNH =
T^HTR"T yojuh -\-pdvanam = yajushpdvanam. (Pan.vm.
4, 35-)
4. In compounds the "^w of nouns endingin tf w, and the *T n of case-termina-
tions,
if followed by a vowel, are always liable to change.
pflP^Trfi*"T
vrihivdpin,
rice-sowing,may * '
form the genitivedlP^lPmn: IT/-
\ V

hivdpinah; but also WlP^mPm: vrihivdpinah.

or '^f^ninf'Tvrihivopdni
or vrihivapdni,nom. plur.neut.
or "at^iiR trihivdpena
or instrum. sing,
vrihivdpena,
o 2
 44 CHANGE OF
^ n INTO TO n " 98.

Likewise feminines such as 'atf^mPmifl'

or cflngmPijffl
vrihivdpini
or vrihivdpim.
(Kas'.-Vritti
vin. 4, n.)
Note " The "T n of secondarysuffixes,attached to the end of compounds, is,under the

general conditions,always changed to

TOxw. Thus "3".Mt kharapah (i.e.donkey-keeper)
becomes khdrapdyanah,the
"sfi"^it*i"ut descendant of Kharapa. TTrWT'fi'TOrt
mdtribhoginah,
fit to be possessedby a mother, from TTtT mdtri,mother, and vffrTC
bhogah,enjoyment,with
the suffix ^tna (samdsdnta),
adjectival is always speltwith TfT^n. (See also " 98.6.) Again,
while 'I'taf'i'fl
gargabhagini,the sister of Garga, always retains its dental IT n, being an

ordinarycompound, TWff^ gargabhagintwould have the lingual*JTw,if it was derived

from T^HTt gargabhagah,the share of Garga, with the adjectival

suffix
^r^in, fern. ^"ft
ini,

enjoyingthe share of Garga. Words which after they have been compounded take a new

suffix are treated in fact like singlewords (samdnapada), and therefore follow the general
rule of " 96. (Pan. vin. 4, 3. Kas'.-Vrittivm. 4, u, vart.)

5. If the second part of the compound is monosyllabic,

then the change of

a final ^ n followed by a terminational vowel, or of a terminational ^ n,

is obligatory.(Pan.vin. 4, 12.)
Ex. "^1^ vritrahan, Vritra-killer ; gen. 4d^"u: vritrahanah ; but ^Nhjjft
dirghdhni. (Pan.vin. 4, 7.)
: surdpah, drinkingsura ; nom. plur.neut. ^"imf\!r
surdpdni.
: ksMrapah, drinkingmilk ; instrum. sing.^li.ij'Jii
kshirapena.
6. If the second part of a compound contains a the change is obliga-
guttural, tory,
even though the second part be not monosyllabic.(Pan.vin. 4, 1 3.)
Ex. harikdmah, loving Hari
^fccRTH: ; instrum. sing.^fxcfiT^
harikdmena;
but agragdmini. (Pan.vin.
^njirrfafrr 3, 92.)
sushkagomayena,instrum. sing,of 3rE5Rjfta*r
sushkagomaya;
,
dry, TffcR gomaya, dung.)
7. Likewise after prepositionswhich contain an T r, the "T n of primary
affixes,such as ^R ana, ^rfTfani, ^nft^r aniya, ^T in, Tf na (ifpreceded
certain restric-
tions.
by a vowel),and mftmdna, is changed to
TT^W, but under
(Pan.vin. 4, 29.)
Ex. iHM"!Jpravapanam ; HH|Tii
pramdnam ; urmHW prdpyamdnam.
While in these cases the change is it
pronounced obligatory, is said to be

optionalafter causative verbs (Pan.vin. 4, 30),and after verbs ning

begin-
and ending in consonants with any vowel but ^T a (Pan.vin.
4, 31);hence M^IIMHf and Otfpraydpanam and praydpanam ; THfitTO or "7f

prakopanam or prakopanam. Again, after verbs beginning in a vowel

(not ^T a) and strengtheningtheir bases by nasalization,the change

is necessary ; it is forbidden in other verbs, not beginningwith vowels,
though they requirenasalization : hence U -f ^r^ = TPTW pra H- inganam =

prenganam ; but H + ^iiR = U"if*r?T

pra + kampanam = prakampanam.
 CHANGE OF 1" INTO'w. 45

Lastly,there are several roots which defyall these rules,viz.

hence
^pd, Wfton, T^c/am, *n\pytiyt T"T vep : m"( prabhdnam "c.,
never 1THTCT prabhdnam ; 1T%*R pravepanam, never lOTTO pravepanam.

8. After containingan
prepositions such as wwraw/ar, f^wtr,qn/wa,
^r,
and
"qftjoflri, IT /?ra, and after jt */Mr,the change of ^ n into
w^n takes
place:
i. In most roots beginningwith t^n. (Pan.vin. 4, 14.)
IT -f-HHfri= HUJHfrt
/"ra + namati =pranamatit he bows.

-qtr + j^fri M^KM^fri

= j"ard+ nudati = pardnudati,he pushes away.
w: -f "l^flT "iri^Mfrt
= antah -f nayati = antarnayati^he leads in.

jj + "rnrcK = HIIIIM^: ^?ra + ndyakah =prandyaka/i,a leader.

The roots which are liable to this change of their initial *^ n are entered in

the Dhatupatha, the list of roots of native grammarians,as beginning

with should find the root entered
Jtt^n. Thus we "^nam as
qp^nam,
simply in order thus to indicate its liability
to change.
a. In a few roots this change is optionalif they are followed by Krit affixes,
viz. (Pan.vm. 4, 33.)
QllfHnis,to kiss ; nfiuftiffttj
or uf"jfa ri*4pranimsitavyam or pranimsitavyam.
frSTWniksh, to kiss ; UUllttJlli
or yfHH|^i
pranikshanam or pranikshanam.
ftjf^
nid, to blame ; nftii^H
or TTPH^Hpranindanam or pranindanam.

3. In a few roots the initial ^ n resists all change,and these roots are entered

in the Dhatupatha as beginningwith tT ny viz. (Pan.vi. I, 65, vart.)

nrit,to dance. ?TTT ndt, to faU down, (Chur*.)
nand, to rejoice. ndth, to ask.

nardy to howl. nddh, to beg.

lead.
nakk, to destroy. f|nri,to
Ex. iircHHHparinartanam ; Mfc"i"Hparinandanani.
only when its 31 is
4. The root ffSl^naS,
to destroy,
changes *T n into ?ffw "

not changed to t^sh.IT -f Tr^nr Tmpttpra + na"yate=pranasyate ; but =

IT + TO TFW.pra
= (Pan.vm. 4, 36.)
-f nashtah =pranashtah,destroyed.

if the is not
5. In the root ^rfcm, to breathe, the "T/i is changed to i^n Tr

separatedfrom the than letter. Thus

tjn by more one IT 4-

mftllfrf
pra + aniti = prdniti, he breathes ; but xrft4- ^fnfH

part + aniti = paryaniti (Patanjali).

The reduplicatedaorist forms

M I Hllill
^prdninat; the desiderative with f^jpard is wftrftr^fifpardni-

nishati. (Pan.vm. 4, 19, 21.)

*
It is not class,and hence written with
"T^na",to dance, but "17 nert of the Chur a

long a. Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 41, note.

4:6 CHANGE OF
^ ft INTO TST^. " 99-

6. In the ^han, to kill,the ^n is changed except where "^hhas

root to

be changed to T^gh.(Pan.vin. 4, 22.) Thus IT + ?rsrff TnrTRTH pra "

+

hanyate = prahanyate, he is struck down ; -eici^JLHd1

antarhanyate
(Pan.vin. 4, 24); but TT -f "jHlT SHlftf
pra= + ghnanti=praghnanti, they
kill. Also H^Otf prahananam, killing.
The change is optionalagainwhere f^n is followed by *rw or ^v. (Pan.
vin. 4, 23.) Thus Tnrfar or TJ^ftwprahanmi or prahanmi ; M^*4! or

U^Fi prahanvah or prahativah.

of fjWM of the Su and of tfT raa of the Kri conjugationis changed
7. The tT w

to i^n in the verbs f^ hi,to send, and ?ftm", to destroy.(Pan.vm. 4, 15.)

Ex. prahinvanti; IFfiwfTT
TT^rq^fw praminanti.
in the imperative is changeable.(Pan.
8. The T^raof the termination ^fif^dni
vin. 4, 1 6.) Thus IT + *^Tftf TW^lftr pra + bhavdni "prabhavdni. =

9. The *T n of the prepositionfa rci,if preceded by u pra, ifopari,"c.,

is changed into
T^n before the verbs (Pan.vm. 4, 17) i\^gad9
to speak,

to go, the verbs

to fall,Tf^pad,
?,to shout, tfKjpat, called ^ghu,

*T^me, to change, ^ so, to destroy,^ A"w, to

*
ma, to measure,

kill,ITT ya, to go, ^T vd, to blow, "^T drd, to flee or to sleep,wr psd, to
eat, "^vap, to sow or to weave, ^vah, to bear, yp^sam, to be tranquil
fa cAi, to collect,fij^
(c?w), dih, to anoint.

The same change takes place even when the augment intervenes.

(Pan.vin. 4, 17, vart.)

pranyagadat
ilimJI^TT ; wm"\"(i{pranyanadat.
" 99. In all other verbs except those which follow n^ gad9 the change of

f"Tni after if pra, iffcpari,

"c., is optional.
TTf^q^ffrf
or Mriiimfripranipachati or pranipachati.

Except again in verbs beginning with cR ka or ^ kha, ending in ^

or sh

(Pan.vin. 4, 1 8),in which the *T n of fa ni remains unchanged.

pranikhddati; 'wfHfi(HP"pranipinashti.
dflT pranikaroti; irf'f^T^'fif

* Where it seemed likelyto be useful, the Sanskrit roots have been given with their

diacriticalletters (anubandhas),but only in their Devanagari form. Panini in enumerating

the roots which change f^ni after TKpra, "Oftpari, See.,into ftff
ni, mentions HTw?a, but this,
according to the commentaries, includes two roots,the root m"md(n}, which forms T"i*i1n

mimtte,he measures, and the root ^^me(n),

which forms HTfifmayate, he changes. Where
in this grammar the transcribed form of a root differs from its Devanagari original,
the

additional letters may always be looked as diacritical marks employed by native

upon

grammarians. Sometimes the class to which certain verbs belong has been indicated by
adding the first verb of that class in brackets. Thus sam (div)means sdmyati,or sam

conjugated like div, and not sdmayate.

-$ 100. CHANGE OP ^8 INTO ^th. 47

Change O/T^S into

J 100. A dental ^* of
(chiefly suffixes and terminations*),
if preceded

by any vowel except v, ^Tf a, or by ^ A:, t r, ^ /, is always changed

into the linguali^sh,provided it be followed by a vowel, or by i^/,^ th,
likewise by certain Taddhita suffixes,
T|Ara,VW kalpa,
^n9 ^tn} i^y,or ^v ;

in^T pd6a, "c.

If an inserted Anusvaraf or the Visarga or ^sh intervenes between the

vowel and the ^s, the change into "^sh takes placenevertheless.
Ex. *rfxN^
sarpis,inflectional base; ?rfchsarpih, nom. sing.neut. clarified
butter ; instrum. *ff"^Tsarpishd; nom. plur.Kqffq sarpimshi (here
the Anusvara ; loc. plur. *rf":i{
intervenes) sarpihshu (here the
Visarga intervenes),
or "P"ujsarpishshu(herethe \sh intervenes).
vdkshu, loc. plur.of speech.
"ZF^vdch,
+ ^ =
*cf$T*J
sarvafak + su = sarvasakshu, omnipotent.

F)+ ^ = chitralikh (k)+

"fa^rfo'BJ su = chitralikshu,painter.

jfiggirshu,loc. plur.of frf^

gir, speech.
+ *J=
"F*T^ kamal + su = kamalshu, naming the goddess Lakshmi.
is
dhrokshyati,fut. ^ druh, to hate ; (here ^ h
of changed to

cfik, and the thrown

aspiration on the initial ^ d.)

pokshyati, fut. of "^push, to nourish; (here ^s/i is changed

into
^ k.)
: + "K = '^f^Mi: sarpih -f kah = sarpishkah ; adj. formed by 9 ka,
having clarified butter.

q; + *rfqro sarpih + tarafy sarpishtarah (here the / of

TO = = ; ^
1T^: tarah is changed into 3^, as in $ 89, III. 2.) If the penultimate
vowel be long, no change takes place; irtaTO gistard. (Pan. vin.
3. I01-)
h H- Trl =
frffar^sarpih
+ mat = sarpishmat, having clarified butter.

* The ^5 must not be a radical ^s; hence *jftnsupisau,because the ^* belongs to

the root f*PR(pis.
(Pan.vin. 3, 59.) Yet VHlfyM:dsishah,from root JIT^Afc. l"he rules

do not apply to final ^s; hence -flfHWd agnis tatra. (Pan. vin. 3, 55.)
t The Anusvara must be what Sanskrit grammarians call nuro, it must not represent
Pada
a radical nasal; hence, even if we write 'Qftpumsu,loc. plur. of ip^tim*, man,

and
base ig^jwm,it does not become ^pumshu. (Pan. vin. 3, 58.) According to Bopp

other who do not limit the Anusvara to the inserted Anusvara,

European grammarians,
we should have to write either ^pumshu,or, if we wish to preserve the ^s, TJ^Tjmnjii.
According to Panini, however, TfjJ
purhsu is the right form. The Sarasvati prescribes
48 CHANGE OF
^s INTO ^ sh. " IOI-

Table showing the Changes of ^ into sh.

s
^

" 101. The same rule produces the change of ^ s into ^ sh in roots

beginning with 1(s, if reduplicated, provided the vowel of the reduplicated

is not ^sr,^TTa:
syllable Ex. ^r^"vap, to sleep; Redupl.Perf. *J"TR sushvdpa,

I have sidh, Des.

slept, ftr^ ftrfMrHfrtsishitsati. This rule is liable to

exceptions.
j 102. Again, many roots beginning with l^s change it into ^sh after

requiringsuch
prepositions a change, viz. ^ifffati, over, ^rg anu9 after,
^rfa api, upon, ^rfa abhi,towards, "fani, in, far mr, out, Tfftjoari,round,
Ufa prati, towards, ft vi, away : Ex. ^rf* + ^rfw = -3ifa"ifrf
abhi + stauti =

he praises. The
abhishtauti, same change takes placeeven after the augment

has been added, in which the is reallypreceded by ^r

case
^ s an a :

Ex. abhyashtautthe praised. Some verbs,after these prepositions,

^HTCCTf^
the
keep "^sh in the reduplicatedperfect
: Ex. ftr^sich, to sprinkle;
^srfafttefw abhishinchati,he sprinkles
; ^rfafa^fa abhishishecha, he has

sprinkled. In the intensive ftr^ sich does, not follow this rule ; hence

^Tfirofaxqif
abhisesichyate(Pan.vin. 3, 112); but in the desiderative ^ s is

changed, ^r5rftfoT5ffr
abhishishikshati. Many other cases must be learnt

from the dictionary

or from Panini.

" 103. In order to give an idea of the minuteness of the rules as collected by native

grammarians, and of the complicated manner in which these rules are laid down, the lowing
fol-

extracts from Panini have been subjoined,though they by no means exhaust the

subject according to the views of native grammarians. It need hardlybe added that

beginnersshould not attempt to burden their memory with these rules,though a glance
at them may be useful by giving them an idea of the intricacies of Sanskrit grammar.
Native grammarians enumerate all verbs
monosyllabic beginning with ^ s, and followed

by a vowel or by a dental consonant, (likewisefW* smi, to smile, ft?^svid,to sweat,

svad, to taste,^s"^svafij,
"*f"j to embrace, ^T^svap, to sleep,)
as if beginning with "^ sh.

Thus they write fa(skidh,shtM, fa? shmi.ST (Pan. vi. i, 64.)

This is not done with to let off,^c["^s"r", W^stri,
W^mp, to go, ^p^m)', to cover, to

cover, w styai,to sound, ^c^sefc,

to go, V sri,to go, in order to show that their initial

^s is not liable to be changed into t(sh under circumstances.

any

They then give the general rule that this initial is to be changed inters,in all
^sh
these verbs, except fe\shthiv,
to spit,and ""{*%sJivashk,to go, (and according to some

in w shtyai,Sar.,)unless where ^sh is enjoineda second time.

50 CHANGE OF INTO \sh. ." 104-
^S

5. After the prepositions

^HJ anu, fa vi,*jftpari,^srfaabhi, f"Tm',
"f"^syand
may tak

except when appliedto living

beings, (vm. 3, 72.)
6. After the prep, fa vi, ta^^.
skand
may take ^sA,though not in the in
past participle
Tf ta (vm. 3, 73),but after the prep, "qfic
pari,throughout, even in the past participle
(vm. 3, 74). ^fV^-sctor s (X"s"q
t parishkannah or pariskannah.

7. After the prep. f*f^wz",

f"Tw",
fefvi,
the verbs ^!^sphur and t*yco sphul may take ^sh.
(vm. 3, 76.)
8. After the prep, f^vi,^^skambh
must always take ^sh. (vm. 3, 77.)
9. The verb ^[ as, after dropping its initialvowel, takes "^sh after prepositionswhich
cause such
TK^prddur,if the ^sh is followed by \y
a change, and after vowel or a

(vm. 3, 87). ^XfazfTi^abhishydt. W^?E(l^prdduhshydt. injt^fir prdduhshanti.

10. The verb CT{st?op,when changed to ^^*"p, takes \sh, after *JSM, f% m",f"T^mY,"j^c?w
(vm. 3, 88). *[$*:sushuptah. JfJW*. duhshuptah.
Exceptional
cases, where ^s is used, and not \sh:
11. The verb fa*{sich,
followed by the intensive affix (vm. 3, 112). ^afn^ f" ^"rf abhisesi-

cJiyate.
12. The verb ftlV sidh, signifying
to go (vm. 3, 113). ^lV*ivfn parisedhati.
13. The verb ^ sah, if changed to ^iffc?
sodh (vm. 3, 1 15). yP"4ft'^
parisodhum.
14. The verbs W^stambh, f^T^siv,
^ sah, in the aorist (vm.
reduplicated 3, 116).

15. The verb "Qsu,followed by the affixes of the ist future, the conditional,or the desidera-

tive (vm. 3, 117). ^fHtftucPri abhisoshyati. "KfH^JfJt abhisusuh.

16. The verbs ^ sad, "^T^svanj,

in the perfect(vm.
reduplicated 3, 118). ^(WmiT^
abhishasdda. 'STPmifl'T abhishasvaje.

17. The verb if precededby

TR^sad,optionally, the augment (vm. 3, 119). "HtO^ or

tmaftt^nyashidat
nyasidat. or

" 104. There are many compounds in which the initial^s of the second word is changed
to if the
TB(sh, firstword ends in a vowel (excepta). Ex. from jfvyudhi,
gfa^^yudhishthira,
in battle,and f^f^sthira,
firm; ^" sushthu,well ; g^dushthu,ill;^^"TTsushamd, beautiful,
f"1Ht vishamah, difficult,
from ^RTt samah, even ; fag*T
trishtubh, a metre ; vcfiTHi"iT
agni-
shomau, Agni and Soma ; *iin"mi mother's
mdtrishvasri, sister ; ft n "i father's
^pitrishvasri,
sister; TTVfft
goshthah, cow-stable ; ^TP'"i8l*iJ
agnishtomah, a sacrifice ; 3"4lfn"Wjyoti-
shtomah, a sacrifice,
(here the final
?^s of Tt^^'^jyotis
is dropt.) In
g"itn^ turdsdh,a
name of Indra, and similar compounds, ^s is changed to ^sh whenever ^ h becomes T t;

nom. '^\m^turdshdt
j ace. ^l^IT^turdsdham. (Pan. vm. 3, 56.)

Change of Dental V dh into Lingual "? dh.

" 105. The ^dh of the second pers. plur.Atm. is changed to ^ dh in the reduplicated
the aorist,and
perfect, in "^ftsST
sMdhvam of the benedictive,providedthe V dh, or the ^ftshi

of ^ftt4shidhvam, follows immediatelyan inflective root ending in any vowel but V, ^TT a.

(Pan. vm. 3, 78.)

Ex. ^ kri; Perf. ^f|"chakridhve.
^ cAyw ; Aor. vc"*J^6
achyodhvam.
Bened. ^ft
Ml p loshidhvam .
-$ 107- BULBS OP INTERNAL 8ANDHI. 51

But flSp^foAtp; **4 akshibdhvam.

Aor. V f\Sf

Bened.
Tf*{yqj; IIUjll^
yakshidhvam.
If the same terminations are preceded by the intermediate \i, and the \% be preceded by

^ y, ^r, ^ /,^0, ^ h, the change is optional.

Ex. Perf.
"J/tt; "5"5^^luluvidhve
(Jcjfajluluvidhve. or

"5/M; Aor. ^fc5fa*4

alavidhvam ^""fq^alavidhvam. or

"JJM; Bened. f^fqMl*4lavishidhvam rtf^Ml j lavishtdhvam. or

But "6""M ; Aor. ^HTtftW abodhidhvam.

Rules of Internal Sandhi.

J 1 06. The rules

phonetic contained in the precedingparagraphs($32"94)
apply,as has been stated,to the final and initial letters of words (padas),
when brought into immediate contact with each other in a sentence, to the
final and initial letters of words formed into compounds, and to the final

letters of nominal bases before the Pada-terminations,and before certain

secondaryor Taddhita suffixes,beginningwith any consonant except ^y.

There is another class of phoneticrules applicable
to the final letters of

nominal (prdtipadikd)
and verbal bases before
(dhdtu) the other terminations

of declension and before primary

conjugation, or Krit suffixes,and before

secondaryor Taddhita suffixes,beginningwith a vowel or

^y. Some of

these rules are and

general, deserve to be remembered. But in many cases

they either agree with the rules of External Sandhi,or are themselves liable

to such numerous exceptionsthat it is far easier to learn the words or

grammaticalforms themselves, as we do in Greek and Latin, than to try to

master the rules accordingto which they are formed or supposed to be

formed.
The followingare a few of the phonetic rules of what may be called
Internal Sandhi. The student will find it useful to glanceat them, without

endeavouring,however, to impress them on his memory. After he has

learnt that %s dvish, to hate, forms irfor
dveshmi, I hate,^ftfdvekshi,thou
hatest,ifffc he hates,^Z
dveshti, advet,he hated, %fjdviddhi,Hate ! f|T7dvif,

a hater,%^: dvishah, of a hater, fg^4}

dvi(su, among haters, " he will refer

back with advantageto the rules,more or less which

general, regulatethe
will learn his
change of final
^ sh ^ d, "c. ; but
into ^F k, 3 /, he never

declensions conjugationsproperly,if,instead of acquiring first the

an"
paradigms as they are, he endeavours to construct each form by itself,
accordingto the phoneticrules laid down in the paragraphs.
following

i. Final Vowels.

" 107, No hiatus is tolerated in the middle of Sanskrit words. Words such as

n"J"i fd'Hd titaii,

praiiga, fore-yoke, sieve,are isolated exceptions. The hiatus in pounds,
com-

such as going
if"jnpura-etd, in front, HH^fth: which
nama-ukiih,sayingof praise,
H 2
52 RULES OF INTERNAL SANDHI. " 108-

producedby the elision of final before certain vowels, has been treated of under the
is a ^s
head of External Sandhi'.(" 84. 2.)

108. Final ^ and ^TT coalesce with following vowels according to the general
" a a

rules of Sandhi.

+
"if^ ^Tm tuda-\-ami= it^iUituddmi,I beat.
+ ^ tuda+i=ltfi
TJ"" tude, I beat,Atm.

+ 3[dana+*
"JT"T "P^ddne, in the gift.
=

+
t[T"T ^ c?awa-f"= "H%ddne, the two gifts.
If we admit the same set of terminations after bases ending in consonants and in short

^T a, it becomes necessary to lay down some rules requiringfinal ^T a to be dropt before

certain vowels. Thus if *8R^am is put down as the general termination of the ace. sing.,as
in '3F3vdch-am, it is necessary to enjoin the omission of final ^Ta of f$R "va before the

^ am of the ace. sing.,in order to arrive at f$rt sivam. In the same manner, if ^ am is

put down as the termination of the i.p. sing.impf. Par., and U e as that of the i. p. sing.

pres. Atm., we can form regularly^s^ advesh-am and TIT^ dvishe; but we have to lay
down a new rule,accordingto which the final ^T a of ij^tuda is dropt,in order to arrive at

the correct forms ^Tg^atud(a)-am and TJ^

tud(a)e. By followingthe system adopted in this

grammar of giving two sets of terminations, and thus enablingthe student to arrive at the

actual forms of declension and conjugationby a merely mechanical combination of base

and termination, it is possibleto dispensewith a number of these phoneticrules.

Again, in the declension of bases ending in radical ^TT a, certain phonetic rules had to

be laid down, accordingto which the final ^TT d had to be elided before certain terminations

beginning with vowels. Thus the dative ty"sr*Hl4- JJ sankhadhmd-\-e was said to form

^IT^TJTsankhadhme, (to the shell-blower,)by dropping the final ^TT a, and not ^l"s!**i
san-

khadhmai. Here, too, the same result is obtained by admittingtwo bases for this as for

many other nouns, and assigning the weak base, in which the W[ d is dropt, to all the

so-called Bha cases, the cases which Bopp calls the weakest cases (Pan. vi. 4, 140). Each

of these systems has its advantages and defects,and the most practicalplan is,no doubt,
to learn the paradigms by heart without asking any questions as to the manner in which

the base and the terminations were combined

originally or glued together.

" 109. With regardto verbal bases ending in long ^TT a, many specialrules have to be

observed, according to which final ^TT a is either elided,or changed to ^z or to J? e.

These rules will be given in the chapter on Conjugation. Thus

ipfT-h '^ fk puna -\-anti = ^jr( in punanti,they cleanse.

IpTT-j-IT: pund+mah= yvfli!
punimah, we cleanse.

ST -t- f^ dd-\-hi=^ dehi, Give !

" no. Final ^i, ", "3u, "31u, ^$ri, if followed by vowels or diphthongs,are generally
changed to Ty, v, ^.r.

Ex. Hw + U = JT" mati+ai=matyai, to the mind.

^ = (Vf
J
J* /^-H$==/fey*" they have conquered.
+ ^fc = *TT^t bhdnu+oh = bhdnvoh, of the two splendours.
+ WT = "fi^Tpitri+d=pitrd, by the father.

UbM+ati "
they fear.
bibhyati,
-$ 1 13. RULES OP INTERNAL 8ANDHI. 53

In some cases ^t and f are changed to ^iy; 7 u and "Hi* to T"(t"p;^ri to ftri;
to ^ t" and, after labials,to "9^ur.

Ex. fyOftl
+ Wy = (VPsH^tfiJri+athuJi = siJriyathuJtt
you (two) have gone.
tf + ^= fafr bhi+i = bhiyi,in fear.

5 -f-Wlf =
^"ffif
yu-\-anti=iyuvantit
theyjoin.
53 H- T: =
*nT|:yuyu+uh = yuyuvuht they have joined.
*[*[+ ^ = 5?^ sushu+e=sushuve, I have brought forth.

"T + ^ = gfabhtf+i=zbhuvi, earth. on

^ + ^HTT = ftnin mri+ate=imriyatet he dies.

*|+ wflf = f^KPn gri+ati=girati, he swallows.

1T^+ 3[ = M ^fVpapri+ i =papuri, liberal.

When either the one or the other takes place must be learnt from
paradigmsand from
specialrules given under the heads of Declension and Conjugation. See fw"rfkbibhyati
from *ftbhf, but fnf"""
fnjihriyati
from ^ hrt.

"m. Final ^Qrt,if followed by terminational consonants, is changed to ^Tfr;and after

labials

*T grt,to shout; Passive 1^5 n gir-yate;Part. ^iWt girnah.

"^prt,to fill;Passive Part "^Ipurnah.
^npur-yate;
Before the ^y of the Passive, Intensive,and Beneclictive,
final ^i and "3 u are lengthened,
final ^J ri changed to ftrt,
final ^ ri to f^ ir or "^.ur. (See f 390.)

" 112. ^e, ^ ai,^uo, ^TT"M, before vowels and diphthongs,

are generallychanged into

9 + ^Trf = ^frf de+ate = dayate,he protects.

X + ^ = ITT rai+e-=.rdye,to wealth.

'M + JJ = T3T ^70+ e=gave, to the cow.

"H + ^Tt = TTre: nau-\-ah=.ndvah,the ships.

Roots terminated by a radical diphthong(except ^vye in redupl.perf.,Pan. vi. 1,46)
changeit into ^TT d before any affix except those of the so-called special
tenses. (Pan. vi. i, 45.)

^ + 7TT ^TrTTde+td=ddtd, he will protect.

=

^ + *faT=^ltO*Jde+siya ddsiya,May I protect! =

" + WT STrTT mlai+td== mldtd,he will wither.

^ft+ HT= ^TTTTTso+td=sdtd, he will pare.

But in the Present ^ + ^rfif 'c6I^Pdglai+ati=gldyati, he

= is weary.

2. Final Consonants.

" 113. The rules accordingto which the consonants which can occur at

the end of word restricted to

a are
^ k, ^ n, ^ /, ^ w, j^tt^[ w, ^/?, "T m, ^ /,
: #, *

77i, must likewise be observed where the last letter of a nominal or

verbal base becomes final,i.e. where it is not followed by any derivative

letter or syllable.
Thus the nominal base battle,would
ifijjudh, in the vocative singularbe
54 INTERNAL SANDHL " 114-

into
y^ yudh. Here, however, the "^dh must be changed ^ d} because no

is
aspirate tolerated as a final ($54. i); and changed into f{t,because
^ d is

no word can end in a soft consonant ($54. 2). ^tr^vdch,

speech,in the voc.
sing,would change its ^ ch into cF k, because palatalscan never be final

(#54-3).
adhok, instead
In ^nftcfi of ^rft|
adoh, the of
aspiration the final is thrown

back on the initial ^d ("118). The final

^h or TT ght after losingits
becomes
aspiration, *T g, which is further changed to ""? k.

"114. Nominal or verbal bases ending in consonants and followed by

terminations of
consisting a singleconsonant, drop the termination altogether,
two consonants not being tolerated at the end of a word (J55). The final

consonants of the base are then treated like other final consonants.

rai vdch + s = vdk, speech; nom. sing.

=inT prdnch + s=prdn, eastern; nom. sing.masc. Here UTcfr
which remains after the dropping of
prank, ^s, is,accordingto the

same rule,reduced the

againto TfT^prdn, final nasal remainingguttural,
because it would have been gutturalif the final ^K k had remained.

+ ^= *J^ suvalg+ s = suval,well jumping. Here, after the dropping

of s, there would remain suvalk but word end in
^ ^"R"F ; as no can

two consonants, this is reduced to 4}4c4 suval. Before the Pada-

terminations *}T^ suvalg assumes its Pada form suval

*jc(c^ ("53) ;
hence instrum. plur.*jqf*H:
suvalbhih.

+ ^= ^T5*T ahan + s = ahan, thou killedst ; 2. p. sing.impf.Par.

= ^7 advesh + 1 = advet, he hated ; 3. p. sing.impf.Par.
'srvVoFadoh + t = adhok, he milked ; 3. p. sing.impf.Par.
Exceptionswill be seen under the heads of Declension and Conjugation.
$ 115. With regard to the changes of the final consonants of nominal

and verbal bases,before terminations,the generalrule is,

1. Terminations beginningwith sonant requirea
letters, sonant letter at the

end of the nominal or verbal base.

2. Terminations beginningwith surd requirea

letters, surd letter at the end

of the nominal or verbal base.

3. In this general rule the terminations beginning with vowels, semivowels,

or nasals are excluded,i.e. they produce no change in the final sonant
con-

of the base.

1. T^-f fv = "^fHrvach + dhi = vagdhi. Speak ! 2. p. sing.imp. Par.

*[^4-ur =
IJTJ^
prich + dhve =prigdhve, you mix ; 2. p. plur.pres. Atm,
2. + fa ^rffcrad + si = atsi,2. p. sing.pres. thou eatest.
^ =

^ + fir= ^rf% ad + ti = atti,3. p. sing.pres. he eats.

- Il8. INTERNAL SANDHI. 55

marut + i= maruti, loc. sing,in the wind.

"
^far vach + mi = vachmi, I speak.
= ?TW7T grath + ya/e =grathyate, it is arranged.
Exceptionssuch as fa^-f "n = fain "/"^ + wo h = bhinnah,divided,
*T"T: "Ao/ -f nah = bhagnah^broken, must be learnt by practicerather than

by rule.
$ 1 1 6. if followed by
Aspirates, terminations beginning with any letter

(exceptvowels and semivowels and lose

nasals), their (J54. i.)
aspiration.
Ex. *TRnqr+ fcT= irRfw mdmath + ti = mdmatti, 3. p. sing.pres. Par. of the
intensive wri^mdmath,he shakes much.

%V + ufr= %^ rundh + dhve = runddhve, 2. p. plur. pres. Atm. of

^^rudht you impede.

C5H4 ^="5T^ labh+sye = lapsye,I shall take.

But "5fy
yudh + i= yudhi, loc. sing,in battle.
TJV+ ^ =

3?^-|-i:Ht"T: lobh -H yah = " lobhyah,to be desired.

"Sp^+ "nfw ^tflfif

kshubh + = ndti = kshubhndti,he agitates.
It is a generalrule that two aspirates
can never meet in ordinarySanskrit.
" 117. If final \gh, \ dh, \dh, H bh are foUowed by T^^or ^ th,theyare changed to the

soft letters,*T^, \d, 3d, 'Qb,

corresponding but the 1(t and likewise softened, and
^M are

the receives the aspiration. See also " 128.

""c?
Ex. ^TJT^+ fff =
^ "u fa runadh+ti = runaddhi, he obstructs.
cJ"T + W: = e73H: labh + talt = labdhah,taken.
rundh runddhah
-\-thah-=. (alsospelt^VJ rundhah], you two obstruct.

+ Wt = ^r?TJ
rundh +tah = runddhah, they two obstruct.

TT = vi"ri-s abdndh+tam = abdnddham, 2. p. dual aor. i. Par. you two bound.

"
= *i "R" iJ abandh+thah = abanddhdh, 2. p. sing. aor. i. Atm. thou

boundest.

In ^TOT^ abdnddham, 2. p. dual aor. i. Par., the aspirationof final ^dh is nojt thrown back

upon the initial^6, because it is supposedto be absorbed by the IT tarn of the termination,

changed into V dham. The same appliesto ^f"i"it

abanddhdh, though here the termination

*TH thdh was aspiratedin itself.

" 1 1 8. If ^gh, ^ dh, V dh, ^(bh, ^ A, at the end of a lose

syllable, their aspirationeither
as final or as being followed by (not by fv c?Ai),
VS^dhv H bh, ^s, they throw their aspiration
back upon the initial letters,provided these letters be no other than *T^, ^ d, ^d, W6.

See " 93.

Ex. Inflective base sing,y^bhut,knowing.

'^^budh,
to know; nom.

Instrum. bhudbhih.
plur.^JHfft
Loc. plur.iJPJbhutsu.

Second pers. plur.aor. Atm. ^Hp| abhuddhvam.

Second pers. sing.pres. Intens. + ftf

"T\"fl^ = ^jWlfrobobodh+si=bobhotsi,
56 INTERNAL SANDHI. $ 119-

Desiderative of "^"Tdabh, iHsfi dhipsati,

he wishes to hurt.

First pers. sing. fut. of "^-f **nf*T "irt"ll("l

bandh+sydmi=zbhantsydmi,I
= shall

bind.

""? dah, to burn ; ^T^dhak,nom. sing,a burner.

g^ duh, to milk j ^JTSEfadhugdhvam, 2. p. plur.impf. Atm. : but 2. p. sing.imp. Par.

jf*Vdugdhi.
Note "

^V dadh, the reduplicatedbase of VT dhd, ^VTfiT

dadhdmi, I place,throws the lost

aspirationof the final Vc?A back on the initial

^d, not only before S^dhv,^s, but likewise

before TT t and ^(th,where we might have of " 1 17. "^^4- 1H

expected the application " VWt

dadh + tah = dhattah ; "^ + *n = TOT: dacta + thah = dhatthah ; ^ + % = VW cfotta+ 5e =

dhatse ; ^"^+ ^*f " \fS dadh + dhvam = dhaddhvam.

" 1 19. If ^T c^, "f ./,l^y^ are final,or followed by a termination beginning with any letter,
except vowels, semivowels, or nasals,they are changed to off k or *T#.
Ex. Nominal base "^T^vdch; voc. speech.
"^Tc"t?a",
Verbal base "3^vach; 3. p. sing.pres. "^^ + flf= '%favach+ti=vakti.
^T + fv = ?^^ yunj-\-dhi=yungdhi,2. p. sing.imp. Join !

But loc. sing.^T^T + ^= ^jf^ vdch+i=vdchi.

=
cfT1*! vdch+ya = vdchya,to be spoken.
+ ft = ^Tt vach+mah = vachmah, we speak.
= ^x^J t?acA-|-t?aA=vachvah,we two speak. (See also " 124.)

" 1 20. "^s^at the end of nominal and verbal bases,if it becomes the final of a word, is
changed into "T t.

Ex. Nominal base fg\dvish; nom. sing,fs^dvit,

a hater.

Verbal base fg\dvish;

3. p. sing.impf. Par. -ws^ advet, he hated.

" 121. Before verbal terminations beginning with ^s, it is treated like "3Fk.

Ex. ^"5 + ftf"=. \ fg|dvesh+si = dvekshi,thou hatest; aor. ^f^l^ i^advikshat,

he hated.

*}\V#rApokshyati
(posh+syati),he will nourish.

" 122. Before IT t or "^M it remains but changes J(t and ^th
unchanged itself, into 3f

and "$th.
Ex. '%'^+KJ = "%FJ dvish+tah = dvishtah,they (two) hate.
^ffrN + 7R = *lfQ8W sarpish-\-tamam=sarpishtamam,the best clarifiedbutter.

This rule admits of a more namely, that

generalapplication, every dental ^th, ^
T^f, d, l{dh,
"Tw, and ^s, is changed into the corresponding ^th,Tc?,^dh,
lingual,if precededby "Zj,
^(n, and ^sh. (Pan. vin. 4, 41.)
Ex. ft^+ fV = fkf^ dvid+dhi= dviddhi,hate thou.

1"?+ "rrffr *j'^illflf

mrid+ndti=.mridndti.
=

^5-f-"ff ^ = "?+ #e = ftfe, he praises.

= "^TT shat+ndm = shanndm, of six.
rri"shat+navatih = shannavatih,ninety-six.(Pan. vin. 4, 42,

vart.)

" 123. Before other consonantal terminations ^sh is treated like Z^t.
Ex. l4
"fe1^+ =
fk^|'
dvish+dhvam-=dviddhvam, 2. p. plur.imp. Atm. Hate ye

c?"MA+"-"= dvitsu,
loc. plur.among haters.
58 INTERNAL SANDHI. $ 129-

Ex. (i) V^duli; nom. Vffidhuk ; instrum. plur.vfrn: dhugbhih; loc. plur.WZdhukshu;

part.pass. dugdhah.
"|7Vi
"^ + TH =*^"oJdrih+tah dridhak, fast,is = an exception.
Ex. (2) fc5^
lih j nom. fc57 Kf *' instrum. plur. f"f^jt
lidbhih ; loc. plur.

vdh, ^TT^Jvdtsu).

= ^: ruh+tah =

In c*te:74tf"a$and ^"t rudhah, ^+!{dh+t are changed to ?T + ^ dh+dh, or, more

to "^d-fT? dh (" 117);

correctly, then the first ^ d is dropt and the vowel lengthened.
The only vowel which is not lengthenedis "^Jri ; e. g. ^ + Tf = ^ vrih-{-ta
= vridha.

The vowel of *T^ sah and ^ vaA is changed into ^\ o (Pan. vi. 3, 112), unless
Samprasaranais required,
as in the part.tKiSt udhah. (Pan. vi. i, 15.)

" 129. The final WA of certain roots ('ttdruh, muh, ^^

Jjfi snuh, f^^snih)is treated

either as "3 gh or From

"^c?A. ^^ druh, to hate, we have in compounds the nom. sing.
dhruk
IJali and "^Tc?Arwf(Pan. vin. 2, '5n^ drugdhahor "^t
33) ; past participle drudhah.

" 130. The final "^ A of "Tt"naA, to bind, is treated as ^ dh.

Ex. updnah,
"grrnr^ slipper;nom. sing. "m i *i
j^updnat ; instrum. plur. ^m"if|ftupd-
nadbhih.

Past part. pass. "T^+ fft= "T^; nah+tah=naddhah, bound.

As to ^R"TF anaduh, ox, "c., see Declension.

" 131. The ^5 of the nominal bases and ?5T^sra5,

tm^dhvas,falling, tearing,if final
or followed by Pada-terminations, and the ^ s of "^ vas, the termination of the part.
perf.Par.,before Pada-terminations only,is changed to T^" (Pan. vin. 2, 72). See, how-
ever,

" 173,204.
Ex. $5R^dhvas, to fall; nom. sing.V3R(^dhvat,
nom. plur.SERK dhvasah, instrum. plur.
VSffjgl
-
dhvadbhih.

" 132. Verbal bases ending in ^s, change it to T{t,before terminations of the general

tenses beginningwith ^s. (Pan. vn. 4, 49.)

Ex. ^f^vas,to dwell; fut. ^5[+ tHif"i "wn("i vas+sydmi = = vatsydmi.
Before other terminations beginningwith ^s, final ^s remains unchanged.

^^ + TT = ^fW vas+se "=. vasse, thou dwellest.

^T^ + "ftf 'flfUf

sas+si
= sassi,thou sleepest. =

f"T^ + % fHw nims+se=nimsse,

= thou kissest.

ftf= Tj^fsqpepes+si=pepeshshi,thou
HH"^ + hurtest. (" 100.)
In certain verbs final H s is dropt before TV dhi of the imperative.

= sddhi. (Pan. vi. 4, 35.)

chakds+dhi = chakddhi.

In the verbs final of the second

same
^s, if immediatelyfollowed- by the termination person,

^(s,may be changed to 1{tor remain ^s.

^$TT^ + ^ = ^T^T T^or ^n: asds+s = asdt or asdh.

Before the J(t of the third person, it alwaysbecomes Tf t.

= asdt. (Pan. vm. 2, 73, 74.)

-$ 137. INTERNAL 8ANDHI. 59

Final Tf t, %d,Vldh before the ^" of the 2nd pers. sing.Imperf.Par. may be regularly
sented
repre-

or *ftl
by l(torby^*; *"l(avet aveh,thou knewest; U ^1(arvnat or W^Hn arvnah,
thou preventedst.(Pan. vm. 2, 75.)

" *33' *{n and the end of nominal verbal base,before sibilants (but
*^wiat a or not

before the *Jsuof the loc. plur.),

are changed to Anusvara.

Ex. HH HI U PH jighdmsati,he wishes to from ^5T

kill, han.

^^Tn kramsyate,he will step, from 1P{kram.

But *jf?T^5
suhinsuy among good strikers,from "j(V"^
suhin, Pada base of *ffi^
suhims.

If 5^n were changed to Anusvara, we should have to write "jjf"*J suhimshu.

" 134. "^nremains unchanged before semivowels.

Ex. "^Tn" hanyate,he is killed,from from iP^ten.

'%*^han.n"i"^ tanvan, extending,
M"-q"l from ^5^"nt?.
prenvanam*,propelling,

" I35- *^m remains unchanged before the semivowels ^y, ^ r, "^ /.
Ex. cfiTWj:Mm-yah, to be loved, from ^IW A;am.

TTPff tdmram, copper, from

Tf^/aw and suflix ^ra.

^^J amlak, sour, from ^W am and sunix "5 la.

" 136.^w at the end of a nominal or verbal base, if no suffix follows,or if followed by
a Pada-termination, or by personalterminations beginning with *T m or ^u, is changed into
5^w. (Pan. vm. 2, 65.)
Ex. H$!Ri{prasdn,
nom. sing.,and H^nf^Tt instrum.
prasdnbhih, plur.,U3li**jprasdnsu,
loc. plur.,from H^Il'T^rasam,quieting.(Pan.vm. 2, 64.)
VI*I"N aganma, we went, and ^i*i""r aganva, we two went, from T^ + T gam+ma,

+ ^
71*^ gam-\-va.
But nom. plur.M^imt prasdmah.

J 137. With regard to nasals,the generalrule is that in the body of a

word the the seconds, the thirds,and

firsts, the fourths of each class can

only be precededby their own fifths,

though in writingthe dot may be

used as a generalsubstitute. ($8.)

Ex. ^n^TUTT or ^i^jcfcri
dsankate or dsamkate,he fears.
or ^ifc^Jlfri'
dlingati
or he embraces.
dlimgati,
or ^^mfa vanchayati or vamchayati, he cheats.

or ^r*^ utkanthate or utkamthate,he longs.

or ifjgantum or gamtum, to go.

or giTr?r kampate or kampate, he trembles.

In compounds, such as *R-J-^H sam + kalpah,it is optionalto change

final standingat the end of a Pada, into the fifth or into real Anusvara ;
^ m,
hence ^cR^q: or TTf^r: samkalpah or sankalpah. (See J 77.)

* If the before treated Anusvara, the second "^ n would have to be

"^n ^ v were as

changedinto a lingual(" 96). Pan. vm. 4, 2, vart.

I 2
60 INTERNAL SANDHI. " 138-

Anusvara is the only nasal that stand

J 138. In the body of a word, can

before the sibilants

s^s9 ^ sh, ^ s, and f h.

Ex. ^R damsanam, biting, ^nrft yajdmsM, the prayers.

*r^n hamsahj goose, t*"lTramhate, he goes.

" 139. "Tw immediatelyafter ^ch

following or
*^jis changed to *T n.

Ex. TT^T ydchnd, prayer. TTsjftra/m,

queen. jajne,he
^fsir was born.

^chh in the middle of word between vowels or diphthongs

} 140. a

must be changed to ^.chchh. (See" 91.)

Ex. ^f^ richh, to go ; '^^firrichchhati,he goes.

Jra:mlechchhah, a barbarian.

" 141. "Schh before a suffix beginningwith "Tn or H m is .changed to Tf?s.

Ex. IT^+ "T= 1TW prachh+na=prasnak, question.

HlH^ +
1*T= HmlVi pdprachh+mi=pdprasmi, I ask frequently.
Before ^ v this change is optional.

Roots ending in T^y and throw off their final letters before terminations
" 142. ^v
beginningwith consonants, except ^ y.

Ex. ^+ 7K =
tjjnpuy-\-tah=putak, decaying.
= THU; turv+nah=. turnah, killed.

+ "llH =
fffiC^l^didiv
-\-vdn = didivdn, having played.

and
" 143. Roots ending in Wt? and ^", if preceded by 3(ior TM, lengthen their ^i "3"w,

if
^v or^r is followed immediatelyby a terminational consonant. (Pan. vm. 2, 77.) See
No. 92, rT^tvar.
Ex. f^1^
div,to play,cflsHPff
dtvyati,he plays. Bened. ^leqm dw-ydsam.
"-,to exert, JjrSt
gurnah.
'i.e. vn^jir}, to grow old, *f\^\njiryati.
voice;
"^.gir, instrum. girbhih,loc. plur.Tftftgirshu.
plur.iftf^t

There are exceptions.(Pan. vm. 2, 79.)

"^^Mr, to sound. Bened. ^fUra kurydsam.

On a similar principle^T u is turv+dvah
lengthenedin jj^-f^rnn ij^i^* = = turvdvak.

(Pan. vm. 2, 78.)

when
" 144. Nominal and verbal bases ending in ^C"V and T^wr lengthen ^i and Tw,

^r becomes final after the loss of another final consonant. (Pan. vm. 2, 76.)

Ex. TT^-f ^= *f^ *f\tgir+s=gir gfk,

or or nom. sing,voice.

" 145. Nominal bases ending in S^z'sor ^^ws (the 3^ is or I^MS being radical)
and terminations beginningwith *T bh ^s.
lengthen^ " ^fu when final,and before or

plur. ^^^ + ^ and neut.

Loc. =
^rt!1J
supis+su=supfyshuj nom. sing. masc.

*|tfh
supth.
Nom. sing.masc. ^HjpT+^T = ^"n sajus+s-=sajuh; nom. sing.neut. *HT* sajuh.
-$ 148. INTERNAL 8ANDHI. 61

Doubling of Consonants.

" 146. According to some grammarians any consonant except ^r and "A, followed by
another consonant and preceded by a vowel, may be doubled ; likewise any consonant

preceded by ^lr or * A, these letters being themselves precededby a vowel. As no practical

objectis obtained by this it is
practice, best,with Sftkalya,
to discontinue it throughout.

In our editions doubling takes place most frequentlywhere any consonant, except the
sibilants and ? h, is precededby ^r or " A, these being again preceded by a vowel. Thus

^T% arka, sun, is written ^1% arkka.

frequently
m(i\brahman may be written Amman.
"%*i"^6ra
If an aspiratedconsonant has to be doubled, the first loses its aspiration.Thus TO"T or

^Ifa vardhana or varddhana, increase.

" 147. A sibilant after ^" must not be doubled, unless it is followed by a consonant.

Tims it is always,T^K varshdh, rainy season ; "U"$: ddarsah (Prat.387), mirror. But we

may write either "^Mff or ";^Mn darsyateor darsfyate,it is shown.

Explanationof some Grammatical Terms used by Native Grammarian*.

$ 148. Some of the technical terms used by native grammarians have proved
so useful that they have found ready admittance into our own grammatical
terminology. Guna and Vriddhi are terms adopted by comparativegramma-
rians
in the absence of any classical words to mark the exact changes of

vowels comprehended under these words by Panini and others. Most

Sanskrit grammars have besides sanctioned the use of such terms as

Parasmaipada, Atmanepada, Tatpurusha, Bahuvrthi, Karmadhdraya, Krit,

Taddhita, Unddi, and many more. Nothing can be more perfectthan the

grammaticalterminologyof Panini ; but as it was contrived for his own

peculiarsystem of grammar, it is difficult to adopt part of it without at the

same time adoptingthe whole of his system. A few remarks, however, on

some of Panini' s grammaticalterms may be useful.

All words without exception,or according to some grammarians with

very few exceptions,are derived from roots or dhdtus. These roots

have been collected in what are called the

Dhdtupdthas,root-recitals, most

importantof which is ascribed by tradition to Panini*.

From these dhdtus or roots are derived by means of pratyayas or suffixes,

not only all kinds of verbs,but all substantives and and according
adjectives,
to some, even all pronouns and particles.Thus from the root m^ man, to

think, we have not only ?rgw man-u-te, he thinks, but likewise "R^ man-as,

mind, HMU mdnas-a, mental, "c. Words thus formed, but without as yet

any case-terminations attached to them, are called Prdtipadika, nominal

bases. Thus from the root Sf^Ym, to beget,we have the prdtipadikaor

* ed. Taranatha, vol.

Siddhanta-Kaumudi, H. p. I.
62 GRAMMATICAL TERMS. " 148.

nominal base ^jan-a, man, and this by the addition of the sign of the

nom. sing,becomes *F\\jan-a-h,a man.

Suffixes for the formation of nouns are of two kinds :

1. Those by which nouns are derived direct from roots ; Primary Suffixes,
2. Those by which nouns are derived from other nouns ; SecondarySuffixes.
The former are called Krit, the latter Taddhita. Thus ^jana, man, is

derived from the root *{r{janby the Krit suffix ^ a; but inffarf
janina,
appropriatefor man, is derived from *ttjana by the Taddhita suffix f"Tfact.
The name prdtipadika would apply both to *"{jana and *"f\"ijanma,as
nominal bases, ready to receive the terminations of declension.

The Krit suffixes are subdivided into three classes :

1. Krit, properlyso called,i.e. suffixes by which nouns can be regularly

formed from roots with certain more or less definite meanings. Thus

of the suffix Sanskrit grammarians form

by means
WJ athu,
^TTJvepathu, trembling,from ^^vep9to tremble,

from
"sgrrsrsvayathu,swelling, figkm, to swell.

kshavathu, sneezing,from TO kshu9 to sneeze.

davathu, vexation,from to burn.

g du, to vex,

2. Kritya, certain suffixes,such as rf^T tavya, ^f"ftaaniya, if ya, JffoOT

elima,
which may be treated as declinable verbal terminations. Thus from

cR^kar, to do, is formed kartavya,Wtjtffa karaniya,CRT"kdrya,

"#S"*i
what is to be done, faciendum.

3. Unddi, suffixes used in the formation of nouns which to native rians

gramma-
seemed more or less either
irregular, in form or meaning. Thus

from house.
i"(vas9to dwell,both ^r vastu, a thing,and wi^vastu, a

The Taddhita suffixes are no further but

subdivided, the feminine suffixes

(stripratyayd)
are sometimes treated as a separate class.
A root, followed by a suffix (pratyaya)9 whether Krit or Taddhita, is

raised to the dignityof a base (prdtipadika), and finallybecomes a real

word (pada)when it is finished by receiving

a case-termination (vibhakti).

Every base, with regard to the suffix which is attached to it,is called

Anga, body. For technical purposes, however, new distinctions have been

introduced by Sanskrit grammarians,accordingto which, in certain sions,

declen-

a base is only called Anga before the terminations of the nom. and

ace. sing., nom. and ace. dual, and nom. plur.of masc. and fern, nouns ;
besides the and vocative
nom. ace. plur.of neuters. The generallyfollows
the nominative. These Anga called the Sarvandmasthdna.
cases togetherare
Bopp calls them the Strong Cases.
Before terminations beginningwith consonants (likewisebefore Taddhitas
" 148. GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 63

the base is called Pada, the

beginning with any consonant except ^ y)
same term which, as we saw before, was used to signify a noun, with a case-

termination attached to it. The rules of Sandhi before these terminations

are in the main the same as at the end of words.

Before the remaining terminations which begin with vowels (likewise

^ y)
before Taddhitas beginning with vowels and the base is called Bha.

Bopp calls the Pada and Bha cases together the Weak Cases ;
and when it

is to distinguish, he calls the Pada the Middle and the Bha the
necessary

Weakest Cases.

Nouns, whether substantives, adjectives, or are declined through

pronouns,

three numbers with seven or, if we include the vocative, eight cases. A case-

termination is called
1"{sup or fwf^i vibhakti, lit. division.
Verbs are conjugated through the active and passive voices, and some

through a middle voice also, in ten moods and tenses, with three and
persons

three numbers. A personal termination is called fir^tin or Owta vibhakti.

A declined noun as well as a conjugated verb, ending in a vibhakti, is

called Pada.

Particles are comprehended under the name of Nipdta, literallywhat falls

into a sentence, what takes its place before or after other words.

All particles are indeclinable (avyaya).

Particles are,

1. Those beginning with ^ cha, and, i. e. a list of words consisting of

conjunctions, adverbs, interjections, collected by native grammarians.

2. Those beginning with u before, i. e. a list of prepositions collected

prat

in the same manner by native grammarians.

When the prepositions beginning with if pra substantive, they

govern a

are called Karmapravachaniya. When they are joined to a root, they are

called Upasarga or Gati. The name of Gati is also given to a class of

adverbs which enter into close combination with verbs. Ex. "astf uri in

^Oeffl urikritya, khdt in made

assenting ; ^TI^ ttlrjirflkhdtkritya, having
khdt, i. e. the sound produced by clearing the throat.
64 DECLENSION. " 149-

CHAPTER III.

DECLENSION.

$ 149. Sanskrit nouns have three genders, Masculine, Feminine, and

Neuter ; three numbers, Singular,Dual, and Plural ; and eight cases,

Nominative, Accusative, Instrumental, Dative, Ablative,Genitive,Locative,
and Vocative.

Note "
There are a few nouns which are indeclinable in Sanskrit: *5^ svar, heaven;
^*m^ayds, fire; W33(^samvat, era); ^tj
year, (ofVikramaditya's svayam, self; *l|f*f
saw*,

half; *j$.bhur,atmosphere; '^fesudi, and ^f^ badi, the

the lightfortnight, dark fortnight,
the usual abbreviations for 5J^M^tsuklapakshahand ^snqsj: krishnapakshah,
or
^c^UHft
bahulapakshah,(Warren, Kalasankalita, p. 361.) According to Radhakanta,*jf?f
sudi is used

in the West only.

Some nouns are pluraliatantum, used in the pluralonly ; "f!TTJ
ddrdh,plur.masc. wife ;

. dpah, plur.fern, water ;

^rtTSvarshdh,plur.fern, the rainyseason, i. e. the rains ;

sikatdh,plur.fern, sand ; q^coit bahuldh, the Pleiades.

" 150. Sanskrit nouns may be divided into two classes :

i. Those that have bases ending in consonants.

2,. Those that have bases ending in vowels.

i. Bases ending in Consonants.

" Iji. Nominal bases may end in all consonants except *"n} 5Tn, Tty.
The final letters of the inflective bases of nouns, being either final or brought
in contact with the initial letters of the terminations,
are subjectto some

of the phoneticrules explainedabove.

" 152. Bases ending in consonants receive the terminations
following :

Terminations for Masculines and Feminines.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

Norn. ^5 (which is always dropt) l^au

Ace. ^ am J

Instr. ^rra
"

fa: bhih

Dat. ire 1
\vi\bhyah
...

Abl. ^: ah J
Gen. ^r: ah ] ^TT dm

Loc. v }^:o* ISM

Voc. like Nom., except bases in ^\n and
"^s ^ au ^r: ah

Neuters have no termination in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. singular(Pada

cases).
They take \i in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. dual (Bha cases).
They take ^ i in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. plural,and insert a nasal

before the final consonant of the inflective base (Anga cases). This nasal is
 DECLENSION.

" 155. Bases ^ k, ^kh, ir

ending in gutturals, #, ^ffh.
These bases requireno rules.
special
Base TRtsPBsarvaSdk, omnipotent,masc. fern. neut. (from *f sarva, all,
and root 3 ""%" to be able.)

DUAL. PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.
MASC. FEM.

N.V. *t
sarvasdkah
A. ^%5nfc
sarvasdkam

I. **im"m,aOkd
D. sarvasdgbhyah
Ab.l
r sarvasdkah '

Q _
sarvasdkdm
, , ,.
sarvasakoh
*
L. sarvasdki sarvasdksTiu

NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. '^5^1
"h sarvasdk ^^"h sarvasdki sarvasdnki

in A;
All regular nouns ending ^ A:,^
be declined after the model
may
of sarvasdk.
^rfsr^
" 156. Base ending in^M. faRffa(chitratikkf (from f%^
painter, chitra,
and root f"^likh,
picture, to paint.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.

N.V. cUtralik^
i-+ n /, *
chitrahkhau chitralikhah
f
A. chitralikham J

I. chitralikhd "1 cUtraligbUh

D. h
I t chitralikhah .

G chitralikham
p. .r^i^i.
\ f"^r"4^u L-* 7-77. T,
.

chitrahkhoh
L. f^^fc^r/?r
chitralikhi J chitralikshu*

NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. chitralikU 5fe chitralihkhi

Note "
In the paradigmsof regularnouns with unchangeable consonantal bases it will

be sufficient to remember the Nom. Sing.,Nom. Plur., Instr. Plur.,Loc. Plur., and Norn.

*
On the change of *Jsu after "3U, see " 100.

t "R" instead of T^kh, see " 113; 54. I.

~" 158. DECLENSION. 67

Plur. Neut. The Ace. Instr. Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc. Sing.,Nom. Ace. Voc. Gen. Loc. Dual,
Ace. Gen. Plur., follow the Nom. Plur. The Instr. Dat. Abl. Dual, Dat. Abl. Plur.,follow
the Instr. Plur. The Vocative is the same as the Nominative.

" 157. Regularnouns to be declined like

BASE. NOM. 8. NOM.PL.M.F. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT.

fftl(harit,
green f fVj^ ^(Vn. ^Wilt f fU4l ^(Xfn
m. f. n. harit haritah haridbhih haritsu harinti

^ifrwifagnimath, fire-kindling
vif*r|ti|i
VffjrWYj: %tf'1*1(5! ""P"i*iw lwi*"i"iPiq
m. f. n. agnimat* agnimathah agnimadbhih\ agnimatsu%agnimanthi

friendly
^Q^suhrid, g^ *J^t ^"jf": *J37*J ^^
m.f. n. si i hr it suhridah suhridbhih suhritsu suhrindi

^{budh,knowing ijl^ ^VJ ^jfe* ^P5 7^

m. f. n. bhut \\ budhah bhudbhfh bhutsu bundhi

*"{gup,guardian ^J*^ JPi; 5^*^ 79 1Sf^

m. f. n. gup gupah gubbhih gupsu gumpi

kakubh, region
"JT5pT 4^;^ "F^Tt "*"^f"*Ttcf|c|H{ "4^f*T
f. kakup kakubhah kakubbhih kakupsu -kakumbhi

I 158. Bases ending in palatals,

^ch, ^ c^

Bases ending in ^ ch change ^ ch into "R k, or IT ^r, except when followed

by a termination beginningwith a vowel.

Base ^^^Jalamuch, masc. cloud (water-dropping).

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.

N.V. vK"ttjalamuk "] 1

^
"
"" ^c^H^T jalamuchau " ico^^iijalamuchah
A. "io*i"*i jalamucham ]
f*"" jalamugbhih
I. ^TOT^n jalamuchd ~] nc5^
D. ^^jalamuche [ TOWin jalamugbhydm 1
^^ jalamugb1iyaH
Ah.
Ab. 1 J
t jalamuchah
G. j 1 m.
^ ^j,
W"$*1jalamuchdm
.^
jalamuchoh
L.
"i"*jni jalamuchi
NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. 5Tc51 "%jalamuk *T c^fl^ jo lamu cM *i ""*{'* jalamufichi

Decline like
fTc3$^jalamuch, ^n^ vdch,
fern, speech;
" W9 tvach, fern,
skin ;
^^ ruch, fern, light; ^^ sruch, fern, ladle.

*
^th final changed into 1(t. See " 113; 54. i. Final ^5 dropt," 55.

t See "66. J See " 54. i. || See " 118.

68 DECLENSION. " 159-
bases
" 159. Special in ^ch.
BASE. NOM.S. INSTR.PL. LOC.PL. NOM.PL.

^5*1krunch*, moving crookedly,"^ "J^fa ^Q "f^* (Accent,Pan. vi. i, 182)

a curlew krun krunbhih krunkshu krunchah

if it means worship- TTT^ Ul^'fa:Tlh| JtHlJ(Accent,Pan. vi. 1, 182)

ping pran pranbhih prdnkshu prdnchah (Ace. the same)

^^ vrisch f, cutting ^7 ^* f^l ^f* (Accent,Pan. vi. i, 168)

mit% vridbhih vritsu vnschuh

" 1 60. Bases ending in *".chh change "^chh into 3^s,which becomes 7 t,when final,and
before consonants. (See " 125; 174.6: Pan. vi. 4, 19.)

NOM. SING. NOM.PL. INSTR.PL. LOC.PL. NOM. PL. NEUT.

TffRZprdchh,
an asker UTSfftt
W$f\prdsah
Tfl^prdt prddbhih m^prdtsu Tfif$[prdmsi

" 161. Bases endingin *^j,if regular,follow the example of nouns in "^ch,except that

they preserve *{jbefore vowels.

BASK. NOM. SING. NOM.PL. INSTR.PL. LOC.PL. NOM.PL. NEUT.

ruj,disease ^TofTruk ^ITt rujah ^^Tt rugbhih ^jTSTrukshu f runji

^T urj, strength "31^tirk \\ *3"(\ urjah drkshu
^Rfr^Jtirgbhih "3R3" 1!^ urji

Other regularnouns in
*^j, ^f^T^vanij,merchant;
"
m. fiTO^
bhishaj, m. physician;
^i frcf
"^ritvij,
m. priest;"5tsraj, f. garland; 41
^"^om,/, n. blood. (On the optionalforms
of vj^^amj, " 214.) Nom. Sing.T"^ mak, diving.
see
if^majj,

" 162. Bases ending in *{jchangeableto ^ d.

Some bases ending in *tj change 1TJ into 7 1 or ^ d when and before terminations
final,
beginningwith consonants.

*
Derived from the root ^^krunch.The Nom. Sing,would have been ^pfi+ 1{krunk
+s; ^s and "FA; are dropt,see " 114.

f Derived from the root (inthe Dhatupatha,

'ZF^vrasch, ^fld*^),
to cut. According
to Sanskrit grammarians, the penultimate ^s or dropt,and ^(ch before consonants
S^^'is
or if final changed into Vt. (See " 114.)
J The form (not 'ffZvrat}is
^ftvrit confirmed by Siddhanta-Kaumudi (1863),vol. i.

p. 182.

|| On the two final consonants, see " 55. The Nom. Plur. Neut. would be "^rf^urji
or 3OTn ttmr/t*.At the end of compounds the optionalforms are
^if^ urji or 01(3*
urnji.
The latter form is confirmed by Colebrooke, the Siddhanta-Kaumudi, vol. i. p. 194,

and the Prakriya-Kaumudi. The Prakriya-Kaumudi (p. 44 a) says :

"3^ I ^ft^gfrf
^rf^i^|f^ ^rfrr^:i ^|f^ ^T^T i ^WTT^ ^ft^w% i *rffst
i (Pan.vn. i,

72, vart.)
-" i"53- DECLENSION. 69

Base samrdj,masc. sovereign.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FKM.

N.V. 4 \ samr djan samrdjah

A. samr* rdjam \
I. samrdjd : samrddbhih

D. samrdje samrddbhydm
\
Hyi^*K samrddbhyah
Ab. 1

G. j samrdjah
*fli"ii
samrdjdm
samrdjoh
L. ,

The words which follow this declension are mostlynouns derived,without any suffix,
from the roots OT5T 6Artf/(j^THJ,
not ^fT3j),
to shine; 1"T mn;, to clean ; T^yo; (except
^J Prf"^ritvij), to shine, to rule; ^p^*n;',
to sacrifice; tT^rtf;, to dismiss, to create,

(^n^sro/, blood,
wreath, and WJJ^asn;', not are derived from ^5^"n;)jHM^bkrajj,
to

roast ("T5T).Also Tfft$K*{parivrdj

', mendicant. a

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR. IN8TR. PLUR. LOC. PLCB.

f^TTS^
vibhrdj,resplen
dent mbhrdtf ah
vibhrdj vibhrdtlbhih vibhrdtsu

i%y worshipper "^"3

of the gods devet devejah devedbhih devetsu

visvasrij,
creator tqvjtii

of the universe visvasrit visvasrijah visvasridbhih visvasritsu

H R" I ^parivrdj, a men- MPi^l^

dicant parivrdt parivrdjah parivrddbhih parivrdtsu

f^^i.i'ii fq^Ki^UTJ rq*aKT^

universal monarch visvdrdt visvardjah visvdrddbhih visvdrdtsu

JJ5^bhrijj,
roasting
bhrtjjah bhridbhtTt bhritsu

" 163. Irregularbases in ^Tj. ,

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR. INSTR. PLUR. LOC. PLUR.

'll",
lame khdnjah J khanbhih

* Cf. " 76.

t From another root, vibhrdk, famfh?. vibhrdgbhih"c. may be formed. (Siddh.-
Kaum. vol. i. p. 165.)
J From ^ efefla,
god, and ^H^ yq;, to contracted into
sacrifice, ^"5^
y.

||The lengthening of the ^T a in f^I rt"?a takes place whenever is changed into
*^^'
a lingual.(Pan. vi. 3, 128.)
IT See Siddh.-Kaum. ed. Taranatha, vol. i. p. 165.
70 DECLENSION. " 164-

of Vedic has
priest, two bases. The Norn. Sing,is vt^MiJ avaydh,
2. *RiRv{avaydj, name a

and all the cases beginningwith consonants (Pada cases)are formed from the same

base, ^ra^ avayas. The Voc. Sing.,too, is being,againstthe

irregular, rule of

these bases, identical with the Norn. Sing. Some grammarians, however, allow

if ^rezi: he avayah.
Base ^RTRH avayas and
vtq*u^ avaydj.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
MASC.FEM. MASC.FEM. MASC. FEM.

N. TJ avaydh
I viq*(mi avaydjau L avaydjah
A. v"q*iin avaydjam
I. avaydjd avayobhifr

D. avaydje avayobhydm 1
" avayobhyah
Ab.
b. 1
" avaydjah
G

L.
. J
""
.
}*i"i"nnlS avaydjoh
avaydjdm
avayahsu
2

V. avaydh or viq*(i avayah like Nom. like Nom.

" 164. ending in ^ r.

Bases

Bases ending in ^ r are regular,

only ^ i and 7 u, precedingthe ""r, are

if the
lengthened, ^r is final or followed by a consonant (f144). In the
Loc. Plur. the final
^r remains unchanged though followed by "S sh. ("90.)
Base frrr^r,fern, voice.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.

N.V.
r fJTU girau " fiRt girah
A.

I.
TftfH:
girbht'h

D. f
Tft^Tgirbhydm \ Tft^lgirbhydh
Ab

G
k'} "PTTT giram

L.
J-
fH^t gir6h

Base neut. water.

,
NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL.

N.A.V. vdri

I. ^WT vdrbhydm : vdrbhih, "c.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR. INSTR. PLUR. LOC. PLUR.

,
f. town Jf"purah purbhih
f. door
c?t?ar, Ctdvdrah j dvdrbhzh ?TT"
dvdrshu

Arir,
m. f. n. scattering : k/h

*
Accordingto Pan. vi. i, 168, aari would have the accent on while
the first,

according to Pan.vi. i, 171, would have it on the second because

syllable, the Nom. and

Ace. Dual in the neuter are not Tritiyadi,

but are Asarvanamasthana.

t Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 125.

-$ [65. DECLENSION. 71

J 165. Bases in ^s.

(A.) Bases formed by the suffixes

VT^as, ^w, f^us.
Bases ending in change the ^s according to the generaleuphonic
^$
rules explainedabove. Thus

as, if final,becomes w: ah. ("83.)

as followed by terminations beginningwith vowels remains unchanged.
and is and followed by terminations beginning with vowels
^ us are

changed to ^and f^ish and ush. (See J 100.)

as before
^ bh becomes ^fto($84. 3); ^ is and 7^ us before ^ bh
become ^.ir and T^ur. ($82.)
before ^su becomes *r: ah; " and before
W(as or ^ 7^ us
*J *w
become wA.
^ish or
^: i#, T^MS/Jor T:

Besides these generalrules,the followingspecialrules should be observed :

1. Nouns formed by the suffix ^^as lengthentheir V a in the Nom. Sing.

masc. and fern.,but not in the Vocative. Thus Nom. Sing. m. f.

*ptTK sumandh, well-minded ; Voc. tJ*Hisumanah.

(eifyzej/ifc)
2. Nouns formed by the suffixes ^ is do not lengthen their
or
g^ or us

vowel in the Nom. Sing. masc. and fern. Hence Nom. Sing. m. f.

^TtflPff:
sujyotify, from
having good light, *Jsu, good, and rtftPH:
jyotih,
light; *J^Er: suchakshufy, having good eyes,
n. from *J su, good, and
chakshuh, n. eye. (Pan.v. 4, 133, com.)
^TB|:
3. Neuter nouns in ^r^as, ^(isy""3(us,lengthen their vowel and nasalize

it in the Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. From JR: manah, *HJfa mandmsi ; from

**ftftt tijfajyotimshi
jyotih,T"fl ; from ^T^t chakshuh, ^TSffa
chakshumshi.

Base and
*p?F^ sumdnas, well-minded, masc. fern. neut. (from ^ su

m^mdnas, neut. mind.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.

U
sumdnasau \ HH^: sumdnasah
A. _
sumdnasam J
tpntt
I.

D. 1
-^
J '

n sumdnasah
I
^ ^HH^I sumanasam

r f ""i"l"'"l;
sumdnasoh
L. "}"ini" sumanasi J ?*^"" sumanahsu

V. '5*^*sumanah ^HH^I sumanasau ^intil sumanasah

NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. 5*Rt sumanah 4J*Htfl

sumanasi ^i"iirt"
sumdndmsi

The rest like the masc. and fern.

 72 DECLENSION. " i66-

Base ?JTif)Prf^
sujyotis,
well-lighted,
masc. fern. neut. (from *j su and

is,neut. light.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.

N.V. sujy6tih
sujy6tishau sujydtishah
A. sujyotisham
I. f sujyotishd sujydtirbhih

D. sujy6tishe sujyrftirbhydm
sujy6tirbhyah
Ab.
I sujy6tisJiah
sujydtishdm
sujy6tishoh
L. \ sujy6tishi sujytitihshu

NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.A.V. sujy6tisM sujydtimslii

The rest like the masc. and fern.

Decline after the model of and sujyotisthe

*JT"T^ sumanas
followingbases :

%V^ vedhas, Nom. sing.^VT* vedhdh, m. wise. ^"S^1^

chandramas, N. s.

^"^Tr:
chandramdh, m. moon. N.
"SFn^prachetas, s. UHrilt prachetdh, m.,
Nom. prop, of a lawgiver, f^^ofi^
divaukas, N. s. f^cfir:
divaukdh, m.

a deity. f^R^v^%"5, N. s. faginn vihdydh,m. bird. TSC^K^apsaras, N. s.

^3n*ro apsardh, f. a nymph. HjTi*^mahaujas, N. s. H^"n: mahaujdh,

m. f. n. very mighty. TT^ pay as, N. s. TIT?: payah, n. milk.

N. s. ^R: "y"^, n. iron. N. T^r: yasafy, praise.

^^ yasa^, s. n.

N. s. ffa:^flviA^n. oblation. ^rNN^archis, N. s. ^rf$:archih, n. splendour.

^rrg^ dyus, N. s. ^15: %wA, n. life,age. ^g^ vapus, N. s.

^j: vapuh,
n. body*.

" 166. 'STTJJara,

old age, may be declined throughout regularlyas a feminine. (See " 238.)
There is,however, another base *K$(jaras, equallyfeminine t, and equallyregular,except
that it is defective in all cases the terminations of which begin with consonants.

*
Any of these neuter nouns assume masc. and fern, terminations at the end of a
may
compound ; qg^(V nashtahavih,Nom. sing.masc. one whose oblation is destroyed.
t Boehtlingk (Declinationim Sanskrit,p. 125) gave feminine; in
*"$(jaras,rightly
as

the dictionary,
though oxytone, it is neuter.
by mistake put down as
74: DECLENSION. " 1 68-

DUAL. DUAL.

N. A.V. Uf"i"J nirjarauor r*f*f"^T

nirjarasau
I. D. Ab. fti"3
"jvqfnirjardbhydm deest

G. L. f"i"K*iunirjarayohor f"T^T^n*nirjarasoh

PLURAL. PLURAL.

N.V. Pri^ltnirjardh
or fa^HSt nirjarasah
A. f^TT^ nirjardn or Pri^K.^nirjarasah
I. f"T^T*nirjaraih deest (f^R%J nirjarasaik,
masc.)
D.Ab. f*l*n,*n nirjarebhyah deest

G. f"T5fcU!!ff
nirjardndmor fl*l"JRT
nirjarasdm

L. PiTtO nirjareshu deest

Fern. fMfTTnirjard,like oRTTTTX:a"^. Neut. Sing, deest (fr|*f"^

nirjarasam)
; Dual

Neut. like ^ifwkdntam.

fH*rtmV/aram, nirjarasi;Plur. "i " ? nirjardmsi.

" 168. ^nnn^ anehas, m. time,'g^I^pMrwrfffm/as,

m. name of Indra,form the Norn.

Sing.vin^T anehd, ^^ ?\ \ purudamsd,without final Visarga. The other cases are regular,
like "QTfif^sumanas,
m. Voc. I? ^^"^the anehah.

" 169. ^T^^usanas, m. proper name, forms the Nom. Sing, o ^i ni usand and the Voc.

Sing.^T^^usanan or o^i"i" usanah or T^Rusana. (Sar.I. 9, 73.)

" 170. (B.) Bases ending in radical f^s.

1. From ffepinda,lump, and %fH(gras,

a to swallow, compound a is formed, fferf1{pinda-
gras, a lump-eater.
From ni^ ^n's,to walk, and ^ ***" well, a compound is formed, ^Jnl^ supis,well-
walking.
From Tj^ #ws, to sound, and ^JSM, well, a compound is formed, *jjj"^
SM/MS, well-

sounding.

2. In formingthe Nom. Sing. m. f. (and neuter),the rules laid down before with regard
to nouns in which ^^is,"31!(us,
^Sl^as, belong to a suffix,
are simplyinverted. Nouns
in j^"'sand "3^ us lengthenthe vowel, nouns in ^K^as leave it short.

Ex. Nom. Sing. m. f. n. "ftf^U!

pindagrah,^fh supih,^JJ sutuh.

3. In the Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. of neuters, nouns in ^(is, '^(us,nasalize

"ZR^as, their

vowels, but do not lengthen them.

Ex. Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. neut. fq^fffS Jjf4(Vi

pindagramsi, supimsi,"fffffa
sutumsi.

4. Nouns in 3j^isand "3^ws lengthentheir vowels before all terminations beginningwith

consonants.

Ex. Instr. Plur. 'gtrtfH: *pjf*l"

supirbhih, suturbhih,*pj"3sutuhshu.

5. The radical ^s of nouns ending in ?^w and T^MS, though followed by vowels, is not

liable to be changed into ^sh. (See " 100, note.)

 DECLENSION. 75

Base h*n\pindagra8,
eating a mouthful,maac. fern. neut.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. FEM. MASC. FEM.

N.V. pindagrafy
indagrasau I ftji
A. pindagraaam
I. pindagrasd pindugrobhih

D .
pindagrase pindagrobhydm
" TTTnjr"n pindagrobhyah
Ab.

pindagratdm
L.
pindagrahsu
NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. : pindagrah pindagrasi pindagramsi

well-sounding,
masc. fern. neut.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.

N.V.
sutusau sutusah
A. sutusam

I. suturbhih

D. suturbhydm
suturbhyah
Ab.

G. sutusdm
sut us ok
L.
NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.A.V. sutumsi

" 171. Nouns derived from desiderativeverbs change H s into when necessary.

Base fsM Hjt^

pipathis,wishingtcr read, masc. fern. neut.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.

N. pipathih
pipathishah
A. rMHf"j*f
pipathisham
pipathirbhih

D.
" pipathirbhyah

["
ft'^fT^Jpipathishah
pipathisham
G. J
pipathishoh
L. fM M PM pipathishi
f"J :^ pipathihshu
NEUTER.
DUAL. PLURAL.
SINGULAR.

N. A.V. t pipathih fnM (VH^ pipathishi (see" 172)

pipathishi

* Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 187. " 83.

76 DECLENSION. 0 172-

" 172. The nouns 'STT'f^I^

dsis,fern, blessing,and ^*J^ sajush, masc. a companion, are

Ace. and Voc. Plur., if they should

declined like fTTf^pipathis,except in the Nom. be

used as neuters at the end of compounds*.

List Bases
of different in ^s.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. INSTR. PL. Loc. PL.
MASC.FEM. NEUT. MASC.FEM. NEUT.

kind, m.f.n. sumandh1 -nah sumanasah sumandmsi sumanobhih sumanassu or -nahsu

sujyotis, ^^ftflTt
Sjsftfrf^ id. *JjSftfiret 3{Wt fin
^JWtfTfrfa T*T" 'p'frfff^"fr"*J or

m.f.n.
well-lighted, sujyotih svjyotishahsujyotimshisujyotirbhihsujyotishshuoi-tihshu

ftfe?J!
f^'^T^'^fpindagras, id. "nT^T^tt TOf^jnT f'JSiji'm* nh"?JW or "?I"^J
lump-eating,m.f.n.pindagrah pindagrasahpindagramsi pindagrobhihpindagrassuor-grahsu

^T3!fflchakds,
splen- ^cfiTt id. ^"^iT^Tt ^fofiTtH *"|oftTf"Tt "*""*! w or ^"*Ti3J
did, m.f.n. chakdh chakdsah chakdmsi chakdbhih chakdssu or chakdhsu

(Accent,P. vi. 1,171.)doh doshah * domshi dorbhih d6shshu or dohshu

^^"T^
supis,well- ^l^" id.3 ?jftnTJ ^Tfani ^"^rnH* ^tflt-^^^"5 or

going, m.f.n. supih supisah4 supimsi supirbhih supishshuor supihshu

well-
IffiHsutus, ^["ff* id. "fffiK 51^" ?^lf^* ?5^5 or ^?:3
sounding,m.f.n. sutuh sutusah sutumsi suturbhih sutushshu or sutuhshu

fiwftl
f^^"S^pipathis,^esiY-id.3f^Rf^^* ftr^frf^ fo^^ftf*!: ftf^"ft^5
-^JJ or

ous of m.f.n. pipathih

reading, pipathishahpipathishi5
pipathirbhihpipathishshuor-thihsh

ous of m.f.n.
acting, chikih chikirshah chikirshi^ chikirbhih chikirshu

blessing,^T^*dsih id. ^Tlf^I'RJ^TT^n"P^ ^JTT^I^f*!*

^ftf^FHdsis, ^TT^ft^or
3r W$ft*5

f. (Voc.id.) dsishah dsimshi dsirbhih dsishshu or dsi

dsihshu

"^^, saJus"compa- H^J saju/iid. ""fMt ^*|f^ ^^fHJ ^T5"

nion, m. (Voc. id.) sajushah sajumshi sajurbhih sajushshuor sajuhshu

^f^^SM/tim5,onewho
^n^r^ id. ^T^H* ^nffa ^f^frHt ^'^^
strikes well, m. f. n. suhin suhimsah suhimsi suhinbhih suhinsu6

* Some grammarians do not allow the lengtheningof the vowels in ^STT^flfft

dsimshi and

^^
sajumshi. (jTTTTfir I X(T0 ^. d" "iO. I H ^ -^^^1 ^ ^iJ^JJTlfiT
M f^
"* N H4 W 1TO *ft
JPOT1

^TTnTrjII ^T^^t "3Tcfi^R ^ in tf 'fli^THTWTi

* 11) This
may be right according
to the strict interpretation
of Panini, but the Pratisakhya
(xui. 7)givesthe rule in a more

general form, statingthat every neuter ending in an Ushman has a long vowel before the

Anusvara, the Anusvara being followed by si or shi.

1 The Vocative is *}*Ri sumanah. In the other paradigms it is the same as the
Nominative.
2
"fft^c?os
may be declined regularlythroughout as a masculine. But it is likewise

declined neuter. On its irregularor optionalforms, see

as a
" 214.
8 Siddh.-Kaum. vol. 4
i. p. 197. ^s not changed into ^sh; see " 100, note.
5 vol. 6
Siddh.-Kaum. i. p. 194. See " 75.
"
} 174. DECLENSION. 77

" 173. VSR^dhvas to fall)

(from V"^dhvarhs, and ^R^sras(from $3N^*rarfw,
to fall),
when

used at the end of compounds,change their ^a into in the Nom. and Voc. Sing.,and
T^J,
before terminations beginningwith consonants.

N.V. ^JBfaefif
parnadhvat N. A.V. Tn"wfT parnadhvasau N. A. s"!)tt""I
parnadhvasah
A.lfftVafQparnadhvasam I. ^^isfylparnadhvadbhih
I.D.Ab.'WRVSnfflparnadhvadbhydm
I. T"SERTTparnadhvasd G. L. *riU"nffc
parnadhvasoh L. TTO
WJ parnadhvatsu
" 174. Bases endingin ^s, f^sh, "^h.
"^ksh,
TS^clth,
Bases endingin these consonants retain them unchanged before all terminations ning
begin-
with vowels. Before all other terminations and when their final consonants
final, are

treated either like ^ t or like

c"k.
1. Bases derived from f^ST to show, ^S^dris,
efts', to touch,change3^*
to see, UFS^sprtf,

into ^ k. (" 126.)

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR. NOM.PLUR. NEUT. INSTR. PLUR. LOG. PLUR.

dis,f. country f^T dtk

f^S^ f^^It
disah f^f^f
dim" f^fnudigbhih $%%"
dikshu

Bases derived from to destroy, into

change "S^s 7 t c^AT.
2. TfS^nas, or

BASE. NOM. SING. N. PL. N.PL.NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOG. PL.

'oil m.f .n
3 H $(jfvana6, ^TMH^or0^"7T5T: ""i% . ""T^5T:or0TrfirH:
"7T^Jor""rEJ
life-destroying jtvanator -naA: -nasah -namsi -nadbhih or -nagbhih-natsu or -nakshu

3. All other bases in ST / change their final into "?t.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOG. PL.

is,m.f. n. one who enters f^vftf^llvtsahf^ffyvfmsi f^

fa^falvidbhih
4. Bases derived from V^ dhrish,to dare, change *r sh into "^k.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

dadhrik dadhrishah dadhrimshi dadhrigbhih dadhrikshu

5. All other bases derived from verbs with final ^sh change ^s" into 7f.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

ish,m.f.n.hating fjfZdmt ffT^t

dvtshah fsfadvimshif^fWtdvidbhih fgr"J
IJdvitsu
6. Bases endingin "^chh change^ chh into 7 t.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

asking W^prdt
TfT3iprdchh,m.f.n. prdmsl
W^'prdsah TTtf^T riT^j*Tt
prddbhth
f ksh into 7
7. Bases endingin T5Tksh change T3^ t.

BASE. NOM. SING, NOM. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

.f.n.paring 17 tat* tdkshah

rHSfJ ifffef
tdmkshi If^fHJ tadbhih

* If derived fn^ta"sA
differently may form its Nom. Sing.7T3F tak. iffTE^goraksh, herd,
cow-

which forms
regularly its Nom. Sing. may, according
*nT7"7ora", to a different derivation,
form "Ui^ gorak.(SeeColebrooke,
p.9O,note; Siddh.-Kaum.vol.i.p.
187.) Sofav^pipat,
Nom. Dual famsfipipakshau,
desirous of maturing; f"J Nom.
"4*"vivak, Dual "f "T"
f"" r/rar;tsAa",
desirous of saying; f^V"F
didhak,Nom. Dual f^lHSJT
didhakshau,desirous of burning.
78 DECLENSION. " 175-

8. Most bases endingin ^ h change ^ h into

^ t.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM.PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC,PL.

lih,m.f.n. lickingf^T lit fc5^"lihah fc^fir

limhi fc5^fat
lidbhih fcV"Qlitsu
,
m.f.n. covering "^ "jrMf ^1 ^rw^aA ^T^gumhi "5^fa"
ghudbhih "JT^ghutsu

On the change of initialT $r into "*T"^, see " 93.

9. Bases derived from roots ending in ^ h, and beginningwith ^ d, change ^ h into ^T k.

Likewise ^fWi^
ushnih, a metre.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM.PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOG. PL.

m.f.n. milking Vftdhuk g%l duhah

ij^duh, |f^ dumhi T*fr*\
dhugbhih V^dhukshu

10. Bases derived from the roots

^ druh, to hate, ^muh} to confound, f^ snih,to love,

change the final h into T t 'ORk.

^f snuh,to spue, may ^ or

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM.PL. N.PL.NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

hating dhrutordhruk druhah druihhi dhrudbhih or dhruglhih dhrutsu or dhrukshu

derived from nah, to bind, change h into

ii. Bases ^ ^ J{t.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM.PL. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

^^^updnahtf.shoe ^m^J(updnat 3H\3" a updnahahvvwtklupdnadbh

Decline fnm^l vipds,

f. the Beyah ft^cwA, f. ordure. river in the Punjab.
f. anger. f%1"3viprush,
f. dropof water. TufalS^viviksh,wishingto enter. "P^snih,loving.

*rk^goduh, cow-milker. tPffictf^madhuHh,

bee. fi^tvish,f. splendour.'Q^fiS'^bahutv
m. f. very splendid.T^J1^ ratnamush,
n. stealer of gems. """^1 idris, f. such. a m. n.

"fi'^J'3Tkidris, f. Which? *\n^*fS(marmaspri^f

m. givingpain.
n.

into ^sh whenever is

" J75- l^T^Tfturdsdh, m. name of Indra,changes ^s ^h changed
into ^ d or T t .

Norn. turdsMt.
Sing.iJl!lHl"r Norn. Dual "u"r^turdsdhau. Instr. Plur. TJTraT^fa:
turdsMdbUh.

" 176."g^nTpwrorfa/,
m. an offering,
or a The
is irregular.
priest, Norn. Sing,is
*f^teTt
puroddh, and all the cases beginningwith consonants (Pada cases)are formed from a

base ^f\^^purodas. The Voc. being identical with

too, is irregular,
Singular, the Nom. Sing.
(" 152),though some grammarians allow ^ ^tt'J*
he purodah.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. 1JCtTnpuroddh g^ 3 1 ^|Tpuroddsau ^CteTSTt

puroddsah
A. j^Cl
sT^T puroddsam ^X^"5T^TT
puroddsau ^ Cls I ^l!puroddsah
I. ifCtTT^n
puroddsd gT^ThTT
purodobhydm "$ftftf*K
purodobhih
D. ^Tt5T%
puroddse "yftftxti
purodobhydm tpCtTteH
purodobhyah
Ab. "grtTT^Tt
puroddsah ^ft^"npurodobhydm g^Tt"Tt
purodobhyah
G. ^Ct?T$npuroddsah ^Styftlpurodds'oh ^^T^f puroddsam
L. IJ^Trf^I
^Mroc?"i"" ^^f T^ft:
puroddsoh 3^"*Jpurodahsu
V. "g^TT: or "?t puroddhor -c?aA gOil^fi
puroddsau ^^T^TJpuroddsah
-
179. DECLENSION. 79

" 177. Another word, 5"*^^||^ukthatids,

a reciter of hymns, is declined like

puroddt.
Nom. J"+^^H'.ukthasdh. Ace. Sing. ?"r*i 311*1 uktha$dsam. Instr. Plur.

ukthasobhih. Voc. Sing. 9"r^^iit or ^cr'q^iJukthasdh or uklhasah.

" 178. Bases in *Tm.

Bases ending in ^m retain *Tm before all terminations beginningwith vowels. Before

all other terminations and when final,the ^m is changed into "^n.

Base mild.
Jf$Ki{pra$dm,

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. i I:M. MASC. KI;M. 1CA8C. FKM.

Nom. Voc. IRRTr^praJdn nywl prasdmau TT^IW! prasdmah

Ace. prasdmam
TTSfTPT H^H"I!
prasdmau 14311*0prasdmah

Instr. U^TTTT prasdmd H^n^Tf pratidnbhydm H^I i f*Htpras"nbhih

Loc. H^nr*ipra5^m" w^n*fUprasdmoh

2. NOUNS WITH CHANGEABLE BASES.

A. Nouns with two Bases.

J 179. Many nouns in Sanskrit have more than one base, or rather they
modify their base accordingto rule before certain terminations.

Nouns with two bases, have one base for the

Nom. Voc. and Ace. Sing. 1 *-

*
Nom. Voc. and Ace. Dual " of masc. nouns
.

Nom. Voc (notAce.)Plural J

I and a second
Nom.

base for all other

Voc. and Ace.

cases.
Plural of neuter nouns ;

The former base will be called the Anga base. Bopp calls it the strong
base, and the terminations the weak terminations.

The second base will be called the Pada and Bha base. Bopp calls it

the weak base, and the terminations the strong terminations.

The generalrule is that the simple base, which in the Pada and
appears
Bha cases, is strengthenedin the Anga cases. Thus the Pada and Bha

base *m^prdchbecomes in the Anga cases ufa prdnch. The Pada base of

the present participle adant in the Anga

^^ adaty eating,becomes ^T^

* Most nouns with changeablebases form their feminines in fy. A few, however, such
as^TO^rfaman, are said to be feminine without takingthe \i,and some of them occur as

feminine at the end of compounds.

80 DECLENSION. " 1 80-

cases. This gives us the followingsystem of terminations for words with

two bases :

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC.

NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL.

Nom. Ace.

1 80. Certain words derived from

,
to move, have two, others
three bases.

TTT^prach, forward, eastern, has two bases, TTI^T prdnchfor its Anga,
for its Pada and Bha base, and is declined t.
accordingly

*
Anga base,or, accordingto Bopp, strong base with weak terminations. The tions
termina-

are called in Sanskrit the Sarvandmasthdna terminations.

t Compounds ending in ^1^ ach retain the accent on the except after
preposition,
prepositionsending in ^" or Tw. This rule does not apply to fa m and ^Qfaddhi (Pan.
vi. 2,52-53). ^^l^dvach,TTR prach, ^^udach^ also 'Zf^nyach,
Hence
"*R3*(pdrdch,
^Hfl^ ddhyach ^TVR^sadhryach, f"t^ m'shvach
"
but TTT^ pratydch,^T?^ samydch, :

anvdch.

stands for this

Trr^jprawfc;
|| In the declension of words
endingin ^^ach, the rule is.that if^f^ach has the Udatta,
inHm-^pratydch,
as
"QJq^samydch, ^(^^(anvdch (" 180, note), all terminations,except
the Sarvanamasthanas,
take the Udatta (Pan. vi. i, 169-170).The rule Pan. vi. i, 182, refers

to T"^anch,
not to ^T^ ach. The rule Pan. vi. i, 222, is restricted in the Veda by vi. i, 170.
is treated as if the accent were on the preposition.
82 DECLENSION. " 182-

G. Tnft^Jpratichdh Mril^t pratich6h Tllft^rt

pratfahdm

L. inftfa^ratfcfo' inft^t prattchth H7TZ[pratyakshu

NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL.

N.A. pratfchi

FEM.
SINGULAR.

N. si cfl
"^1pratichi.

The words,
following derived from to move, have three bases :
,

ANGA OR STRONG BASE. PADA OR MIDDLE BASE. BHA OR WEAK BASE.

(Pan.vi. 2, 52)
behind WF^pratyach
samydnchyright(vi.2, 52) samyach samich

nyanch, low (vi.2, 53)

3, 95)
h, accompanying(vi. ^p^sadhryach
following(vi.2, 52) anvach andck
^"J^
vishvanch, all-pervading vishvach vishtich
ftf^[
upward (vi.2, 52) udach 3^\ udich
,

frTM^
tirydnch,
tortuous firSf^
tiryach frf^tirasch
Bases in and ^a^t
i. Present.
Participles
182. of
Participles the present have two bases,the Pada and Bha base

n ^fiatf,the Anga base in ^h^"m^ (Accent,Pan. vi. i, 173.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
-J 184. DECLENSION. 83

NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.A. ^K^In addnti

FEM.
SINGULAR.

N. ^^n\adat{t
"c., like

" 183. There is a

very difficultrule accordingto which certain keep
participles the "^n
in the Nom. and Ace. Dual of neuters, and before the \t of the feminine. This rule can

onlybe fullyunderstood by those who are with

acquainted the ten classes of conjugations.
It is this,

I. Participles
of verbs followingthe Bhu, Div, and Chur classes must preserve the "^n.
II. Participles
of verbs followingthe Tud class may or may not preserve the "^n. The
same of the future in
appliesto all participles ^H^syat,and to the participles
of

verbs of the Ad class in ^T d .

III. Participles
of all other verbs must the "Jn.
reject
I. VRl(bhdvat. Nom. and Ace. Dual Neut. *flhft
bhdvantl

dtvyanti.
chordyanti.
II. ^J^tuddt. tuddnti or tudati.
iJ^Tft
^f^T^ (fut.). or Hfa"nft bhavithyati.
bhavishydnti
ydt.
*ffi^ ydnti *ffift
or ydtt.
III. Nom. and Ace. Dual Neut. wrftadatf.
*"d$J\
juhvatt.
sunvatf.

rundhatt.

Mndt. ^^Jdl Jcrinati.

The feminine base is throughoutidentical in form with the Nom. Dual Neut. Hence

HTiftbhdvantt,being,fern.; ij";
n\ tuddntt or fern.;^a"pftae?af/,
^n\tudantstriking, eatin'g,
fern. The feminine base is declined regularly
as a base in \t.
" 184. Another rule,which ought not to be mixed up with the precedingrule,prohibits
the of
strengthening the Anga base throughoutin the present of reduplicated
participles
verbs, except in the Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. Neut., where the insertion of *^n is optional.
With this exception,
these participles
are therefore declined like
really nouns in J(t with
unchangeablebases.
Base giving,from
rjftf^dddat, ^T ddtto give,"J^Tfa
ddddmi,I give.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
MASC. MASC. MASC. NEUT.

N.V. "^TT dddat

A. ^ff dddat am
r "^m dddatau f-
^^ift
dddati f "";nidddatah ? ^^Pndddati
I. ^fndddatd dddadbhih

D. dddate j^lOf
dddadbhydm
dddadbkyah
Ab.
t dddatah
G. dddatdm
J dddat oh
L. dddati ^7^ dddatsu

*0r dddanti.

M
84: DECLENSION.

The same rule appliesto the eating;

participlesvCB^jakshat, waking;
*W4i(jdgrat,
"jfr%J{daridrat,
being poor; ^m^sdsat, commanding; ^iTOT^ chaMsat, shining. But

neut. the
*\*\l(jdgat, worlcL forms Nom. Plur. *\*\fa
jdganti,only.

" 185. ^ftjmkdt,great, ^f^pr^shat,

m. a deer, n. a drop of water, are declined like

of
participles verbs of the Ad class.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. MASC. MASC.

N.V. brihdntau brihdntah

A. brihdntam brihdntau bnhatdh

NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.A.

FEM.

SINGULAR.

N. brihati
'pift
$ of
participle the Ad class,
1 86. if^mahat,great,likewise originally
a

forms its Anga or strong base in

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. MASC. MASC.

N. mahantau "
mahdntah
A. fifmahdntam mahdntau *
mahatdh

I. *T?nrTmahatd t maJiddbhih

D. Hij.n mahat" mahddbhydm

Ab. 1 t mahddbhyah
rT?1T" mahatdh
G. j
JT^WT mahatdm
L. *}lt"fiT
mahati mahatdh
mahdtsu
V. T^"^ mdhan
NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.A.V. mahati
"l^fll
The rest like the masculine.

FEM.
SINGULAR.

N. mahati
*i^rfl

Bases ending in the Suffixes forming their Anga Bases

,

in itc^mant
and

" 187. The possessivesuffixes ifi^ma/ and

^ v"# form their Anga or

strong base in i^ mant and ^ vaw#. They lengthen their vowel in the

Nom. Sing.Masc. These suffixes are of very frequentoccurrence.

- 188. DECLENSION. 85

,
having fire.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
MA8C. MA8C. MA8C.

N. agnimdn agnimantau agnimantah

A. agnimantam "i"/ni, nu nt nu
agnimatah

V. ^ec ft1*1*^ ayniman

NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL.

V. ^ f*ri"iii agnimat agnimatt agnimanti

FEM.
SINGULAR.

N. ^M P*"i*i iflagnimatt

va/ is used i after bases in ^i a and ^J

^ .

Ex. having knowledge.

'^Fffl^jndnavat, vidydvat,having N.
know-

ledge.
But having fire, "^rn^hanumat,
wfi"\H\affnimat, having jaws.
2. After bases ending in nasals, semivowels, or sibilants,
if precededby v a

or ^n d. (Pan.viu. 2, 10.)
Ex. TF^rflpayasvat, having milk. ^R^tf udanvat, having water.
But Pd *H AJyotishmat,having Light. I^IT girvat,having a
T*ft voice.

3. After bases ending in any other consonants, by whatever vowel they may
be preceded.
Ex. f^j^vidyutvaty
having lightning.
There are exceptionsto these rules. (Pan.vni. 2, 9-16.)

" 1 88. Your

Vffl^bhavat, Honour, which is used
frequently in place of the pronoun of

the second person, followed by the third person of the verb, is declined like a noun derived

by "%1(^vat. Native grammarians derive it from HT bhd, with the suffix and
"^1(vat, keep it

distinct from *f33{bhavat, present of *^bhu,to

being,the participle be.

f,Your Honour.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. MASC. MASC.

N. ^^l^bhavdn bhavantau bhavantah

A. HTcf bhavantam bhavantau bhavatah

V. H^*^ bhavan or * bhok

NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.A.V. bhavatf HTfw bhavanti

FEM.
SINGULAR.

N. bhavatt
86 DECLENSION. " 189-

H^Tif bhavat, being,part,present.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. MASC. MASC.

N. H^f^ bhavan H4lu bhavantaw WffJ bhavantah

A. *r4lTbhavantam HTiu bhavantau VTO bhavatah

V.
NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.A.V. "T"toa* H^rftbhavanti Wffitbhavanti

FEM.

SINGULAR.

N. ^T^ift
bhavanti

" 1 80. ^RH ar^af, masc. horse, is declined regularly

like nouns in ^lf vat, except in the
* *r \ ^ ^ _"".__

Norn. Sing.,where it has ^Tf arra. ^Rf^araew in ^R^awarvaw, without a foe,is a

totallydifferent word, and declined like a noun in W^aw; Nom. Sing,^ftl anarvd;
Nom. Dual ^nftTtlManarvdnauj Ace. Sing.^RtTOT anarvdnam; Instr. Sing.^R^TT

anarvand j Instr. Plur. WiT^fHtanarvabhih. The feminine of ^^c^orva^

is ^Jcfdlarvati.

" 190. f^Rl^%a?,

How much ?
^Ti^tyaf,
so much, are declined like bases in

Their feminines are

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. MASC. MASC.

N. f"hm"^
My an fon*iffT
Myaniau ftF^J kiyantah

A. f"*4ri
Myantam fonMiukfyantau f%Tin kiyatah

I. fawn ttya*4 f^rcirf

TciyadbJiydm fmfel MyadbUh
V. fenM^ My an

NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. "fSFTi**yfl* Pqi^nlHya^ fcfi^fn

kiyanti

Bases in ^ir^an (^5(an,ii^man,

191. Words in ^^an have three bases : their Anga or strong base is

; their Bha or weakest base *{n ; and their Pada or middle base ^r a.

Mark besides,
1. That the Nom. Sing. masc. has WT d, not TO^ """($).
2. That the Nom. Sing.neut. has ^r a, not ^r"^an.

3. That the Voc. Sing.neut. may be either identical with the Nominative,
or take *{n.
4. That words ending in i"^man and ^^van keep iceman and ^^van as

their Bha bases,without dropping the ^r a, when there is a consonant

immediatelybefore the ^ man and ^ v"ft. This is to avoid the

concurrence of three consonants, such as ifi^parvn

from
-$ DECLENSION. 87

or *m* dtmn from WTTR^ dtman. This rule appliesonly to words

ending in i^ maw and ^ vaw, not to words ending in simple

"A^ an. Thus TTfl^ takshan forms UWT takshnd ; *JV^ murd/tan,
frjr
mdrdhnd, "c.

5. That in all other words the loss of the V a is optionalin the Loc. Sing.,
and in the Nom. Ace. Voc. Dual of neuters. The feminine,however,
drops the ^r a ; thus TTlftrdjnt.

m. king. Anga, T"K*{rdjdn; Pada, TTHrdja; Bha,

V. "nH nama or HIH"^nd

I. "fiyi ndmnd
D. *TT%n/mne
Ab. "TW ndmnah

G. f^t ndmnah ; ndmnoh ll^li namndm

L. tiif^n^mni or man "Tl*i^

ndmasu

" 192. Nouns in which the suffixes H^wara and ^vara are preceded by
a consonant, such as '3CT^ brahman, m. n. the creator, *T^^ yajvan, m.

f^^an;aw,n. joint,form their Bha base in H^wara and ^va".

brahman, m. creator. Anga, ^WT^ brahman ; Pada, ^w brahmd ;

Bha, ^CJ^ brahman.

88 DECLENSION. " J93~

V. brahman
^t51"r^

I. brahmdnd
9(411111 brahmdbhydm ""fat brahmdbhih

D. fls*"u brahmdne brahmdbhydm brahmdbhyah

Ab. """nt brahmdnah brahmdbhydm brahmdbhyah

G. : brahmdnoh 0141ill!
brahmdndm

brahmdni t brahmdnoh

NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A. brdhmant brdhmdni

V. brdhma or brahman

Decline yajvan, sacrificer; dtman, self ; sudharman,

virtuous.

MfdR^ pratidivan,one who sports,from divyati,

lengthens
the f^cftto ^t^, whenever the is immediatelyfollowed by Nom.
^w w.

Sing. Hfrff^i
pratidivd
; Nom. Plur. Hfrff^H:pratidivdnah
; Ace. Plur.

l pratidivnah ("143).
" 193. Words in ^T"^aw,like TTf^nf/aw, king, form their feminine in ^tf,
droppingthe
^f a before the 5^w; TT|ftra/w^
queen.
Words in ^f^paw, like vT"l"^c?Mflaw,
fisherman, form their feminine in

dhfvart,wife of a fisherman. (See,however, Pan. iv. i, 7,vart.)

Words in W^man, if feminine, are declined like masculines. ^i"i"\daman, fern, rope;
Nom. Sing. ^TTTe?ama,
Ace. ^i*n"i
ddmdnam; but there is an base "fRT rfam"f,
optional Ace.

Sing.^TRT ddmdm. (Pan. iv. i, n; 13.)

" 194. Nouns in ^T"^aw, T"^ man, ^f^van, at the end of compounds,
adjectival may
either use their masculine forms as feminines, or form feminines in ^TT a. Those in ^n^aw,
if in the Bha base they can drop the ^T a before the "^w,may also take fy (Pan. iv. i, 28).
Thus, Nom. Sing. masc. and fern. ^pf*h
sucharmd, having good leather,Nom. Dual

*J-q*n"ul suparvd,^M 5 i"uT suparvdnau

sucharmdnau; ^^T^T : or, Nom. Sing. fern.

sucharmd, Nom. Dual T$*(qsucharme, Plur. ^^Tt sucharmdh "

^1T"T su

suparvdh. Of bahurdjan,having
1"S*^^M^ many kings,the feminine may be,
1. bahurdjd,Dual
"|J"J"1T 4""MMT bahurdjdnau.
2.
"^Jtnn bahurdjd,Dual ^TT% bahurdje.
3. "r^"T9^
bahurdjni,
Dual "J^l^irbahurdjnyau.
dviddmni (Pan. iv. i, 27),having two ropes, is an exception.
Adjectivesin "3"[van,which form their fern, in ^ft van, vffo*{dhivan,
fisherman, a

vtaO dhivarf, *4*\"*"\pivan,

slqO pivari,fat,
may do the same at the end of compounds,or
90 DECLENSION. " 197-

" 197. At the end of a compound, too, ^i^ahan Thus

is irregular.

havinglong days,is declined :

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. ^Krr^T:dirgMhdh * N.A.V. HIM dirghdhdnau N.V. "0"l"H!i:

"{t5l" dirghdhdnah
V. ^iSl^tdfrghdhah A. "0*njg;
dirgMhnah
A. Q I^!"U dirglidhdnam
"fl I. ^ 5 1 ^lfa:dirghdhobhih,
"c.

Feminine, "0"l^dirghdhni
(Pan. vm. 4, 7).

" 198. In derivative compounds with numerals, and with fa vi and ^TR saya, ^j"
is substituted for ^K^aAaw; but in the Loc. Sing, both forms are admitted; e.g.

dvyahnah,produced in two days; Loc. Sing,'gfedvyahne

or'Sjfgdvyahni
or sA^^dvya
(Pan. vi. 3, 1 10.)

" 199. $van, dog, 5^; yuvan, m. young, take sp( "un, ^
^ m.

as their Bha bases. For the rest, they are declined like
regularly,
brahman, m. (Accent,Pan. vi. i, 182.)
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. '^rrW N.A.V. W$svc[nau N.

A. mi"i "odnam A.

V. ^^^" I.

The feminine of ^ "van is ^ww^;

Tgpft of g^ ywvaw, ^f?K yuvatty;
accordingto some grammarians, igftydni.

" 200. W(3i{maghavant the Mighty, a name of Indra,takes W^t^maghon

as its Bha

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. "m"n maghdvd N. A. V. "i^^i"iT maghdvdnau N. "iM^i"it maghdvdnak

A. HM^M maghdvdnam A. #i*T\ni
maghtinah
V. T^^^wM^Aavaw I. *iM"l("?J
maghdvabhih^

The same word may likewise be declined like a masculine with the suffix ^U(vat or lff(mat;
(see^H P**\*"{agnimat.)
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. nim\v{maghdvdn N.A.V. *i^i"JnT

maghdvantau N. *mqnt maghdvantah
A. H^4rt maghdvantam A. HM^rit maghdvatah
V. *i M H"\ mdghavan I. *iM"i(st
maghdvadbhik
The feminine is either H*fl"fl
accordingly maghtinior HV4il) maghavatt.

" 201. '5^jJwsA^ and ^SnNr^

aryamdn, two names of Vedic deities,do not lengthen
their vowel except in the Norn. Sing,and the Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. neut. ; (in this they
follow the bases in ^(inj " 203.) For the rest,they are declined like nouns in ^T"^an ;

(see

* Pan. vm. 2, 69, vart. i; Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 194; but Colebrooke, p. 83, has
dtrghdhdas Nom. Sing.
t Colebrooke, Sanskrit Grammar, p. Si.
 DECLENSION. 91
-
303.

NOM. SING. NOM. PL. ACC. PL. INSTR. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT.

pfahn
pdshan,ptisha, pUshd pdshdnah pdshndh pUshdbhih ptisUni

aryaman, aryama, aryamn aryamd aryamdnah aryamndh aryamdbhih aryamani

Loc. Sing.^(jfaf
pUshnf or "g"((Vr
pdshdni;or, accordingto some, ^f^pUfhi.
(S"r.1. 9, 31.)

" 202. The root "^han, to kill,if used as a noun, follows the same rule; only that
when the vowel between
^h and ^ n
^ h becomes
is dropt, ^gh.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. ACC. PL. INSTR. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT.

^ ha, hd t hanah ghnah : hub hih hdni

J^ghn ^T

brahmahan, ha, ghn brahmaha brahmahdnah brahmayhndh brahmahdbhih brahmahani

Loc. Sing.wwPH brahmaghnt or flw^fcj

brahmahdni.

Bases in ^ in.

J 203. Words in iftinare almost regular;it is to be observed that

1. They drop the ^n at the end of the Pada base.

2. They form the Nom. Sing.masc. in $i; the Nom. Ace. Sing. neut. in

^ i ; and the Nom. Ace. Plur. neut. in ini.

ffif
MASCULINE.
SINGULAR. DUAL.

N. V"ftdhan( dhantndu t dhan(nah

A. Vnf"T dhaninam dhanfnau dhantnah

I. vf^HI dhantnd Vf"T"ridhanibhydm : dhantthih

D. %r"indhanine dhantbhydm J dhan(bhyah

Ab. vP"i"i;
dhanfaah, dhanfohydm dhantthyah
G. .
Vflli dhaninah dhantnoh Vf^RT dhanindm

L. ^fVrf"T
dhanini Vf"T"fh
dhantnok dhantshu

V. VfV| ctoonw dhdninau dhdninah

NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.A. VftfH dhanfni

V.

FEM.
SINGULAR.

N. Vni dhanint

Decline ^Vtf^medhdvin,wise ; ^rfy^ yaisasvin,

glorious
;

loquacious;oirrft^AranX
domg.
Note " These nouns in ^tn, (etymologically
a shortened form of ^*Jcn,) follow
the analogy of in in the Nom. Sing.
nouns ^I"^an (like TTH^r^jan, "TW^"""man)
masc. and neut.,and in the Voc. Sing, and in the Nom. Ace. Plur. neut. They might be
ranged, in fact,with the nouns having unchangeablebases ; for the lengtheningof the
vowel in the Nom. and Ace. Plur. neut. is but a compensation for the absence of the nasal
which is inserted in these cases in all bases exceptthose endingin nasals and semivowels.
N 2
92 DECLENSION. " 204-

Participles
in ^ vas.

"$04. perfectin ^
of the reduplicated
Participles vas have three bases ;

the Pada base.

vdms as the Anga,
^ ush as the Bha, and ^ vas as

Accordingto grammarians,they change the ^s of ^(vas into T(t9if

Sanskrit

the
^" is final,
or if it is followed by terminations beginningwith v^bhand T^S;
(seeJ 173, 131.) But the fact is,that the Pada base is really'^vat, not
vas.

Anga, rurudvdms ; Pada, '^^(rurudvas ; Bha,

V. rurudvan
"^^"f"r^

I. rurudushd rurudvddbhydm rurudvddbhih

D. rurudushe rurudvddbhydm : rurudvddbhyah

Ab. rurudushah rurudvddbhydm rurudvddbhyah

G. rurudushah rurudushoh rurudushdm

L. rurudushi rurudushoh rurudvdtsu

NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL.

rurudushi rurudvdmsi

FEM.

SINGULAR.

N. rurudushi

f 205. Participles
in ^v"5 which insert an ^ z between the reduplicated
root and the termination,drop the ^ i whenever the termination ^ #a$ is

changed into T^wM. Thus

tasthivdn,from 5^n 5/M, to stand, forms the fern. W^J^ttasthushi.

pechivdn,from f^pach9 to cook, forms the fern. ^^joecAw^.
A very common word followingthis declension is vidvan,wise, (for
fVgrir^
vividvdn)
f^fsTSTT^ ; fern,"fagtft
vidushi.

If the root ends in ^ i or ^ ^,this radical vowel is never droptbefore -grtr^,

the contracted form of ^vas. Hence from "ftra",PdHl^K ninivdn; Instr.
ninyushd; fern, ftfg^t
ninyushi.
 $ 207. DECLENSION. 93

Decline the followingparticiples

:

I'ADA MASK. NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR. ACC. PLUK. IN8TR. FLUE.

jufruvas Jusruvdihsah iusruvushah sujruvadbhih

pechivas pechivdn pechivdmsah pechushah pechivadbhih

jagmivas jagmivdn jagmivdnisah jagmushah jagmivadbhih

jaganvas jaganvdn jaganvdmsah jagmushah jaganvadbhih

jaghnivas jaghnivdn jaghnivdmsah jaghnushah jaghnivadbhih

jaghanvdn jaghanvdmsah jaghnushah jaghanvadbhih

Bases in ^^ ivas.

^ 206. Bases in (termination

of the form
comparative) their

Anga base in ^1^ iyd

Pada and Bha base ?, heavier ; Anga base

MASCULINE.

SINGULAR.

N. * IO *4 1"\ gdriydn gdrfydmsau t gdriydmsah

A. *iO"*i"gdriydmsam gdriydrhsau gdriyasah

V.

I. gdriyasd gdriyobhydm "c.

gdriyobhlhy
NEUTER.

SINGULAR.

N. TJSNT:gdriyah gdriyasi gdriydthsi

FEM.

SINGULAR.

N. gdriyasi

Miscellaneous Nouns with changeableConsonantal Bases.

" 207. Words ending in foot,retain ^T^^^c?

"m^tfc?, as Anga and Pada base, but shorten
it to tj^ad as Bha base.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.V. supddau t supddah (Anga)

A. tjHi^
supddam supddau gtf^:supadah (Bha)
I. ^pllfk:
supddbhih (Pada)

*
^m changed into "^n according to " 136.
94: DECLENSION.

The feminine is either tjm'^swpad or *JM"{1

supadi(Pan. iv. i, 8)j but a metre consisting
of two feet is called PrfM^I
dvipadd.
" 208. "Words ending in vdh, carrying,
^TT^ retain
^T^ vdh as Anga and Pada base,but
shorten it to uh
"3fi| as Bha base. The fern, is ^t uU.

Final
^ h is interchangeablewith ^dh, "?$,"ff. (See " 128 ; 174, 8.)
The "35w of "^ uh forms Vriddhi with a preceding ^ a or ^5TT a (" 46). Thus (4HI'41"
visvavdh,upholderof the universe. (Accent,Pan. vi. 1, 171.)
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.V. n*"a"u visvavdt

A. ftrflBRT^
visvavdham J mfoauhdh

I.

" 209. *yti"h# foetavdh is further forming its Pada

irregular, base in
^(ras, and retain-
ing

it in the Nom. and Voc. Sing.;e.g. Nom.Voc. i^n"*\*svetavclh;

Ace. HI rH I" svetavdham "

Instr. foetauhd
*%i\ls\ ; Instr. Plur. "y n "f\
fa 3vetavobhfy,";c.;
Loc. Plur.^JCm^svetavahsu.

Some grammarians allow 5m"u^" instead

tivetavdh, of *yiiiF fvetauh,in all the Bha cases

(Sar. i. 9, 14),and likewise "aii^t 6vtiavah in Voc. Sing.

" 210. A more important compound with ^T^r^A is w\s^anaduh, an ox, (i.e.a cart-

drawer.) It has three bases : i. The Anga base

'Wisi^ anadvdh; 2. The Pada base iHHJ^.
anadudj 3. The Bha base "wnj^. anaduh.

It is besides
irregular in the Nom. and Voc. Sing.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. anadvdn
'^5HJI"^ N. A.V. ^SMil^T
anadvdhau N. xinsi^t anadvdhah

V. w\s*{anadvan I. D. Ab. *f"is"i anadudbhydm A. vins^t anaduhah

A. 'sins i ^ anadvdham G. L. vcnj^lt

anaduhoh I. ^"isf": anadudbhih
I. "*in^l"T anaduhd L. viH^rg anadutsu
If used as a neuter, at the end of a compound, it forms
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. ^InJ^ anadud w n "^1 anaduM "wi$\^anadvdmhi

The rest like the masculine.

The feminine is ^ini^ anaduM or ^nji^lanadvdhi (Pan. vn. i, 98,vart.)-

" 2ii. is plural,and

invariably makes its ^r long in the
^r^ap} water, a

Anga base, and substitutes j(tfor T^p before an affix beginningwith *T bh.

Plural : Nom. ^TTTJ: dpah,Ace. ^R: apdfy,Instr. ^Hfe:adbhih,,Loc. ^n" apsu.

(Accent,
Pan. vi. i, 171.)
In composition^r^ap is said to form WF^svdp, Nom. Sing.masc. and

fern.,having good water ; Ace. ^TR svdpam ; Instr. ^m svapd,"c. Nom.

Plur. ^rro svdpafy; Ace. ^^ svapah,; Instr. ^fe: svadbhili,"c. The

neuter forms the Nom. Sing, ^f^svap; Nom. Plur. ^ffttsvampi or ^fft
svdmpi, accordingto different interpretations
of Panini. (Colebrooke,
p. 101,
note.) The Sarasvati (i.9, 62) gives ^ift ri^HHf*!svdmpi taddgdni,tanks
with good water.
-" 214. DECLENSION. 95

" 212. "p^pwhs,man, has three bases: i. The Anga base ^^pumdrhs ; 2. The Pada
base Jjftpum;3. The Bha base ty^pums. (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 171.)
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N" ^mpumdn N.A.V. pumdmsau

;jnitn N. y\\*\pumdmsah
V. tjfr^
puman I.D. Ab. pumbhyim
y*lf A. ipn pumsdh
A.. pumdmsam
*jptt G. L. tpffcjjumsrfA I.

I. nuwsa L.

The Loc. Plur. is written "pumsu, not jg^uwwAw or "f^punsu (" 100, note). The Sarasvatt

gives ^Qpunkshu(1.9,70). Panini (vin. 3, 58) says that "^num only, not Anusvara in

general,does not prevent the change of ^s into ^*A,- and therefore that change does not

take place in "j(V"^j

svhinsu and ^^puihsu.
In the first,"^n is radical,
not inserted ; in the

second,the Anusvara represents an original

*^m. Cf. Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 186 :

Mi"l("ir"i
In compositionit is declined in the same manner if used in the masc. or fern, gender.
As a neuter it is,Nona. Sing.SjyTsupum, Nom. Dual 4JJJ40 supumsi, Nom. Plur. 4J^Hif"H
supumdmsi.

" 213. f^div or f. sky,is declined

IJtfyu, as follows, (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 171; 183):
Base flj^rfw,
l[dyu. (See " 219.)
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. J"ldyauh N.A.V. ""$ dtiau N. %t divah

A. ftfdfoam I. D. Ab. ^"rfdydbhydm A. f^T.divdh

I. f"Jdivd G.L. fffrldivfy I.

D. f^rftW D.Ab.

Ab. G. f^: divdh G. i^f divdm

L. f^ftdM L. ^5 dyushu
V. ifttrfyaSA
Another base Sift
c?yois declined as a base ending in a vowel, and follows the paradigm
of *ft#o,
" 219. (See Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p.. 138.)

Compounds like gft^sttefaj,

having a good sky, are declined in the masc. and fern, like

Hence ^flrtsudyauh, *jfq4

sudivam, "c.

In the neuter they form Nom. Ace. Voc. Sing. ^IJ sudyu, having a good sky ; Dual

sudivt; Plur. ^f^r"c

sudivi.

" 214. A number of words in Sanskrit are what Greek grammarians would call

Metaplasia,i. e. they exist under two forms, each followinga different declension, but one

being deficient in the Sarvanamasthana cases, i.e. Nom. Voc. Ace. Sing,and Dual, Nom.
Voc. Plur.,and Nom. Voc. Ace. Plur. of neuters. (Pan. vi. i, 63.) Thus

DEFECTIVE BASE : BASE DECLINED THROUGHOUT :

*i. ^sran^asan,n. blood ; ^np^osn;, n.

*2. SHW^ dsan, n. face ; ^TT^T dsyayn.
*3- f^ udan, n. water ; "3^1 udaka, n.

4. datf m. tooth; Ace. PI. ^TH datdh; ^rfdanta,m.

* No accent on Vibhakti. (Pan. vi. i, 171.)

 96 DECLENSION. 315-

*5- "*^ doshan,(m.) n. arm ; dos, m. n.

6. *"(nas,f. nose ; Ace. PL "TOt nasdhj "TTftl"!fT

ndsikd,f.

7. m's, f. night ; Ace. PL f"T$tt

fff^T nisdh; P"i^||
msa, f.

8. Tl^ac?,m. foot; Ace. PL T^t paddh; Ttff$pdda,m.

f. f; Loc. PL ipBpritsu; pritand,f.
9. *p^.pr**"army
10. TT^m^ms, n. meat^ ; mdmsa, n.

11. TT^mas, m. month ||; TPHt m.

*I2. TO"l yafam, n- liverlf;

*I3" "^g"iyushan,
m. pea-soup;

*I4. ^T"F^ sakan, n. ordure;

15. ^ SWM, n. ridge; n.

16. ^ An'c?,
n. (m.); Gen. Sing, hriddh; hridaya,n.

Hence in

No. I. N.V. A. asrik only;

Sing.is ^TCpJ? asrinjior asdni.

N.V. A. Dual is ~"m"ilasrijionly; amj a or

N.V. Plur. is vttjf"i

asrinji
only ; Du.^tpttlT or^W^asabhydm.
asrigbhydm
No. 4. N. A.V. Sing.ia^jn^^dantah,am, a, only; A. Plur. drlld dantdn or "5H

N.V. A. Dual is tflfr

dantau only; " ,
but * I. Sing.tpf"Tdantena or tpTTrfa^.
N.V. Plur. is "fffTi
dantdh only; I. Dual ^in"ri
dantdbhydm or ^WT dadbhydm.
No. 1 1. N. A.V. Sing.isiran,0^Tj0^masaA," only; A. Plur. mdsdn
TT^rr"^ or TTOJ mdsah.

N.V. A. Dual is TPHT mdsau only; but I. Sing.^TO"T mdsena or Hlfll wwfoa.

N .V. Plur. is wia5"fAonly ; I. Dual mdsdbhydm or *rn*lima"%am.

*n"T**rf

No. 13. N. A.V. Sing,is only; fA. Plur.

"^m*\ yushdn or ^{W* yushnah.
,

N. A.V. Dual is yushau only ; but ^ I. Sing.^W yushena ^Ul||yushnd. or

N.V. Plur. is T yusMh only; [I.Du. ^HI "M Iyushdbhydmor "^*ri-shabhydm.

L. Sing.T^yws^e or0^U!J-s^am or "ft5t "

Grammarians differ on the exact meaning of Panini's rule ; and forms such as

doshant, Nom. Dual Neut., would seem to show that in the Nom. Ace. Voc. Dual the base

^[***{doshan
may be used. (See Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. pp. 107, 131, 141, 144.) By some the

rule is restricted to the Veda.

2. Bases ending in Vowels.

315. Bases ending in vowels may be subdivided into two classes :

1. Bases ending in vowels, except derivative ^r a and ^TT d.

any
2. Bases ending in derivative w a and ^TT d.

* No accent on Vibhakti. (Pan.vi. i, 171.) t Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. p. 131.

J Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 141. |)The Sarasvati givesall cases of

HT^mas (i.6,35).
IF Pan. vi. 1,63.
98 DECLENSION. 219-

If bases in J? ai,*K\ o, W au are to be declined as neuters at the end of compounds, they

shorten 1* ai to
^ *, and ^n o and w au to T u, and are then declined like neuters in ^" and
^ u. The masculine forms, however, are equallyallowed (ifthe base is masculine)in all

cases except the Nom. Ace. Voc. Sing. Dual and Plural. Hence Instr. Sing.neut. 4j(XlJJI
surind or ^CHTT surdyd; but only tj*j"iuwmma.

" 219. rndyo, fern, heaven, is declined like *ft#o.It coincides in the Nom. and Voc.

Sing, with f^^div,

sky,but differsfrom it in all other cases. (" 213.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. N dyauh dydvah
vau

A. f dydm*
I. dydvd dy6bhih
D. dydve yrfbhydm
dy6bhyah
Abb. 1 ,

G
flffc
dydshu
L.

V. : dyauh

Forms of dyu which occur in the Rig-veda:

Sing.N. dyausj A.d{vam,dydm; I. divd(dtvd,
by day); D.dive*; G.divdh,dy6"h;
dydm; V. dyaus (Rv. vi. 51, 5). Plur. N. dydvahz
A. dyun ; I. dyubhih. Dual N. dydvd.
Being used compound Inrfyo forms its neuter base as Igdyu; e.g.
at the end of a

Dual
WQpradyu,eminentlycelestial, H"*l1 pradyuni,Plur. WS^ipradyuni (Siddh.-Kaum.
vol. i. pp. 144, 145); while from the
"R^cfo'p neuter adjective
was, as we saw, ^?T sudyu,
having a good sky, Dual ^jP^cfl sudivi,Plur. tJ^Tq sudivi (Colebr.pp. 67,73). IRSpradyu,
as a neuter, cannot take the optionalmasculine cases (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 145).
Note " There are no real nouns ending in U e, though grammarians imaginesuch words

as JJi eh,the sun, "TBR^

udyadeh, the rising sun ; Nom. Dual o"^"4l udyadayau, Nom. Plur.

udyadayah.
"9'CI^Mt

Bases in $t and -31 ti.

i. MonosyllabicBases in^iand liu, being both Masculine and Feminine.

(A.) By themselves.

" 220. Monosyllabicbases, derived from verbs without any suffix,

like vftdM,thinking,
"aft
krt, buying,f5lu, cutting,take the same terminations as consonantal bases. Th"

remain unchanged before terminations beginningwith consonants, but change final fy am

"31^ into ^*{iyand before vowels. (Pan. 4, 82,83.) Their Vocative is the
T^MU, vi. same

as their Nominative.

(B.) At the end of compounds.

" 221. These monosyllabicbases rarelyoccur except at the end of compounds. He

vi. i, 93.
-
221. DECLENSION. 99

they may either change \t and "314 into Iftiyand T^W, or into ^y and ^[r. They
change it
1. Into ^(iy and
T^wr.-
a. If the first member of the compound forms the predicateof the second, and the

second maintains its nominal character. Thus M4,*Hl:paramanth, the best leader,

Ace. Sing. M*"I Tn4 paramaniyam. Here "ifanihis treated as a noun, and seems

to have lost its verbal character. ^T^ftt

fuddhadhth, a pure thinker, a man of pure

thought,Ace. Sing, ^pgfftri

tuddhadhiyam;"$":kudhth, a man of bad thought,
Ace. Sing.Tffvni
kudhiyam. (Sar.)
b. If tyand ""tt are precededby two radical initialconsonants. ^"M(\ljalakrth, buyer a

of water, makes Ace. Sing."i ofwjalakriyam. Itpftt w

susrth, ell faring, Sing.
Ace.

tj^scq
sutriyam. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 1 19.) This is a merelyphoneticchange,
intended to facilitatepronunciation.(Pan. vi. 4, 82.)

Into and ^v, under all other circumstances, i.e. wherever the bases
monosyllabic
2. ^y
retain their verbal character. i|WUfi:
grdmanih,leader of a Ace. Sing.iJIHJUJ
village,
grdmanyam; here n\*\grdma is not the of "TTt nth,but is
predicate governedby "^ nth,
which retains so far its verbal character. U"fh pradhth,thinkingin a high degree,Ace.

Sing.T"Qpradhyam; here IT pro, is a prepositionbelongingto "ftdht,which retains

its verbal nature. ""3ftl
unnth,leading out, Ace. Sing."ttQunnyam; here ^ ud is

a prepositionbelonging to "ftnt. Though ^t is preceded by two consonants, one

only belongsto the root. ^P^* suddhadhth (ifa Tatpurusha compound), thinking

pure things,would form and thus

the Ace. Sing. ygSUts'uddhadhyam, be distinguished
from ^JSVfc
suddhadhih (as a Karmadharaya compound), a pure thinker,or as a

Bahuvrihi compound, a man possessedof pure thoughts (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 119),

which both have ^j-sfrra
suddhadhiyamfor their accusative. The general idea which
*
suggested the distinction between bases changingtheir final t and "31u either into

^{iy and T^WP, or into ^T y and \v, seems to have been that the former were treated

as real monosyllabic
nouns that might be used by themselves (*fh
dht/i, a thinker),or
in such compounds as a noun admits of (^ft"
sudhih*, a good thinker; SI3"*J*h
Juddhadhih,a pure thinker or pure thoughted); while the latter always retained
somewhat of their verbal character,and could therefore not be used by themselves,
but only at the end of compounds, preceded either by a preposition(HVfcpradhth,
providens)
or by a noun which was governed by them. The nouns in which ^t and
"3Su stand after two radical consonants form an exceptionto this generalrule,which
exceptionadmits, however, of a phonetic explanation(" 330),so that the only real

exceptionwould be in the case of certain compounds ending in ^bhu. Thus ^bhu

vowels, whether it be verbal nominal. (Pan. 85.)
becomes *$^bhuv before or vi. 4,

Ex. Ace. Sing, ^^^t svayambhuvam. (Sar.i. 6,61.

^*OJ" svayambhuh, self-existing,
Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 119.) Not, however, in ^tpjtrarshdbhuh,frog, Ace. Sing.
^TV^ varshdbhvam (Pan.vi. 4, 84), and in some other compounds, such as "R*Jt
karabhuh or ^TT^JtMrabhuh, nail,^pT*Jt
punarbhuh, re-born, '^J! drinbhuJt,thunder-
bolt.

(Pan.vi. 4, 84,vart.)

sudhth is never to be treated as a verbal compound, but always forms Ace. Sing.
*jf"f*f
sudhiyam,"c., as if it were a Karmadharaya compound. (Pan. vi. 4, 85.)
O 2
100 DECLENSION. " 222.

2. Polysyllabic Bases in ^ i and ^1 u.

" 222. Polysyllabic bases in ^ and "3! u being both masculine and feminine, such as

TJtfh papih, protector, the tpftj yayih, road, and nrituh, dancer, declined like
sun, "JTg are

the verbal compounds JT^fh pradhfh and ^3T"$* vrikshaluh, that

except

1. they form the Ace. Sing, in \tm and ^

2. they form the Ace. Plur. in %*{in an

Remember also, that those in \i form the LOG. Sing, in ^ f, not in

vdtapramih, antelope, be declined like i papth but if derived by

may ;

i/), it may entirely follow the verbal Wftlpradhih (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. p. 1 16). The same

applies to nouns like 'Jifttsutih, wishing for a son ;

^^* sukhih, wishing for pleasure.

They follow the verbal H*Tfc pradhih throughout, but they have their Gen. and Abl. Sing.

in "3*: uhj ^IJt sutyuh (Siddh.-Kaum. vol.

i.p. 120). If the final long \i is preceded by

two consonants, it is changed before vowels into ^"'y. Ex. ^^tt sushkih,

sushkiyau, "c.
$-222. DECLENSION. 101

*"$ I
" fe" =
I 5 s
.

$
a
^ ,2

ll m
n
a

*4"i
rS* "

S
58 """
"""""""S i
ftlf""|.|"ii
5-.

Iffll ="
Ht'Mll^8- s,
CH

i
"s
K

ll
S ".

02

"-
a

H
if

n
102 DECLENSION". 222-

1-
*

"a
-J 224. DECLENSION. 103

" 223. All these compounds may be used without any change, whether they refer to

nouns in the masculine or in the feminine gender. If the head-boroughor the sweeper

should be of the female sex, the Dat. Sing, would stillbe t(i*i"w f$9Ryrdmanye striyai,
'4"4c4i4 0^1)khalapve striyai(Kasika i. 4, 3). Sometimes, however, if the meaning of a

compound is such that it may by itselfbe applied to a woman as well as to a man, e. g.

mftl pradhih,thinking, some grammarians allow such compounds to be declined in the

feminine, like A^f\l lakshmih,except in the Ace. Sing, and Plur.,where they take V am

and VJ ah; TW pradhyam, TtW pradhyah, not IPffpradhtm

ortpftlpradhth
(Siddh.-Kaum.
vol. i. p. 136). A similar argument is appliedto ^Tjt punarbhuh, if it means a woman

married a second time. It may then form its Vocative ^ ^"f^he punarbhu (Siddh.-Kaum.
vol. I. p. 138),and take the Jivefullerfeminine terminations (" 224).

MASC. AND FEM. FEM. ONLY.

SINGULAR. SINGULAR.

N. m: pradhih radhih

A. 1W pradhyam TTWT pradhyam

I. TRflT pradhyd TFtR pradhyd
D. Uttfr
pradhye or Tn*I pradhyai
Ab. 1TUK pradhyah or 1HTK pradhydh
G. TWt pradhyah or IHflTtpradhydh

L. yfapradhyi or TTW pradhydm

V. TVfcpradhih or Tjfapradhi
DUAL. DUAL.

N. A.V. Jiwft
pradhyau UW pradhyau
I.D.Ab. IwNff pradhibhydm inft"ri
pradhibhydm
G. L. Jn4h pradhyoh H**fopradhyoh

N. IT^IJ pradhyah pradhyah

A. IT^n pradhyah pradhyah
I. TnfHWt^rarfAt^AtA JUfffir.
pradhibhih
D.Ab. lrft*Kpradhibhyah IWh'K pradhibhyah
G. HWT pradhydm or MM)"TIpradhindm
L. lT"fh|
pradhishu

i. MonosyllabicBases in \\ and ^su, det?z^Feminine only.

224. Bases like "ft c?^z,intellect,

^ft srz, happiness,^t Ar?, shame,
"rt 5A^, fear,and ^6Ar^, brow, may be declined throughout exactlylike
the monosyllabicbases in ^" and "35 ^, such Their only
as
"jf"2,a cutter.

peculiarity
consists in their admitting a number of optionalforms in the

Dat Abl. Gen. and Loc. Sing,and Gen. Plur. These be called the five
may
fullerfeminine terminations in ^ ai, ^r: dh, ^rn ah, ^f am, and ?ffndm.
104 DECLENSION. I 225-

Monosyllabic, Optional fuller Monosyllabic, Optional fuller

fern. only. forms. fern. only. forms.

thought. earth.

SINGULAR. SINGULAR.

N. tf : dhih
A. fVrfdhiyam bhuvam

I. fwr dhiya
fVni dhiyai bhuvai

Ab. to: dhiydh tot: dhiydh bhuvdh : bhuvdh

G. to: : dhiydh bhuvdh

L. dhiydm bhuvi

V. vT bhuh

DUAL. DUAL.

bhuvau

I.D. Ab. tf"ridhibhydm bhtibhydm

G.L. tot: bhuvofy
PLURAL. PLURAL.

N. to t bhilvah

A. to: dhiyah ; bhuvah,

D.Ab. "rfattdhibhydh : bhubhydh

G. tot dhiyam bhuvam $tffbhundm
L. dhishu
-qfar bhushu

2. Bases
Polysyllabic in ^ i "wc? "31u, beingFeminine only.
f 225. (i)These bases always take the full feminine terminations.

(2)They change their final ^i and ^1 u into

T^y and
"^v before terminations

beginningwith vowels.

(3)They take
n^m and ^ s as the terminations of the Ace. Sing,and Plural.

(4)They shorten their final ^i and "35 u in the Vocative Singular.

(5)Remember that most nouns in ^i have no
^5 in the Nom. Sing.,while
those in "31 u have it.

Note " Some nouns in \f take ^s in the Nom. Sing.: ^T^h avih, not desiring
(applied
to women) ; o5TS*rhlakshmih,goddessof prosperity tarfh,boat ; "rf^t:
; fTtt: tantrth,
lute.

Versus memorialis : ^^c*y1rf'OH*"^Vl'

(Sar.p. 18 a.)

Base T^nadi and Base '^vadhiland

^g^nady.
SINGULAR. SINGULAR.
FEM. FEM.

N. ^ nadi N. Tf:
vadhd-h
A. "Tcft'
nadi-m A. 'zr^vadhu-m
I. "^ITT nady-d I. efsen vadhv-d
106 DECLENSION. 326"

excluding the fuller terminations (*Zai, ^\\dh, ^TT dm, Iffworn)* for the masculine, or the

simple terminations (*?e, VK ah, ^STt ah, \ i, ^TT dm] for the feminine. The same applies to
the compound ^pfhsudhih, when used as a substantive, good intellect.

If the same compounds are used as neuters, they shorten the final \i or "31 u of their

base, and are declined like ^tft!vdri and

*g[mridu, with this difference, however, that in

the Inst. Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc. Sing. Dual and Plural they optionally take the masculine
may

forms.

Optional forms for neuters, except

Masc. and Pern. Optional fuller forms.
Nom. Ace. Voc.

good-tho ughted.
SINGULAR. SINGULAR. SINGULAR.

N. gift:sudhih
A. gf^R sudhiyam sudhi

I. gfaxrrsudhiyd sudhind

D. *jfv*r
sudhiye sudhiyai sudhine

Ab. gftrosudhiyah ; sudhiyah : sudhinah

G. gftrc:sudhiyah gfw: sudhiyah : sudhinah

L. gfvftrsudhiyi "ffipti
sudhiydm sudhini

V. or gv
DUAL. DUAL. DUAL.

N. A.V. sudhiyau sudhini

I. D. Ab. sudhibhydm or gfv"lfsudhibhydm

G. L. or 4jf\f"fU
sudhinofy

PLUBAL. PLURAL. PLURAL.

N.V. sudhiyafy sudhini

A. : sudhiyah, sudhini

I. : sudUbhih, sudhibhify
D. : sudhibhyah sudhibhyah

Ab.^ft"i:sudhibhyafy sudhibhyah
G. tjfimi
sudhiydm sudhindm sudhindm

L. "T^ sudhishu sudhishu

* I find which these fuller terminations excluded. In

can no authorityby are

bahusreyasf, the feminine "^WJ1 sreyasi retains its feminine character (naditva} throughout
(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 116); and the same is distinctly maintained for the compound
TWffc pradhih, possessed of distinguished intellect, if used as a masculine (Siddh.-Kaum.
vol. i. p. 119),
 DECLENSION. 107

Maso. and Fern. Optional fuller forma. Optional forma for neut/ra, except
Norn. Ace. Voc.

with beautiful brows.

SINGULAR. SINGULAR. SINGULAR.

N. subhrtih subhru
g^
A. subhruvam
^subhru
I. subhruvd or subhrund
g^WT
D. subhruve subhruvai or TT^JTTT subhrune
Ab. subhruvah subhruvdh
^^T! or
g^!K subhrunah
G. subhruvaJjt g"^r:subhruvdh or
g^Trn subhrunah
L. subhruvi
g^f subhruvdm or "fiu subhruni
V. subhrufy
DUAL. DUAL. DUAL.
N. A. V. subhruvau subhruni
I. D. Ab. T subhrubhydm subhrubhydm
G.L. subhruvoh subhrunok
PLURAL. PLURAL. PLURAL.
N.V. subhruvafy subhrum
A. subhruvah subhruni
I. subhrubhih : subhrubhih
D. subhrubhyah : subhrubhyah
Ab. subhrubhyah t subhrubhyah
G. subhruvam f subhrundm
L. subhrushu subhrushu

Compoundsendingin Polysyllabic
Feminine Bases in \ i and "3! ti.

" 227. Feminine nouns like "T3(twac?f

and ^^c^flmw may form the last portionof pounds
com-

which are used in the masculine gender. Thus ^^qtttbahusreyasi, a man who

has many auspiciousqualities

(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. pp. 116,117),and xi Pn atichamv, one -s^
who is hetter than an army (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. 123),are declined in the masculine and
p.
feminine :

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. H^^^til
bahusreyasi *
bahusreyasyau bahufreyasyah
"i^^"4**"t
A. ^T? ^nTOT bahusreyasim bahusreyasyau ~TS1smtO"^
bahusreyasin
I. bahus'reyasyd ^HSHnftfat
bahusreyastbhydm bahusreyastbhih
D. bahusreyasyai Vin bahusreyasibhyah
Ab. t bahusreyasydh bahusreyastbhydm 1 bahu^reyas(bhyah

G. bahusreyasydh bahusreyasyoh T bahuSreyastndm

L. ^M^l bahusreyasydm bahusreyasyoh ^^'"Mil^lM
bahufreyastshu
V. bahusreyasi bahusreyasyau 1"sJ^^^^yt bahu"reyasyah

From f6"*ili
lakshmfy,the Nom. Sing, would be i atilakshmty.
P 2
108 DECLENSION.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. ^fflT^nTt
atichamuh atichamvau atichamvah

A. ^fftT^f^atichamum atichamvau atichamun

I. ^rfif^*^Tatichamvd atichamubhydm : atichamubhih

D. *iiPfi"^*^
atichamvai atichamubhydm i atichamubhyah
Ab.^rfn^^iJ atichamvah atichamubhydm atichamubhyah
G. vtPfl-s*"u:
atichamvah atichamvofy atichamundm

L. wPrr*f*"lT
atichamvdm atichamvoh atichamushu

V. 'SfPtf'i'J
atichamu atichamvau '*atichamvah*

Nouns like Jcumdrt,a man who behaves like a girl,are declined like

bahusreyasi,except in the Ace. Sing, and Plur.,where they form cjj*u*q

kumdryam and

kumdryah. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. pp. 118, 119.)

woman, is declined like only that

"T^ w"c?^, the accumula-
tion
,

of four consonants is avoided by the regularinsertion of an ^ i, e. g.

f^fT striyd,and not *?m 5/rya. Remember also two optionalforms in the

Ace. Sing,and Plur.

Base npftstrt
and (Accent,
ffa*{striy. Pan.vi. i, 168.)
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. Tfiift stri N.A.V. P^j4istriyau N. (tfl*""

striyah
A. ^pff
sfrzm or ffepT
striyam I. D. Ab. ^t^TfstribhydmA. ^jjjfhs^rzA Q^i or striyah
I. ffam striyd G.L. f^|4fl:
striydh I. ^ftfW:stribhih

D. "^^ striyai D. Ab. ^ft"i:stribhydh

Ab. G. f^TTt striydh G. ^lillis^/m
(P .
1 . 4, 5)

L. f^RT striydm L. ^1n strishu

V. %"^ (Pan. i. 4, 4)

" 229. When ^jfl's^

forms the last portion of a compound, and has to be treated as a

masculine, feminine, and neuter, the following

forms occur :

SINGULAR.

N. t atistrih \\atistrih atistri

atistrim or atistrim or
A. atistri
atistriyam atistriyam
ffrf atistrind
I. atistrind ^rPrfi^flJn
atistriyd

atistriyai
or atistrine or

D. atistraye
atistraye atistraye

atistriydh
or \latistrinah or

Ab.G. J atistreh
t atistrefy L ^Pfi^t*
atistreh

atistriyamor \ 'SiPi
if^jjffijT
atistrini or

L. atistrau 1 r
"JH Pri
^ T atistrau L ^Itf atistrau

V. atistre atistre atistre

* The neuter is said to be N.A.V. Sing,o^^ilitfl N.A.V.

bahusreyasi, Dual "rj^l*lt(l
N. A.V.
bahusreyasini, Plur. ^?^"4tflP"r Dat. Sing.
bahusreyasini,
bahusreyasyai(-sye?) or -sfoe,
"c.
-J 230. DECLENSION. 109

DUAL.

MASC. FEM. NEC*.

N.A.V. atistriyau atistriyau In i atistrini

I.D.Ab. atistribhydm atistribhydm atistribhydm

G.L. atistriyoh t atistriyoh t atistrinoh

PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N.V. atistrayah i atistrayah tu atistrtni

atistrin or atistrih or
A. atistrini
atistriyah t atistriyah
I. '.atistribhih atistribhih atistribhih

D.Ab. atistribhyah, J atistribhyah atistribhyah

G. F atistrindm atistrindm f atistrindm

L. atistrishu atistrishu atistrishu

In the masculine final ^fisshortened to ^t,and the compound declined like "="(%.
kavih,
except in the Nom. Acc.Voc. and Gen. Loc. Dual. In the Ace. Sing, and Plur. optional

forms are admitted. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. p. 134.)

The feminine may be the same as the masculine, except in the Instr. Sing,and Ace. Plur.,
but it may likewise be declined like ^ft stri in the Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc. Sing.

The neuter has the usual optionalforms.

Bases in ^ i and "3 u, Masculine,Feminine, Neuter.

" 230. There are masculine,feminine,and neuter bases in ^ i and ^ u.

They are of frequent occurrence, and should be carefullycommitted to

memory.

Adjectivesin \i are declined like substantives,only that the masculine

may be
optionally substituted for the neuter in all cases except the Nom.
and Ace. Sing.; Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual and Plur. Ex. wfa: suchify,
masc.

bright; suchih, fern. ; ^jfa

^fVi: suchi,neut.
The same in
appliesto adjectives ^ u, except that they may form their

feminine either without any change, or by adding ^ t. Thus P$IK laghuh,

is
light, in the fern, either laghuh,to be declined feminine,or cflMl
?5T[: as a

laghvi,
to be declined like "T^tnadi.
If the final T u is preceded by more than one consonant, the fern, does
not take ^z. Thus pale; fern. HTJJpdnduh.
ifl'gpdndu,
Some in
adjectives ~su lengthen their vowel in the fern.,and are then
declined like ^v: vadhufy. Thus T}IJ:
pahguh, lame; fern, tpj: pangufy.

Likewise ^^: kurufy,a Kuru ; fern. ^^: kurufy: some compounds ending in
"gi^: uruh, thigh,such a" "qwljc: vdmoruh, with handsome thighs,fern.
5 vdmorufy. ..
110 DECLENSION. " 23"-
Bases in Bases in
SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. NEUT.

Base " **3"x

15
**W
15
*^J

\_kavi,
poet matt, thought vdri,water mridu, soft mridu, soft mridu, soft

N.
J cFf%: *rfitt
[kav{-h mati-h mridu-h mridu-h mridu

J cfff^ Jffif
A.
I kavi-m mati-m mridu-m mridu-m mridu

I.
\kavi-nd maty-a vdri-nd mridu-nd mridv-d mridu-nd

D.
J ofi'"JM miTJmatdy-eoT "nftffl *t^cf ^W mriddv-e or *J^Tmridu-ne or

[kavdy-e TW maty -at vdri-ne mriddv-e ^ mridv-ai *f$3mriddv-e

f^i^J
i
Tlf J mate-h or mridd-h or mridu-nah
^JjpT* or
Ab.G. .

[kave'-h TrPTFt maty-dh vari-nah mrid6-h " mridv-dh ipjfc

mridd-h

mridau or mridu-ni
IJ?'*T or
L.
\_kavau mf( maty -dm vari-ni mridau T mridv-am f^T mridau

or
V.
mate ^ftv/re* mr/c?o
DUAL.
*nft Ifgft
N.A.V.
\kavi wia/^ vdri-nt mridu mridu mridu-nf

I.D.Ab.
L kavi-bhydmmatt-bhydm vdri-bhydm mridu-bhydmmridu-bhydm mridu-bhydm
f^ffr* T?ftt "4ir"UUU Jpftt "pftt JJgrfttmn'c?M-
G.L.
[A:at?y-^A maty-6h vdri-noh mridv-6h mridv-dh JJ^tt
mridv-dh
PLURAL.

J ofT^TIJ TiHT* ^TXVf% *pf^* 'J^*

N.V.
[Aravay-fl/i
matdy-ah vari-ni mriddv-ah mriddv-ah mr

J "^T*^ fffti ^tx^ftr "jg"^ ^51

A.
[A:fli?"-w
mati-h vdri-ni mridu-n mridu-h

I.
matt-bhih vdri-bhih mridu-bhih mridu-bhih mridu-bhih

D.Ab. IS**
[kav{-bhyahmati-bhyah vdri-bhyah
mridu-bhyah mridu-bhyah mridu-bhyah

G.
[kavi-nam f mati-ndm vdri-ndm mridu-ndm mridu-ndm mridu-nam

L.
r^rf^r^ ^^ '4if"y *gj$ "j^5 If1!!
[kawi-shu mati-shu vdri-shu mridu-shu mridu-shu mridu-shu

* The Guna in the Voc. Sing,of neuters in ^ i,TM, ^[rt, is approved by Madhyandini
Vyaghrapad, as may be seen from the followingverse : ""iW"T 'iJ5ri;T^'^^TT
^TTIT 7HIT

r: n

t Nouns ending in short

^i,I'M, ^Jn, and ^Ta, and having the accent on these vowels,
may throw the accent on "*tindmin the Gen. Plur. (Pan.vi. i, 177). Hence matf'ndm,
or,

more usually,matindm.
% The lines of separationplaced in the transcribed intended to divide
paradigmsare not
-

233. DECLENSION. Ill

" 231. ^ifif

kati,how many, lf?fyati,as many (relat.),
and Tffw tati,so
many, are used
in the Plural only,and take no terminations in the Nom. and Ace. Plural. For the rest,

they are declined like *lifa

kavi, and without distinction of gender.
Nom.Voc. Wfirfcto'
Ace. Tffft
kdti

Instr. flufnfa;kdtibhih

Dat. "arfirWT:
kdtibhyah
Abl. ^flfwr: kdtibhyah
Gen. *fftni kdtindm
Loc. ^ifriij
kdtishu

J 232. ^rftrsaMe,friend,has two bases :

for the Anga, i.e. the strong base.

for the Pada and Bha base.

It is in
irregular some of its cases.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. TOfT sdkhd sdkhdyau t sdkhdyah

A. tt"?H"4 sdkhdyam sdkhdyau

I. sdkhibhydm sdkhibhih

D. sdkhye '*{fa*R sdkhibhydm sdkhibhyah

Ab. sdkhyuh ^rf%"n sdkhibhydm sdkhibhyah
G. sdkhyuh *fWfc sdkhyoh sdkhfadm

L. sdkhyau W"\\\ sdkhyoh sdkhishu

V. 5aA:Ae like Nom. like Nom.

The feminine *^ft saMz is regular,like

At the end of compounds,we find ^f masc. declined as follows

Base tjtifW
susakhi, a good friend,masc.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. susakhd susakhdyau
4J4HslHu : susakhdyah*
A. susakhdyam ^[fl^lMlsusakhdyau susakhln

I. susakhind IJ*ifW*li
susakhibhydm ri susakhibhih

D. susakhaye ^" ftl"n susakhibhydm i: susakhibhyah

Ab. susakheh *jufw"[i
susakhibhydm i: susakhibhyah

G. susakheh ^^t\l susakhyoh *jti"5i1"it

susakhindm

L. susakhau 'QM"\\1susakhyoh susakhishu

V. susakhe ^^Isll^Ususakhdyau susakhdyah

At the end of a neuter compound i is declined like (" 230).

the real terminations from facilitate the learningby heart of these

the real base, but only to
nouns. Masculine nouns in short TM are HTg 6A4nu, sun, wind, fq"^ci^nu,
^T$ rrfyu, nom.

prop. "q^pWu, as masc., is the name of a tree; as neuter, the name of its fruit (Sar.i. 8, 17).
Feminine nouns in short Tw are rope, W^*
V*j:dhenuh, cow, T^p rqjjuh, body.
fa""*^"
* Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i.
p. 112.
 112 DECLENSION. $ 233-

" 233- Trf"T

pati, lord,is irregular
:

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. Ttfnipdtih N. A.V. ifftpdti N.

A. Tffftpdtim I.D.Ab. *rfw"ri

pdtibhydm A.

I. TfTRpdtyd G. L. tfTftt
pdtyoh I. *rffffa:
D. TTW^afye D. Ab. Trfk^K pdtibhyah

Ab. G. T7Jtpdtyuh G. "tjrfrfri

pdtindm
L. ifiQipdtyau L. trfinj^aft'sfa*
V. tni pdte V. Tfimi pdtayah

trfTT
^a/i at the end of compounds, e. g. ^rfir lord
bhtipati, of the earth,
HHI MPri
prajdpati, like cirfa
lord of creatures, is regular, #aw. The feminine

of Tfopatiis tf^tpatni, wife,i. e. legitimate

wife,she who takes part in the
sacrifices of her husband. (Pan.iv. i, 33.)

" 234. The neuter bases 'SrfTSf

akshi,eye, vj (Viasthi,bone, ^f^dadhi,
curds,^^^ sakthit
thigh,are declined regularlylike ^%[f%.vdri;
but in the Bha cases they substitute the bases
fSW*fsakthn. In these theyare declined,in fact,like
"mM^ aksJin,^T^1 asthn,'%l(dadhn, cases

neuters in *%*[an,such as *\\*M\ndman.(See note to " 203.)

Anga and Pada base -"f f"sj
akshi, Bha base
wv^akshn.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.A. itfqdkshi N.A.V. *fi%nft

dkshint N.A.V.
'

*ratftfor
dkshtni

I. ^H^ill aksJind I.D.Ab.^Tf^"rf

dkshibhydm I. ^r%ftT:dkshibhih
D. ^r^f oJtsA^ G.L. ^T^llft:
akshn6h D.Ab.^rf^^* dkshibhyah
Ab. G. *2f""{liaksJindh G. vi^ii akshndm

L. 4fPi9!l
akshm and vuqfVjakshdni L. ^rf^Jdkshishu
V. ^T^ a^s^e (or

Bases in ^ ri,Masculine,Feminine, Neuter.

" 235. These bases are declined after two models :

SINGULAR.
I. MASC. FEM. NEUT.

Base "Tff ridptri,

grandson ^T svdsri,
sister VfiJdhdtn, providence
N. "TRTwapfa ^WT svdsd V^dMtr{
A. "THTtndptdr-am ^^TR svdsdr-am VT^ dMtri

I. ndptr-d
'5TJJT ^THT svdsr-d VT^TT dhdtn-nd or VTWT dhdtrd*

D. *nfr
ndptr-e ^H svdsr-e VTJJfr
dhdtn-ne or VTW dhdtrd

Ab. G. wajp^A
"^rgt ^^t syaswA VT^H dhdtrt-nah or VTg: dAaMA
L. "THftndptar-i *3**r".svdsar-i fill
"lI"J dhdtr{-ni or "llrifll
dhdtdri

V. ftfi:ndptah(r) ^[W. svdsah(r) VTJ cta^n or VTiT: dhdtah(r)

* If "^n has Udatta and becomes ^r and is preceded by a consonant, the feminine

and the AjadiAsarvanamasthana cases have the Udatta.

114: DECLENSION.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. N. A.V. kroshtdrau N. "a^TO kroshtdrah

A. *ntg|".
kroshtdram A. "^tj*^
kroshtun

I. J kroshtund
I.D.Ab. kroshtubhydm I. "Siftfa:
kroshtubhih
kroshtrd

kroshtave

kroshtre
D.Ab. sRtj"i:
kroshtubhyah

kroshtvoh
'' G. ^ITrffkroshtundm
kroshtuh kroshtroh

kroshtau
kroshtushu

V. Jcroshto

The is the only

JKf^kroshtri
base one admissible as Anga, i.e. in the strong cases,

exceptingthe Vocative. (^ "SRtl'I

he kroshtah is,I believe,wrongly admitted by Wilson.)
The base ^t^kroshtu
is the onlyone admissible as Pada, i.e. before terminations ning
begin-
with consonants.

The other cases may be formed from both bases,but the Ace. Plur. is T$f%*(kroshtun
only.
(Pan.vn. i, 95-97.)
Those who admit 'A^Jkroshtrln
Ace. Plur. likewiseas admit sjfr|
kroshtum as Ace. Sing.
(Sar.i.6,7o.)
The feminine is Vhlgl declined like
kroshtrt, TSftnadt.
" 237- *fWH" man, a word of frequentoccurrence, though, for convenience sake, often

replacedby "TT nara, is declined like

regularly frjpitri,except in the Gen. Plural,where it

may be either "TOT nrindm or

^pOTnrindm. (Pan. vi. 4, 6.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. ff(nd ndrau "TT* ndrah

A. tR ndram ff"^wnw
I. ^tW nnbhydm

D. ^nr^(Ved. ^"lf
nnbhydm nnbhydh
Ab. cjtnt^ nnbhydh
G. g: nuh (Ved. nrindm or "p!nnrindm (Ved. naram)
L. rfftndri nr6h nrishu

V. ndrau "fC* ndrah

The feminine is

2. Bases endingin ^? a

J 238. This class is the most numerous and most importantin Sanskrit,
and in
adjectives in Latin,
like the correspondingclasses of nouns us, a, urn

*
The accent may be on the first or on the second in
syllables the Pada cases beginning
with and ^
*"\bh *. (Pan. vi. i, 184.)
 DECLENSION. 115

and oy, 77,oi" in Greek. The case-terminations are and

peculiar, it is best to
learn ^ihn kdntah,*hrr kdntd, SRTW kdntam by heart in the same manner as

we learn bomis,bona,bonum, without asking any questionsas to the origin

of the case-terminations,
or their relation to the terminations appended to

bases ending in consonants.

SINGULAR.

MASC. PEM. NKUT.

Base ifakdntd
N. kdntdfr
A. kdntam cMdi kdntdm "Kfaf
kdntdm

I. kdnttna "*id*ll
kdntdyd
D. kdntdya kdntdyai
cfrfrtiM "*idHIkdntdya
Ab. kdntdydh
r:

G. "hlri44|
kdntdsya ftkdntdydh kdntdsya
L. cRfij"
Mntt ifkdntdydm
V. IKUkdnta W^kdnte*

DUAL.

N.A.V. Wt Jtoaw fcfetf

I.D.Ab. kdntdbhydm
3inrT*qi kdntabhydm
G. L. ehldjfl!
kdntdyoh kdntdyoh ohld'jfh
kdntdyoh

PLURAL.

N.V. fafeofiri
A. kdntdn Jtantfni

I. K kdntdbhih

D.Ab. : kdntebhyah \\ kdntdbhyah kdntebhyah

G. chlriMI
kdntdndm kdntdndm
""ini"ii "nini"ii
kdntdndm

L. kdnt"hu kdntdsu
efiirtl*} kdnteshu

Note " Certain in

adjectives \ ah, TOT ^, TO am, which follow the ancient pronominal
will
declension, be in
explained the chapteron Pronouns (" 278).

Bases in TOT a, Masculine and Feminine.

" 239. These bases are derived immediatelyfrom verbs endingin TOT a, such as

WTT dhmd. They are declined in the same

way in the masculine and feminine gender. In
the neuter the final TOT d is shortened, and the word declined like ifa kdntam.

Anga and Pada base fcmmvisvapd,

Bha base fa"W{visvap, (masc. and
all-preserving,
fern.) The neuter is declined like "RTTT kdntam (" 238).

* Bases in TOT d, meaning mother, form their Vocative in TO a; e. g. ^TS"akka,

TO^ alia ! But TOWtST ambddd, TO?! c5T ambdld,and TO^PiT ambikd form the regularVocatives
bdde,^H"llc* ambdlet^^Kambike.

Q 2,
 116 DECLENSION. 340-

MASCULINE AND FEMININE.

SINGULAR.

N.V. visvapd-h visvapau

A. visvapd-m visvapau

I. visvap-d visvapd-bhydm : visvapd-bhih

D. visvap-e visvapd-bhydm visvapd-bhyah
Ab. visvap-ah l visvapd-bhydm visvapd-bhyah

G. visvap-ah visvap-oh visvap-dm

L, visvap-i visvap-oh visvapd-su

NEUTER.

N. fw^tf visvapam visvape visvapdni,"c.

Decline *fi^Hltsomapdh, Soma drinker; *

sankhadhmdh, shell-blower;
dhanaddh, wealth giver.
" 240. Masculines in ^TT d, not being derived by a Krit suffix from verbal roots,are declined
as follows :

Base

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.V.

A. hdhdm

I. hdhdbhydm : hdhdbhih

D. hdhdbhydm : hdhdbhyah
Ab. hdhdbhydm t hdhdbhyah
G. hdhauh hdhdm

L. AaAe hdhauh hdhdsu

CHAPTER IV.

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.

$ 241. As every noun in Sanskrit may, at the end of a compound, form the

final portionof an all the

adjective, essential rules for the declension of such

compound adjectives
had to be given in the precedingchapter. Thus in the

declension of neuter in ^n-^as, like the declension of

nouns
Trf^ mdnas, mind,
^^(sumdnas, as an adjective
masc. fern, and neut., was exhibited at the same

time ($165). In the declension of nouns endingin consonants, and admitting

of no distinction between masculine and feminine (this
terminations, appliesto

* The Sar. i. 6,38, givesthe optionalform ^T^TJ hdhdh in the masculine. At the end of

a feminine compound the same form is sanctioned in the Rupavali,p. 9 b.

-$ 247* DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. 117

all nouns with unchangeablebases,)

the special
forms of the neuter in Nom.

Acc.Voc. Sing.Dual and Plur. had to be exhibited. See " 158,Jrft9ftjalamukt

*M*J*0jalamucht, iraijfa
jalamunchi. In the declension of nouns with

changeable bases, the more important feminine and neuter forms were

mentioned
separately ; and in the declension of nouns ending in vowels, all
necessary rules with regardto the same subjectwere fullystated.
J 242. The chief which
difficulty remains with regard to the declension

of is
adjectives the exact formation of the feminine base, and the rules on

this subjectare often so complicatedthat they have to be learnt by practice

rather than by rule. The feminine bases,however, once given,there can be no

doubt as to their declension,as they follow exactlythe declension of the responding

cor-

feminine nouns. A few observations on this pointmust suffice.

J 243. Adjectives*
in ^r a form their feminines in *n d. Ex. ftnfpriya,
dear, masc. fire:priyah, fern, ftnn priyd, neut. ftrfpriyam, to be declined
like ^Fru kdnta ($238).
" 244. Certain derived by ^HR
adjectives aka form their feminines in ^9R ikd. Ex. m^"*

pdchaka, cooking, masc. HM"*; pdchakafi,fern. *nf"l"RT pdchikd,neut. TTPW pdchakam.

Likewise masc. *H"I" sarvakaTi,fern. ttRcfcl
sarvikd, every; 4K"*t kdrakah, doing,"*!fX"*l
kdrikdj ^iscR ihatyakah,present here, ihatyikd. But PHflJ"fcl
$^fi*|"*l kshipakd,fern, one
who sends ; "*"M"tii kanyakd, fern.maiden; -q";=fti chatakd, fern, sparrow; ni"j"i tdrakd, fern.
star. Sometimes both forms occur ; vmcm ajakdand vif"icu
ajikd,a she-goat.

$ 245. Bases in ^jrz and in ^n take ^ i as the sign of the feminine : w*

kartri,doer, ofi^fkartri ("235); ^fe^ dandin, a mendicant, ffitfl

dandint

(J203). Likewise most bases endingin consonants, if they admit of separate a

feminine base
"VN^prdch,w^ftprdchi($181); ig^foan,
: dog,^n^suni (J199);
xm^bhavat,HTift bhavati (J188). Some adjectives in ^ form their van

feminine base in "3^vari: ifa^pivan,fat,"q^'^ pivari("193).

" 246. Many adjectives

in ^Ta form their feminine base in \i (" 225),instead of WTa.-

trinamayah, made
i|*U*i"4* of grass, ij"u*i"fl
trinamayf ; ^t devahy god, dh-ine, ^^t devl;

If^UJI tarunah or talunah,a youth,ntj*ul

cT"5*Tt kumdraJi,a boy,^*fi-u kumdri;
taruni; ^*n",I
jffat
gopah, cowherd, his wife, but '*\\mgopd,female shepherd ; l^"="t
^rftn^^qp^ nartakaA, a

actor, "in"*l
nartaki; ^Tt mrigah, deer, ipft win^, doe ; H"RTJ sukaraJt,boar, "g^nrf
a a

sukari- ^^"*iO
kumbhakdrah, potter,^H'"niO
kumbhakdri. a It will be observed, however,

that many of these words are substantives rather than Thus

adjectives. TOH matsyah, fish,
forms *irwl matsi ("Qya
beingexpunged before ^i)J "t*j"Hl
manushyaJi,man, manushi.
*i"j"u
" 247. Certain adjectives
in TTt ^a^,expressiveof colour, form their feminine either in

7TT ft? or in "ftnf:"^TifJsyetah,white, ^WT/ye/a, ^pFftsyenf; variegated,T"n

'ZiT.etaJi, etd

or ^ft enf; ^f^Wt rohitah,red, ^%iTTroAtVa or 0 f^^llrohint, but ^Hi "?e/aA,white,

svetd; ^(VieiTflstVa,
white ; M Pc4riI palitd,grey -haired.

gunavachana, the name for adjective,

occurs in Pan. v. 3, 58.
118 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. " 248-

" 248. The formation of feminine substantives must be learnt from the dictionary.
Thus

J ajah,goat,forms v" "i i ajd. ^HSK asvah, horse, forms W *a I asvd.

: bdlah, boy, forms WTc5T bald.

f SLUT swc?ra,a woman of the S'udra caste.

: sudrah, a forms 1 **
S'udra, ,

[^rjlsudri,the wife of a Sudra.

t mdtulaJi,maternal uncle, forms Hl'j'cA

mdtuli or I*fl
*i\ijc4 mdtuldm, an uncle's wife.

dchdryah,teacher, forms ^Ti-qwfl dchdrydnt*wife ,

of the teacher; but

dchdryd,a female teacher.

lord, forms
|)a/i$, ^f^ patni,wife, "c.

Degrees of Comparison.
J 249. The Comparative is formed by TTC;tara, or ^q^ fyas (J206); the

Superlative
by HT tama, or
^irishtha t. These terminations in: ^cr" and TW /ama

are not restricted in Sanskrit to adjectives.Substantives such

tjnri,man,
as

form
"j?m:nritamah, a thorough man; ^ft 5^rz,woman, stritard\,
{pflrUf
more of a woman. Even after case-terminations or personalterminations,
in: tara and H*T fawa may be used. Thus from ^tr%"purvdhne, in the

forenoon, ^tT%Jfft
pdrvdhnetare,earlier in the forenoon (Pan.vi. 3, 17).
From tH pachati,he cooks,T^fjr?fxf
frl pachatitardm, he cooks better (Pan.v.
3, 57),M^fririHl
pachatitamdm,he cooks best (Pan.v. 3, 56).
" 250. "cRl fara and im ^"m", if added to changeable bases, requirethe
Pada base. Tfi^prdch("180),m"Kprdktara; from
Thus from

("iftj),
("203),"|ftTTtdhanitara ; from \f^j[^dhanavat \Ftt

from f%^^^6?va5($204),fzrsw* vidvattama ; from TTF^ pratyach (" 181),

VKTiK^pratyaktara.There are, however, a few exceptions,such as
"^gii*U
dasyuhantamah, "^J^ dasyuhan, demon-killer
from ; ^i|fv("riT:
supathintarah,
from supathin,with good roads.
*Jtrfa^
f 251. %*R(iyas
and ^ishtha are never added to the secondarysuffixes
^"H, Tt^fwaf, ^v"^, "3"vala9 f"^vin,JSftin.If adjectives ending in these
^Ttiyah and ^5 ishtha,the suffixes are dropt,and the i^r:
suffixes require iyah
and 3[S ishtha added to the last consonant of the base.
original ^r"*H i^ bala-
vdn, strong, "^1n^ i"Z- tyas,
'"4 wfe? bal-ishtha. ^rvdogdhri,milking,"")^1
1|^
^f^r
doh-iyas, doh-ishtha. fcifi^
sragvin,garlanded,^^^sraj-iyas,more
garlanded.*f?RT^wa^waft,
profusely wise,^^mat-iyas, *rfire
mat-ishtha.

* On the dental *^", see Gana Kshubhnadi in the Kas'.-Vritti.

f Before ?R ^ara and TfT ^"ma retain their accent; before

adjectives %*"(iyas
and ^T?ishtha
theythrow it on their first (Pan. in.
syllable i, 4; vi. i, 197). There are a few exceptions.
% Feminines in \i,derived from masculines,must shorten the \i before JR. tara and

rW tama; ^i^HJjft
brdhmani forms WT^rftjUrmbrdhmanitard. Other feminines in ^i or "^iw

may or may not shorten their vowels ; ^f\ stri forms ^pprRTstritard or (^|ri"l
stritard.

Also ^JnrcrfafTT
sreyasitardor ''SRftfilll f"i^*ln"l
sreyasitard; mdushitard or

vidushitard (Pan. vi. 3, 43-45).

-f 252. DECLENSION. OF ADJECTIVES. 119

J 252. Other too, lose

adjectives, their derivative elements before

and ^ffishtha,or are otherwise irregularby substituting

new bases for the

Comparativeand Superlative.TJTO pdpah, bad ; pap-iyaSyworse ;

MlfMtfpdp-ish(ha,
worst.

SECOND BASE. COMPARAT1VK. BCPERLATIVE.

i. ^ffn"nantika,near nedtyas iK-ilislithfl

2. alpa, small as kanishtha

or alpiyas alpishtha
3. T^j uru, wide variyas varishtha

4. "^nr riju,straight rijtyas "^fTttf

rijishtha
Vedic *
rajiyas rajishtha

5. *f$T krifa,lean krastyas krasishtha

6. VttjHkshipra,quick ksheptyas "Sjftnf

kshepishtha
7. TJ$ kshudra, mean kshod kshodiyas ttfif^B
kshodishtha

8. T^^wrw, heavy artyas *II"I.H garishtha

g

9. ^TTtripra,satisfied as ^fs" trapishtha

10. ^W dirgha,long drdghiyas '^lfl|8
drdghishtha
1 1 .
far
gT cJwra, davtyas davishtha

12. TT3" dridha, firm "5^ dradh dradhtyas dradhishtha

13. H(V"J"S
parivridha,exalted M (Xd ^ parivradh as s f""PCs parivradhishtha

14. ^^^n^M, broad

TT^^ra^A pratMyas nPM8 prathishtha

15. H ^l mprajasy a,praiseworthy

TR fro. IR! sreshtha

or

1 6. ftftpriya,
dear Upra TfH preshtha

17. "^Jbahu, many *J5I^bhuyas bhuyishtha

1 8. *^c5 bahula,frequent bamhiyas bamhishtha t

19. ^F Mn/a, excessive bhra"yas Hf^Tff

bhrasishtha

20. lg mridu, soft mradiyas mradishtha

21. fl^*^ywt?aw,
young yaviyas yavishtha
or kantyas kanishtha^

22. '^TSvddha, firm sddhtyas Kshthat

23. ^5Tvriddha,old varsh "**t[m{

varshiyas varshishtha

or

24. ^ K.CH beautiful

vrinddraka, ^ unndf vrindfyas vrindishtha

25. f^RsMtra,firm ^1 stha stheyas stheshtha

26. ^c5 stMla, strong sthavfyas sthavishtha

27. f^TO sphira,thick t*t"M^ spheyas spheshtha

28. j[^ hrasva, short hrasfyas hrasishtha

* Pan. vi. 4, 162. ed. Kielhorn,i. 7 ; 23 (20).

f See Phitsiitra, t P"n- v- 3" 63-
 120 NUMERALS. " 253-

CHAPTER V.

NUMERALS.

" 253. Cardinals.

ekah, ekd,ekam, one. (Base

^ 1^,if,if, , efoe,
two. (Base^r dva; in comp.

3 WQl, fro:, ,
trdyalj,,
tisrdh,trmi, three. (Base
TOTft, chatvarah, chdtasrah, chatvdri, four. (Base
chatur.)
^
5 M 'fapdncha,
m. f. n. five. (Base
6 "f^T 5^a^, m. f. n. six. (Base^ shash.)
7 3 TOf saptdjm. f. n. seven. (Base
8 b ^T^ ashtau,m. f. n. eight. (Base ashtan.)
9 "T3T m. f. n. nine. (Base
10 a, m. f. n. ten. (Base
1 1 ekddasa,eleven. (Baseas in mn.)
/

dvddasa. 35 W
trdyodasa. 36 ^ ^zf^ri shattrimsat.

14 chdturda"a. 37 3^
15 ifa^Tpdnchada"a. 38 ^b ashtdtrimsat.

shodasa. 39 ^ navatrimsat.

17 ^ saptddasa. 40 do fern.
chatvdrimsdt,
1 8 st ashtadasa. 41 d"i ekachatvdrimsat.

1 9 "l"*. ndvadasa or 42 ^^ dvdchatvdrimsat or

^^rfTTJ
unavimfatih. dvichatvdrimsat .

20 ^o I fern.
vimsdtih, 43 83 R\\J(trayaschatvdrimsat
or

21 ^ rfir:
ekavimsatify. l trichatvdrimsat.

2,2, ^ fittdvdvimsatih. 44 $8 chatuschatvdrimsat.

23 ^ ffr:
trayovimsatih. 45 8M

24 ^d n chaturvimsatih. 46 ^i shatchatvdrimsat.

25 ^M n panchavimsatify. 47 d^"
26 ^ shadvimfatih. 48 8b r^.\\^ashtdchatvdrimsat
or

27 ^S ifrf:
saptavimSatih. ashtachatvdrimsat.

28 ^b ^rrtJ
ashtdvimsatih. 49 d"i. navachatvdrimsat.

29 ^ navavimsatih. 50 MO fern.

30 30 fern. 51 M"l ^cF^T^Ti^

ekapanchdsat.
31 ^ ekatrimsat. dvdpanchdsator
52 M? ^IM^I^If^

32 ^ dvdtrimsat. flTM^I^dvipanchdsat.
33 33 53 M^ ^n^Nm^ trayahpanchdsat or

34 3^ chatustrimsat. tripanchdsat.
r^M^r^lr^
122 JTUMEEALS. " 253.

no w ^nftnirsn? dasddhikam satam or ^FSlrf dasasatam.

in "m i^RT^nftraf
snr ekddasddhikam satam or TOT^TW ekddasasatam "c.

or u^fiT^f
STW ekddasam satam, i. e. a hundred having eleven (in
excess).Pan. v. 2, 45.

H2 "\"\^IT^nfaoff^nr dvddasddhikam satam or ^T^T W dvddasam satam.

113 ^3 ^fafsnfirir
$nr trayodasddhikam satam or^[^^trayodasam satam.

1 14 ^8 ^t^IlfVoF
^IW chatur dasddhikam satam ^lichaturdasam
or '^njtST satam.

115 ^M ^panchadasddhikam
''T^^TTfv^ satam or iHr^T^panchadasam satam.

116 ^^rrfVr"lr
"|C|^ ^rw shodasddhikam satam or *fhr$f
^Tif
shodasam satam.

117 W ^ saptadasddhikam
^m^^nftnfi satam or TOT^I ^Tcfsaptadasam satam.
1 1 8 "ttb ^Ifl^irftrar
^Tffashtddasddhikam satam or "5^ashtddasam
-"5ilfT^^ satam.

119 "jc|"" "^

rr^^Tf^Gir navadasddhikam satam or ^^T ^TfT navadasam satam.

1 20 $Trf
CI^Q f^^rwAl""* vimsatyadhikam satam or f^r 3Tff vimsam satam *.

121 ^ TT5|if^rwfV%
W ekavimsatyadhikam satam or Tjcfif^i
W ekavimsam

satam*, "c.

1 30 "^^o f^^fv% $TiT trimsadadhikam satam or f^ SHT trimsam satam *.

140 "i$o ^^Tfr^fVNr ^TiT chatvdrimsadadhikam satam or ^nf chatvd^

^fi3lfc$r
rimsam satam*.

150 "wo i^^i\i%^/"a/icMsa^a^/:flms"/"morTj^T^^pfl^

or Fr"3Trf
sdrdhasatam,, 100 +-J- (hundred).
160 ^o nwfV^r ^rf shashtyadhikam satam or ^fF$nfshashtisatam.
170 ^so ^nrmiVGR1^iif saptatyadhikam satam or tiHfri$('ri
saptatisatam.
1 80 "^bo ^ifarfVrojr
^nr asityadhikam satam or xM^flfrtDM
asitisatam.

190 SQ.O H5rwf\f% ^nr navatyadhikam satam or navatisatam.

TT^ffT^nr
200 ^oo ir^ cfoe sa/e or Pd^M dvisatam or ffT^nft
dvisati.

300 ^oo ^% ^nnf5Tifrmi satdni or f^Tfftrisatam.

400 ^oo ^r^rftl
Tfnnf^T
chatvdri satdni or ^g:^i^ chatuhsatam.
500 MOO 'q'q 'SfTlTT'PfT
pancha satdni or "q^ITt
panchasatam.
600 ^oo "^7 ^Idlfrf
5^a/ satdni or Ml^frl shatsatam.
700 500 TOT ^Mif*i5"jo/asatdni or WHSlrlsaptasatam.
800 fcoo ^n? ^lirrf'T
ashta satdni or ^31 riashtasatam.

900 Q.OO IT^ ^nrrf*T

w"va satdni or "T"r^ilf
navasatam.

1000 ^ooo ^ ^TWrf?T

""zsa satdni or dasasati,fern.,
^Sfl^nrt or ?H[H sahdsrani,
neut. and masc.t

2000 ^ooo i"^H cfoe sahasre.

3000 ^ooo ^^Hril*T?W I Pill

/rmi sahasrdni.

10,000 ^0,000 ^w ayutam, neut. and masc.f

* Pan. v. 2, 46. The same rules apply to ^IfH sahasram, 1000, so that ion might be

rendered by ^'cmq^}
1Xig" ekddasam sahasram, 1041 by "i"*^r=nf^^I
^^5T ekachatvdrimsam

sahasram, "c. t Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 635.

 J 253. NUMERALS. 123

100,000 100,000 7TBJlaksham,neut. or fern.*,

or fagwniyutam, ncut. and masc.t
One million,fljwprayutam, neut. or masc.*
Ten Tsfrfz
millions, koti,fem.J
A hundred millions, and
^TJ^ arbuda, masc. neut.

A thousand *T"IJ"J
millions, mahdrbuda, masc. and neut., or TITI padma, neut.,
i.e. lotus.
Ten thousand ^
millions, kharva, neut., i.e. minute.

A hundred thousand fn^c5 nikharva,neut.

millions,
A billion,
H^IM-W mahdpadtna,
neut.

Ten billions,
$vjsahku, masc., i.e. an ant-hill.

A hundred ^fa sahkha,

billions, masc. neut., i. e. a conch-shell,or *nj^
samudra, masc., i.e. sea.

A thousand ^T^fa mahd"ahkha,or ^w antya, ultimate.

billions,
Ten thousand ^T^T hdhd, masc.,
billions, or Hm madhya, middle.

A hundred thousand n"^imahdhdhd,

billions, or iQ"pardrdha,i.e. other half.

One million billions,

^tfdhuna, neut.

Ten million *?^TVrf mahddhuna.

billions,
A hundred million biUions,^"fff^ilfl i.e.
akshauhini,fern., a host.

A thousand million q^iH^f^ft

billions, mahdkshauhini.
In the same manner as 'Sftuna, diminished, may
^rfVcRadhika, exceeding,
be used to form numerical compounds. i}*ft"f
^Tff panchonam fatam or

M -"ft
H 51tipanchonasatam,100 "
5, i.e. 95. If one is to be deducted,"gR una,
without "c|f ekat suffices. sjiHf^flT:
unavimsatih or K^Tlfffci^ifiT:
ekonavimSatih,
20 "i, i.e. 19. Another of expressingnineteen and similar numbers
way
is by prefixing
^"FTW ekdnna, i.e. by one not ; Jd4 ft: ekdnnavimsatih,
14(^31
by one not twenty, i.e. 19. (Pan.vi. 3, 76.)

Declension of Cardinals.

SINGULAR.
" eka" one- PLURAL.
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N. *5K tkah l^RT tkd ^ tkam T"K eke ^BH ekdh

A. VFR tkam ^cRT ekdm ^ tkam U"*1"^e'A:a" ^^iK ^roA

I. l*cJHeTcena T"Wm ekayd ^"*H ^tena ^%t eifcatA V^iT*?:ekdbhih

D. '"R" tkasmai ^afc^ekasyai 5"*^ ekasmai l"Wle'kebhyah'"
Ab. ^4^1:
^cROTTi^efcasmaZ ekasydhQ"*W\^ekasmdt ^T"i:tkebhyah^r"i: tkdbhyah^W^l
G. ^"=M-M tkasya ^ "+^H 11ekasydh^ "h^M ekasya "J"*Mfekeshdm ";cni^f
ekdsdm ^*im\e'keshdm
L. ^(WT^efcasmm
^oh^MieArasyam'^flftTWr^e^aswit/i
^cF^e^e^M el-"5a
"{cni^ ^"^T^f A-esAu
V. ^8 ^3ta ^R eyte " ^R ^Jba *^T ^te ^BT: elaA ^BTfiTrtaiu

* Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 635. f Amara-Kosha in. 6, 3, 24.

" A differentstringof names is given in theVajasan.-Sanhita

xvn. 2. See also Woepcke, Memoire
sur la propagationdes chiffres indiens (1863),p. 70; ed. Calcutt.
Lalita-vistara, p. 168.

B 2
124: NUMERALS. $254-

254* ft dvi,two, base ^ ^", like cfffir

Ararat ("238).
DUAL.

MASC. FEM.

dvdbhydm l"T"n dvd'bhydm

G.L. dvdyoh dvdyoh

$ 355. f"f"H, three,fern.

N.V. "?R: *r"ya# fwrcfc(Pan.vi. i, 166)

A. tisrdh *

D. Ab. fif*n tribhydh frfWH tisribhyah tribhydh

G. traydndm(Ved. trindm)
d*U4lli tisrindm
ftHprf f traydndm
L. "JW'3
trishu Irt^Mf tisrishu trishu

" 356. ^g^ chatur, four,fern. ^H^ chatasri.

N.V. ^n^tc/mWra#(Pan.vii.i,98)
^rTHt chdtasrah chatvdri

A. ^if"*chaturah (Pan.vi. i, 167) chdtasrah* "^ r3 1 U. chatvdri

I. ^jjf^"
chaturbhih "Tt chatasribhih : chaturbhih

D. Ab. chaturbhyah
^TJ**?* t chatasribhyah n chaturbhyah
G. ^i
5"Ur chaturndm
""in""ui
chatasrindm f chaturndm
L. ^irt-HM chatasnshu chaturshu

J ^57 ^, five, "^r shash, six. 4igc^ashtan, eight.

N.A.V. iH^a'Ma r 5^4 ashtau or ^T? ashtd

I. iHf^^ancAa^AiAt shadbhih : ashtdbhih \\

D.Ab. "*fa"tt
panchdbhyah shadbhydh i ashtdbhydh t ashtdbhyah
G. "4^I"1 1 panchdndm If shanndm ^ l ashtdndm If

L. ""fajj
panchdsu shatsu ashtdsu or ashtdsu

Cardinals with bases ending in "^ w,, such as TOlr^ saptan, "T^ navan,

dasan, "ichi^^ ekddasan, "c., follow the declension of "q^ panchan.

\\vimsatih is declined like a feminine in ^i; those in TT f like feminines

in "j^tf;
^HT satam like a neut. or masc. in ^r".

" 258. The construction of the cardinals from i to 19 requiresa few remarks. *J"fieka

is naturallyused in the singularonly,except when it means some ; ^fi" ^frf eke vadanti,

* Not rf^n f"r?#,nor -"i n^ft chatasrth. (Accent,Pan. vi. I, i67,vart.;

vn. 2,99, vart.)
f Not fw^nf
tisrindm, nor -"iri"ii]ri chatasrindm (Pan. vi. 4, 4),though these forms occur

in the Veda and Epic poetry.

t Accent, Pan. vi. i, 180; 181. ||Pan. vi. i, 172. If Pan. VH. i, 55.
 NUMERALS. 125
-

259.

some people say. fifdvi is always used as a dual, all the rest from 3 to 19 as plurals.
Ex. fafa: TjpT*fc with
tribhih purushaih, three men ; ";"*i"^l ^w^ekddata pvrushdn,eleven
ace. The cardinals after four do not the gender; ""*!"; 31 niOi
distinguish ekadasa
men,

ndrih,eleven women, ace.

While the numerals from i to 19 are treated as adjectives,

agreeingwith their substan-
tives

in and
gender,if possible, in number and case, fq^ifni
vimsatih and the rest
may be
treated both as and
adjectives as substantives. Hence f"i^|fdt^ic^di vimtatih fatrundm,

f=J5lfff!
^lei^'.vimsatih fatravah VftH fiji^q:
shashtih sis'av'ih,
sixty
twenty enemies, or ;

boys; ^Tff MirilfH

satam a hundred
phaldni, fruits j fc^ln i ^filtririrfatd vriddhaih,by thirty
elders ; TfHT ^uflnl6atam ddsindm or ^Trf
$\mi satam ddsyati,a hundred slaves ; *H"H
fi^ri'Ct
sahasram pitarah,a thousand ancestors.

Exceptionallythese cardinals may take the pluralnumber : M^i^ns^Mtpailchdsadbhir

horses.
with fifty
liayaih,

J 259. Ordinals.

H, prathamdh, d, am, "|

"^5 agrimdfy,d, am, " the first.

"H, ddimdh, d, am, }

"^,dvitiyab,
d, am, the second.

:, "tTT,"^, tritiyah,
d, am, the third.

chaturthdh,z, ^77?^,"j
d9
turtyafy, am,
I the fourth.

r, "",turyah,d, am,
0""T,
"?t,
:, ""ft, pafichamdh, i,am, the fifth.

", shashthdh, z, "w, the sixth.

:, "ift,
""T, saptamdh, i,am, the seventh.

"4,ashtamdh,
:, ""ft, i,am, the eighth.
,
navamdh, i,am, the ninth.

t, "JT, dasamdh, i, am,

"Jft, the tenth.

f, ekddasdfy,
i,am, the eleventh.

,
am,

t,unavimbdh, i,am, S the nineteenth.

, "*, dnavimsatitamdh, i,am, j

m^, I, am (Pan.v. 2,56),1 ^ twentieth
^ vim"atitamdh i am }

i, "#, "* MmM*, r,"", l

the thirtieth"
^NH:, "4,trimsattamdh,i,am,
""ft, J

$ft,"^T,chatvdrimsdb,i,am, 1
^ fortieth
:, ""ft,
"H, chatvdrimsattamdh,i, am, J
MHi^rt, 0$ft5"3T,patichdsdh,i,am,
'M^'I^MHJ, "4,panchdsaitamdh, i, am,
""ft, J
126 NUMERALS. J 260-

: shashtitamdh,the sixtieth *.
t ekashashtitamdh h, 1 .,

\ the sixty-first.
: ekashashtah, ]

; saptatitamdh,the seventieth.
riH: ekasaptatitamdh,]
" the seventy-first.
: ekasaptatah, ]

: asititamdh,the eightieth.
: ekdsititamdfy,
1 ,, .
,
_

\the eighty-first. ,

7 */*, 'i
d"tdfr, \
"jf,
*ft, navatitamdhji,am, the ninetieth.

ekanavatitamdht\ ,, .
n
" the ninety-first.
: ekanavatdhj J
"if,
:, "*rt, Satatamdh, i, am, the hundredth. (Pan.v. 2, 57.)
the hundred
: ekasatatamdfy, and first.

: sahasratamdb,the thousandth.

260. Numerical Adverbs and other Derivatives,

^f\ sakrit,once. ^cRVT ekadhd,in one way.

j, twice. ffTVTdvidhd or ^VT dvedhd,in "two ways.
J, thrice. f^"n tridha or ^"n tredhd,in three ways.

: chatuh,four times. ^"T chaturdhd,in four ways.

: five times.
panchakritvahj Tfowpanchadhd,in five ways.

: six times,"c.
shatkritvah, -qto shodhd,in six ways, "c. (or

ekasahyone- fold.
isah9 two-fold.
three-fold,
f^r: tri"afr, "c. (Pan.v. 4, 43.)

"STf dvayam or ffinfdvitayam, a pair. (Pan.v. 2, 42.)

"fi[
trayam or fdd4 tritayam or gifi'^rayz,a triad.

^^"44 chatushtayam, a tetrad.

^(^nr^panchatayam,
a pentad,"c.

These are also used as in

adjectives, the sense of five-fold "c., and may
then form their pluralas or tNTnr panchataye
"^n^fllpanchataydJ}, (J283).
VFR^panchat,pentad,^r?^dasat, a a decad (Pan.v. i, 60),are generally
used as feminine; but both words occur likewise as masculine in the

commentary to Pan. v. I, 59, and in the Kasika-Vritti.

* The ordinals from sixtyadmit of one form only,that is TfT: tamahj but if preceded
by another numeral, both forms are allowed (Pan. v. 2, 58). !Jfif
satam forms its ordinal as

t satatamah only(Pan. v. 2, 57).

- 261. PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 127

CHAPTER VI.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

261. Personal Pronouns.

Base (incomposition)
IT? mad and Base (incomposition)
R^ tvad and

asmad.
y"T^ yushmad.
SINGULAR.

N. *n" ahdm, I W /ram, thou

A. *rfWm, m wd, me ftf tvdm,
m tvd,thee
I. *RT wayd, by me OTT tvdyd,by thee

D. TO mdhyam, ^ me, to me tubhyam, ^

Tjwi te, to thee
Ab. from thee
*n^wa/,from me

G. TO mama, ^ we, of me tfava,W te, of thee

L. *cfa mdyi, in me in thee

DUAL.
i /

N. ^rni dvam, we two *pfyuvdm, you two

A. ^rref^v^m, ^ waw, us two g^fyuvdm, ^f vawi, you two
I. W3T"li dvdbhydm,
by us two yuvdbhydm, by you two
*pn"li
D. VHNI*qf dvabhydm, "ft
waw, to us two yuvdbhydm, ^f vaw, to you two
5^T"rf
Ab. WTT"ri dvdbhydm, from us two g^T^rfyuvdbhydm, from you two
G. SUN Ml: dvdyoh,^ft?zaw, of us two g^ft:yuvdyoh,^f vaw, of you two
L. VHN*ft:dvdyoh,in us two ^4 "TlJyuvdyoh,in you two

PLURAL.

N. vaydm, we yfydm, you

A. asmdn, ^: wa^, us yushman, ^: vaA, you
I. : asmdbhih,
by us : yushmdbhih,by you

D. asmdbhyam, ^: waA, to us i yushmdbhyam, ^: vaA, to you

Ab. ^ro\ a"ma/, from us *pn^ yushmdt, from you

G. "HWli asmdkam,
IT: w"A, of us yushmdkam, ^: vah, of you

L. "srsm asmdsu,in us su, in you

The substitutes in the even cases, *n md, we, i 7?aw, ^

7T te, ^f v^m, ^: vaA, have no accent and are never used at the beginningof
a sentence, nor can they be followed by such particles
as ^ cha, and, "^T vd,

or, ^ eva, indeed, ^ ha, ^r^ aha.

128 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. " 262"

262. Base (incomposition) Pan.vi.

u^ tad, he, she,it. (Accent, i, 182.)
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N. *H sdh ff te WTt tdh ITTf^tdni

A. i(tdm HX tctm HT^tdt TTF^ td'n irn tdh Wrf"Ttdni

I. ^T IHIT ^aya cHT Una %: taik infa:t %: tain

D. tdsmai tdsmai i: tebhyah tdbhyah

ff"H

Ab. tdsydh K tdbhyah

W"i

G. ta'sya nt"lit tdsydh tdsya "rfTOT frf'sam W^f

L. tdsydm tdsmin Wg teshu

DUAL.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N. A. WT tau

I. D. Ab. TTWf tdbhydm rTT"n tdbhydm tdbhydm

G. L. infttta'yoA

" 263. Base (incomposition)

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N. W sydh ^TT syd mr:

A. "FT ^"/^"i WT #y^m tydh

wt 'Itydbhih mi tyaih

D. TIw tydsmai 7TO tydsyai T?w tydsmai

Ab. mWTi(tydsmdtm^TTI tydsydh j\W\^tydsmdt Wm tytbhyah7TW* tydbhyah
W"l" tyebhyah
G. mW tydsya ?T^TTt tydsydh7TO tydsya W^f tyeshdm mi^lftydsdm TH'^f
tytshdm

L. 'mfeff*[tydsmin dm mftR^tydsmin mjlty"hu

10X31 tydsy mTQtydsu TT^tyeshu
DUAL.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N. A. 7TT

I. D. Ab. mT"lf tydbhijdm mi^TT tydbhydm tybhydm

G. L. T*nft*
tydyoh W*ftltydyoh

Possessive Pronouns.

" 264. From the bases of the three personalpronouns, adjectives

possessive
are formed by means of ^T 2ya.
"^rr,"V, madtyah, yd,
JT^fan, yam, mine.

:, "*n, "^, tvadiyah,yd, yam, thine.

)
"T^ytadiyah,yd, yam, his, her, its.
"^T, "^ asmadiyah, yd, yam, our.
/

:, "irr,"*r,yushmadiyah,yd, yarn, your.

,
"4, tadiyah,yd, yam, their.
*
Other derivative possessive
pronouns are *n*?"R* mdmdkah, mine ; riN"=K

Idvdkah, thine; ^n^RT"R: dsmdkah, our;

^^RTcfi:
yaushmdkah, your. Likewise

* Pan. iv. 3, 1-3; iv. 1,30; vn. 3, 44.

130 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. I 370-

DUAL.

MASC. FEM.

N.A.V. imt im6

I.D.Ab. f dbhydm ^TP*rfdbhydm

G.L. ; andyoh vrn"4\Jandyoh ^HT^ftj
andyoh

" 270. l"^etdd and 'Zftiddm,

when repeated in a second sentence with reference to a

preceding^rf^etad and ^ idam, vary in the following

cases, by substituting
^"f ena, which

has no accent.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.

A. IJ ewa/w A. 4i"tl"\ewaw ^TH ewaA "niTn endni

I. "n"T ""1*(i enayd enena

DUAL.

FEM.

A. t enau

G.L. JMJfl:enayoh I enayofy ^"TMU enayoh

Ex. ^ri""""u*iMln vydkaranam adhitam, enam chhando 'dhyd-

payay the grammar has been studied by this person, teach him prosody.
anayoh pavitram kidam, enayoh prabhutam svam,

the familyof these two persons is decent,and their wealth vast.

271 Base (incomposition)

^Qadas, that (mediate).
SINGULAR.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N. asaii

A. ^TT amum

I. v"ijr|iamtind .
I. 29, 5) amund

D. amushmai amushyai amushmai

Ab. amushmdt l amushydh amushmdt

G. amushya amushydh amushya

L. amushmin amushydm amushmin

PLURAL.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.

J
N.
.
ni

A. amuni

I. ^FftfH:amibhih : ambhih

D.Ab. ^Wt*i: am"hyah J amubhyah amibhyah

G. VH*^1*!
amishdm amushdm

L. amushu

DUAL.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N.A.V. I.D.Ab. amubhydm G.L. ; amuyoh

-J 274. PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 131

Relative Pronoun.

$ 272. Base (incomposition)

Tf^ydd,who or which.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.

MASC. i i M NKUT. MASC. FEM. NXUT.

N. IHy"a *Hy"/ *T^y"fc $y" TOy"" ifa yjni

A. *}y""m *liyam *n^yrf" *H"^y"/n TJT! ydfe "ufn yon"
I. M"T y^ha Tm ya'y^ ^*Ty^na *h ya/A TTfWt ydbhih*h ya"3i
D. *Tw ydsmai T^ ydsyai T^ ydsmai ^"T:ytbhyah TWt ydbhyah TW. ytbhyah
Ah. T"RXI^ydsmdt
T^JT: ydsydJi'H\"\1(ydsmdt T"Tt ytbhyah TJW. ydbhyah
G. ^TWyasya T^^lydsydh T"Q ydsya WT y"hdm
L. ""t*ii
""fw^ya5"nm ydsydm

DUAL.

MASC. FEM.

N.A.V. T^
I.D.Ab.

G. L. ^nt yayo^ Tt yrfyo^ 'n: ydyoh

Interrogative
Pronouns.

f 273. Base (incomposition)

f% ^m, Who or which 1

SINGULAR. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NKUT.

N. TXlkdk TXlkcl f*Mm %*6f W.kcth

A. 3ikdm -atikctm f^ktm "S^kcln ^FTt kdh

I. ^k^na WRkdyd ^ ktha %:kafy "SK^lkd'bhih%t kath

D. "I35R kdsmai "Pw kdsyai cR^ kdsmai ^""IJ

k"hyah oRfl*n kd'bhyah
IfW. ktbhyah
Ab. TQ"^kdsmdt iK"CMsydh ^^^(kdsmdt :"H\ktbhyah
IKW.Ubhyah W*r.k#"hyah
G. "B^I Aroisya "=HMK kdsydh "K^T Araisya ^if k"hdm 4IUI Ara's^m WTT kfshdm

L. ^ftR^Ara.mm
"F^fJtasyrfwi
"liftR^
kdsmin ^fTSktshu cRHJAr/"tt

DUAL.

MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N.A. 'a"fam' ^1*^ ^i*"f

I.D.Ab. "5KT"n^y(fm ^BT"n kdbhydm kd'bhydm
-361*6
G. L.

" 274. Pronouns admit the interposition

of ^!"Jfak before their last vowel or syllable,
to

denote contempt or dubious relation (Pan.v. 3, 71). tvayakd,By

r^HRT thee! instead of

WJT tvayd. ^^^\l yuvakayoh,Of you two ! ^Wotilf*?:

asmakdbhih,Wiibus ! ^^4 ayakam.
"c. (See Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. 706.)
, p.

S 2
132 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

Compound Pronouns.

" 375. By adding igs^dris,

^fdrisa, "^driksha,
to or certain pronominal
bases, the followingcompound pronouns have been formed :

tddri$9irnjsr
tddrisa,wr^f tddriksha,such like.

ScTT^ etddriksha,this
T etddrisa, like.

yddris,Mld^f yddrisa,HldKJ yddriksha,what like.

idrisa,^^ idriksha,this like.

kidrisa,^ft^ Mdriksha,What like?

These are declined in three genders,forming the feminine in ^ i.

ril^cf,
tddrik,m. n. ; tddrisi,f.;
TTT^ft HT^r:, "5ft,"^T,tddrisah,i,am. or Similarly
like me, like thee,"c.
formed are
HT^^I mddrisa, F^T^T tvddrisa,
J 276. By adding ^ va# and
*n^ ya^ to certain pronominal bases, the
followingcompound pronouns, implyingquantity,have been formed : "

so much, "1
,

,
so much, ^declined
like nouns in '^vat (J187).
,
as much, J
3Tfil iyat,so much, 1

feni%"/, How much ? }^^ iyan"

Note " On the declension of "fiflT How

Arrfri, many? TfflT
tdti,so many, and Tfa ya7i,as
many, see " 231.

" 277. By adding fq-f^

chit,^R c^aw", or ^ft "p^, to the interrogative
pronoun f^ir
kirn,it is changed into an indefinite pronoun.

kaschit,WiT^kdchit,
fsK^f^kimchitj
some one; also 'affai^kachchi
anything.
kaSchana, oFT^"T kdchana, f"fr^"T
kimchana, some one.

^*, ofrrfTT fohHfq kimapi,some

Aropi, one.

In the same manner indefinite adverbs are formed : oin*T "ac?a,When ?

ddchit9 ch^m kaddchana, once ; n A:v",Where ? "T W"* na kvdpi,
not anywhere.
Sometimes the relative pronoun is prefixedto the to render
interrogative,
it indefinite : TK ^B: yah kah, whosoever ; iRS "fi^T yasya kasya,whosesoever.
Likewise IT: "irf^y^^kaschit,whosoever, or IT: ojrg yah kascha, or in "*"$H

y"A kaschana.

The relative pronoun, if doubled,assumes an indefinite or rather distributive

meaning : iffiy:,zn ^T, "/o y"S, y" y"^,

*T?T^, yad yad, whosoever. Occasionally
the relative and demonstrative pronouns are combined for the same :
purpose
yattad,whatsoever.
-f 278. PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 133

Pronominal Adjectives.
the of Sarvandman, which has been freelytranslated
} 278. Under name

but which reallymeans class of words beginningwith

by Pronoun, a
sarva,
native grammarians have included, besides the real pronouns mentioned
words
before, the following which share in common with the real pronouns

certain of declension.
peculiarities They may be called Pronominal Adjectives,
and it is to be remembered that they are affected by these peculiarities
of

declension only if they are used in certain senses.

I. Tit sarva, all; 2. fira vtiva,all; 3. w ubha, two; 4. TOTJ ubhaya,

both; 5. ^rsr any a, other; 6. ^araraT anyatara, either; 7. jifcitara,other;
8. w tva, other (some add w?^ tvat,other); 9. words formed by the suffixes

Tfft tar a and T"TH tama, such as 9. qftX katara,Which of two? 10. "3S?TR katama,

Which of many? 10. *nr sama, all ; 1 1. fan sima, whole ; 12. "sfa
nema, half;

13. ^"R eka, one; 14. ^ pdrva, east or prior; 15. v"para, subsequent;
1 6. W9R avara, west or posterior; 17. ^frspff
dakshina, south or right;
1 8. TJR uttara, north or subsequent; 19. ^TTC apara, other or inferior ;

20. ^nrc adhara, west or inferior ; 21. ^T *va, own; 22. ^TfT antara, outer,

(except^rHl ^: antard puh, suburb,)or lower garment).

(scil.
If OT 5flma means equalor even, it is not a pronominaladjective
; nor ^f0f*!T
dakshina,if it means clever ; nor ^ sva, if it means kinsman or wealth ; nor

^Kt antara ,
if it means interval,
"c.; nor any of the seven from ^ purva to

^rvn adhara,unless theyimplya relation in time or space .

Hence "fttJ*U!
"nvj"*K

dakshind clever
gdthakdfy, minstrels "$^J uttardfykuravah, the northern
; TWn:

Kurus, (aproper name); THJirn^T* svdh,greattreasures (Kas'.i 1 35);

prabhdtdfi .
,

grdmayor antare vasati,he lives between the two villages.

*
Accent, Pan. vi. i, 191.
134: PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. " 279-

I. ^f^TT sdrvayd ^T^WT sdrvdbhydm ^rflfatsdrvdbhih

D. *rf^ sdrvasyai ^"=rt"*ri
sdrvdbhydm ^T%"n sdrvdbhyah
Ab. *t5tHitsdrvasydh ^TtPTT sdrvdbhydm ^HtTWKsdrvdbhyah
G. sdrvasydh
"i"it"ii! ^T^fttsdrvayoh tf"=n*ii
sdrvdsdm

L. "5""*fsdrvasydm ^rt^ftt
sdrvayoh ^^TCJ
sdrvdsu

NEUTER.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. ^1% sdrvam 1$ sdrve ^qiP"y sdrvdni

The rest like the masculine.

" 279. W*J awya, ^rsfiTT any at ar a, ^rfT itara, cRTR katara, cRnr katama,
take f^/in the Nom. Acc.Yoc. Sing,of the neuter :

Nom. Sing.^n*n any ah, masc. ; ^rarrawya, fern. ; neut.

^ran^emya^
" 280. w w5^" is used in the Dual only :
Masc. N. A. V. -"ftubhau,
I. D. Ab. Tm"n ubhdbhydm, G. L. "gwft:ubhayoh;

W w^^e, N. A. V. fern, and neut.

J 281. T"nr: "4

ubhayah,0"$t-yi, -y"m, is never used in the Dual, but only
in the Sing,and Plur. Haradatta admits the Dual.

MASCULINE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.

N. "WI* ubhayah - 7VR ubhaye

A. "JWT ubhayam ^WTT*^ ubhaydn
I. "SH^tT ubhayena ^TOJ ubhayaih
D. "3WTCR ubhayasmai, "c. ^3^^Wt "c.
ubhayebhyah,

" 282. The nine words from ^ jjzt/rato

^Hfcantara (14 to 22),though used in their

pronominal senses, take in the Nom. Plur. ^z"or ^f! ahj in the Abl. Sing.WV?(smdt
may
or
^n^a/; in the Loc. Sing.ftR^smiw
or ^".
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. "^Ipurvah ^[%T
purvau

A. ^^ purvam tj^T
purvau

I. T$l$purvena ^tl"npurvdbhydm ^l purvaih

D. ^w purvasmai "^^HWf
purvdbhydm ^f"Jt
purvebhyah
Ab. ^tn^pMnja^"^tr^rf
Tjfwn^w/rasma* purvdbhydmor Xj^fa:
purvebhyah
G. *"****purvasya ^[%^Ipurvayoh
L. ^fw^^Mrvaswm or ^ purve "^^ftt
purvayoh

" 283. The followingwords may likewise take ^ft "A or ^ i in the Nom. Plur. masc.

(Pan. 1. 1, 33.)
J prathamah, first,THWi prathamau, iniT prathame or n"4*iit prathamdhj fern.

nn prathamd.
t charamah, last,^T?U charamau, ^T" charame or ^TflTt charamdh.

fern, fgrnfl
PsnM* dmtayahy two-"^l, dvitayt,
and similar words in IHT #aya y fWrPTt
tritayah,
three-fold ; f^TTW tritaypor f^H^TTt
tritayah.
-J 285. PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 135

dvayah,two-fold,fern, T^ft dvayt,and similar words in Hya ; ?HH trayah.

I alpah,few, fT^Y alpe or *K-HI; alpdh.
: ardhah, half,*tffardhe or
V^Tt ardArfA.

: katipayah,some, "*fdM^katipayeor ^PnMMi; katipaydh.

tt nemah, half, "T*T neme or "TTH nemdh.

In all other cases these words are regular,like ^fa: kdntah.

" 284. ftrufajdvittyah

and other words in tfhltfya are declined like ^ifa kdnta,but in

the Dat. Abl. and Loc. Sing, they may follow *ftsarva.

MASCULINE.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. fedlM: dvitiyah fsnW doittyau fgrtl^Tidvitiydh

A. f^ldl4dvittyam Psrt1"iT
dvittyau fgnlMl^dvitiydn
I. HSdl^H dvitiyena PS nlM I *4 idvltiydbhydmTS nl M idvittyaih
D .
fSdl^lfl
dvittydya
or doitiyasmaiT^mTWT
fsnl"4"*f ism*!*'!! dvitiyebhyah
dvitiydbhydm
Ab. or fjj ^ W
Pi dl ^ If(dvitiydt ifl frf
I"\dvitiyasmdt PSr/1
id^ I**41dvittydbhydm M^I dvitiyebhyah
G. ferri
JJ44J dvitfyasya fsnlM^J dvittyayoh fsn1""i"ii
dvitiydndm

L. fkri*ft"fofrfye
rrfHl^rm^rfmViyo^mm
or dvittyayoh fsnl^M dvitiyeshu
feff^^nftt

At the end of Bahuvrihi compounds the Sarvanamans are treated like ordinarywords :

Dat. Sing."ftn^H^nT^nyo"Aayaya,
to him to whom both are dear (Pan. 1. 1, 29). The same

at the end of compounds such as irti^J mdsapurvah,a month earlier ; Dat. *liti^i"4

mdsapurvdya(Pan. 1. 1, 30). Likewise in Dvandvas; j51 M"UUi purvdpardndm, of former and

later persons (Pan. 1. 1, 31),though in the Norn. Plur. these Dvandvas may take ^i; "j5m"
purvdpareor ^=imUt purvdpardh. Only in compounds expressiveof pointsof the compass,

such as ^"R^"Iuttara-purva, north-east,the last element may throughouttake the pro-

nominal
terminations (Pan. I. i, 28).

Adverbial Declension.

" 285. In addition to the regular case-terminations by which the declension of nouns

the Sanskrit
is effected, language possesses other suffixes which differ from the ordinary
terminations by being restricted
chiefly in their use to certain words, and particularly
to

pronominalbases. The ordinary

case-terminations,
too, are used
frequently in an adverbial

sense. Thus

Ace. fat;chiram, a long time.

Instr. P^"u chirena,in a long time.
Dat. P"RH4 chirdya,for a long time.
Abl. fa^u^chirdt,
long ago.
Gen. TTC^T chirasya,a long time.

Loc. f^T chire,long.

Other adverbial terminations are,

1. rTCtah, with an ablative local.

meaning,becoming generally
2. ^ tra, with a locative meaning.
3. ^T dd, with a temporal meaning ; also raised to

tdt,with
4. UTi^ a locative meaning.
 136 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. " 285-

5. 1R thd, with a meaning of modality;likewise ^ tham

6. "UTR^sdt,expressiveof effect.
7. ^TT and ^rrf^
a dhi,local.
8. "f|rhi,temporal and causal.
9. 1P"tar, local.
10. "5ha, local.
See also the terminations for forming numeral adverbs (" 260).
Kt tah,with an ablative meaning.
IHf I tatah,thence. Tin yatah,whence, ^rfJ itah,hence ; (cf.^flf
iti,thus, j[^iva,as.)

,
hence. Whence
opH frwtaA, ? amutah,
VSHJcU thence. *^J mattah, from me.

t asmattah, from us. W"K bhavattah,from your Honour. ^^ purvatah,

before (ina generallocal or temporal sense). Vf HJ sarvatah, always, ^(Jrt* agratah,
before,like ^T?T fl^e. ^3r5?!f:
abhitah,around, near. WTitt ubhayatah,on both sides.

TTftw:paritah,all round. 5rRWt grdmatah, from the village.^sJM'H. ajndnatak,

from ignorance.
2. cl ^ra, locative j originally
c^T trdtas in gotdi purushatrd,amongst men.

TfW tatra,there. '^ ya^ra, where. ""fWAw^ra,Where ? ^Tcf a^ra, here. ^T|W amutra,

there, in the next world. V"ffi ekatra,at one place,together. ^T^T sa^ra, with,
and Tf^f satram, with (see^ saAa).

3. ^T rfa,
temporal.
IT^Ttadd, then,and ri^THlT
taddnim. when.
*Tr?Tyarfa, "a"fcf,When?^"H^l
cIT^T any add,
another time. ^HfT sarvadd, always, at all times. ^oft^T ekadd, at one time.

^T sac?a,always. ^T idd, in the Veda, later ^m*) iddntm, now.

4. local.
ITTi^^,
in front.
W^fJT^prdktdt,
Frequentlyafter a base in ^ s :

before, vi M ".tn i
f^ adharastdt,below, msaif^parastdt,
afterwards.

t, below. TMf"8 vt^uparishtdt,

above.

thd, modal.
tathd,thus. T^TT y"/Aa, as. ^ft^n sarvathd,in every way. ^R^T ubhayathd,in
both ^SRT*IT anyathd,in another ""!""" nvm in
anyatarathd, one of two
ways. way.

ways. ^rK^I itarathd,in the other way. ^TT vrithd,vainly(?). Or H tham, in

"R^ katham, How? ^r*Tittham, thus. Or "*T#Aa, in ^HI aMa, thus.

6. efPective.
^TTi^saf,
(TT$ft$\ftlf
"M^H"^ra/asa^, rdjno'dhinam,dependent on the king.)H w^Il i^bhasmasdt,

reduced to ashes. ^b*\*\\t(^agnisdt,

reduced to fire.

7. ^TT d and ^iHfc

dhi,local.
^f^Wf^ dakshindhi,in the South, or ^Hsjiiu
dakshind. ^'rKlH^
uttardhi,
in the North,

or T^T uttard. ^TiTTT antard (or "t -ram^ or "T! -re, or "T^ -rena),between. ^TT
purd, in the purah and
East, in front,formerly,(or JJIS before.)
^*jf\\^purastdt,
1"Rpa"chd, behind, (or **vt\"^paschdt.)
Adverbs such as ^pn mudhd, in vain, JplTmrishd, falsely,
are instrumental cases of

obsolete nouns ending in consonants.

 ;138 CONJUGATION. " 288-

e.g. info pachati,he cooks; SMCI pachate,he cooks for himself; Mififyajati,he sacrifices;
^"fffyajate,he sacrifices for himself. The same appliesto Causals (Pan. i. 3, 74).
These however,
distinctions, rest in many cases, in Sanskrit as well as in Greek, on

peculiarconceptionswhich it is difficultto analyse or to realize; and in Sanskrit as well as

in Greek, the right use of the active and middle voices is best learnt by practice. Thus
"rf\
nt,to lead, is used as Parasmaipada in such expressionsas *TJ TM "f*(fit
gandam vinayati*,
he carries off a swelling; but as Atmanepada,
in ^H fVn*^ krodham vinayate, he turns

away or dismisses wrath; a subtle distinction which it is possibleto appreciatewhen stated,

but difficultto bring under any generalrules.
Again,in Sanskrit as well as in Greek, some verbs are middle in certain tenses only,but
active or middle in others; e. g.
Atm. ^ffi vardhate, he grows, never '3"favardhati;
but Aor.

Par.,
^^f^avridhat, or ^Rffo avardhishta, Atm. he grew. (Pan. I. 3, 91.)
Others take the Parasmaipada or Atmanepada accordingas they are compounded with

certain prepositions fV^lfwvisati,he enters but fiTq^n ni-visate,he enters in.

; e. g. ;

(Pan. i. 3, 17.)

" 288. Causal verbs are conjugatedboth in the Parasmaipadaand Atmane-

pada. Desideratives follow
generally the Pada of the simpleroot (Pan.1.3, 62).
Denominatives ending in ^srTO ay a have both forms (Pan. i. 3, 90). The

intensives have two forms : one in it ya, which is always Atmanepada

; the

other without if ya, which is always Parasmaipada.

" 289. The passivetakes the terminations of the Atmanepada,
and prefixes

if yd to them in the four specialor modified tenses. In the other tenses the

forms of the passiveare, with a few the

exceptions, same as those of the

Atmanepada.
" 290. There are in Sanskrit thirteen different forms, correspondingto the

tenses and moods of Greek and Latin.

I. Formed from the Specialor ModifiedBase.

PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

I. The Present(Lat) H^lfH bhdvdmi vfebhdve

2,. The Imperfect(Lan) ^sw4 dbhavam ^W% dbhave

3. The Optative(Lin) H^TI bhdveyam *^H bhdveya

4. The Imperative(Lot) H^rftr bhdvdni H% bhdvai

II. Formed from the General or Unmodified Base.

PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

5. The Perfect (Lit)^33

Reduplicated babhdva W$5 babhuve

6. The Perfect (Lit)^fksf ^$5

Periphrastic choraydm
babhuva ^ choraydm
vft"n[ cha

7. The First Aorist (Lun) ^nffftridbodhisham ^wfafa dbhavishi

8. The Second Aorist (Lun) ^*"$ dbhdvam ^rftr%dsiche

9. The Future (Lrit) Hfmmfir bhavishydmi Hfa*T bhavishye

* Cf. Siddhanta-Kaumudi, ed. Taranatha, vol. n. p. 250. Colebrooke,Grammar, p. 337.

 291. CONJUGATION. 139

10. The (Lrin)

Conditional 1w*fr"T dbhavishyam ^wfir"" dbhavithye
1 1 .
The Future (Luj) Mflrdifw bhavitdsmi
Periphrastic Hfaing bhavitdhe
12. The Benedictive (As'ir
lih) ^m bMydsam *ftprta bhavishiyd

13. The (Let)occurs

Subjunctive in the Veda only.

of the
Signification Tenses and Moods.

$291. 1.2. The Present and Imperfect requireno explanation.The

Imperfecttakes the Augment (J300),which has alwaysthe accent.

3. The principal
senses of the Optativeare,
a. Command ; e. g. ?frjppw *T^: tvam grdmam gachchheh,thou mayest go, i.e.

go thou to the village.

b. Wish ; e. g. mif^m!* bhavdn ihdsita,Let your honour sit here!

c. Inquiring; e. g. ^nfhftn T"r 7rl*nfhqffaj

vedam adhiyiya,uta tarkam

adhiyiya,Shall I study the Veda or shall I study logic?

d. Supposition(sambhdvana)
; e. g. M"^*ft
3"MK*ft dHHIM!^ bhaved asau

vedapdragobrdhmanatvdt, he probablyis a student of the Veda, because

he is a Brahman.

e. Condition ; e. g. ^N H^wfo EM^glXm: IHTTt dandab chen na bhavel

loke vinasyeyurimdfyprajdh,if there were not punishment in the world,

the people would perish. ~m T^T^
^ilM^r^yafypathet sa dpnuydt,he
H

who will
studies, obtain. *("l^^Hf^W^W^^^KHr^r. yad yad rocheta
viprebhyastat tad dadydd amatsarah, whatever pleasesthe Brahmans

let one givethat to them not niggardly.

f. It is used in relative dependent sentences ; e.g. *TW H*H ^^T *f m$ yach
cha tvam evam kuryd na frraddadhe,I believed not that thou couldst

act thus. ^pnsrfH^dfmra yat tddrisdfy krishnam

^rll"$li: ninderann

dscharyam,that such persons should revile Krishna, is wonderful

4. The Imperativerequiresno explanation,

as far as the second person is

concerned ; e. tuda, Strike !

g. ijj^ The first and third persons are used

in many cases in placeof the Optative; e. g. 3*41 ft ichchhdmi

HTT^^ii
bhavdn bhunktdm, I wish your honour may eat.

5. The ReduplicatedPerfect denotes something absolutely

past.
6. Certain verbs which are not allowed to form the reduplicated form
perfect,
their perfectperiphrastically,
i.e. by means of an verb.
auxiliary
7.8. The First and Second Aorists refer generallyto time past,and are the

common historical tenses in narration. They take the Augment ("300).

9. The Future, also called the Indefinite Future ; e.g.
devcLS ched varshishyatidhdnyam vapsydmah, if it rain, we shall sow

rice. ^N-nil^H^ "l^friydvaj-jivamannam ddsyatiy as long as life

T 2
140 SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES " 29!-

lasts, he will give food. Under certain circumstances this Future

may be used with

optionally the Future
Periphrastic ; e. g. *K^T H^W

kadd bhoktd or H^ffi bhokshyate,When will he eat?

10. The Conditional is used, instead 6f the if thingsare spoken of

Optative,
that might have, but have not happened (Pan.in. 3, 139); e. g.
szwmM^ died abhavishyattadd subhiksham

abhavishyat,if there had been abundant rain,there would have been

plenty. The Conditional takes the Augment ($300).

11. The Periphrastic
or Definite Future ; e. g. 'snfaflT
TO ayodhydm
JI41rilftl
"vah praydtdsi,thou wilt to-morrow proceed to Ayodhya.
12. The Benedictive is used for expressingnot but
only a blessing, also a

wish in general; e. g, srimdn

^fhfTRJjni^ bMydt, May he be happy!
fft chiram jivydt,May
*i1mif^ he live long !
in the Veda only.
13. The Subjunctiveoccurs
$ 292. The Sanskrit verb has in each tense and mood three numbers,
Singular,Dual, and Plural,with three persons in each.

CHAPTER VIII.

SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES AND THE TEN CLASSES OF VERBS.

J 293. Sanskrit grammarians have divided all verbs into ten classes,
according to certain modifications which their roots undergo before the

terminations of the Present, the Imperfect,the Optative,and Imperative.

This division is very useful,and will be retained with some alterations.
slight
One and the classes. Thus
same root may belong to different "TS^ bhrds,
HTS^bhlds,"*f bhram, *%?{kram, ^jJT klam, ^3( tras, cJ7trut, H1^ belong lash

to the Bhu and Div classes ; "T$IW bhrd"ate or WT^m bhrdtyate,"c. (Pan.in.
i, 70). Again, ^sku, w^stambh,ffcHstumbh} *^fo^skambh,^tskumbh belong
to the Su and Kri classes;^rfiPff
skunoti or ^rrfwskundti (Pan.in. i, 82).

J 394. The four tenses and moods which requirethis modification of the

root will be called the Special or ModifiedTenses ; the rest the General or

Unmodified Tenses. Thus the root fa chi is changed in the Present,

Imperfect,
Optative,
and Imperativeinto fqvj
chi-nu. Hence fa"jR:
chi-nu-mdli,
we search; ^rf%"pr
dchi-nu-ma,we searched. But the Past f^nr:
Participle
chitdh,searched, or the ReduplicatedPerfect fa^aj:
chichy-u^ they have

searched,without the g nu. We call f% chinu,the

chi,the root, f^fj base

of the specialtenses.
-$ 296. AND THE TEN CLASSES OP VERBS. 141

J 295. Verbal bases are first divided into two divisions :

I. Bases which in the modified tenses end in *1 a.

II. Bases which in the modified tenses end in any letter but W a.

This second division is subdivided into,

II a. Bases which insert g nuy "9 u, or *ft nty between the root and the
terminations.
II b. Bases which take the terminations without any intermediate element.

I. First Division.

J 296. The first division comprisesfour classes:

1. The Bhu class (the first with native grammarians,and called by them
v^rf^bhvddi,because the first verb in their lists is ^ bhd, to be).
a. iQ a is added to the last letter of the root.

b. The vowel of the root takes Guna, where possible(i.e.

longor short t, u, r",

if final ; short i, u, ri,(i,if followed by one consonant).

Ex. yi budh,to know ; ^tvfiTbodh-a-ti,
he knows. $"M, to be ; H^firbhdv-a-ti,
he is.

Note "
The accent in verbs of the Bhu class (as we know from the ancient Vedic

language) rests on the radical vowel, except where it is drawn on the augment.
Many derivative verbs, " such as causatives,HmMiir bhdvdyati,he causes to be;
desideratives,^J?rflT
bubhushati, he wishes to be, from *"bhu; intensives in the Atmane-
pada, ^faildbebhidydte,
he cuts much ; and denominatives,n*n"fiinamasydti,he worships,
^ftiVdHlfa he
lohitdydti, grows red, " follow this class.

2. The Tud class (thesixth with native grammarians,and called by them

U^rf^tudddi,because the first root in their lists is ip tud, to strike).

a. ^r a is added to the last letter of the root.

b. Before this ^ a, final ^ i and ^i are changed to

^ iy.
T u and ^l u to T^ uv.

^ri to ft^rty.
^ri to ^rjr ($no).
Ex. tud-d-ti.
to strike;ij^fif
"g^tud, ft ri,to go; CUlTd riy-d-ti. \nd, to

nuv-d-ti.
praise; yMfcf ^ mri, to die ; fa^ mriy-d-te. tf kri, to
scatter ; foff^fw
kir-d-ti*

Note " The accent in verbs of the Tud class rests on the intermediate ^? a j hence never

Guna of the radical vowel.

3. The Div class (thefourth with native grammarians,and called by them

r^mf^divddi,because the first root in their lists is f^divyto play),

a. IT ya is added to the last letter of the root.

Ex. bind ; H^fri ndh-ya-ti. to awake budh-ya-te.

"3"rffr
t^;nah, to ^ budh, ;

Note " The accent in verbs of the Div class rests on the radical vowel ; though there are

traces to show that some verbs of this class had the accent originally
on 1 ya.
 SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES " 297-

4. The Chur class (thetenth with native grammarians, and called by

them yiigfchurddi,because the first root in their lists is chur, to
^
steal).
a. ^HT ay a is added to the last letter of the root.

b. If the root ends in a simple consonant, preceded by sr ", ^T a is

lengthenedto ^n d.

Ex.
^ dal,to cut ; (many exceptions.)
^l^^fdddl-dya-ti,

c. If the root ends in a simple consonant, precededby ^ i, -gr u, ^ rt, o" #,

these vowels take Guna, while ^ri becomes $^ir.
Ex. fg^"fcA,to embrace ; %tnrflT6lesh-dya-ti.^ cMr, to steal ; ^Ulfff

chor-dya-ti.^ mrish, to endure ; *rl^W marsh-dya-te. cfi^W", to

praise; GR^S^rrr
kirt-dya-ti.

d. Final ^i, ^, "3 u, "35^,^H" an"i "^[r^take Vriddhi.

Ex. fwyn,togrow old; ^ |m\ fajray-dya-ti.

"ftm^, to walk; ifRnrflT
mdy-dya-ti.
to fill; ^RTfir pdr-dya-ti.
^ dhri,to hold; vn^rfK dhdr-dya-ti.v^pri,

Note "
Many, if not all roots arranged under this class by native grammarians, are

secondaryroots,and identical in form with causatives,denominatives, "c. This class differs

from other inasmuch

classes, as verbs belonging to it,keep their modificatory
syllable
^HTaya
throughout,in the unmodified as well as in the modified tenses, except in the Benedictive
Par. and the Reduplicated Aorist. The accent rests on the first^ a of ^R ay a.

II. Second Division.

J 297. The second division comprises all verbs which do not, in the

specialtenses, end in ^T a before the terminations.

It is a distinguishingfeature of this second division that, before

certain terminations,all verbs belongingto it requirestrengthening

of their

radical vowel, or if they take "Jnu, ^ u, rftni, strengtheningof the vowels

of these syllables.This strengtheninggenerallytakes place by means of

Guna, but "ftni is raised to *n nd in the Kri, and ^ n to *T na in the Rudh

class.

We shall call the terminations which require strengtheningof the

inflective base, the weak terminations, and the base before them, the

strong base ; and vice versd, the terminations which do not require
strengtheningof the base, the and
strong terminations, the base before

them, the weak base.

As a rule,the accent falls on the first vowel of strong terminations,or, if

the terminations are weak, on the strong base, thus establishing

throughout
an equilibriumbetween base and termination.
-$ 299- AND THB TEN CLASSES OP VERBS.

II a. Bases which take g nu, lu,

J 298. This first subdivision comprisesthree classes :

I. The Su class (thefifth class with native grammarians, and called by

them ^rf^ svddi,because the first root in their lists is *| su).

"Jnu is added to the last letter of the root, before strong terminations,
"ftwo before weak terminations.

Ex. g suy to squeeze out ; *frp: su-nu-mdfr,ist pers. plur.Pres.

^ffffa
su-n6-mi, ist pers. sing.Pres.
a. The Tan class (theeighth class with native grammarians,and called by
them iMltytanddi, because the first root in their lists is ir*^tan).

7 u is added to the last letter of the root, before strong terminations,

*fto before weak terminations.

Ex. JG^tan,to stretch; inpn tan-u-mdh,ist pers. plur.Pres.

rttftfa
tan-6-mi9 ist pers. sing.Pres.
Note " All verbs belongingto this class end in "^n,except one, ^fkri,JiOfH karomi, I do.

3. The Kri class (theninth with native grammarians,and called by them

ctylty
kryddi,because the first root kri).
in their lists is "aft

"ftni is added to the last letter of the root, before strong terminations,
"H nd before weak terminations,
*{n before strong terminations beginningwith vowels.

Ex. "aft
W, to buy; "aftarfa:
kri-ni-mdfy,
ist pers. plur.Pres.
kri-na-mi,ist pers. sing.Pres.
kri-n-dnti,
3rd pers. plur.Pres.
II b. Bases to which the terminations are joinedimmediately.
J 399. The second division comprisesthree classes :

i. The Ad class (thesecond class with native grammarians,and called by them

^ify adddi, because the first root in their lists is ^ ad, to eat).
a. The terminations are added immediatelyto the last letter of the base ;

and in the contact of vowels with vowels, vowels with consonants,

consonants with vowels, and consonants with consonants, the phonetic
rules explainedabove ("107"145)must be observed.
carefully
b. The strong base before the weak terminations takes Guna where

possible($296, i. b).
Ex. f?5^
lih,to lick : fc5TO lih-mdh,we lick ; ^ftr leh-mi, I lick ; Tyf^flek-shi,
thou lickest ($1 27); ctftettdhd,you lick (J1 28); *c*"^diet,thou lickedst

($1*8).
The accent is on the first vowel of the terminations, except in case of
weak terminations,
when the accent falls on the radical vowel.
144: SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES AND THE TEN CLASSES OF VERBS. "299-

2. The Hu class (thethird class with native grammarians, and called by

them "Spftarf^ juhotyddi,because the first root in their lists is fr hut

a. The terminations are added as in the Ad class.

b. The strong base before the weak terminations takes Guna, where possible.
c. The root takes " 302.)
reduplication.(Rules of Reduplication,
Ex. ? hu, to sacrifice: *J"H!ju-hu-mdh, we sacrifice ; sj^frfa
ju-ho-mi,.I
sacrifice. (Pan.vi. i, 192.)
The intensive verbs, conjugatedin the Parasmaipada,follow this class.

The accent is on of the

the first syllable verb,if the terminations are weak, likewise if

the terminations are strong, but begin with a vowel. Ex. "f*nfff
dddhdti; ^vfff
dddhati

(Pan. vi. i,. 189"190). Whether this rule extends to the OptativeAtmanepada is doubtful..

We find in the Rig-vedaboth dddhita and dadhttd. Prof. Benfey,who at first accentuated

dadhitd,now placesthe accent on like

the first syllable, Boehtlingkand Bopp. The Agama
siyutis,no doubt, avidyamanavatsvaravidhau (Pan.in. 1,3, vart. 2); but the question is
whether tta is to be treated as beginningwith
ajadi, a vowel, or whether the termination

is ta with Agama i. I adopt the former view, and see it confirmed by the Pratyudaharana
given in vi. i, 189. For if ydt of dad-ydtis no then
longer ajadi, tia, in ddd-ita must be

ajadion the same ground. The verbs bhi"hri,bhri,hu, mad, jan, dhan, daridrd,
reduplicated
jdgri have the Udatta syllable
on the
precedingthe terminations, if the terminations are

weak. Ex. but fwfif UbJirati (Pan. vi. i, 192).

fwfff bibhdrti,

Rudh class (theseventh class with native grammarians,and called

3. The
by ^vrf^rudhddi, because
them the first root in their listsis rudh,
^
rundddhi, to obstruct).
T^qffg
a. The terminations are added as in the Ad class.

b. Between the radical vowel and the final consonant "{n is inserted,
which

in the strong base before weak terminations is raised to 7f na.

Ex. to join:
*[*{yuj9 gr*n yu-n-j-mdh,
we join; g"lft*T I join.
yu-nd-j-mi,
The accent falls on tf na, wherever it appears, unless it is attracted by the

augment.
First Division.
Bhu class,with native grammarians, Bhvadi, I class.

Tud class, Tudadi, VI class.

Div class, " " Divadi, IV class.

Chur class, "

Churadi, X class.

Second Division.
Su class,with native grammarians, Svadi,V class.

Tan class, Tanadi, VIII class.

Kri class, "
Kryadi, IX class.

Ad class, "
Adadi, II class.

Hu class, Juhotyadi,III class.

Rudh class, " "
Rudhadi, VII class.
146 AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS. " 303-

General Rules of Reduplication.

$ 303. The first
syllableof a root (i.
e. that portion of it which ends

with a vowel)is repeated.

in forming^t^babhu. (Pan.
is exceptional
v$J)hu
^ budh=z'3^^bubudh.
vn. 4, 73.)
$ 304. Aspiratedletters are representedin reduplication
by their responding
cor-

unaspiratedletters.
fas bhid,to cut,fwfa^bibhid. =

T^dhu,to shake,=^dudhu.
" 305. Gutturals are in reduplication
represented by their corresponding
palatals
; ^ h by *(j. (Pan.vn. 4, 62.)
^Z kut, to sever, =
^^7 chukut.

to dig, ^^R[ = chakhan.

,
to go, =

as, to laugh, =

$ 306. If a root begins with more than one consonant, the first only is
reduplicated.
ipi kru$,to shout, ^JST chukruf. =

fqpikship, to throw, faffcp^chikship. =

$ 307. If a root begins with a sibilant followed by a tenuis or aspirated

tenuis,the tenuis only is reduplicated.
^J stu, to praise, "$% tushtu (J103, i). =

W^stan, to sound, irer^ tastan. =

??nlspardh, to strive, =
'^cf^paspardh.
WT sthdjto stand, = if^n tasthd.

^3g\Schyut,to drop, ^gi^ chu"chyut. =

But ^ff 5mn, to pine, = TTCR sasmri.

" 308. If the radical vowel, whether final or medial, is long, it is

shortened in the reduplicative
syllable.
i?T^gdh, to enter, "TTTT|
jagdh. =

^ kri,to buy, fsnftchikri. =

^ stid,
to strike,
^^ = sushud.

" 309. If the radical (notfinal)

vowel is TJ e or ^ ai, it becomes ^ i; if it
is ^fto or ^ftauy it becomes ^ u.

%^ sev, to worship, ftr^sishev. =

^c^dhauk, to approach, J^cfi dudhauk. =

" 310. Roots with final *e, %ai, ^ffro,

are treated like roots ending in

a, taking^r a in the reduplicative

syllable.
^ dhe, to feed, = ^ftdadhau.
^ gai, to sing, =s

^ft^o,to sharpen, =
-$312. AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS. 147

f 311. The followingroots are slightlyirregularon account of the

semivowels which they contain,and which are liable to be changed into

vowels. (Thischange is called Samprasdrana.)Pan. vi. i, 17.

BOOT. FIRST PERS. SING. EEDUPL. PERF. WEAK FORM*. WEAKEST Fomt-
(dja, iprnr yaydja.)
(for
to sacrifice, ^ tj.
uvdcha,
to speak. ^J^ tick.

uvdda9 to say. dd.

^
uvdpa,
to sow.

fo,to wish.

vas = TTW uvdsa,

to dwell.

vah = ytfig uvdha, to carry. ^ dh. uh.)

uvdya,to weave. (zu.)
vivydcha,
to surround.

= f^nv vivyddha,to strike. fafa^vividh. (fvidh.)

= fzpar^vivyathe(Pan.vn. 4, 68). f^T^ vivyath.
=
f^HlM sushvdpa,to sleep.
$u$dva,
to swell^f.

vivydya,
to cover. ft^rtriv?.

w, to grow old.

;a, to call (Pan.vi. i, 33).

= f"pipye,togrow fat (Pan.vi. i, 29).

" -^j^jagrdha9
to take.

= TO^ vavrdscha,to cut (Pan.vi. i, 1 7). ^^ vavrtich.

paprdchchha9to ask. TRF"paprachch

babhrdjja,
to fiy.
^il^ babhrajj.
In the last three verbs the weak form in the perfectis
reduplicated tected
pro-
againstSamprasaranaby the final double consonant. (Pan.i. 2, 5.)
Roots beginningwith ^ va9 but ending in double consonants, do not

change ^ va to ^ u. Ex. ^^ vavrite; ^^ vavridht.

J 312. Roots beginningwith short ^ a, and ending in a singleconsonant,

contract ^i a + ^ a into 5TI d.

^F" ad, to eat, = ""u"{arf.

* The weak forms appear in all persons of the where

perfect
reduplicated neither Vriddhi

nor Guna is required.

t The weakest forms of these verbs do not belong to the but
perfect,
reduplicated have

been added as useful hereafter for the formation of the past participle, the
the benedictive,

passive,"c.
J ^T{vay is a substitute for ^ve,in the reduplicated (Pan.n.
perfect 4, 41). If that sub-
stitution

does not take place,then ^ve forms ^T vavau, ^t vavuh (Pan.vi. i, 40).
(1Pan. vi. i, 38, 39. IF Or f^ITO^svdya(Pan. vi. i, 30).

U 2
148 AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS. " 3T3"-

" 313. Roots

beginningwith short ^r a, and ending with more than one

consonant, prefi^^T^dn. (Pan.vii. 4, 71.)

^H^ arch ^rt dndrch. (Also^rsi as (Su), ^T"!^r
= dna"e.)Pan. vii. 4, 73.
J 314. The root ^j n forms the base of the perfectas WT^
reduplicated dr.
Other roots beginningwith ^ ri prefixw^ara. (Pan.vii. 4, 71.)
^^r^',
to obtain, ^TPpfdn-rij. "^p^ridh,
= to thrive, ^TRJ"^a/zn^" =

These roots are treated in fact as if they were 'W^arch, "c.

-zw^ardh,
" 315. Roots beginningwith ^ i or "su long),
(notprosodially contract ^ + ^
i + i and tf + "$ u + u into ^ i and ^R u ; but if the radical^i or ^r u take
Guna or Vriddhi,i{y and inserted between the reduplicative
syllable
^ v are

and the base. (Pan.vi. 4, 78.)

^^A ^g: ish-dtuh,they two
= have gone.
^^(iy-esh-a
"

(Guna),I have gone.

^^ ukh =
"grwg:ukh-atuh) they two have withered.
= T^ftsfuv-okh-a (Guna),I have withered.
As to roots which cannot be reduplicated
or are otherwise see the
irregular,
rujes given for the formation of the Reduplicatedand Periphrastic Perfect.

SpecialRules of Reduplication.
"3 1 6.
So far the process of reduplication would be the same, whether applied
to the bases of the Reduplicated Perfect or to those of the Hu class. But there
are some pointson which these two classes of reduplicated viz.
bases differ;

1. In the ReduplicatedPerfect,radical ^ ri, -^ri,whether final or medial,

are representedin reduplication
by ^r a.

In the bases of the Hu class,final -^ri

2. and ^ri (theydo not occur as

medial) are representedin reduplication

by \i.
REDUPLICATED PERFECT. Hu CLASS. PRESENT, "c.
f

V[ bhri,to bear, = -qvrn: babhdra. ^ bhri = fWiff bibhdrti.

^ sri,to go, = TOCTC sasdra. ^ sri "
ftmfS sisarti.

" hriy to take, = vf^Ttijahdra. ^ hri = f^fS jiharti.

The root ^ri, to go, forms ^rf"iy-arti;^pn, to fWa
fill, piparti.
" 317. The three verbs f^^nij,
f"^vij,and f^ vish of the Hu class take Guna
in tfr$red^plicated;
syUahle. (Pan. vii. 4, 75.)
f*1^nij, to wash, ^T% nenekti,%f^ nenikte; f%*tvij,
to separate,^rf^ vevekti;
f%\vish, to pervade, TTJ? veceshti.

f 318. The two verbs TT ma, to measure, and i?T hd, to go, of the Hu class take in
^z
the reduplicative
syllable.(Pan. vii. 4, 76.)
*TT ma, mimitej ^T hd, f*T%fft
(H*flri jiMtt.
" 319. Certain roots change their initial consonant if
they are reduplicated.
han,
*""^ to kill,*in\*ijaff1idna.
Likewise in the desiderative ftTO^rfwjighdmsati,and the
intensive "nT3W jahghanydte.(Pan. vii. 3, 55.)
ft[hi,to send (Su),f*m\"*jigh$yq.
Likewise in the desiderative f"nrt^fTT and
jighishati,
the intensive W*fNTiTjeghiydte.(Pan. vii. 3, 56.)
-$ 3^1- AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS. 149

ftfji,to conquer, (Vl'IIH

jigdya.Likewise in the desiderative fwfMn ; but
jfyishati not

in the intensive,which is always ^hftTTTT

jejtydte.(Pan. vn. 3, 57.)
fa c/tt,to gather, has P"i""u"4
optionally chichdya or P^^IM chikaya. The same option
applies to the desiderative,but in the intensive we have ^W)"in chechtydteonly.
(Pan.vii. 3, 58.)
Terminations.

J 320. After having explainedhow the verbal roots are modified in ten

different ways before they receive the terminations of the four special
tenses,
the Present, Imperfect,Optative,and Imperative,
we give a table of the

terminations for these so-called specialor modified tenses and moods.

$ 331. The terminations for the modified tenses, though on the whole the

same for all verbs,are subjectto certain variations,

accordingas the verbal bases

take ^?(FirstDivision), or
a "Jnu, ^ut"^ni (SecondDivision,A.),or nothing
(SecondDivision,B.) between themselves and the terminations. Instead of

givingthe table of terminations accordingto the system of native rians,

gramma-
or accordingto that of and
comparativephilologists, explainingthe
real or fanciful changes which they are supposed to have undergone in the

different classes of verbs, it will be more useful to give them in that form
in which they may mechanicallybe attached to each verbal base. The

beginner should commit to memory the actual paradigms rather than the

different sets of terminations. Instead of taking^rre dthe as the termination

of the *
2nd pers. dual Atm., and learningthat the ^TT d of ^rr$dthe is changed
to ^i after bases in ^T a (Pan.vn. 2, 81),it is simplerto take ^ ithe as

the termination in the First Division ; but still simplerto commit to memory

such forms as "ftvvi

bodhethe, fgmuj dvishdthe, ftwivjmimdthe, without asking
at first any questionsas to how they came to be what they are.

FIRST DIVISION.

Bhd, Tud, Div, and Chur Classes.

PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.
Present. Imperf. Optative.Imperat. Present. Imperfect. Optative. Imperative.
i.^"faamt ^m ^Tjiyam^"f^ani
^i ^* ^ft'ya ^e

2.f*si lh ^lih -* $se *m thdh J^ttlithdh ^ sva

3.
fart 1(t ^(it ijta* ^te If ta ^W ita Ifftarn,
^Rava "^iva ^T^T ava W^avahe W"4 fi$
avahi ^f^ irahi ^R^ arahai

ff tarn ^lfitam "fttarn ^ ithe ^TT ithdm ^ttlRiydthdmJpRithdm

3. 1ft tah Ifftarn ^iff
itdm WT tdm ^n ite ^iff
itdm ^Minf
iydtdm ^TTTitdm
i.^Rlamah ^Rama ^Rima ^"T ama ^HR^amahe^SKf^amahi^f^imahi WH$_ amahai
z.lftha If ta ^if"Va If ta U" dhve *4 dhvam ^131idhvam l4 dhvam
^ nfe nT nta iran nffntdm

* In the second and third persons TR1(tdtmay be used as termination after all verbs, if
the sense is benedictive.
150 AUGMENT, EEDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

SECOND DIVISION.
Su, Tan, Kri,Ad, Hu9 and Rudh Classes.
PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.
Present. Imperfect.Optative. Imperative. Present. Imperfect. Optative. Imperative.

I.

Uf dhvam

^TrTf
atdm

The terminations enclosed in squares are the weak, i. e. unaccented

terminations which requirestrengtheningof the base.

Note i " When f^ hi is added immediatelyto the final consonant of a

root (inthe Ad, Rudh, or Hu classes), it is changed to fv dhi (Pan.

vi. 4, 101.

See No. 162). The verb J hu, though endingin a vowel,takes fqdhi instead
of f^ hi, for the sake of euphony. (Pan.vi. 4, 101.)

Kri verbs ending in consonants form the 2nd pers. sing.imp. in WT ana.

(See No. 155. Pan. in. i, 83.)

In the 2nd pers. sing.imp. Parasm. verbs of the Su and Tan classes take

no except when
termination, ^ u is precededby a conjunctconsonant. (See
No. 177.)
Note 2 " In the 3rd plur.pres. and imper.Parasm. verbs of the Hu
pers.
class and ^rvq^f abhyasta,i.e. reduplicated bases,take ^rfir
ati and ^nj atu.

Note 3 " In the 3rd pers. plur.imp. Parasm. verbs of the Hu class,redu-
plicated

bases,and ft^vid,to know, take 7: uh,,before which, verbs ending

in a vowel, requireGuna. "gt uh is used after verbs
optionally in *"\ a, and

after to hate.
f"^dvish, (Pan.111.4, 109"112.)
$ 322. By means of these terminations the student is able to form the

Present, Imperfect,Optative,and Imperative in the Parasmaipada and

Atmanepade
of all regularverbs in Sanskrit ; and any one who has clearly
understood how the verbal bases are prepared in ten different ways for

receivingtheir terminations,and who will attach to these verbal bases the

terminations as given above, accordingto the rules of Sandhi,will have no

difficultyin writingout for himself the paradigms of any Sanskrit verb in

four of the most importanttenses and moods, both in the Parasmaipadaand

Atmanepada.Some verbs,however, are irregular in the formation of their
base ; these must be learnt from the Dhatupatha.
$322' 151

'i

?
"
i

I
r
o

""
 152

""
* -8
(-H .0;

ji
ve

g
ifkttll I

rim "
 154

*
t
S'xs !"s)h" o
f 1 SI " -g

I
1 3-
" ^ te
r
ar ^
l^"^ fa ""

-i v!
"*" ^ fl
"
-"S
\"s" .8^
^ "r" ^

HilllMJ
4
s- -t^e

""o
*|^

PS
mil
^1
PL,

"

"""
 155

l
fit! I immmsi

'5
1
5

'%

"
Q -41 1
"tj
iiti!.
i 1
"

W
J5
"Jl
i o
09

" t-
H
""
o"
":

2
"%

ft* 15 fl ""lH*l I

(*

lj

1 I
1 el "!
.

ri

'^ sri Pi
156

I Ig
g
s QJ
-
^
a " 1 ^ "7 $
"" ^ I4% o

'.g
vs
7!
P1
'?|
^e W ^

tvr

"
."
$3*2. 157

^ *"."

r- * v?
P
2
a,
"g "Kr'TS

'
W

~"

"" ?
r ""
5? J ^
^ * ^^52 I o

ir^S

"S V-e

xe
^2
" ^ J5 X2 fc =8
IfHi!
~

"^-

3 B"
Bl
1^1 P^
'S3 "l

.1 1
6-

J?S
lir^
P
^ KS fe)^
158

"

4
"5

a
't

'is
"Q 1045

-1
-J GENERAL OR UNMODIFIED TENSES.

CHAPTER X.

GENERAL OR UNMODIFIED TENSES.

which remain, the Reduplicated Perfect, the phrastic

Peri-
$323. In the tenses

Perfect, the First and Second Aorist, the Future, the Conditional,
the PeriphrasticFuture, and Benedictive,the distinction of the ten classes

vanishes. All verbs are treated alike,to whatever class they belong in the

modified tenses ; and the distinguishing

features,the inserted "jnu, *u97ft ni,
"c., are removed again from the roots to which they had been attached in

the Present, the Imperfect,the Optative,and Imperative. Only the verbs

of the Chur class preserve their ^R dya throughout, except in the Aorist

and Benedictive.
ReduplicatedPerfect.
J 324. The root in its primitivestate is reduplicated. The rules of

have
reduplication been given above. ($302"319.)
$ 325. The ReduplicatedPerfect can be formed of all verbs, except
1. Monosyllabic roots which begin with vowel prosodiallylong but
any
d: such fr id,to praise; *vedh, to light
*T a or m as to grow ; jp^indh, ;

'S^und,to wet.

Polysyllabic such be bright.

2. roots, as
'l*w"(chakds, to
3. Verbs of the Chur class and derivative verbs, such as Causatives,

Desideratives,
Intensives,Denominatives.
form the
J 326. Verbs which cannot form the Perfect by reduplication,
Perfect by
Periphrastic means of composition. (J340.)
So do likewise to sit down
^TI day, to pity,"c., ^n^ ay, to go, ^T^ as,

(Pan.in. i, 37),WR(kds,to cough (Pan.in. 35); also WR(kds, to shine

I,

(Sar.);optionally
^re ush, to viddm),
burn, (^faioshdm),fas vid, to know, (fe^T
to wake, fapvftjdgardm,
*TFJ.M0T"" Pan. in. i, 38); and, after takingredupli-
cation,
tftbhi (fswrnbibhaydm),-%thri(^^jihraydm)^ ^ bhri

and
J hu ("SJ^T
juhavdm. Pan. in. i, 39).

The verb ^ drnu, to allows only

although polysyllabic, of
cover,

drnundva as its Perfect.

although its base

richh, to fail, in the Perfect ends in two consonants,
^5
forms only VMM^ dnarchchha. It is treated, in fact,as if ^^archchh. ($31
3.)

Terminations of the ReduplicatedPerfect.

SINGULAR.

2. ishe
160 GENERAL OR UNMODIFIED TENSES.

DUAL.

1. ^ iva ivahe

2. ^rgt athufy
3. ^BTgja"w#
PLURAL.

i.
^IT ima imahe

or

These terminations are here given,without any regard to the systems of

native or comparativegrammarians, in that form in which they be

may
added
mechanically to the reduplicated
roots. The rules on the omission of

the initial^ i of certain terminations will be given below.

" 327. The accent falls on the terminations in the Parasmaipada and

Atmanepada, except in the three persons singularParasmaipada. In these

the accent falls on the root, which therefore is strengthenedaccordingto the

followingrules :

1. Vowels capableof Guna, take Guna throughout the singular,

if followed

by one consonant.

fa^bhid9 f^T^ bibhed-a,fsftf^q f^T^ bibhed-a.

bibhed-itha,
**F^budh,"j^fai
bubddh-at ^ftftTO
bubodh-itha,^r"rtv bubddh-a.
But *fatjiv,
a long medial vowel not being liable to Guna, forms P"f"flcf
jijw-a, PH jflfavjjy P*|"fl^
iv-itha, jijiv-a.
2. Final vowels take Vriddhi or Guna in the Guna
first, in the second,
Vriddhi only in the third person singular.
nindy-a or PHHH nindy-a9 PHH^ ninetha or PfHP*4"inindy-itha,
ninay-a.
3. ^r a if followed by a singleconsonant, takes Vriddhi or Guna in the first,
Guna in the second, Vriddhi only in the third person singular.
^ hanS3"K*{jaghdn-a v{*FRJaghdn-a.
or Wttjaghdn-a,^qfaRjaghdn-itha,

Note " If the second person singularParasmaipada is formed by ^ftha,the accent falls on

the root ; if with ^ZJitha, the accent may fall on any but generallyit
syllable, is on the

termination. In this case the radical vowel in certain verbs, be without Guna,
may,
f%*(vij, but P"P"=I
f^3*1viveja, PiT^T (Pan. 1.2,2;
vivijitha. 3.)

" 328. As there is a tendency to strengthenthe base in the three persons

singularParasmaipada,so there is a tendency to weaken the base, under

certain circumstances,
before the other terminations of the Perfect,Parasmai
and Atmanepada.Here the followingrules must be observed :

i. Roots like impat, i.e. roots in which ^ a is preceded and followed by a

singleconsonant, and which in their reduplicated repeat the

syllable
initial consonant without any change (thisexcludes roots beginning
with aspiratesand with gutturals;roots beginning with 'Zv, and
162 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i. " 331-

Roots ending in 7 u, ^ u, change these vowels always into f*(w).

Most roots ending in ^ri, change the vowel to "^.ar (Pan.vn. 4, u).

niny-ivd,
we two have led. 6i"riy-ivd,
fa "ri,fyfeiftra we

have chakr-dthuh, you have done. ^ stri,

two gone. *f kri, ^m^l two

ri**K^ttastar-dthuh,you two have spread. 5 yw, ^fJTJ! yuyuv-dthufy,

you
two have joined. ^ stu, "^f^l tushtuv-dthuh,you two have praised,
eg#/"",
p chakar-dthufy,
you two have scattered.

CHAPTER XL

THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i.

$331.Before we can proceed to form the paradigms of the Reduplicated

Perfect by means of joiningthe terminations with the root, it is necessary
to consider the intermediate ^i, which in the ReduplicatedPerfect and in

the other unmodified tenses has to be inserted between the verbal base and

the beginning with

originally
terminations, consonants. The rules which

of this of the
require,allow, or prohibitthe insertion ^ i form one most

difficult chaptersof Sanskrit grammar, and it is the objectof the following

paragraphsto simplifythese rules as much as possible.
The generaltendency,and, so far,the generalrule,is that the terminations

of the unmodified or beginningwith

generaltenses, originally consonants,
insert the vowel ^ i between base and termination ; and from an historical

pointof view it would no doubt be more correct to speak of the rules which

requirethe addition of an intermediate

^ i than (ashas been done in $ 326)
to representthe ^ i as an part of
integral the terminations,and to give the
rules which requireits omission. But as the intermediate S{* has prevailed
in the vast majorityof verbs, it will be easier,for practical
purposes, to

state the i. e.
exceptions, the cases in which the ^ Hs not employed, instead
of denning the cases in which it must or may be inserted.

One termination only,that of the 3rd pers. plur.Perf. Atm.,^tire,

keeps the
intermediate 35i under all circumstances. In the Veda, however, this 3[i,too,
has not yet become fixed,and is omitted; e.
occasionally duduh-re.
g. gpr

* In Sf fri,"[dri, and "^ pri a further shortening may take place; ^KJJ! sasardtuk

being shortened to $RT"i sasrdtuh,"c. (Pan.vn. 4, 12.)

-$ 332. THE INTERMEDIATE ^ t. 163

Let it be remembered then, that there are three pointsto be considered :

i. When is it necessary to omit the \i?

3. When is it optionalto insert or to omit the ^ i ?

3. When is it necessary to insert the \ i?

For the purposes of readingSanskrit,all that a student is obligedto know

is,When it is necessary to omit the ^ i. Even for writingSanskrit this

knowledge would be for

sufficient, in all cases except those in which the

omission is necessary, the ^ i may safelybe inserted,

although,according
to views of native grammarians,it may be equallyright to omit it. A
student and
therefore, particularly
a beginner,is safe if he only knows the

cases in which ^ i is necessarily

omitted,nor will anything but extensive

reading enable him to know the verbs in which the insertion is either

optionalor necessary. Native grammarians have indeed laid down a number

of rules,but both before and after Panini the language of India has

changed, and even native grammarians are obligedto admit that on the

optionalinsertion of ^ i authorities differ;that is to say, that the literary

language of India differed so much in different parts of that enormous

country, and at different periodsof its long history,

that no rules,however
minute, would suffice to all its freaks
register and fancies.

" 332. Taking as the starting-pointthe general axiom (Pan.vu. 2, 35) that every
termination with
beginning originally a consonant (except ^ y) takes ^ "",which we
the

representas a portionof the termination,we proceed to state the exceptions,e. the cases
i.

in which the ^t must on no account be inserted,or, as we should say, must be cut off from
the beginningof the termination.

The verbs, which

following have been collected by
carefully native grammarians(Pan.
vu. 2, 10),are not allowed to take the intermediate ^ " in the so-called generalor unmodified

tenses, before terminations or affixes beginningoriginally

with a consonant (except*(y).
(Note " The perfectand its participle
reduplicated in ^^rcrsare not affected by these rules ;

see " 334.)

1. All monosyllabic
roots endingin ^f[d.

2. roots endingin
All monosyllabic ^ t, except ft*sri,to attend (21,31)*; fa 4vi,togrow

(23,41). (Note " ftRsm*,to laugh,must take ^ " in the Desiderative. Pan. vu.

2, 74-)
3. All monosyllabic
roots ending in ^f,except ^ df,to fly(22,72 ; and
26,26. anuddtta),
$ftsi,to rest (24,22).
4. All roots ending in *5u, except *fyu,
monosyllabic to mix (24,23; not 31,9); ^rw,
to sound (24,24); to
"jjnw, praise(24,26; 28, 104?); to sound
TSJfoAt/, (24,27);
T9JJkshnu, to sharpen(24,28). ^ snu, to flow (24,29),takes ^" in Parasmaipada
(Pan. vu. 36). (Note take in the First
2, "
*J stu, to praise,and *}sw, to pour, ^ "

Aorist Parasmaipada. Pan. vu. 2, 72.)

*
These refer to
figures the inWestergaard'sRadices LinguaeSanscrit*,1841.
Dhatupaflia
Y 2
164 THE INTERMEDIATE i. 332-

5. All monosyllabic
roots ending in ^Jn", except ^t?n,to choose (31,38).

Important exception: in the Fut. and Cond. in ^T sya, all verbs in ^J ri take ^ i (Pan.
vn. 2, 70).
take i in the
^ svri,to sound, may take ^ i (Pan. vn. 2, 44). ^ bhri,to carry, may ^
Desider. (Pan.vn. 2, to hold, and ^n,
49). ^ dri,to regard,"jc?An, to go, take

^ i in the Desider. (Pan.vn. 2, 74, 75).

In the Benedictive and First Aorist Atmanepadaverbs ending in ^ ri and beginning
with a conjunctconsonant may take ^ i (Pan. vn. 2, 43).
6. All monosyllabic roots ending in TJ e, ^ ai, ^fto.
Thereforej
with few exceptions,as mentioned above, all monosyllabic
roots ending in
vowels, except the vowels ^5 u and ^ ri,must not take ^ i.

7. Of roots ending in cjfJc,TfT^fak, to be able (26,78; 27, 15).

8. Of roots ending in ^ ch, ^f^pach,to cook (23, 27); *^vach,to speak (24,55); ipf
much, to loose (28,136); fa^sich, (28,140); ft^n'cA,
to sprinkle to leave (29,4);
'fa^wcA,separate(29,5).to

(28,120). It take ^i in the Desider.

9. Of roots ending in "^chh, Tf^prachh,
to ask must

(Pan. vn. 2, 75).

Of roots ending in *(J, embrace (23,7); fV^tyaj,
to leave (23,17); ^T5T
10.
W^svanj,to
sanj,to adhere (23,18); ^(bhaj, to worship (23,29); T^ranj,to colour (23,30;
36, 58); TS^yo;,to sacrifice (23,33); f^^nij,
to clean (25,n); f^w/, to separate

(25,12; not 28,9, or 29, 23); [Kas'.

^mri;]; *[*{yuj, to meditate (26,68),to join
(29,7); to let off
*n^sn)', (26,69; 28, 121); ^^bhrajj,to bake (28, 4, except
Desider.)j to dip (28, 122); *^*{ruj, to bend
to break (28,123);V[*{bhuj,
Tr^majf/,
(28,124),to protect(29, 17); lfc(bhafij,
to break (29,16).
1 1. Of roots endingin ^ d, "^ had, to evacuate (23,8); ^^ skand, to step (23,10); ^ ad,
to eat (24,i)j ^pad, to go (26,60) ; f"^khid,
to be "c. (26,61
distressed, ; 28, 142 ;

29, 12); "fa^w'eJ,

to be (26,62); "fe^sm'd,
to sweat to strike (28,
(26,79); "g^tac?,
i); "55nud, to push (28,2 ; 28, 132); ^ sad, to droop (28,133) ; ^ sad,to perish
(28, 134); f^vid,
to find (28,138? 29, 13; not 24, 56); fo^bhid,
to cut (29,2);
f^ chhid, to divide (29,3); T5H* kshud,to pound (29,6).
12. Of roots endingin V(dh, *3p(budh,to know (26,63); to fight
Ijftyudh, (26,64); ^ rudh,
with aww, to love (26,65),to keep
^5T5J off (29,i); TT^rddh,
to grow (26,71; 27, 16);

^H("ya^, to strike (26, 72); "^fcrwdA,to be angry (26,80); ^1 kshudh, to be

hungry (26, 81), except Part. "WfVrTkshudhita and Ger. ASlfVlr4l
kshudhitvd (Pan.

vn. 2, 52); ^JVswdA,

to clean (26,82); ftr^sz'dA,
to succeed (26,83); ^TTVsadA, to

achieve (27, 16) ; ^6awc/A, to bind (31,37).

13. Of roots ending in r^w,JR^han,to kill (24,2),except the Fut. and Cond. (Pan. vn. 2,

70); likewise its substitute 'Q^badhj*"[man, to think (26,67).

14. Of roots endingin \p, fft*{tip,
to pour (10,i ?); 1"{srip, to go (23,14); Jf^tap,to heat
(23,16; 26, 50); STU/op, to swear (23,31 ; 26, 59); 'SRvap, to sow (23, 34);
svap, to to reach (27,14); f^Jcship,
sleep(24,60) ; ''Srr^ap, to throw (28,5) ;
to cut (28,137); f"{lip, to anoint (28,139); ""^chhup, to touch (28,125). (Note "

fflj/npand ^^drip,which are generallyincluded, may take ^ ", according to Pan.

vii. 2, 45.)
15. Of roots ending in "T bh, t"(rabh,to desire (23,5); ""*Xlabh,to take (23,6) ; T*T yabh,

n).
coire(23,
_$ 333- THE INTERMEDIATE J t. 165

16. Of roots ending in T^ram, to play (20,23) ; "T^nam,to

*^ro, incline (23,12);
to cease (23,15). But these three take ^ t in Aor. Par. (Pan. vn. 2, 73). If^cm, to

go (23,13),but it takes ^" before ^* of Put.,Cond., and Desider. Par. (Pan. vn. 2,

58). Also W^kram, to step (13,31),in Atm. (Pan. vn. 2, 36).

17. Of roots ending in to shout

1{4,"J^Jtri^, (20,26) ; ^J^rfftl,
to see (23,19); $J(daih",
to bite (23,20) j fo"S^Ji/, (26, 70;
to be small 28, 127); ft^rftV,show to (28,3);
,
to hurt (28,126); ft^rtf,
to hurt (28, 126);Fpjaprtf,
to touch (28,128);
to enter (28,130); to rub
iJSJmrtf, (28,131).
,

18. Of roots endingin "^sA,

ff^krish,
to draw (23,21 ; 28, 6); ffr^tvish,
to shine (23,32) ;
fg^dvish, to hate (24,3) ; ft^vtsA, to pervade(25,13),to separate (31,54; not 17,
47)J ^push, to nourish (26,73 ; not 17, 50)j to dry (26,74); Tfttush,
Jjf{4ush, to

please(26,75) ; J^dusA,to spoil(26,76); fe^tftsA,

to embrace (26,77); fjf^uA,
to (29,14);
distinguish fq^pish,
to pound (29,15).
19. Of rootsendingin ^s, ^^t?as,to dwell (23,36),except Part. ^Cnn; ushitah and Ger.
TfoFTTushitvd (Pan. vn. 2, 52) ; T"^ghas,
to eat (17,65, as substitute for W^cwJ).

20. Of roots ending in ^ A, ^? ruA, to grow (20,29) ; ^ dah, to burn (23,22) ; fo^miA,
to sprinkle(23,23) ; ^ vah, to carry (23,35); J^ duh, to milk (24,4; not 17, 87);
f"^dih,to smear (24, 5); fc5^
lih,to lick (24,6); ^ naA, to bind (26,57).

" 333- Other roots there are, which must not take ^ * in certain only of the general
tenses.

A. In the future (formed by ITT td\ the future and conditional (formed by W *ya),the
and
desiderative, the in
participle cT ta (Pan. vu. 2, 15; 44),the verb Jf^klip
must not

take ^ ", if used in the Parasmaipada. (Pan. vn. 2, 60.)

to shape, Fut.
gr^^/ip, "h rWI Fut.
kdlptd, oF^rfif kalpsyati,
Cond. ^ "" rn" t^akalpsyat;
Desid. (V|^i%rn Part.
cJiiklipsati; giTKkliptah.
B. In the future and conditional (formed by **T sya),the desiderative base, and the

in IT ta,the following
participle four verbs must not take ^ *, if used in the Parasmai-
pada.

(Pan. vii. 2, 59.)

to exist,
^!(vrit, Fut. "TO^favartsyati, Desid. rq^rofn
Cond. ^GRF!(avartsyatj vivritsati;

Part. ^: vrittah. (Pan. vn. 2, 15; 56.)

^(vridh,to g rowt"ut.'5j"fKvartsyati,Cond.^31Q3(avartsyatjDesid. fq^wfn vivritsati;

Part. ^: vriddhah.

^^syand,to drop,Fut. ^Wft syantsyati, Cond. ^^4i^^asyantsyat ; Desid.

Part.
sisyantsati; t"iq; syannah.
5J^ ^tc?A,to hurt, Fut. 314*)
fritartsyati,
Cond. ^^i"3i^
asartsyat; Desid.

Mritsati; Part. sriddhah.

^fSf:
C. In the desiderative bases, and in the hi
participle W /a, roots ending in
monosyllabic
7w, ^!M, ^n, ^rl, and ?T^^"A,to take, and ^ ^uA, to hide,do not take ^ i.

(Pan. vn. 2, 12.)

^L"Att,
to be, "yjjrfiff
bubhushati; Part. ^IH MtftaA.

f=H^H|fAjighrikshati;
ITfi/rraA, Part. *prfa:$rn"AftaA(longf by special rule,cf.Pan. vn. 2, 37).

5f guh, 'SfflQfftjughukshati;
Part. *J":gudhah (cf. Pan. vn. 2, 44).

(Verbs ending in ^rt and *J0riare liable to exceptions. See " 337. Pan. vn. 2, 38-41.)
D. formations.
Participial
Roots which be without the ^ in any one of the generaltenses, must be without
i. may "

it in the participle
in If ta.
166 THE INTERMEDIATE L
333-

(Remark that the participle

in K ta is most opposed,as the reduplicated
perfectis most
disposedto the admission of 5[".)
Monosyllabic
roots endingin ^fu, ^u, ^n", ^ri, do not take 3["before the participle
in 7T ta, nor before other terminations which tend to weaken a verbal base.
(Pan. vn. 2, u.)
3 yu, to join,JIT:yu-tah,^jf^l^yu-tavdn,
fFTTyu-tvd.(Pan.vn. 2, n.)
""Zw,to Zw-wa#,"""HI"llu-navdn, eSFTT Zw-taa.
cut, cg"T: (Except^pu, " 335, II. 6.)

^ "ft, to cover, ^r^Tvri-tvd.

^Wt vri-tah,'^nm^vri-tavdn,
,
to enter,may form (Pan.vn. 2, 44) the future as W^M gdh-i-
hence its participle
TT2't gddhah only.

,
to protect,may form (Pan.vn. 2, 44) the future *frfWT#qp-i-fa
or

hence its TOTt

participle guptak only.
2. Roots which by native grammarians are marked with technical ^TT " or \t do not take

in the *
5ft in
participle K ta. (Pan.vn. 2, 14, 16.)
'c?,
to sweat (marked as f"i(*"*=!
t;i nishvidd);Ptsrq*
svinnah.

*"to be ashamed (marked as vTlwil olaji};H^J lagnah.

List of Participles
in If ta or "T na wJ^ic^ for specialreasons and in specialsenses
do not take ^ i.

f^Tsri,to go ;
f^Ilft
fritah,T'JdqT
fritvd. (Pan.vii. 2, n.) See " 332, 2.

"fa"w, to swell ; SHT: sMwaA. (Pan.vii. 2, 14.) See " 332, 2.

"^prkshubh, to shake; ^"art

Jcshubdhah, if it means the churning-stick.
(Pan. vn.2, 18.)
See " 332, 15.

T3"^ svan, to sound ;

^flTtsvdntah,if it means the mind.

13^ dhvan, to sound ; ScJTlfJ dhvdntah,if it means darkness.

^, to be near; W?T* lagnah,if it means attached.

mlechchh,to ; ffn?J
speak indistinctly mUshtah, if it means indistinct.

fTOT virebh,to sound ;

fetatt viribdhah,if it refers to a note.

,
to prepare ;
Tfife:
phdntah, if it means without an effort.

vdh, to labour ; ^PSTt vddhah, if it means excessive.

,
to be confident ; ^"1 dhrishtah,if it means bold. (Pan. vii. 2, 19.)
,
to praise; tVsfUjcU
visastah,if it means arrogant.
drill.,
to grow ; 7g"ldridhah,if it means strong. (Pan.vii. 2, 20.)
parwrih, to grow ; HfY"|"sJ
parivridhah,if it means lord. (Pan.vii. 2, 21.)

,
to try; oFlft if it means
Jcashtah, difficultor impervious. (Pan.vii; 2, 22.)
to manifest ; ghushtah,if it does not mean
TJT?t proclaimed.(Pan.vii. 2, 23.)
^T^ard, with the prepos. ^ saw, f^Twi,f^1t?i,^rfharnnahj *i*i"5t
samarnnah, plagued.(Pag.
vii. 2, 24.)
with
^I^arc?, the prepos. ^rfa aZ"My WIWi abhyarnnah,if it means near. (Pan.vii. 2, 25.)
it (ascausative),WJ vrittah,if it means read.

*
f*fc"
mid, to be soft,though having a technical W a, may, in certain senses, form its

participle
as "iP^nJ
meditah or fa^J minnah (Pan.vii. 2, 17). The same appliesto all verbs

marked by technical ^TT a.

-$ 335* THE INTERMEDIATE J i. 167

Intermediate ^ i in the Reduplicated

Perfect.

" 334. The precedingrules, prohibitingin a number of roots the ^ t for all or most

generaltenses, do not affect the perfect.Most

reduplicated of the verbs just enumerated
which must omit ^ i in all other general tenses, do not omit it in the perfect. So general,
in fact,has the use of the ^ i become in the perfect,
that eightroots only are absolutely
prohibitedfrom takingit. These are (Pan. vn. 2, 13),
1. If kri, to do, (unless it is changed to ^f skri),ist pers. dual ^pf chakri-va; but
t"^"a(Vq samchaskariva; 2nd pers. sing.t^WX** samchaskaritha.

2. ^ sri,to go, sasri-va.

tlljq
3. ^ bhri,to bear,f$3 babhri-va.

4. ^vri ty^vrirl
and ^rnVi*),
to choose, Par. ^^ ram-rat, Atm. ^p^ vavri-vahe,

^"4 vavri-she.

5. ?*Jstu, to praise,IJJ^T
tushtu-va. g*W tush^o-tha.
6. "5 dru, to run, J5^ dudru-va. J^T dudro-tha.

7. ^ srw, to flow, tjt^ SMsrw-ra. tjtaTiv

susro-tha.

8. to hear, ^^^T 4usru-va.

^ ^irtt, 3JH"ftVJ
susro-thn.

" 335- IQ tne second person singular of the reduplicated

perfectPar. the \ i before

*T /Aa must be left out,

necessarily
1. In the eightroots, enumerated before. (The form "*"H vavar-tha,however, being
restricted to the Veda, ^^^vavaritha is considered the rightform. See No. 142, in

the Dhatupatha.)
2. In roots endingin vowels, which are without 5["
necessarily in the future (ifT
td),
Pan,

vn. 2, 61. See " 332, where these roots are given.
*TT yd, to go ; Fut. Mini ydtd; 4JJJIVJ yayd-tha.
f% cA",to gather; Fut. ^UT chetd; P'l'S'q chiche-tha.

3. In roots ending in consonants and having an ^? a for their radical vowel, which are

without ^i
necessarily in the future (iTT
td),
Pan. vn. 2, 62. See " 332, where these
roots are given.
Tf^pach,to cook ; Fut. ^Kfpaktd; HMTH papak-tha.
But "pH(V he
krishati, drags; Fut. ctff
T karshtd; 'qcuPHN chakarsh-i-tha.

(Bharadvajarequiresthe omission of ^ i after roots with ^ ri only,which are necessarily

without ^ i in the future
periphrastic (Pan. vn. 2, 63),except root ^ ri itself. Hence he

allows sf'H'q
pechitha,besides MH"T^ papaktha; ^MPiiN besides
iyajitha, ^I" iyashtha:
also ^ftnryayitha,f'UfilVIchichayitha,
"c.)

4. All other verbs ending in consonants with any other radical vowel but ^ a, require^*,
and do all verbs with which i is either optional or in the
indispensable future
so
^
(ltt
to).

*
^ t?nn, (27,8) ^TTET t?arane, Su. ^t?r"n,(34,8) SHN"jJ dvarane, Chur. ^ rrt",

(31,38) WW sambhaktau, Kri.

t The form "H(M vavarivay which Westergaard mentions, may be derived from another

the rule of Panini

root "^vri, being restricted by the commentator to ^Trrin and
 168 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i.

Exceptions:
1. In and ^S^drif,
Iffisrij the omission is optional.

^(srij,TO? sasrashtha, or UtjfaTVI

sasrijitha.
2. The verbs ^rf% atti,^rflfarti,awfffvyayati must take ^i. " 338, 7.
^Tad, ^nf^Tdd-i-tha,(exceptionto No. 3.)
^ri, ""! i fvq dr-i-tha,
(exception
to No. 2.)

^T vye, fa"M PHV vivyay-i-tha,

(exceptionto No. 2.)

Tables showing the in which the intermediate i must be omitted between the Unmodified
cases
^
Root and the Terminations of the so-called General Tenses, originally
beginningwith a

Consonant, except *^y.

"
" 336. In these tables Jtta stands for the Past ff^san stands for the Desidera-
Participle;
tive ; ^T sya for the Future and Conditional ; HT td for the Future
Periphrastic ;
for the First Aorist ;
f"3 lin for the Benedictive.

I. For all General Tenses, except the Reduplicated

Perfect,
Omit \ *',
1. Before Ttta, *fi^sare,
^(sya, rTT td, fti^sich,
fc5^lin :

In the verbs enumerated " 332.

2. Before Ttta, 'Q^san,^sya, WT td:

In y^klip,if Parasmaipada. " 333, A.

3. Before IT ta, *R^san,*?? sya :

In ^?(vrit,
^fivridh, if Parasmaipada. "
l"^syand,
yfts^idh, 333, B.

4. Before 7f ta, ^H^ saw ."

In verbs ending in T,
monosyllabic "3!u, ^, ^ rt,
^ grah, and J^ guh. " 333, C,

5. Before Tf ta:

a. All verbs which by native grammarians are marked with ^TTa, \t, or ~"u *.

b. The verb fwfri and others enumerated in a generallist," 333, D.

II. For the Reduplicated

Perfect,
Omit ^ i,
1. Before all terminations,except ^C ire :

In eightverbs,mentioned " 334.

2. Before "Htha, 2nd pers. sing.:

All verbs of " 332 ending in vowels 1 ifwithout ^ " in the

All verbs of " 332 endingin consonants with ^Ta as radical vowel /periphrastic
future.

Optional insertion of ^ i.
" 337' F"r practicalpurposes, as was stated before,it is sufficient to know when it
would be wrong to the intermediate
use
^*,-for in all other cases, whatever the views of
different grammarians, the usage of different writers,it is safe to insert the i.
or
^
As native grammarians, however, have been at much painsto collect the cases in which ^i
must or be inserted,a short abstract of their rules may here follow,which the early
may
student may safely
pass by.

* The technical "ZRu shows that in the other generaltenses the ^ i is optional.
" 337, 1. 2.
170 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i. $ 338-

5. Before the gerundialtermination T^T tvd :

In verbs having a technical "31u. (Pan. vn. 2, 56.)

Slftfri
3I*/am (flQgamu), I samitvd or ^T^f\ sdntvd.
6. Before the gerundialtermination r^T tvd and the in IT ta
participle :

In the verb fjfR^klis.

(Pan. vn. 2, 50.)
f^P^RK Misitvd or f^ifT ffrfspf:
klishtvd, klisitah or fjf":
klishtah.

In the verb ^pu. (Pan. vn. 2, 51.)

n\*tt*\ pavitvd or ^^Alpavitahor "JTTt
T$t31putvd, putah. It must take ^" in

the desiderative(Pan. vii. 2, 74).

7. Before the participial
terminations If ta or "ffwa.; (see also " 333, D. 2, note) :
In the verbs %*[dam,to tame, ^f cH ddntah or ^f*Trf:
damitah. (Pan. vii. 2, 27.)
$T*T/am, to quiet,^itcH
sdntah or ^rf'Trf
J samitah.

^Ttpur,to ^jSt
fill, purnah or "%ftjK
puritafi.

"^ c?"5,to perish,^cTJ dastah ^iftnf

t ddsitah.
or

,
to touch, ^"re: spashtah *Mlf$M:spdsitah. or

chhad, to cover, chhannah

"SfflfJ "(i(^fT! chhdditah.
or

,
to inform, ^Ijnaptah or ^rPTff
t jnapitdh.

i, to hurt, ^TT?i rushtah or ^PunJ rushitah. (Pan.vii. 2, 28.)

am, to go, WrH aw^aA or ^i(*irtt
amitah.

,
to hasten, IT^J
turnah or rqf^nJtvaritah.
hush, to shout, UMV* sahghushtahor ^'^PMdt
sanghushitah.(See " 333,
D. 2.)
"9"^^s"an,to sound, vti taintdsvdntah or vfi^rrtn;dsvanitah. (See " 333,

D. 2.)

^mA, to rejoice,
^?J hrishtah or ^f^W"hrishitah,if applied to horripilation.
(Pin.vii. 2, 29.)
apa-chi,to apachitahor ^TH^irMnt apachdyitah
honour, "smF*frrt *.

8. Before the of the reduplicatedperfectin ^[pas.-

participle
In the verbs TH #am, to go, ^fH1
H "ll^jagmivdn or "f*l"4 [^jaganvdnf.
^"^ Aaw, to kill,^ P"q \J(jaghmvdnor ^ M i^T^jaghanvdn.
ia7.,
to know, PqP3i\crir|[
vividivdn or f"cfc|g^
vividvdn.

V, to enter,WV%^T"^ vimswdn or f%Pq*a l*^vivisvdn.

ris,to see, ^"T^TTP^
dadrisivdn or ^STSTT*^dadrisvdn.

Necessary insertion of ^ i.

" 338- ^ " must be inserted in all verbs in which, as stated before,it is neither prohibited,
nor only optionally
allowed (Pan. vii. 2, 35). Besides these,the followingspecialcases may
be mentioned :

i. Before perfect:
of reduplicated
^^pas, participle
In the verbs ending in ^TT d (Pan. vii. 2, 67). *TT pd,

In the verbs reduced to a singlesyllablein the perfect(Pan.vii.

reduplicated 2, 67).
^TST as, to eat, SsiI P^|"(
i*^dsivdn.
In the verb fR^ghas,
to eat, "i P"j
"( \*{jaksMvdn.

Other verbs rejectit.

* Pan. vii. 2, 30. f Pan. vii. 2, 68.

-$ 34*. THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i. 171

2. Before T*T*yaof the future and conditional r

'

In all verbs ending in ^ri, and in ^ han (Pan.vii. 2, 70). In JTl^am, if used in

the Parasmaipada (Pan.vii. a, 58).

3. Before the terminations
of the firstaorist (fa^sick) :

In the verbs ^J stu, *Jsu, ^jdhH in the Parasmaipada (Pan.vii. 2, 72). Thus from

fFJstu, to praise,First Aorist (First Form), ^unlfqM astdvisham; but in the

Atmanepada, vmflfM astoshi.

4. Before the terminations of the desiderative (*P^"an):
and
In the verbs ^ dji,^dh^-i,
^f krf, *lffrt, fR^prachh (Pan.vii. 2, 75); and in

TpT^am, if used in the Parasmaipada (Pan.vn. 2, 58).

In the verbs ftiRsmi, ^pu, ^ n, ^*^otij,and ^HT a/. (Pan.vii. 2, 74.)
5. Before the gerundialWT tvd and the termination
participial K ta. (Pan.vn. 2, 52-54.)
In the verbs to dwell; Ijftkshudh,
'3R(vas) to hunger; ^^ afich,to worship; "y^/u"A,
to confound (Dhatupatha 28, 22).
6. Before FTT tvd only:
In to grow old ; to cut. (Pan. vn.
'^{vras'ch, 55.)
^[jrt, 2,

7. Before iftha, 2nd pers. sing,reduplicatedperfect:

In W^arf, to eat; ^n, to go; ^ vye, to cover. Wlty"!
dditha,against" 335, 3;
""n(V'H
dritha," 335, 3, note; PqcMPM^ vivyayitha.

J 339. The vowel 3[ i thus inserted is never liable to Guna or

Vriddhi.
Insertion of the long \ i.
J 340. Long ^ i may be substituted for the short when subjoinedto a

verb ending in ^" ri,also to ^ vri,except in the reduplicated the

perfect,
aorist Parasmaipada,and the benedictive. (Pan.vii. 2, 38-40.)

Per. Fut. nrfaT taritd or TtftriT "c.; but

taritd, Perf. 2nd pers. sing.
teritha ; I. Aor. Par. 3rd pers. plur.^H H IPI.M:atdrishufi; Bened.
3rd pers. sing,'rffimlif
tarishishta *.

^ vri; Per. Fut. c(0in varita or Tfcn varitd; but Perf. ^^^"v| vavaritha;
Aor. Par. ^SHifoj:
avdrishuh ; Bened. 'cifWtevarishishta.

" 341. In the desiderative and in the aorist Atm. and benedictive Atm. these verbs may

or may not have ^[* (Pan.vii. 2, 41-42),which, if used, is liable to be changed to ^ t; not,
however, as far I can judge,in the benedictive Atmanepada.
as

"fftri; Des. titarishati ; rddOMPrt titarishatijfrtiflSfif

fnii(V."irir titirshati;Aor. Atm.
^fift^ atarishta,and ^Ti^" attrshta; Bened.
atarishta, n PvHl9 tarishishta,
tirsMshta.

vjij Des. fqqfVMcivivarishate; feiqOHfivivarishate; ^^ vuvurshate; Aor. Atm.

avarishta, ^Tq"1s avarishta,and ^T^TTavrita; Bened. qf"M*l8varishishfa,
vrishishta.

The verb
?^ ^rraA,too, takes the long $ i, except in the reduplicated the
perfect,
desiderative,
and certain tenses of the passive.(Pan.vn. 2, 37.)
?T^grah; Per. Fut. il^HI grahitd; Inf. ij^lij
grahitum; but Perf . "fjf^T
jagrihima.

* The forms given in the Calcutta edition of Panini vn. 2, 42, MOMlV varishishta,
starishishfa, are wrong. (See Pan. vn. 2, 39.)
Z 2
172 PARADIGMS OF REDUPLICATED PERFECT. " 343-

Perfect.
Periphrastic
$ 342. Verbs which, accordingto $325,cannot form a reduplicated
perfect,
form their ^rf dm
perfectby affixing (an accusative termination of a feminine

abstract noun in wr d)to the verbal base,and addingto this the reduplicated
perfectof to do, *^bhuf to be, or
"cfkri, ^r?(as, to be*
?,to wet, "g^NcFR, 'sr*$$,^rrer, unddmchakdra, babMva, dsa.
?,to shine,^cinflM"*K, ^J?, ^ira, chakdsdmchakdra, babhdva,dsa.
bodhaya, to make known, ^hWHehTCj ^^, ^TTH, bodhaydmchakdra,
babhuva, dsa.
After verbs which are used in the Atmanepada,the auxiliary
verb "fkri
is conjugatedas Atmanepada,
but ^^ as and ^ bM in the Parasmaipada.
Hence from *j\rff edhate, he grows,
"N J
^VT^sR edh-amchakre ; but ^*j$ babhtiva and ^TW dsa.

In the passiveall three verbs

auxiliary follow the Atmanepada.
" 343. Intensive bases which can take Guna, take it before ^srf
dm; desiderative bases

never admit of Guna. (" 339.)

w^bobhu, base
frequentative of *^bM, ^T^T^cUR bobhavdmchakdra.
But ^J^frfVr^
bubodhish, desiderative base of "c. bubodhishdm-
^V budh, '^sTlfVjMMohK
chakdra "c.

Paradigms of the ReduplicatedPerfect.

i. Verbal bases in ^TT a, requiring intermediate ^ i.

i, to place.
PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL, SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

dadhwd dadhimd dadhtf dadhivdhe dadhimdhe

or
"
2t1 _

\3$W dadhitha* dadhdthuh dadhd dadhisM dadhdthe dadhidhvt

3. ^u dadhati

dadhdtuh dadhuh dadht dadhdte dadhirf

2. Verbal bases in ^i and ^",preceded by one consonant, and requiringintermediate "5[

i.

*ftni, to lead.

(_Mti^ nindya ninyivd ninyimd ninyf ninyivdhe ninyimdhe

\ r*iH*(
nin"ha or Prj^fq: frf^T f"ff^^ f"i"Mi"i Prjf^^ or ""s(" ion) vy "'
4
2. 1 ^
L P*l"lP"4^wmay^a*
ninydthuh ninyd nmyishf ninydthe mnyidhveor-c
3. f*frfl}J
nindya ^*5*
P"i**i^[J f*T^ f'f^T'if frfpsq^
ninydtuh ninyuh niny" ninydte ninyire

2^ and
*
" 335. " 335, 3.
 -$ 343- PARADIGMS OF REDUPLICATED PERFECT. 173

3. Verbal bases in ^ ri, preceded by one consonant, and requiringintermediate ^ t.

Vdhji, to hold.

f ^VTT dadhdraor
[f^rt,
dadhdra dadhrvod dadhrimd dadhrt dadhrivdhe dadhrimdhe

2. "prQ dadhdrtha *
"r^3* ^ qiMM ^WTM ^T"w or

dadhrdthuh dadhrd dudhrishe dadhrdthe dadhridhve' or -dhtf

dadhrdtuh dadhruh dadhre" dadhrdte dadhrirf

4. Verbal bases in "^J/"/,

preceded by one consonant, not admittingintermediate ^ t.

*" Art,to do.

chakdraor ^^T 1'^'^ ^^ ^*^j^ ^"p*f^

chakdra chakrivd chakrimd chakrt chakrivdhe chakrimdhe

2. ^RTO chakdrtha ^BT*J* lf" ^"^ ^J"IN 1^'?

chakrdthuh chakrd chakrisht chakrdthe chakridhvf

3. ^fSRi'C chakdra ^3"^" ^"5* ^" ^J^iH ^l^K

chakrdtuh chakruh chakre" chakrate chakrirf

5. Verbal bases in ^t or \f,precededby two consonants, and intermediate ^

requiring t.

"aft
krt,to buy.
J f^rWT chikrdyaor
*" 1 r . T -T f
\^%*\ ._.

chikrdya chikriyivd chikriyimd chikriye' chikriyivdhechikriyimdhe

chikre'tha or VJJ f^fjli^ f^f^if^ fcfsfiJJIVfn^f^ifm? or "^
fa fdiJJ
chikriydthe
[f^"r"4^ chikrayithachikriydthuhchikriyd chikriyisht
'

-dhv"
chikriyidfivtor
3. chikrdya
fWfliiiJ fa"tHH$i r^fju^t f^f^W P"ir""4in P^rj"rM"

chikriydtuhchikriyuh chikriyd chikriydte

chikriyire"

6. Verbal bases in TM or "31u, precededby one or two consonants, and requiringintermediate ^i.

3 yu, to join.
J^MI"Iyuydoa or ^^Pqq ^*jfaH iffl3 ^^^q^ ^^fq"i^
L^^0'yuydva yuyuvivd yuyuvimd yuyuv" yuyuvivdhe yuyuvimdhe

yuywsdthuh yuyuvd yuyuvishe' yuyuvdthe yuyuvidhve*

or -dhv"

yuyuvdtuh yuyuvuh yuyuve' yuyuvate yuyuvirf

7. Verbal bases in^M, preceded by one or two intermediate ^".

consonants, and not admittingthe

*J stu, to praise.

L (H^ tushtdva tushtuvd tushtumd tushtuve" tushtuvdhe tushtumdhe

tushtuvdthuh tushtuvd tushtusht tushtuvdthe tushtudhcf

tushtuvdtuh tushtuvuh tushtuvt tushtuvdte tushtuvirf

*
" 335" 2" and " 335, 3.
t If 3 yu is taken from Dhatupatfia 31, 9, it may form JpffaywyrffAa.
(See " 335, 2, and

Westergaard, Radices,p. 46, note.)

I Bharadvajamight allow fJHfq'"|
tushtavitha even againstPan. vn. 2, 13.
174 PARADIGMS OF REDUPLICATED PERFECT. " 343-

8. Verbal bases in ^J ri, preceded by two consonants, and intermediate

requiring ? ".

UK stri,to spread.

f f^tTR tastdra or nwf^q 'fi^cffiJH HHT cUtlTi,^

I fftrtX tastdra tastarivd tastarimd tastare tastarivdhe tastarimdhe

2. "cTCcr^?
tastdrtha

tastardthuh tastard tastarishe tastardthe tastaridhve or -dhve'

tastardtuh tastaruh tastarg tastardte tastarirt

9. Verbal bases in ^T n, requiring

intermediate 3[*.
cF kri,to scatter.

f ^fom*. cJiaTcdra
or

[^ofT^C chakdra chakarivd chakarimd chakare* chakarivdhe chakarimdhe

2. ^nKT^f chakaritha ^R^t ^^f^ ^^Ttt^ -4 "hCI ^ H "*R.SET

or "e
chakardthuh chakard chakarishe chakardthe chakaridhvt or -dhve*

chakardtuh chakaruh chakarts chakardte chakarire'

10. Verbal bases in consonants, intermediate ^[".

requiring
lf^ tud,to strike.

i . ijm^ tut6da ^5*^^ 33'V** "$ ggfq^^ ^4^*'^

tutudivd tutudimd tutudf: tutudivdhe tutudimdhe

tutuddthuh tutudd tutudishe tutuddthe tutudidhvt

tutuddtuh tutuduh tutude tutuddte tutudire'

ii. Verbal bases in consonants, having 1J e, and requiringintermediate ^ i,

to stretch.

I rift 11 tat ana or

1,4
|_fTfTrTtatdna tenivd tenimd tene" tenivdhe tenimdhe

2. dMV( tenitha

tendthuh tend tenisht tendthe tenidhve

3. tatdna
ii(i"i"J rf"T^[J W^t ?T*f

tenuh tene

12. Verbal bases in consonants, having Samprasarana, and requiring

^ *.

TWyo/, to sacrifice.

J 5[^rr5f
iyaja or ^TTT^1 *f"TT ^w S^Wqtj '^f^'H^
i.
\^lf*fiydja ijivd ijimd tje ijlvdhe ijimdhe

J5pPH?iydshtJia ^'T^J or ^5f ^ftf^ i("TTT ^ftT^

'\^f3[Hiyajitha
ydthuh ijd ijisM ijdthe ijidhvt

3. ^Tflifiydja ^*fij* t[5* ^ ^"TTn ^f"R

tjdtuh ijuh tj"? ijdte yire
-$ 344. PARADIGMS OP REDUPLICATED PERFECT. 175

13. Verbal bases in consonants, requiringcontraction, and intermediate ^ i.

^"^ han, to kill.

J *! *4 1 ^\jaghdnaor "^fiji-i aiiHM Ifn flii^^ "lfHH"

[ *\n"\jaghdna jaghnivd jaghnimd jaghnt jaghnivdhe jaghnimdhe
[fpfajaghdnthaoT WIT^I "fH "SfflT1^ 1HIM TfWT
[ *\M PHVjaghanitha jaghndthuh jaghnd jaghnisht jaghndthejaghnidhvf

jaghndtuh jaghnuh jaghnt jaghndte jaghnirt

14. Verbal base ^JbhH (irregular).

babhuvivd babhuvimd babhuvt babhuvivdhe babhuvimdhe

2. **$yv"4babhuvitha H"J5^; ^*"? H"JJ^H ^"J5TM q'JJ^ufor^

babhuvdthuh babhtivd babhumsht babhuvdthe babhucidhv"or-dhi;"

babhuvdtuh babhuvuh babhuce babhuvdte babhuvirt

CHAPTER XII.

STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF THE VERBAL BASES

IN THE SIX REMAINING GENERAL TENSES.

J 344. It may be useful, without enteringinto minute details,to tinguish

dis-

between two sets of general tenses, moods, and verbal derivatives,

which differ from each other by a tendency either to strengthenor to weaken

their base. The strengtheningtakes place chieflyby Guna, but, under

specialcircumstances, likewise by Vriddhi, by lengthening of the vowel,

or by nasalization. The weakening takes placeby shortening,
by changing
"^ ri to ^ ir, or, before consonants, to ^T ir, by Samprasarana, or by
dropping of a nasal. There are many roots, however, which either cannot

be strengthenedor cannot be weakened, and which therefore are liable

to change in one only of these sets. Some resist both strengtheningand

weakening, as, for instance, all derivative bases, causatives, desideratives,
and intensives (in the Atm.),
which generallyhave been strengthened,
as

far as their bases will allow,previouslyto their taking the conjugational

terminations.
 176 STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VERBAL BASES " 344-

The base is, if possible, The base is not strengthened,and, if

strengthenedin : weakened
possible, in :

1. The Future. i. The in

Participle K ta (unlessit takes

2. The Conditional. intermediate ^ i).

3. The Future.
Periphrastic 1. The Gerund in i"n tvd (unlessit takes

4. The Benedictive Atmanepada. intermediate 3f*).

(Except bases ending in conson.
^ ri, and 3. The Passive.
or not taking interm.
^i. Pan. 1. 2, n; 12. vn. 2, 42.) 4. The Benedictive Parasmaipada.
5. The First Aorist,1. II. 5. The First Aorist,IV.
(Except First Aor. II. Itm. of
6. The Second Aorist.
verbs ending in conson., ^ ri,or
"350-352.)
. (Except verbs in ^ ri,"c. " 364.)

I. Root. Base Future. Conditional. Per.Fut. Ben.Atm. First Aor. I.II.

strengthened. (Except bases ending in
cons, not taking interm. ^ "'.)

Atm.

bU bho bhavishydti dbhavishyat bhavishishtd dbhavishta

ift^
tud tod dtotsyat tottd (tutsishtd) dtautsit

VHtjP"|*Mi^
^P"nu ^P^ifte ^"Hfl
div dev i ddevishyat devitd devisMshtd ddevit

chur choray chorayishydti

dchorayishyat chorayita chorayisMshtd

krt kar dkanshyat karitd karishishtd dkdrit

^T^fhUT^ tTlrtT
su so dsoshyat sotd

^dP"i*Ui^ fiPniti
tan tan dtanishyat tanitd tanisMshtd

%
kri kre dkreshyat dkraishit

dvish dvekshydti ddvekshyat dveshtd

1
hu ho dhoshyat dhaushit
-..^-..1^
*H VUrUlfl
rudh rodh rotsydti drotsyat drautsit

^ Caus. "*i"^ ^"KP*i"MPff ^ToFRPH1^^

kri kdray kdrayishydti dkdrayishyat kdrayita kdrayishishtd
"F Des. f^T^"^f%c|HfH^ttPrfwf^olftfH^ni f^offtf1^
WT fWohTT^tftv
kri chiMrsh chikirshishydti chikirsUtd
dchikirsUsJiyat chikirshishishtd dchiktrsMt

^ Int. ^"SftP^^n
-"(rfil^ "ei^unlPM'Mn ^wtftRfT ^rfTIPM'Oy -ef-qjn^f^
kri chekriyitdchekriyisMshtd
dchekriyishyata
chekrty chekriyishydte dchekriyishta
178 STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VERBAL BASES, "C. J 345-

guh guh ghokshydti dghokshyat godhd (ghukshishtd)

or

guhishydti dguhishyat guhitd guhishishtd dguhit

srij sraj srakshydti dsrakshyat srashtd dsrdkshit

mi md mdsydti dmdsyat mdtd mdsishtd dmdstt

nas nams nankshydti dnahkshyat namshtd

srams srams sramsishydte dsramsishyata sramsitd sramsishishtd dsramsishta

bandh bandh bhantsydti dbhantsyat banddhd dbhdntsfa

II. Root. Base Part.Wte, Ger.RTtoa, Passive. Ben. Par. Sec.Aor. First AorJV.
not strengthened, without ^i. without^*, and II. Atm.

mrij mrij mrishtdh mrishtvd mrijydte mrijydt

guh guh gudhdh gudhvd guhydte guhydt dghukshat

^f5*nr ^^if^
snj srishtdh srishtvd srijydte srijydt
fa ft f*ir^i *i!*i^ *nmr

mi mitdh mitvd miydte meydt

\ \

was nashtdh nashtvd nasydte nasydt dnasat

srams sras srastdh srastva srasydte srasydt dsrasat

bandh badh baddhdh baddhvd badhydte badhydt

4
i, 60.
I 2 3 Pan. Pan.
Pan. vi. 4, 89. Pan. vi. i, 38. vi. i, 50. vn.

5
Pan. vi. 4, 24.
6
But with mdrjitvd,not Hf^r^Tmarjitvd.
^i, Hlf'Sfll
9
7 As to the long 3iM, see " 128. 8 Or 'jf^r^T
guhitvd," 337, 1. 2.

10 with their
Roots which may thus drop their nasal,are written in the Dhatupatha nasal,
or while others which retain their nasal throughout, are written without the
w^srams :

nasal,but with indicatory

an ^ i; ^f^ nad, "c. (Pan. vi. 4, 24 ; vn. i, 58). Two verbs thus
marked by ^ i, c3fHlag and "fif^kap, may, however, drop their nasal, the general rule not-
withstanding

if used in certain meanings, f^^fTTT vilagitam, burnt ; f^cfrfiTfT

vikapitam,
deformed (Pan.vi.4,24, vart. 1,2). ^f vrih,^fftvrimhati,
drops its nasal before terminations

beginningwith a vowel, but not before the intermediate ^ij ^"t^ffT

varhayati,but sjfsg
d'T

vrimhitd. T^raw/,to tinge,may drop its nasal, even in the causative (i.e.before a vowel),
if it means to sport; TJrfirfff
rajayati(Pan.vi.4, 24, vart. 3, 4). The same root,like some others,
drops its nasal before sdrvadhdtuka affixes; T^fffrajati,
"c. (Pan. vi. 4, 26). ^^(anch,
if it

means to worship,must retain its nasal (Pan. vi. 4, 30) and take the intermediate ^ i (Pan. vn.
2" 53) : ^N^ff* anchitah,worshipped; otherwise ^T3u aktah or ^f^lfj anchitah, bent.
II
Or
-f 347. AORIST. 179

Note" The verbs beginning with ^ ku( (Dhatupatha 28, 73-108) do not strengthen
their base,except before terminations which are marked by *^flor ^n; fT hif, to be

bent, Put. ^fcmfdkujishydti,

Per. Fut. $fzdlkutitd,
First Aor. *^f\J(dlcuttt
(Pan. I. 2, i).

finery,
to fear, never takes Guna before intermediate ^ "; Per. Fut. w"W(Pan. i.
Alftlfll
3" a), ^H"tfrntt,to cover, may do so optionally
;
urnuvitdor
^Nijfqni w"5fqnivrnavitd
(Pan. i. 2, 3).

CHAPTER XIII.

AORIST.

J 346. We can in Sanskrit,

distinguish as in Greek, between two kinds of

Aorists,one formed by means of a sibilant inserted between root and nation,

termi-

" this we call the First, "

another,formed by addingthe terminations

to the base, this we call the Second Aorist.

Both Aorists take the Augment, which always has the Udatta, and, with
some the
modifications, terminations of the Imperfect.
J 347. The First Aorist is formed in four different ways.

Terminations of the First Aorist.

1. First Form.
PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

^^ isham ^^ ishva ^QR ishma j^fa

ishi ^^H? ishvahi ^**if^
ishmahi

$ltft ^ ishtam ^Tiishta ^T^ishthdh ^m"u ishdthdm ^$4 ^ or idhvam or idhvam

^# ^^ishtdm^lishuh ^S ishta ^'mniishdtdm ^TT ishata

In this first set of terminations the intermediate ^ i stands as part of the

because
terminations, all the verbs that take this form are verbs liable to
take the intermediate ^ i. The first and second forms of the First Aorist

in fact,by
differ, this only,that the former is peculiar
to verbs which take,
the latter to verbs which intermediate
reject ^ i. (See$332, 4, note.)

2. Second Form.
PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

^ sam ^ sva ^R sma ft?si ^f\|svahi Wf^ smahi

re (

\ or If ta \or^ITt thdh
s/m ^rsffl
sit -( . ^: stth -{ ^IHI satam THT sata
[or HT tarn "
[oriT^a
A a 2
 180 AOKIST. J 348-

3. Third Form.

There are some verbs which add ^ s to the end of the root before

taking the terminations of the Aorist,and which after this ^ s, employ the

usual terminations with ^ i, viz. ^4 isham, "c. They are conjugatedin the

Parasmaipadaonly.
PARASMAIPADA.

s-i-sham ftt"*i
s-ishva ftro s-ishma

s-ih (forffSm sish(a)h) fftf?s-ishtam fav s-ishta

f^^^sish(a)t) faST s-ishtdm

(for ftnf:
s-ishuh

4. Fourth Form.

Lastly,there are some few verbs, ending ^ s, f^sh,^ h, preceded in

by ^ *, T u, ^ ri,which take the followingterminations,without an inter-

mediate

^ i (ksa).
PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

r"
sdvahi ~_
tTTq sava *ITH sama T^T si 4 ^fTHT^ samahi
r
or "TT^ vahi
*
sathdh .
f^?4 sadhvam
4 4
_

r: sah ^Trf sa/am *TrT sata ^TT^n 5"^aw

[ or Ml J f hah [ or *^ dhvam

Wilsat ^tftsatdm 'ttsan 4 ^TTirf

sdtdm ^K santa
[ or W ta

Special Rules for the First Form of the First Aorist.

$ 348. For final vowel, Vriddhi in Parasmaipada*. c3 /w, to cut,

dldvisham (Pan.vn. 2, i).
For final vowel, Guna in Atmanepada. "^ hi,^r??f^f^ dlavishi.
For medial or initial vowel, Guna (ifpossible)
both in Par. and Atm.

^ budh, to know ; Par. ^Vf\ni dbodhisham ; Atm. ^TTtfafadbodhishi.

The vowel ^r a, followed by a singlefinal consonant, may or may not take

Vriddhi in Par. if the verb beginswith a consonant f. kan, to sound, ^ToFT-

"F^T

dkdnisham or ^rsfiftj^
dkanisham (Pan.vn. a, 7); Atm. ^rcfiftufa
dkanishi.

*
Except f^f svi, to swell,^Tni*lTf^
asvayit; vTFIjdgri,to wake, ^"TT' " i.1 ojdgarit
f^
(Pan.vn. 2, 5). "^l^wrwM,
to cover, may or may not take Vriddhi; Wi ^"iTi^
aurnuvit,or

^TRV^J^aurndvit,
^rr^qRT^aMrwat?^
(Pan. 2, 6). or vii.

t Roots ending in ^c^aZ or ^:ar always take Vriddhi in the Parasmaipada ; ^"^jvalf
to burn, ^'*n"ft?(djvdKt
(Pan. vii. 2, 2). Likewise ^vad, to speak, and 'Gfi^vraj,
to go

(Pan.vii. 2, 3). Roots ending in ^ A,^"",^y,the roots to hurt,^R^"as,to

T5prjA;sA"m, breathe,
and verbs of the Chur class,roots with technical TJe, do not take Vriddhi (Pan.vii. 2, 5).
^f^grah,
to take, ^lf^J[^dgrahit
j fQ^syam, to sound, TSR"*ftf{dsyamft; to
'"F{vyay,
throw, ^^ifl1?^
dvyayitj "^TJTkshan, to hurt, dkshantij "^^
^"SHUI1?^ svfls, to breathe,
stt ; to minish, ^n*flf('f(jiunay(t
"3i"T^Mway, ; to suspect, *Z(T?f\J(aragt
TJl^rag,
", to shine,^ft vet- ", to desire, and ^fr^Tdaridrd,to be poor, drop their final

vowels, according to the rules on intermediate ^ ^ft.^[T

t ; daridrd,
-$ 35"5- AORIST. 181

placein desiderative bases, Desid. "

" 349. No Guna takes "^budh;

Aor. ^TJ^tfvfrnt
dbubodhishisham.

Intensives in if precededby consonant, must, certain denominatives in *Jy may,

^y, a

drop their final ^y. If the intensive ^y is precededby a vowel, ^y is left between the

final vowel and the intermediate ^t. fal^bhid, to cut; Int. base 4"iv{bebhidy Aor. Atm. ;

TO'^faf^ftT
dbebhidishi. *^bhd, to be; Int. base "^j^bobhuy Aor. Atm. ^^jftrfa dbo- ;

Aor. VSprf^CR dnamasy-ishamor "8MHfiHM

bhuyishi.Denom. base
l"it*^namasy, worship ; to

dnamas-isham.

SpecialRules for the Second Form of the First Aorist.

" 350. Vriddhi in Parasmaipada. f^^kship, ^Brips

dkshaipsam; fyi",
^fhidsaisham (Pan.vn. 2, i); v*(pach, *rmfa(dpdkshU(Pan.vn. 2, 3).
Guna in Atmanepada,
if the verb ends in ^, ^ z, 7, "31 u (notin ^ rt,

Pan. i. 2, 12); otherwise no change of vowel, f^r si, ^r^tfodseshi ; but

dkshipsi;^ "rz,^i^rfa
fq^kship,^rftff^r dkrishi. Final "^r^ becomes f^ 2r.
J 351. Terminations beginning with ^ET st or ^sth drop their ^* if the

base ends in a short vowel or in a consonant, except nasals. Ex. 2. p. dual

^ri|Tf
dkshaip-tam,3. p. dual ^T%"rf
dkshaip-tdmy 2. plur.^fr%R
p. of
dkshaip-ta,
f^^kship; 2. p. sing.Atm. "H"$VJT:
dkrithdh,3. p. sing,^fudkritayof Atm.
ifkri,
But from JRT^ mdnyate, *HHW dmamsta.

" 352. The roots FTT "/^^, to stand, ^rc?a,to give,VT dhdy to ^rfe,
place, to

pity,*f dhe, to feed,^ do, to cut, change their final vowels into ^ i before the

terminations of the Atmanepada(Pan.i. 2, 17). WT sthd,3 \\\fald updsthi-ta

;

ffupdsthi-shdtdm. In the Parasmaipadathey take the Second Aorist.

($368.)
" 353- The roots iftmi (mindti),
to hurt, fa mi to throw,
(minoti), and $ di,Atm., to

decay,instead of taking Guna, change their final vowels into ^TTa in the Atmanepada; and
cl^fr
/*,to stick,does so optionally(Pan. vi. i, 50-51)*. Thus from *ftmi and fa mi, "w*iiw

amdsta; from ^ di, 'W^i^cf addstaj from c5^ /",^""iw aldsta or ^^H? aleshta. In the

Parasmaipada these verbs take the Third Form.

" 354" "%*{han,to kill,drops its nasal in the Atmanepada (Pan. i. 2, 14); V^H ah at a,

ahasdtdm, "c.

" 355- 'T^^ffm,to go, drops its nasal in the Atmanepadaoptionally (Pan. i. 2, 13);
or ^JT^cT agamsta. The same rule applies to the benedictive Atmanepada ;

stshta or ^t^fh?gamstshta.

" 35^' ^ yam drops its nasal, necessarily

or accordingto
optionally, its various

meanings; 3";""n udayata, he divulged(Pan. i. 2, 15); "JMi^n vpdyata, he espoused,OP

updyamsta (Pan. I. 2, 16).

* Prof. Weber (Kuhn's Beitrage,

vol. vi. 102) blames Dr. Kellner for having admitted
p.
^1*1 1 (Vi
M*T amdsisham and similar forms, and denies that these forms are authorised by
Panini. Dr. Kellner,however, was right,as will be seen from the commentary to Pan. vi. i,

50. The substitution of ^TT d takes placewherever there would otherwise have

excepting in Sit forms.

182 AOEIST. " 357-

SpecialRules for the Third Form of the First Aorist.

f 357. Most verbs taking this form of the Aorist end in ^TT d, or in

diphthongs which take w d as their substitute. This ^rr d remains

unchanged. In the Atmanepadathese verbs take the Second Form.

" 358. The verbs *ftmi, to hurt, fa mi, to throw, and c^tli,to stick,in taking this form,
change likewise their final vowels into ^SRT a. Ex. ^faifViMamdsisham, I threw, and I hurt ;

tf aldsisham (or ^Trt1! alaisham). " 353.

" 359. Three roots ending in H m take this form ; TF^yam,to hold, T^rawi,to rejoice,
nam, to bend, Aor. ^Hlftreayamsisham, "c. (Pan. vn. 2, 73.)

SpecialRules for the Fourth Form of the First Aorist.

$ 360. The roots which take this form must end in SI ^ (asto ^j(dri$9
to

see, cf. Pan. in. i, 47),T{sh,1(s, ^ h, preceded by any vowel but ^T, ^n a.

They must be verbs which rejectthe intermediate ^ z; " 332, 17"20;

(Pan.in. i, 45.) Their radical vowel remains unchanged.

" 361. The root fig^sUsh
takes this form only if it means to embrace (Pan. in. i, 46) ;
^{f^renT
aslikshat. Other verbs, such as and
"tjftpush sush,
Tjre are excepted.
specially
(" 366.)
" 362. The roots Z^duh,to milk, f^TeftA,to anoint,fe^lih,
to lick,TR^guh,
to hide

(Pan. vn. 3, 73),may take in the Atmanepada

1RI thdh instead of *T*n* sathdh. ^rf^vahi instead of tu^f^sdvahi.

If ta "
^Trf sata. ?4 dhvam -
TOI sadhvam.

They thus approach to the Second Form of the firstaorist in most, but not in all persons.

Ex. gf]duhj 2. p. sing.Atm. ^g'^Ttadugdhdh or ^VTSpITt adhukshathdh.

3. p. sing.Atm. ^^V adugdha or 'STV'^fTadhukshata.

1. p. dual
Atm. ^Ig3ffl"
aduhvahi or ^V^T^f^ adhukshdvahi.

2. p. plur.Atm. ^npl"!adhugdhvam or adhukshadhvam.

vi^isjSel

FIRST AORIST.

First Form,

with intermediate 3Ji-

a. Verbs ending in a vowel; c" lu, to cut.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, Guna in Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.

1. ^T?5Tf^ dldv-isham ^co l fq "*t dldv-ishva ^rcolPei'^T

dldv-ishma

2. ^Tc5T^J dldv-ih ^?rtlf^^dldv-ishtam ^Ic^Tf^F dldvi-shta

3. ^Ic^T^fTdidv-it ^051^81 dldv-ishtam ^TrtlPq^t

dldvi-shuh

ATMANEPADA.

1. ^Tc4'P"lfll
dlav-ishi ^TcoTqwif^
dlav-ishvahi ^?"5ft^Tf^
dlav-ishmahi

2. ^r5f?l"Ttdlav-islithdh ^Tc^r"i1miqTdlav-ishdthdm ^?c5T%l^dlav-idhvam or "^-dhvam

3. ^rafel?dlav-ishta ^r^f^^TUT dlav-ishdtdm ^cofqmi dlav-ishata
 -$ 362. AORIST. 183

b. Verbs ending in consonants; wvbudh, to know.

Guna in Parasmaipada and Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.

1. "vianPt"M
abodh-isham ^WTttV1^ abodh-ishoa WqlP*!1!?abodh-ishma

2. ^Bnfftfh
abodh-ih W^tfVn? abodh-ishtam W^fViB abodh-ishta

3. W^hrh^a"orfA-f/ ^H""riP*4"i
abodh-ishtdm ^TTtfv^:
abodh-ishu/i

ATMANEPADA.

1 .
^BpfVfvftf
abodh-ishi vi^P^t^p^abodh-ishvahi ^T^ftfv^Rf^
abodh-ishmahi

2. ^"f\PM"iJabodh-ishthdh ^T^tfVmxjiabodh-ishdthdm TO^ffVl**J

abodh-idhvam

3. ^I^tfw abodh-ishta ^ToTlfMmrff

abodh-ishdtdm VH^PyMrf abodh-ishata

Second Form,
without intermediate ^ i.

a. Verbs ending in consonants ; f^^ Ar^z/?,

to throw.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada,no change in Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.

1 . akshaip-sam
vjtsj'^i "fB|MS akshaip-sva "s^K|^3kakshaip-sma

2. vj^tdjakshaip-sih ^T^fff
akshaip-tam(" 351) ^T!pT akshaip-ta

3. v^^tilf^
akshaip-sit ^I^Trt
akshaip-tdm ^\^^lakshaip-suh
ATMANEPADA.

1. ^TTTSfftl
akship-si ^TT^T^f^ akship-svahi ""iPe$M3Hn"
akship-smahi
2. vfPBj^xflJ
akship-thdh ^rft^Tnrt
akship-sdthdm ^T^Pf akshib-dhvam
3. isfPsiN
akship-ta ^P^tiifli
akship-sdtdm ^TPnjtirt
akship-sata

b. Verbs ending in vowels (^,^ z, ^r, ^ ^); tftwi, to lead.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada,
Guna in Atmanepada.
PARASMAIPADA.

1 .
^Tn *fanaisham ^In^ anaishva "ci^**!
anaishma

2. vf"iHiJ anaishih ^fn" anaishtam ^Tn? anaishta

3. ^sH'fli^anaisAft ^T%1T anaishtdm *I^Jtanaishuh

ATMANEPADA.
1 .
"SfrPHaneshi vffiw^n^
aneshvahi ^ti^P^ aneshmahi

2. ^MiBit aneshthdh vt'imMi aneshdthdm ")H^anedhvam

3. ^fn" aneshta vifiUmt aneshdtdm ^HMif aneshata

c. Verbs ending in ^ n; ^f Arz,to do.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada.
PARASMAIPADA.

i .
xt'cRm akdrsham --Scfciu^
akdrshva rM=fl^ akdrshma
akdrshih %M"*|5
akdrshtam xM4l^ akdrshta
^nfinll
akdrshtdm
 184 AORIST. " 362,

ATMANEPADA.
1. '^ifaakrishi 'ST^i^f^r
akrishvahi vi
"ym fifc
akrishmahi

2. ^I^iV I? akrithdh "fepm"fTakrishdthdm ^^f" akridhvam

3. ^T^irf a"rzta ^TOi^TUT akrishdtdm ^TOi^ll akrishata

d. Verbs ending in ^?r a; ^r da, to give.

Atmanepada
only j ^TT a changed into ^ t.

ATMANEPADA.
1. ^Hl^iMadishi ^TT^^f^adishvahi ^?f^"^Tf^
adishmahi

2. ^ff^rnadit hah ^rf^m^qi

adishdthdm ^%" adidhvam

3. ^rf^lT
ac?^a ^rf^^TrTf
adishdtdm vif^qnadishata

Verbs in ^jr?/ stretch.

e. ending ^ */r^jto
Vriddhi in Parasmaipada,with intermediate ^i.
In Atmanepadathe insertion of ^ i is optional. (See " 337, II. 4. Pan. vn. 2, 42.)
If ^i is inserted,
then Guna (" 348) and lengtheningof ^i. (" 341.)
optionally
If ^ * is not then ^n
inserted, changed to ^T2r. (" 350.)
PARASMAIPADA.

^eiWlW astdrisham, "c., like First Form.

First Form, ATMANEPADA. Second Form,

with ^ i. SINGULAR. without 3[i'
or "*nsi*3"n?
astarishi or astarishi "wWliM astirshi

or ^RarfanJ astarishthdh or astarishthdh vtwIeK astirshthdh

or vitclO? astarishta or astarishta ^TOft%astirshta

DUAL.

1. ^wft^fifJ or ^^TT^^f^ astarishvahi or astartshvahi viWl ^"f^asttrshvahi

2. ^Kri'fXmvjj
or '^wOMfifi astarishdthdm or astarishdthdm ^HWlSl^lastirshdthdm

3. ^i tsl U.H i nT or ^IwOmin astarishdtdm or astarishdtdm ^tfliHtclT astirshdtdm

PLURAL.

1. ^SMHlX^n^or -^wO^Hn^ astarishmahi or astarishmahi ^n^l^\k astirshmahi

2 .
^T4df^"c(
"^ or ^HWtH"f "^astaridhvam -dhvam or astaridhvam -dhvam ""iWic astir dhvam

3. ^JMriPlXri
or ^r^cTirt^Tf
astarishata or astarishata vjtflUn astirshata

f. Verbs with penultimate^ ri / "n/, to let off.

^
Peculiar Vriddhi in Parasmaipada,no change in Atmanepada.
PARASMAIPADA.

asrdksham ^^TSS asrdkshva ^t*H5^ asrdkshma

\lasrdkshih ^TFT? asrdshtam ^H5m asrdshta

3.
^TWrKfasrdshtam
'STOTSffa^asra"s^ ^T^rr^tasrdkshuh
ATMANEPADA.

1. ^njfrSf
asnJfo^z ''H^iyr^
asrikshvahi "^^"*if^
asrikshmahi

2. ^T^fFTJ asrishthdh ^^VijIVjl

asrikshdthdm
vujsc asriddhvam

asrishta ^W^ITftasrikshdtdm ^ti"|n asrikshata

186 AORIST. $363-

ATMANEPADA.

I. aghukshi aghukshdoaU or aguhvahi aghukshdmahi

2. 41 [laghukshathdh
^ H|'V| or^PJcFKagudhdh ^H gHjIVJ1aghukshdthdm or *Jf *icr
*

3. ^nrefcf aghukshataor ^^ agudha vi^im aghukshdtdm aghukshanta

It may also follow the First Form, ^nrf^ agdhisham and aguhishi.
(I337 "
I- !")
/"A,to
fc^; smear.

PARASMAIPADA.

aliksham ^?fc5^T^
alikshdva alikshdma

j aliksJiah ^rfoJ^iT
alikshatam alikshata

. ^f"^l^alikshat ^rfc^^rrf
alikshatam alikshan

ATMANEPADA.

i. alikshi ^av^m^ alikshdvahi or vtrcodr^

alihvahi alikshdmahi

2. ^rfc4H|'m*
alikshathdh or aUdhdh ^"*i\**\alikshdthdm or
2

3. ""i PC*ej n alikshata or alidha w fra"SjI ifi alikshatam alikshanta

to milk.

PARASMAIPADA.

adhuksham, "c.

ATMANEPADA.

I. adhukshi f^ adhukshdvahi or ^SI'f^aduhvahi adhukshdmahi

adhukshathdh
2. WJ^nt or
"f^'^Tt adugdhdh or

3. ^f^fcT adhukshata or ^87V adugdha adhukshdtdm adhukshanta

? c?^, to anoint.

PARASMAIPADA.

adhiksham, "c.

ATMANEPADA.

.
^rftff^
adhikshi or
4 adhikshdmahi

or adhiksMthdm or ^rfarSEJ
6

or adMkshdtdm adhikshanta

SECOND AORIST.

J 3^3- Verbs adopting this form take the augment, and attach the
terminations (FirstDivision)of the imperfect to verbal base
a ending
in ^r ", like those of the Tud form.

1
aghukshadhvam or aghudhvam. 2 alikshadhvam or alidhvam.
3 adhukshadhvam 4
or adhugdhvam. adhiksMvahi or adihvahi.
5 adhikshathdh or adigdhdh. 6 adhikshadhvam or adhigdhvam.
7 adhikshata or adigdha.
-J 3*7- AOKIST. 1*7

sich,to sprinkle. Pres. nnchdmi ; Impf. wftK asincham.

PARASMAIPADA.

asicham asichdva agichdma

asichah asichat am nail-lintn

asichat asichatdm asichan

ATMANEPADA.

asichdvahi s anchdmahi

: asichat hdh asichethdm asichadhvam

asichata asichetdm asichanta

ve, to call. Pres. ^rqrfH hvaydmi ; Impf. ^T^TT ahvayam ; General base

PARASMAIPADA.

ahvam ahvdva ahvdma

2. "Hd^i ahvah aJivatam ahvata

3. ahvatdm

ATMANEPADA.

ahvdvahi iihrumnhi

2. t ahvathdh ahvethdm ahvadhvam

alivata vi Q^ fii
ahvetdm ahvanta

" 364. Roots ending in ^rr ^, ^ e, ^ i, drop these vowels, and substitute

a base ending in ^ " : ^ Ave substitutes 3^ Ava, Aor. "??a^

ahvam ; fv" 6vi
substitutes ig M;O, Aor. ^nS asvam. Roots ending in ^ H, and the root

^^ic?m,to see, take Guna (Pan.vn. 4, 16),and then form a base ending
in short ^? a: ^sn',to go, ^5T driktto see,
^STTO^asarfltf; ^^T^a"?ar^a/.
^365.Roots with nasal,dropit: T3fi"[
penultimate skand,to step,^ragi"*
askadam.

J366. Irregular
forms are, ^^'M avocham, I spoke,from ^^ vach (according
to Bopp a contracted f 370,
aorist,
reduplicated for ^^ci^ avavacham); ^rni

apaptam, I flew,from (possibly contracted aorist

reduplicated for
itf^pat a

VHIMri apapatam) ; ^3R^fanesam, I Kas'.on

perished, Pan. vi. 4, 120 (possibly
for xMHH^ranana"am); ^5?%^a"isham, I ordered, from ^n^ ^"*; WTO dstham,
I threw, from ^"s. 4, 17.)
(Pan.vii.
" 367. Roots which take this form are,

^^os, to throw (^rTO dstham),"Q^vach,to speak (^I^T avocham), WT Myd, to speak

(^af akhyam), if the agent is implied. (Pan. in. i, 52.)
fe^Zip,to paint,"ftr^sicfc,to sprinkle,d" Jive,to call ^2^ ahvam), in Par.,
(irregularly
and optionally
in Atm. (Pan. in. i, Atm. -wfcaHnalipata
53, 54). Par.^feHi^aftpaf,
or vifcoH alipta.
The verbs classed as "^f^pushddi,
beginning with "$\push(Dh. P. 26, 73-136),^mfV
'dyutddi,
beginningwith ^^rfyi/^ (Dh. P. 18),and those marked by a technical "^ /t,

in the Parasmaipada.(Pan. in. i, 55.)

B b 2
188 AORIST. " 368-

The verbs ^ sri,to go, ^TP^sas,to order, and ^J ri,to go (^nttfram),in Par. and Atm.
(Pan. m. 1,56.)
verbs
Optionally, marked
technically by ^ir, but in the Parasmaipadaonly (Pan. in.
^5W wl
^fatC^abhidat
i, 57). or
t^abTiaitsit.
Optionally,*[jri,to fail,
^ScPT stambh,to stiffen C^^f^l^astabhat
or ^w^l^
or ^rafNh^amrocMtf),
"jr^mluch,togo,
to
^J^mrMcA, (-Wyi^amruchat
go

to steal,r^^gluch, to steal,*l"^$rZttnc^,
to go (^Pcf^ agluchat or

f^["z,
agluncUi), to grow (irregularly """")" DU*
^HST?^ in the Parasmaipadaonly.
(Pan. m. i, 58.)

" 368. There are a few verbs,ending in ^TT d, *J e, ^STto, which take this form of the

second aorist in the Parasmaipada; also ^bhu, to be. They retain throughout the long
final vowel, except before the Tt uh of the 3rd before
pers. plur., which the final ^?T d is

rejected. In the Atmanepada

these verbs in ^TT d take the Second Form of the first aorist,

and change ^TT d to 3[".

^T da, to give. Pres. ^Tf daddmi; Impf. ^^ adaddm.

PARASMAIPADA.

1. ^njfarfaw ^r^T"^arfawa ^TT addma

2. ^T^Tt arfa/f iH^Irtaddtam

3. ^R(Tf^a^ ^si^ini
addtam

^6^w, to be. Pres. ^mPH bhavdmij Impf. Wft abhavam.

PABASMAIPADA.

1. ^S^ abhuvam* ^*$$ abhuva ^^ abhuma

2. ^T^r:"5MA ^*J? abhutam ^^ abhuta

3. ^*"j{abhut ^T^WT abhutam ^^^abhuvan

Verbs which take this form are,

IT #a, to go ; ^T c?",to give; "IT c?A",to place; *U pa, to drink ; WT sthd, to stand ; ^ c?e,
to guard; ^ to be.
do, to cut; *j^bhu, (Pan. n. 4, 77.)
Optionally,
TIT # W, to smell ; V e?Ae,
to drink ; ^ftso, to sharpen ; "sft
chho,to cut ; ^fft
50,

to destroy.(Pan. n. 4, 78.)
" 369. The nine roots of the Tan class ending in "fTn or Tff n
*
may form the 2nd and 3rd
\
A

pers. sing.Atm. in ^IT: thdh and Uta, before which the final nasal is rejected. If^tan, to
stretch; Aor. vjnPrigatanishta or ^TiTlf atata; ^IirfVn?TJ
atanishthdh or ^-Nri^i: atathdh

(Pan. ii. 4, 79). These forms might be considered as irregular

Atmanepada forms of the

second aorist,or of the first aorist II, with loss of initial ^s.

Second or Reduplicated Form of the Second Aorist.

" 370. A few verbs, and

primitive the very numerous class of the Chur

roots, the denominatives and causatives in ^ro ay, reduplicatetheir

base in the second aorist,taking the augment as before,and the usual

terminations of the imperfect.

*
Irregularin the ist pers. sing.,dual,and plur.,and in the 3rd pers. plur.
-$374- AORIST. 189

The primitiveverbs which take this form

" 371. are,

fof/ri,to go, "Jrfru,

to run, ^ sru, to flow, ^^kamt to love (Pa?, ill. I, 48),if expressing
the agent. Ex. ^H f^ifa M asitriyat.
r^
fa
Optionally, wt, to grow,
^ dhe, to suck (Pan. in. i, 49),if expressingthe agent.
Ex. Wpfltadadhat, " 364,(or \t^4\"^adhdt
or ^MMl"1i^a"M""sft.)
syllable,
Their reduplicative as far as consonants are concerned, is formed like that of the

perfect.
reduplicated
tj he went. ^"^ i^adudruvat, he ran.
-wtj^qi^flstm-Hra/,he flowed.

f, he loved. ^V^arfarfAa^, he sucked. fvjJJ|^asiiviyat,

"W f^| he

Sec. Aor. and First Aor. "Wll^afoaytt(Pan. in.

grew; also vimi^fl"af i, 49).
2^hve,to call,forms its Aor. Caus. W*\"W{ajuhavat (Pan.vi. i, 32).

$ 372. The verbs in "n{ay drop ^r^ay, and (with certain exceptions*)
reduce their Guna and Vriddhi vowels to the simplebase vowels : wr a to ^ a ;

*eto^i; ^ho to *u; ^,^ar,to^H; $^frto ^ri. (Pan.vn.4, 7.)

Thus JTlr^frt
mddayati would become
if^mad, (Aor.1"nftiT^
amimadam.)
bhedayati "
fw^bhid, (Aor.vtffa^ abtbhidam.)
modayati " "

ij^mud, (Aor.^njjj^
amumudam.)
" 373. In the roots, which
exceptional do not admit this shortening
process,

^T d,ty,^ e, ^ ait'md,'?fto,^au
are in the
represented syllable
reduplicative by

mdlayati, ^rmrft amamdlam. ^ifc"f;cF

zte"folikayati, atilikam.

cftcFTrfTT
lokayati,^?$"\3;
alu/okam.

J 374. In the vast majorityof roots, however, the thus

takes place,
shortening
leavingbases with short ^i iy ^u}^ri. Here the tendencyis to make the
a, ^
base,with
reduplicated the augment, either w "
w or w w "
.
Hence all roots in

which the shortened vowel is not lengthenthe

long by position, vowel of the

(amdmudai).
syllable
reduplicative Those in which the vowel is long by
leave
position, the vowel of the reduplicative short (ararakshat).
syllable
Where, as in roots beginningwith double consonants, the vowel of the

is necessarily
syllable
reduplicative it is not changed into
longby position, the

* These exceptionalverbs are (Pan. vn. 4, 2, 3),

Certain denominatives : From Hlc4l mala, a garland,is formed the denominative *iioiMrrt
Caus.
mdlayati,Red. Aor. ^*\*{\"A^amamdlatj "$f\1{6ds, ^utf^fn he punishes,
sdsayati,
Red. Aor. """ 31 31 1 " t[^a"a3dsat.
Those with technical ^Jn- W^bddh, to hurt; Caus. "^PHlfTT
bddhayati;Aor. SH^HIVTi^
ababddhat.

to shine, VX^bhds,to
^dX^bhrdj, to speak, tf*{dip,
shine,*H^bhdsh, "SfNyfr,
to lighten, to

live,*ftc^
mil,to meet, tfrSpid,
to vex, shorten their vowel optionally.Ex. *ff*{bhrdj;
'SRfc"\ababhrdjat futiifi^abibhrajat
i "i (" 374).
or ^M

t %F^t?es^f"y,
to surround, ^"^ cheshtay,to move, take either ^ "" or ^ a in the

reduplicative iH f"4^
; ''Z"R'tn^avaveshtat
syllable or inn^rfyo/ay,lighten,
8 ^aviveshfat. to

takes ^t; ^?f^f iadidyutat.n

190 AORIST. " 375-

long vowel (achuchyutatnot achuchyutat).In ,

roots beginningand endingin
two consonants, this metrical rhythm is necessarily
broken (achaskandat).
" 375. In the roots which do not resist the shorteningprocess,
^T a, ^ i, ^ uy ^J ri are representedin the syllable
reduplicative by
^i, "3 u, T(i; and all where
lengthened, necessary.

Second or ReduplicatedForm of the Second Aorist.

I. w " w .

pack, to cook, M H -Mfri pdchdyati;

id, to cut, ^Tj^bheddyati;

,
to jft^rfff
rejoice, moddyati ;
rit9to exist,^t^lfw vartdyati;
rij,to cleanse,JJTihrfir H dmimrijat.
mdrjdyati; ^*fl*J"1
-sftwqfnkirtdyati
rit,to praise, ; ^r^\^lT?(dcMkritat^.

The lengtheningbecomes before

superfluous roots beginningwith two nants,
conso-

because the two consonants make the short vowel heavy (guru].
iq^ tyaj,to leave,Tm"RflT tydjdyati
;

^TT^ bhrdj,to shine,yi'H^fribhrdjdyati

;

ip,to throw, "^TTTfw ; ^Tp^ PH|

Jcshepdyati dchikshipat.
M i^

,
to ^ftTT^fTT
fall, chyotdyati;
svri,to sound, ^ Tlinfrf
svdrdyati;

,
to protect,iHinfrf
rakshdyati;
bhiksh,to beg, fvnsprfir
bhikshdyati;
" 376. If the root begins and ends with double consonants, this rhythmicallaw is

broken.

,
to ask, H-"**i Pit
prachchhdyatij
^RWSSj^dpaprachchhat.
skand, to step,"tai^"4fii
skanddyati; *x ^
*5h^ dchaskandat.
" 377. Roots with radical ^ri followed by consonant, may take
optionally
or ^n, a

the w "
w or w w " forms.

*
'TO^ gandy and kathdy
cFTO^ take ^ i or ^T a optionally; ^*(\*\1"1{djigan
or

^ "nW?^ djaganat.
t The followingverbs take *3fa instead of ^i or \i in the reduplicative of
syllable the

aorist in the causative :

^R smri,"? dri,13T. tvar, TT^prath,

^ mrad, ^c[stri,

fQsmri;Caus. ^WT"*( fffsmdrdyotij Aor.

The same verbs which, as will be shown hereafter (" 474),reduplicate^l^av,(the Guna of

^, "35 u,)in the desiderative by "3"w,take T" instead of ^* in the reduplicatedaorist:

"^nujCaus. ^\\^^tindvdyatij
Des^^^v^fiKnundvayishatij
A or. of Caus.^R ^C

J Radical ^R a is reduplicatedby ^T a if the root ends in a double consonant.

-J 380. AOKIST. 191

^W vrit,to be, tli* vartdyati;W""jn i^dvivritat ^iqqflf^aoacar/af. (Pan. vn. 4, 7.)

or

HlAnfrtindrjdyati;xi "i1"j "j

TOmry, to cleanse, "i
i^dmimrijator ^i*i"i 1 f^dmamdrjat.
"5SFH M/, to kirtdyati;TI V) "yn i^dchikritat
praise,4fc)ft^frt or wfrnflfrl^
dchikirtat.

J 378. Roots beginningwith a vowel have the same internal reduplication,

which will be described hereafter in the desiderative bases.
This after throwing off
Thus ^r^as forms the Caus. *n$fi{dsdy. ay,
and shorteningthe vowel, becomes w^a"; this reduplicated,
and with augment
lastly, and termination,^nfifllfr
d$-i6-am.

In the same manner, 'WtfW archicham, vftfMiraubjijam,"c. ({476.)

" 379. Are irregular:
slightly
m /"f,to drink,which forms its causal aorist as ^"Ml*"4i^
dpipyat(insteadof
dptpayat}.Pan. vii. 4, 4.

WT sthd, to stand, which forms its causal aorist as ^rnf"Mi dtishjhipat

(insteadof

its causal aorist

TTT ghrd, to smell, which forms as
^ djighripat
or

djighrapat.

REDUPLICATED AORIST.

PARASMAIPADA.

1. 1"iiI'5tM ds'israyam asifraydva asisraydma

2. vif^i^Mt
a6israyah asisrayatam uslsrayata

3. vi f^i
^ ^
i^atisrayat asisrayatam asisrayan

ATMANEPADA.

asisraye f^ asisraydvahi ^ asisraydmahi

2. I asisrayathdh asisrayethdm a"israyadhvam

asisrayata as'israyetdm asisrayanta

" 380. In the preceding "" occasional rules have been given as to the

forms
particular of the aorist which certain verbs or classes of verbs adopt.
As in Greek, so in Sanskrit,too, practiceonly can teach
effectually which

forms do actuallyoccur of each verb; and the rules of grammarians,

however minute and complicated,
are not unfrequentlycontradicted by the

usage of Sanskrit authors.

However, the generalrule is that verbs follow the first aorist,unless this

is specially and
prohibited, that they take the first form of the first aorist,

unless they are barred by generalrules from the employment of the interme-
diate

^ i. Verbs, thus barred, take the second form of the first aorist.

The number of verbs which take the third form of the first aorist is very

limited,three roots ending in JT m, and roots ending in ^T d.

The fourth form of the first aorist is likewise of very limited use ; see "360.
As to the second aorist,the roots which must or may follow it are
192 FUTURE. " 381-

indicated in " 367, and so are the roots which take the form
reduplicated of

the second aorist in $ 371*

Roots which follow the second aorist optionally,
or in the Parasmaipada
only,are allowed to be conjugatedin the first aorist,subjectto the general
rules.

CHAPTER XIV.

FUTUKE, CONDITIONAL, PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE, AND BENEDICTIVE.

Future.

$381. Terminations.

PARASMAIPADA.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

1. i^*miH
ishydmi Sf^TRJisJiydvah 3pR*{\ishydmah
2. 3^4
(Viishydsi ^3T*Kishydthah ^wfH ishydtha

3. ^Hjfrr
ishydti ishydtah
S^tQTI! ^"4ffl
ishydnti

ATMANEPADA.

1. ^$tishy6 $*MI^ ishydvahe ^*MIH^

ishydmahe
2. ^W ishydse ^^faishyethe ^f"l ishyddhve
3. ^HT ishydte ishytie
sfSTcT ^^TTishydnte
The cases in which the ^ i of ^snfaishydmi "c. must be or may be omitted

have been stated in chapterXI, $ 33 1 seq. For the cases in which *(i is
changed to ^ ",see $ 340. On the change of w sha and *r sa, see $ 100 seq.
On the of the radical
strengthening vowel, see chapterXII, $ 344 seq.

$ 382. The changes which the base undergoes before the terminations of

the tenses,the
strengthening two futures,the conditional,
and the benedictive

Atm. are regulatedby one that

generalprinciple, of givingweightto the base,
though their varies accordingto
application the peculiarities
of certain verbs.

See illustrations in $ 344 (bhavishydmi)

and $ 345 (mdrkshydmi).These

peculiarities
must be learnt but
by practice, a few generalrules may here be

repeated:
1. Final U e, $" ai9 ^\ o are changed to ^TT d; ^ gai, to sing, JllHJlfa
gdsyami, "c.
2. Final ^ i and\i, ^u)^uj'^ ri and ^" ri,take Guna ; f*tji,
to conquer,

^mifajeshydmi;*%bhu,HfcujifHbhavishydmi; ^ kri}g"ft"5|rftT
karishyami;
^ dri,to tear,^fXmifHdarishydmi or ^^NnfH darishyami. There are the

usual cF ku, to sound, ^f^RTfTkuvishydmi. (J345, note.)

exceptions,
3. Penultimate ^ i, ^u9 short,take Guna;
^ri, prosodially ^ri becomes

%$ir; ^ budh, ^tfv^nfifbodhishydmi ;

 PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE. $384-

ATMANEPADA.

1 .
J*tq aishye aishydvahi aishydmahi

2. "jwfqit aishyathdh aishyadhvam

3. JrofiT aishyata aisJiyetdm aishyanta

PeriphrasticFuture.
" 384. The terminations are,

PARASMAIPADA.

1 . ^niPwitdsmi ^dl^t itdsvah

2. itdsi
^ruP** $HIW itdsthah itdstha

3. ^cTTltd itdrau
^rillJ \ itarah

ATMANEPADA.

i. itdhe
i^HI*" ^ itdsvahe
^fli*3 itdsmahe

3. 3[HT""a ^rtl'Uitdrau

These terminations are clearlycompounded of in td (base^ tfn),

the common
(

suffix for forming nomina and

agentis, the auxiliary
verb ^rc^as, to be. There

is,however, with regardto TTT td,no distinction of number and gender in the

ist and 2nd persons, and no distinction of gender in the 3rd person.
On the retention or omission of intermediate ^ i or ^ i, see J 331 seq.
On the strengthening
of the radical vowel, see " 382.

*ry^budh, to know,
with intermediate ^ i.

PARASMAIPADA.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

1. "BM fVci i Ujf bodhitasmi

2. ^tfwrf?? lodhitdsi *
bodhitdsthah bodhitd'stha
"nPviril^|

3. "ilTMriI bodhitd bodhitdrau bodhitdrak

ATMANEPADA.

1. WTTVffll^bodhitdhe bodhitdsvahe
2. "Tl
PMn itf bodhitd'se bodhitdsdthe bodhitd'dhve

3- WtfvnTO bodhitd'
rau bodhitd'rah

without intermediate ^ "'.

PARASMAIPADA.

tdsmi etdsvah I etdsmah

etd'sthah

"ni"J etdrau J etdrah

-" 388. BENEDICTIVE. 195

ATMANEPADA.

i .
FrT!^
etdhe JgrilH^ etdsvahe *ni"HC etdsmahc

2. ^rtlfietdse "ni"im etdsdthe 3711*4 etddhte

3. ^TTT e/d
":niCfetdrau "niC et draft

Benedictive.

J 385. The so-called benedictive is formed in close analogy to the

optative. It differs from the by not admittingthe

optative full modified verbal

base,and, secondly,
by the insertion of an "^s before the personaltermina-
tions.

In the Parasmaipadathis ^s stands between the TTT yd of the optative

and the actual signs of the persons, being lost,however, in the 2nd and
3rd pers. sing. Thus, instead of

Opt. if, TK, TTT^,*TR, inf, Trnrf, *n*r, *rnr, 3:,

ydm, ydh, ydt, ydvayydtam,ydtdm,ydma, ydta,yuh, we have

Ben. 1TO, iTTt, TTT^,1TTO, 1T^, ^IWI, *JTO, irer, TR}:.

ydsam, ydh, ydt, ydsva, ydstam, ydstum,
ydsma, ydsta,ydsuh.
As the optativeis a verbal compound of the modified base with an ancient second aorist

of the root IT yd, the benedictive seems a similar compound of the unmodified base with an

ancient first aorist of *TT yd. In *TH ydh and contractions of "n"^y"fos
Tffl^ydt have we

and In the
"t\*(t{ydst. Veda the 3rd pers. sing, is HI y^. (See Bollensen, Zeitschrift
der D. M. G., vol. xxii. p. 594; and Pan. vm. 2, 73"74.)
In the Atmanepada
the
^ s stands beforethe terminations of the optative,
e. g. T"nstyainstead of ^ITiya. Besides this,the personalterminations originally
beginningwith j(Jt
or
^ th take an additional ^s. Cf. $351. Thus, instead of

Opt. fs, ^n:, fw, f*ft", ty^" t^" t1^* ^ t^l"

iya, fa/A, #a', foa'Ai, iydthdm,
iydtdm,imdhi, idhvdm, trdn, we have

Ben. TR^T, "l8it, ?ft7, filqf^,

^ilqiteqi, til^P^,?fh^, "i"lv.^"
'*OilUHi,
siy"x,sfshthdh,sishtd,sivdhi, siydsthdm, siydstdm,simdhi, sidhvdm, sirdn.
The benedictive in the Atmanepada
is really optativeof the first aorist. Thus
an from

^bhu, Aor. ^wfq fa abhavishi, Ben. HfclMl^bhavishfya; from ^J stu, Opt. Atm.

Aor. ^cft? astoshta,Ben. W*l'il

stuvita, K stoshishta; from Opt. Atm.
"S^Arf, '

Aor. VN^iMtf
akreshata, Ben. ^TT^ArresA^ran.
" 386. Verbal bases ending in ^H^ay (Chur, Caus. Denom. "c.) drop ^Tay before the
terminations of the benedictive Par.: Ben. *"ft^nf
^ft^choray, chorydsam;
but in Atm.
"

chorayishtyd.Denominative bases in ^y drop ^y in the Ben. Par. :

Ben. ^"1"4 1 tt putriydsam; but in Atm. fMMll putriyishiyd.

^cfl
" 387. The benedictive Parasmaipada belongs to the weakening, the
benedictive Atmanepada
to the strengtheningforms ($344). Hence from

f^chit,Par. chitydsam,
fa"qiti Atm. ^fWN chetishiyd.
" 388. The benedictive Parasmaipada never takes intermediate ^ i. The

benedictive Atmanepadagenerallytakes intermediate ^ t. Exceptions are

provided for by the rules " 331 seq.
c c a
196 BENEDICTIVE. $ 389-

Weakening of the Base beforeTerminations beginningwith T y.

" 389. Some of the rules regulatingthe weakening of the base, which is required in the
benedictive Parasmaipada, may here be stated together with the rules that apply to the

weakening of the base in the passiveand intensive.

" 390. While, generallyspeaking, the terminations of the benedictive, passive,and
intensive exercise a weakening influence on the verbal base, there is one important,though
only apparent, exception to this rule with regardto verbs ending in 3[i,^ u, ^J ri. Final

^i and Tw, before the ^y of the terminations of benedictive,passive,and intensive,are

lengthened(Pan.vn. 4, 25),but not strengthenedby Guna.

fa chi,to gather; Ben. -*ftm'i\chiyd't; chiydte;Int. ^T^falff

Pass. **ft*tt chechiydte.
Final ^J ri is changed to ft ri. (Pan. vn. 4, 28.)
^ kri, to do ; Ben. (VhHli^
kriydt; Pass. Pj**4H
kriydte. (The Intensive has ^nO^n
chekriydte.,
Pan. vn. 4, 27.)
In roots,however, beginning with conjunct consonants, final ^ r* ia strengthened
actually
by Guna, and appears as ^R ar. (Pan. vn. 4, 29.)
^smri,to remember ; Ben. W*\\i[smaryc[t T"fasmarydte; Int. Wfwflrt sdsmarydte.
; Pass.

Also in ^n, to go; Ben. ^^(arydt;Pass. ^f*fiT arydte; Int. ^C(5n ardrydte.
Final ^Tn fjfr,
is changed to
and, after labials,to ^.ur.

to stretch; Ben. *sl\*\\^stirya[t;

^stri, Int. iNcfWft
Pass. WlAd stirydte; testirydte.
to fill;Ben. ^Tf^purydtj
^pri, Pass. "$%purydte;Int. ^^fl popury ate.

Exceptions : l$siis changed to TJP^s'ay.

^ftsi,to He down; (Ben. $\m\i\sayydt
does not occur, because the verb is Atmanepadin);
Pass. "^H^ffsayydte; Int. ^tI^1^^"
sdsayydte. (Pan. VIT. 4, 22.)
3[i,after prepositions,
does not lengthen the final 5fi in the benedictive.

^", to go; Ben. \Hit(iydtj

but ^T*\Wi(^samiydt.
(Pan. vn. 4, 24.)
uh, to understand,
"35^ after prepositions,
is shortened to
7^ uh. (Pan. vn. 4, 23.)
Ben. "#[^uhydt; Pass. "Zv"lt
uhydte .

Ben. ti^^iiIT samuhydt;

Pass. t4"j^in
samuhydte.
" 391* The following
roots may or may not drop their final "^w, and then lengthen the
precedingvowel. (Pan. vi. 4, 43.)
*F[jan,to beget; Ben. "P*ffity'arey""
"SfT^m^/ay/jf Pass. Himtijdydte
or ; or *\"*njanydtej
Int. **R*fmft jdjdydte
or "TW^TiT janjanydte.
^*{san,toobtain; Ben. WHTI^sdyd't
orW^^anyat; Pass.^T'Tfl' sdydteor 'ff^ sany ate;

Int. tiitiiMrt sdsdydte

or ^^Pmf samsanydte.
^*{khan, to dig; Ben. khdydt
'^1^41^ or !?("*{
I ^khanydt;
Pass. "sii*ifl khdydte or "?r*mi

khanydte;Int. ^KNI^rt chdkhdydte or ^""""n chahkhanydte.

In the passive only, fT"^frw,to stretch; Ben. n"*\"(^tanydt;
Pass. ni"qn #ay^e or n"Mn

tanydte; Int. ffrT^Rff tantanydte.

" 392. Accordingto a generalrule,roots ending in ** ai and ^ o change then* final

diphthongin the general tenses into ^TT d: "Wf dhyai,UTnTlf dhydydte. Roots ending in

^TT d retain it: "TT^a,TTTff pdydte,he is protected. But the followingroots change their

final vowel into \f in the passiveand intensive; into "Ze in the benedictive Par.; and keep
it unchanged before gerundial1 ya. (Pan. vi. 4, 66,67, 69.)
-$ 395- BENEDICTIVE. 197

The six verbs called *"ghu*,and the followingverbs :

PASSIVE. INTENSIVE. BENEOICTIVE f. GERUND.

IJTddy to give OMII diydte ";"{l"4n

dediydte IpRl^deyctt
Tf$\H praddya
ITT mdy to measure 'ffaTfl'
miydte *i"il"4H
memiydte *fami mey"" TFTR pramdya
WT s/H to stand Wtan sthiydte rfulqi)
teshthiydte 'Wm^stheydt
UWHT prasthdya
l\gai,to sing ifbfKgtydte wfanT jegiydte ^Tf^geycltWmpragdya
TRpd, to drink TftTftpiydte ^Mlqi)pepiydte Tfrtfl(jpeydt
VKFlprapdya
^T Ad, to leave ^I^H Afy"ft"? ^IJInj'eAfyrffe
^Tn^Aey"" HfRpraWya
*ftso, to finish ^^(siydte tlH)"u)
seshiydte HW^seydt HFR pra*/ya
" 393. The followingverbs take Samprasarana in the benedictive (Pan. in. 104),
4,

passive, and gerund. (Pan. vi.

participle, 1, 15.)
^racA, to speak; ^^waptH, to sleep; ^t?a/ (Pan.vi. i, 20), to wish; and the
"4"iif^
yajddi,i. e. those following
*H^ yaj.
Ben. Pass.T^
T^TTT^McAy^; uchydte; Part. T1K u^""A ; Ger. TW tt^t?/
The Mlif^are, (23,33-41) i"^yqj,
to sacrifice;^*{vap, to sow ; ^ vah, to cany ; T^ro*,
to dwell; % vc, to weave; ^t?ye||,to cover; 3$ hve\\,to call; ^ rarf,to speak;
f^Gf
sut||,to grow.

" 394. The |followingverbs take Samprasaranain the benedictive,

passive,participle,
gerund,and intensive. (Pan.vi. i, 16.)

,
to take; 'vlfljyd,
to fail; **F^vyadh,
to pierce;"H^t?yacA,
to surround;

vratch, to cut; Tf^prachh,

to ask; to fry.
VlTS^bhrajj, As to W^sca
and ^ rye, see " 393, note ||.

; Ben .
J|^IIc^grihydt;
Pass. grihydte;Part. Ji^lfft
JJ^lii grihitdh; Ger.
grihftvd;
Int. "i 0 '^t$l d jarigrihydte.

" 395* ^T^ s", to rule, substitutes f^T^sish, in the benedictive,passive,participle,

gerund, intensive,also in the second aorist. (Pan. vi. 4, 34.)
Ben. fijl
U|| i^tishydt
; Pass. f^PRffsishydte
; Part. f^t?t"shtdh; Ger. $ishtvd
(31^1 ;

Aor. ^ir^im^osisAa^.
Roots ending in consonants preceded by a nasal (which is reallywritten as belonging to
the root) lose that nasal before weakening terminations (Kit,Nit, Pan. vi. 4, 24). Thus

* This term comprises the six roots J^IM, ^Rff,^T,^, f*H^, and *te,all varieties of

the radicals "JTdd and VT dhd; but not ^T^and ^^, i.e. "JTfrT
ddti,he cuts, and ^mfinddy at i,
he cleans (Pan. 1. 1, 20). Hence fffrnt diyate,it is given; but ^mnddyate, it is cleaned.

t In other roots, ending in ^IT d or diphthongs,and beginning with more than one sonant,
con-

the change into ^e in the benedictive Par. is optional(Pan. vi. 4, 68). " glai,to
wither ; gleydt
jpffi^ or
^fT^T^gldydt. ^TT khyd,to call ; ^im^khydydtwmi(khyeyd't. or

J ^fl^svdp, to send to sleep,takes Samprasarana in the aorist (Pan. vi.

reduplicated
I, 18). ^f^^asushupat.
|| ^^ svap, to sleep,^tpT syam, to sound, and ^ rye, take Samprasarana in the

intensive also (Pan.vi. i, 19); tftMU^ soshupydte, fql^n

^PHWIn sesimydte, veviydte.
f^ifvi takes Samprasarana optionallyin the intensive (Pan.vi. i, 30); ^i\a^Mn
so"ydtc
or ^THlt^H
sesviydte.% hve forms Int. ^\"*Wjohuydte(Pan. vi. I, 33). In the intensive

forms Mcfclnlf
cheMydte(Pan.vi.i, 21); ^pydy, ^TNTT pepiydte
(Pan.vi. 1,29).
198 PASSIVE. " 396-

from ^R(srams, Part. "*$: srastdh,Pass. ^TR^ srasydte,

Ben. HWi^ srasydt, Ger.

srastvd, Int.T"ft"QR sanisrasydte, ^on.^B^dsrasat ; fromt^ranj, Ben.

Part. t3K raktdh, Ger. TiiT rctoa

Pass. "Tl|ri rajydte, (or tw ranktvd, Pan. vi. 4, 32).

$ 396. With regard to the benedictive Atm. see the generalrules as to

the of
strengthening the base,$ 344, and $ 348
particularly seq. Remember,
that if the benedictive Atm. does not take intermediate ^ i,penultimate^ i,
left unchanged,whereas in other tenses they take
strengthening
"3u,?$ri are

Guna (f344). Final ^ ri,too, remains unchanged, and ^ri becomes ^ ir,
or, after labials,
^ 4r. fq^kship,to throw, ftfml4 kshipsiyd;^pri,
to fill,

Benedictive.

PARASMAIPADA.

1. budhydsam
"JUJTtf ^HITO budhydsva '3p$m budliydsma
2. ^TH budhydh ^*HHfl budhydstam ^"irai budhydsta
3. TURff budhydt J ^M IW I budhydstdm ^*Hi^tbudhydsuh
ATMANBPADA.

1. '^IfM^^ bodhishiyd ^flfVM'HfV

bodhishivdhi ^Vftml*tf^
bodhisMmdhi

2. ^fFmflaU bodhisMshthdh HtlVll^lW bodhishiydsthdm

^tfVT^?4 bodhishidJivdm

"T bodhishiydstdm ^i(VfMii5^

bodhishirdn

CHAPTER XV.

PASSIVE.

5 397. The passivetakes the terminations of the Atmanepada.

SpecialTenses of the Passive.

" 398. The and imperativeof
optative,
present,imperfect, the passiveare
formed by adding IT 2/a to the root. This if ya is added in the same manner

as it is in the Div verbs, so that the Atmanepadaof Div verbs is in all

respects(except
in the accent)identical with the passive.

Atm. "T^fff
ndhyate,he binds ; Pass, rf^ nahydte,he is bound.

" 399. Bases in Caus. of the

^T^ ay (Chur, Denom. "c.) drop ^T^ ay before t ya

passive.
"*tt*n^bodhdy
', to make one know; ^tWrf bodh-ydte^
he is made to knuw.

**TV"*^
chordy"to steal j ^"n chor-ydte,he is stolen.

Intensive bases ending in ^y retain their 1y, to which the lya of the passive is added
without any intermediate vowel.

,
to cut much j
3fico*snloluyydte,
he is cut much.
 PASSIVE. 199

Intensive bases ending in

*^y,precededby a consonant, drop their ^y.
qfal^bebkidy,
to sever ;
^(*iwn bebhidydte,
it IB severed.

"fhft
didM, to shine, q^ vevt,to yearn, q(V."'
daridrd,to be poor, drop their final vowel,

as usual.

didhi,^teti
^t*ft i.e.
it is lightened,
didhydte, it lightens.

$ 400. As to the weakening of the base, see the rules given for the

J 389
benedictive, seq.
Passive.
SINGULAR.

I. 2. 3.
Pres. vj$bhdy6 $TH*bhuydse "07*bMydte
Impf. *ng$dbhdye WgW. dbhdyathdh *T"qTT dbMyata
Opt. VgWbMyfya tgWCbMytthdh VgfrbMytta
Imp. ^bMya( *j*tt bhuydsva *gllft
bhuydtdm

DUAL.

Pres. vgtt^bMydvahe ^q^ bh"ytthe *"" bhuytte

Impf. ^T^lT^f^dbhuydvahi ^T^^lfdbhuyethdm ^J^iffdbhuyetdm
Opt. ^4*1^bhuytuahi "J5^Rtbhuyfydtkdm ^Tnrf bhtiyfy"tdm
Imp. *JJJN^
bhtiydvahai *J^zn
bhuytihdm ^iH bhuyttdm
PLURAL.

Pres. ^TR^ bhuydmahe *$$"bhuyddhve ^-qiTbhuydnte

Impf. ^UJTHHf^dbhuydmahi dbhuyadhvam
^T*J?T5"I ^NJjTiTdbhuyanta
Opt. ^l*lf^
bhuytmahi ^^ bhuytdhvam V^f^bhuy^ran
Imp. ^Twt bhuydmahai ^^ bhuyddhvam ^TiTfbhuydntdm

General Tenses of the Passive.

f 401. In the generaltenses of the passive,

^ya is dropt,so that,with
certain exceptionsto be mentioned hereafter,there is no distinction between
the generaltenses of the passiveand those of the Atmanepada.The ifya of
the passiveis treated,in fact,like one of the conjugational
class-marks

(vikaranas),
which are retained in the specialtenses only, and it differs

therebyfrom the derivative of causative, desiderative,

syllables and intensive

verbs,which, with certain remain

exceptions, throughout both in the special
and in the generaltenses.
ReduplicatedPerfect.
The perfectis
reduplicated the same as in the Atmanepada.

Periphrastic
Perfect.
The periphrastic
perfectis the same as in the Atmanepada,but the

verbs
auxiliary ^ as and ^ bM must be conjugatedin the Atmanepada,
as well as
^ kri. (J342.)
200 PASSIVE. $403-

Aorist.

$ 402. Verbs may be conjugatedin the three forms of the first aorist

which admit of Atmanepada,

and without from
differing the paradigms given
above, except in the third person singular.
The second aorist Atmanepada is not to be used in a purelypassivesense *.

J 403. In the third person singulara peculiarform has been fixed in the

ending in ^ i, and
passive, Vriddhi
requiring of final,and Guna of medial

vowels (but^r a is lengthened),

followed by one consonant.

Thus, instead of^wfay dlavishta,

we find dldv-i. 1
,,,.
" First Form.
^T^tfv? abodhishta, " abodh-i. J
^rfojTT
akshipta, akshep-i.
anay-i.

^T^rTakrita, " akdr-i.

"
^iftjaddy-i. fc Second Form.

astirshta, " ^HsTTftastdr-i.

asrishta, " ^T*rf^asarj-i.

^xv adagdha, " addh-i.

TBrf^Tf
adikshata, "

agtih-i.
alikshata, " aleh-i. Fourth Form.

adhukshata, " adoh-i.

^rftrepadhikshata, " adeh-i.

" 404. Verbs ending in ^TT d or diphthongs,take T^y before the passive2[*.

"fTda, "H^|ftl
addyi,instead of ^fq'ff
adita.

" 405. Verbs ending in ^*{ay (Chur, Caus. Denom. "c.) drop ^f ay before the passive
^ t, though in the generaltenses, after the droppingof the passiveHya, the original
^P^ay
may reappear, i.e. the Atm. may be used as passive.

"HV*I bodhay, ^^nf dbodhi; ^\X*T choray,^ef^TKachorij TT*fQrdjay,

^Ujf"iardji.

In the other persons these verbs may either drop ^^ay or retain it,being conjugatedin
either case after the firstform of the firstaorist."

abhdvisM, ^^ilVsiJ abhdvishtJidh,^MTf% abhdvij or

^MTf^fabhdvi.
fJ abhdvayishthdh,

" 406. Intensive bases in

T^yadd the passive^[i,without Guna.

Int. ^T^t"jftr
Tft*$l(bobhuy,abobMyi.
Intensive bases ending in ^y, precededby a consonant, drop ^y, and refuse Guna.

Int. ^fWST bebhidy; Aor. ^T^rftrf^

abebhidi.

Desiderative bases,likewise,refuse Guna.

Des. Aor. ^R^rfvfa
^hf^fbubodhishj abubodhishi.

* This would follow if Jcartari extends to Pan. in. i, 54, 56.

202 PASSIVE. " 411-

Dual r. pers. -?Hc*lP^Hf^ by

aldvi-shvahi, the side of "Hc*P"iHP^
alavi-shvahi.

i aldvi-shdthdm, " " 'HoiiVmvjjaldvi-shdthdm.

3. ^TcSTfr^Tiri
aldvi-shdtdm, " " ^cSfamdl alavi-shdtdm.
Plur. i. pers. ^TcSTfaTf^aldvi-shmahi, by the side of "swfV^ng aldvi-shmahi.

%. ^roFfes"r
^K"ifasafaldvi-dhvamor^^dhvam aldvi-dhvam " or "^.
3. "MlP"4Mffaldvi-shata, " ^c-ifMMH aldvi-shata.
Fut. c^TPM^JIdvi-shye, by the side of c*P"^tM
Idvi-shye.
Cond. -flrtlfciui
aldvi-shye, " ^Jc5p^ aldvi-shye.
Per. Fut. oSlfcrilj
Idvi-tdhe, " c^P^ril^
Idvi-tdhe.
*

Ben. fyrP^t^ Idvi-sMya, " e3P^*flnIdvi-shiya.

From f% chi, to gather,3rd pers. sing.Aor. Pass. -4Mipjjachdyi; hence

Aor. ^T^P^PM achdyishi,besides ^?^f^ acheshi,"(i.
Fut. M iP"M^ chdyishye, "
^"^ cheshye.
Cond. ^r-cftPnui
achdyishye, " SH^ul acheshye.
Per. Fut. xjiPuHI^
chdyitdhe, " ^TTT%cheiahe.
Ben. ^iP^Mln chdyishiya, " ^"^hl cheshiya.
From inghrd, to smell,3rd pers. sing.Aor. Pass, ^mfa aghrdyi; hence
Aor. SHmHuPM aghrdyishi)besides SHUlPu aghrdsi.
Fut. i||Pi|u)
ghrdyishye, " TTT^ ghrdsye.
Cond. -*{||| Pnul aghrdyishye, " ^.syif^
aghrdsye.
Per. Fut. MlfMril^
ghrdyitdhe, " UMI^ ghrdtdhe.
Ben. uiPijtflii
ghrdyishiya, "
l||^^ ghrdsiya.
From to hurt, 3rd pers. sing.Aor. Pass, ^wsnft adhvdri; hence
i^ c?^t;n,
Aor. ^rc^rfcfaadhvdrishi,besides ^Ifi|f^
adhvrishi or ^ruiftftadhvarishi.
Fut. t^lfc^dhvdrishye, " isrftw dhvdrishye.
Per. Fut. "nfbn^ dhvdritdhe, "
i9%1%dhvdrtdhe.
Ben. "nfbrfa dhvdrishiya, "
sq^dhvrishiyaorvstfttvdhvarish
From ^ 3rd pers. sing.Aor. Pass. ^iinP^ aghdni; hence
^"?z,to kill,
Aor. ^HlPnPK aghdnishi,
besides (^ 3 PyPn avadhishi).
Pan.vi.4,62 t-
Fut. MlPn^ ghdnishye, "
^Pnul hanishye.
Per. Fut. TfiffTdl^
ghdnitdhe, " - ^ffrthantdhe.
Ben. yifHMl^ ghdnishiya, "
(c|Pififln
vadhishiya).
From to see, 3rd pers. sing.Aor.
~^5{dri", Pass. ^f$t adar"i; hence

Aor. ^n^tfa adarsishi, besides ^rfP"fadrikshi.

Fut. ^f^^1darsishye, "
fiss drakshye.
Per. Fut. ^Pjlrii^
darsitdhe, "
-5^^drashtdhe.
Ben. ^P$|*(hl
dar"shtya, "
^l drikshiya.

* See " 332, 5.

f Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n, p. 270, seems to allow ^P* ahasi.
-J 414. PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. 203

From TRyrah, to take, 3rd pers. sing.Aor. Pass, ^nft agrdhi; hence
Aor. agrdhishi,besides
"{{jif]gfa Wil^lfMagrahishi.
Fut. ?rrfT*f
grdhishye, inf^*fgrahishye.
Per. Fut. Trfziri^grdhitdhe, IF"lrikgrahitdhe.
Ben. yifgiflq
grdhishiya, "
i|^1*rlq
grahishiya.
From JTT^ramay, to delight,Caus. of
t1^ram, 3rd pers. sing.Aor. Pass.

weft arami or ^Klfa ard/we ; hence

Aor. mfcCM aramishi or ^Tifirfaardmishi, besides "KHfafo aramayishi.

" 412. Certain verbs of an intransitive meaning take the passive^* in the 3rd pers. sing.
Aor. Atm. Thus IrqClff utpadyate(3rd pers. sing,present of the Atmanepadaof a Div

verb),he arises,
becomes J^Mltyudapddi,he arose, he sprang up ; but it is regularin the

other persons, o^MWini udapatsdtdm,theytwo arose, "c. (Pan.in. i, 60.)

" 413. Other verbs of an intransitive character take the same form (Pan.HI. 1,61);
optionally

("j1u|d
dtpyate,he burns, Div, Atm.),"*"1fM adipi ^"OrMKadipish^a. or

jan (*i\*M
jdyate,he is born, he is,Div, Atm.; it cannot be formed from Iffy'an
(Hu, Par.)"to ^l"Tf*T
beget), ajani or ^enifneajanishta.
(^"W budhyate,he is conscious, Div, Atm.),^TTtfVabodhi VJl or abuddha.

^L^frt
purayati,he fills,Chur.), ^T*. apuri Wjfn? apurishta. "" or

(TTRff Bhu,
tdyate,he spreads, Div
Atm.; really form of Tan),"Mlfa atdyi or
atdyishta.
dyate,he xi"qif"l
grows), apydyi or -"*mrM8 apydyishta.

CHAPTER XVI.

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE.

$414.The participle
of the present Parasmaipada retains the Vikaranas

of the ten classes. It is most easilyformed by takingthe 3rd pers. plur.of

the present, and droppingthe final ^ i. This givesus the Ahga base, from

which the Pada and Bha base can be easilydeduced accordingto general
rules (J182). The accent remains in the participle
on the same syllable
where it was in the 3rd pers. plur. If the accent falls on the last syllable
of the and
participle, if that does
participle not take a nasal,then all Bha

cases and the feminine suffix receive the accent. (Pan.vi. I, 173.) Thus

H^f?T H^TT Nom. S. "T^ Ace. HWTf "

Instr. "T^HT "c.

bhdvanti bhdvant bhdvan bhdvantam bhdvatd

tuddnti tuddnt tuddn tuddntam tudatd

dtoyanti dfvyant dirynn divyantam dtryatd

D d 2
 204 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. $415-

Norn. S. ^K*J"^ Ace. ^TCTIT Instr. "qioiifi "c.

chordyant chordyan chordyantam chordyatd

sunvdnt sunvn sunvdntam

"c.

tanvdnt tanvdn tanvdntam

WtWi^ "BfalF^ "c.

krmdnt krmdn krmdntam krinatd

"s^i^ ^fifrTT"c.
addnt addn addnt am adatd

(" 184)
aJ"^riT
jtibvati juhvat juhvat juhvatam juhvatd

rundhdnt rundhdn rundhdnt am rundhatd

Intens. *TT*J^T^ "fl*j"if^ ^JTff "37*j^ni(" 184)
bdbhuvat bobhuvat b6bhuvatam bobhuvatd

415. The of
participle the future is formed on the same principle.
^fatq-^ Norn. S. Hftra^ Ace. H fa *M rf Instr. Hfcufri'l

bhavishydnti bhavishydnt bhavishydn bhavishydntam bhavishyatd

" 416. The of

participle the reduplicatedperfectmay best be formed by
takingthe 3rd pers. plur.of that tense. This both
corresponds, in form and

accent, with the Bha base of the only that

participle, the ^ s, as it is always
followed by a vowel, is changed to ^ sh. Having the Bha base,it is easy to

form the Anga and Pada bases, accordingto " 204. In forming the Anga
and Pada bases,it must be remembered,
1. That roots ending in a vowel, restore that vowel, which, before T: uh,
had been naturallychanged into a semivowel.

intermediate
2. That, accordingto the rules on
^ i,all verbs which, without
countingthe "3: uh, are monosyllabicin the 3rd pers. plur.,insert ^ i.

(See Necessary ^ i, " 338, i ; Optional^ i, " 337, 8.)

3rd P. Plur. Instr. Sing. Nom. Sing. Ace. Sing. Instr. Plur.

babhuvuh babhuvushd babhuvdn babhuvddbhih

ninyuh ninyushd ninivdn nintvdmsam ninivddbhih

tJl^SlT^ "3^fk"
tutuduh tutudushd tutudvdn tutudvdmsam tutudvddbhih

f^f^t f^r^"ji"^
didivuh didivushd didivdn didivdmsam didivddbhih

^TIj'nTPgJ ^K*(T*Jt4jlit
^TKTn^TMFT^T^ ^nT^TTTTf^T^T^f ^ftonHTfirafg:
choraydmdsuh choraydmdsushd choraydmdsivan choraydmdsivdmsam choraydmdsivddbhih
 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. 205

3rd P. Plur. Instr. Sing. Nom. Sing. Ace. Sing. Instr. Plur.

fTO
sushnvuh sushuvushd sushuvdn sushuvdihsam tushuvddbhih
"v

cT"jm 7ff"TTF*^
ten lilt tenushd tenlvdn teniva/hsam tenivddbhih

fafag: P*iftl"iiti
chikriyuh chikriytishd chikriodn chikriodmsam chikricddbhih

^IJtn ^Nlf^l^
dduh ddushd ddivdn ddivdmsam ddivddbhih

*J?^^T ^Sc|[c^ *lf'-ffe*

juhuvuh juhuvushd juhuvdn juhuvdmsam juhuvddbhih

rurudhuh rurudhushd rurudhvdn rurudhvdmsam rurudhvddbhih

" 417. In five verbs, where the insertion of ^ " before ^ is optional(" 337, 8),we
forms
get the following :

3rd P. Plur. Instr. Sing. Nom. Sing. Ace. Sing. Instr. Plur.

or

jagmuh jagmushd jagmivdn or jaganvdn jagmivdrhsam jagmicddbhih

jaghnuh jaghnushd jaghnivan or jaghanvdn jaghnivamsam jaghnivddbhih

vividuh vividushd vividvan or vividivdn vividvdmsam vioidcddbhih

or

vivisuh vivisushd vivisvdn or vivisivdn vivisvdmsam vivifvddbhih

dris dadrisuh dadrisushd dadrisvdn or dadrisivan dadrisvdmsam dadrisvddbhih

" 418. The of

participle the perfectAtmanepadais
reduplicated formed

by dropping ^T ire, the termination of the 3rd pers. plur. Atm., and

substituting
^TT"T dna.

babhdvire "

^L^M: babhuvdndfy
chakrire "
^?W^n: chakrdndh

dadire "
^R: daddnah,

J 419. The participle present Atmanepadahas two terminations, ITR "

mdna for verbs of the First Division (J295),

^R dna for verbs of the Second

Division.

In the First Division we may again take the 3rd pers. plur.present Atm.,
drop the termination ^ nte, and replaceit by JfRt mdnah.

In the Second Division we may likewise take the 3rd pers. plur.present
Atm., drop the termination ^nr ate, and replaceit by ^TR! dnafy.

* The same optionalforms run through all the Pada and Bha cases.
 206 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. J 420-

First Division. Second Division.

bhdva-nte "
VRJTR: bhdva^mdnafy sunv-dte" g^R: sunv-dndfy
tudd-nte "

IJ^TRJ tudd-mdnah ^rnreff dpnuv-yte "

^MI^HM: dpnuv-dn*
divya-nte" ^Nmr^r: divya-mdnah : tanv-dnd

chordya-nte iJUquUU: chordya-mdnah " krm-dte "

jfftaiFT:
krin-dndfy
tudyd-nte ^HMt "
tudyd-mdnah ad-dte "

^f'^HS ad-dndh
bhdvdya-nte HN+HM: "

bhdvdya-mdnah uhv-ate "

juhv-dnah,
^3^1~*{\
Des. ^^bubhusha-nte^JWT": bubhusha-mdnah " rundh-dte "
%VT"f:
rundh-dndfy
Int. ^ft^l^
bodhuyd-nte "^JtWHt bobhuyd-mdnah "

" 420. The of

participle the future in the Atmanepada
is formed by adding

: mdnah in the same manner.

bhavishyd-nte ^P^U|Hri!j:
bhavishyd-mdnafy "

R neshyd-nte T^iMHRd:neshyd-mdnah "

totsyd-nte iftwui^: totsyd-mdnah "

i edhishyd-nte ^Puu(H|iii:
edhishyd-mdnah "

J 421. The of
participles the present and future passiveare formed by
adding *TRt mdnah in the same manner.

bhiiyd-nte IJJJHH* bhtiyd-mdnafy "

^i4^budhyd-nte "

IURT^T: budhyd-mdnah bhdvishyd-nte-bhdvishyd-mdnah"

stuyd-nte ^TRTT: stuyd-mdnah "

ndyishyd-nte ndyishyd-mdnah
"

kriyd-nte f"q*TO; Jcriyd-mdnafy "

Or like the Part. Put. Atm.

HT^ bhdvyd-nte"HTsq^R: bhdvyd-mdnah

The Past ParticiplePassive in 7H tah and the Gerund in i^T tva.

J 422. The passiveis

past participle formed by adding IT: tdh or eft ndb

to the root. ^ fai,^r?f:kritdh,done, masc. ; ^f?n kritd, fern.; epf kritdm,

neut. "J[ lundh, cut.
/i","g"T:
This termination 7T ^a is,as we saw, most opposed to the insertion of inter-
mediate

much that verbs which form generaltense

^ iy so so may any one

with or without ^ i,always form their past without

participle it. The number

of verbs which must insert ^ i before if ta is very small. ($332, D.)

Besides being averse to the insertion of intermediate ^ i} the participial
termination H ta, having always the Udatta, is one of those which have a

tendency to weaken verbal bases. (See$ 344.)

$ 423. The gerund of simple verbs is formed by adding FTT tva to the

root. ?f kri, "ag^Rkritva3having done, "^pu, Tg^lputvd or, from Tf^pun,

MfaHl pavitva,having purified.
The rules as to the insertion of the intermediate ^ i before ?=rT tvd have

been given before. With regard to the strengthening or weakening of the

-" 430. PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. 207

base, the generalrule is that WT tvd without intermediate

^ i weakens, with
intermediate ^ i strengthens the root (Pan.i. 2, 18). It always has the

Udatta. In givinga few more specialrules on this point,it will be venient

con-

to take the terminations w ta and iWT tvd together,

as they agree to

a great extent, though not altogether.

I. H: t ah "in I F7T t v;\, with intermediate ? i.

" 424. If IT. tah takes intermediate 3[", it may in certain verbs produce Guna. In this

case the Guna before r^T tvd is regular.

^ftsi,to lie down, ^|f"4ni

fayitdh(Pan. i. 2, 19); 31 forai $ayitvd.
avid,to sweat, ^jtyrit
sveditdh or (V"lf|!
svinndh ; ^ff^HIsveditvd.
mtrf,to be soft,^f^TTJ
meditdh ; i^ni meditvd.
k thrill. to drip,8^1^lit kshveditdh; a^i^rmkshveditvd.

,
to dare,vftlf*dharshitdh; Vnti^T dharshitvd.

,
to bear, fftwt marshltdh (patient),
(Pan. i. 2, 20) ; Hf*li"ll
marshitvd.
purify,^f^lf*pavtidh(Pan. I. 2, 22) ; MP"ii"n^amW,
from ^[^/wn. See No. 156.
" 425. Verbs with penultimate T K may or may not take Guna before Tf fa with mediate
inter-

^ *, if
impersonally.theyare used

to shine, ^fnndyutitdm or iTl

Wi{dyut, Pnn dyotitdm,
it has been shining.(Pan. i. 2, ai.)

" 426. If WT tod takes intermediate ^", it requires,as a general rule, Guna (Pan. i. 2,
18),or at all events does not produce any weakening of the base.
^crtV,to exist,qfrfrti
vartitvd.^^srams,to fall,tjiftfrm sramsitod (Pan. i. 2, 23). ^ pu (i.e. ^^pun)y to

sfqrqipavitvd
purify, (Pan. i. 2, 22).
Verbs, however, beginning with consonants, and ending in any singleconsonant except

*^yor ^t",preceded by ^, "^ror "31u, take

"3", Guna optionally(Pan. i. 2, 26) : Ip^cfyttf,
to

shine,tflfriril
dyotitvd
or dyutitvLThe
'^PriHl same option appliesto Jfitrish,
to thirst ;

IJ^mmA, to bear; ^5^A:m, to attenuate (Pan. 1. 2, 25); "jfar^T trishitvd or nf^rqitarshitvd.

" 427. Though taking intermediate ^ *, rTT tvd does not produce Guna, but, if possible,
weakens the base, in ^ rud,to cry, tjRrqi
ruditvd (Pan. I. 2, f^ md, to know, (%f";rm
8) ;
viditvd;
Ig^mush, to steal,^fm^lmushitvd ; *J^gra.h,to take, J]^1r"li
grihitvd;ifcmrid,
to mriditvd(Pan. i.
delight,ijf^r^T 2, 7); ^ mrirf,to rub, mriditvd;^TV^urfA,
"jH;i"ii to

cover, gudhitvd;
JjPviHI f^iS^"fr/, klisitvd;
to hurt, f^iP^IHI ^vad, to speak,
uditvd;'3R(vas,to dwell, ^fm^fiushitvd.
" 428. Roots ending "^fAor "^pA,precededby a nasal,may or may not drop the
in

nasal before WT tvd granthitvdor 44 fan i grathitvat,

(Pan. i. 2, 23); iifVrti having twisted.
The same to pluck (Pan. I.
appliesto the roots ^^vafich,to cheat, and rJ^/ancA, 2, 24);
vanchitvdor ^f-Hr^I vachitvd.

II. Kl tah and WT tva, without intermediate ^ i.

" 429. Roots endingin nasals lengthen their vowel before WJ tah and r^T ted (Pan. vi. 4,

15). SH* saw, to sdntvd.

rest, ^TTTr:sdntdh,T^rfi^T
Arram, to
JfP{ step, may or may not lengthen its vowel before i^T tvd (Pan. vi. 4, 18).
WT kram, "ZRtf: krdntdh,jfclHI krdntvdor kramitvd.
"air^T krantvd;also ^iP"irGU

" 430. The followingroots, ending in nasals, drop them before WJ taA and WT fp"

vi. 4, 37-)
208 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. " 431-

TJ^yam,to check,TcH yatdh,Tfft[yatvd*;

T^\rom, to sport,TTtt ratdh,TJ^T ratvd;*R namt
to bend, 'ffttnatdh,^^[natvdj '%*fkan, to J"znhatvctj
kill,^TfTtAafrfA, T* gam, to
/ '

go, TlTt gatdh, lli^R gdtvdj l"^man, to think, *HTt matdh, IfFRmatvdj "^^van, to
ask; TT^faw, to stretch,fTTH fa"a$, ffi^T tatvdj and the other verbs of the Tan class,
ending in 5^w.
Note Of the verbs those ending in
"
same "^w drop the nasal before the gerundialHya
and insert l^tjTHTTT pramdtya (Pan. vi. 4, 38) : those ending in 1(m may or may not drop
the nasal before the gerundialHya; 11*171 pragdtya or WFRtpragdmya.
" 431. The following
verbs drop final *{n, and lengthen the vowel.

^ff^jan,to bear, ^Ttfljdtah,*\\ri\jdtvd:W^san, to obtain, OTtTi sdtah, '*Hril sdtvd;

^t^ khan, to dig,^Trf: khdtah, Tsllril khdtvd.
Roots ending in
1. t|cM, or
"^v,substitute 3^^ and "3iw. (Pan. vi. 4, 19.)
,
to ask, TJFIprishtah (" 125), ifflprishtvd; f^div,to play,fpTJdyunah,
dyutvd.
2. Roots ending in "^rc^A, or ^r", drop their final consonant. (Pan. vi. 4, 21.)
l^murchh, to faint,^J murtah; ^ #wr", to strike,wftjturnah.

" The following

verbs change their with the precedingor followingvowel into
432. ^v
^i u. (Pan. vi. 20.)
4,

,
to ail,*T*!fcjurnah, *{r"T
jurtvd;13Ttvar, to hasten, "^t turnah, Hr^Tturtvd;
iv,to dry,^JTHsrutah, t|r"l
I srutvdj to
*8*{av, protect,^Tft wtaA, wrqi w^a;

,
to bind, 1JTHwi^aA, ^^r^Tmw^.
" 433. Roots ending substitute
dhyai, to meditate,"UTTfT: dhydtah,
in ^ ai ^TT d; ^
dhydtvd: or ^ gai, to sing, *ft?H^^"^, Iftr5TT
I ," T ^i^a. Final TJ e and ^TT a, too,

are changed to \i; fftpd,to drink, tjtff

J pitah, M!rq i pitvd; v dhe,to suck, Vhfttdhitah,

" 434. The following

roots change their final vowel into ^ i.

^ do, to cut, f^TTt f^rfl

rf"7"^, c?z^a (Pan. vn. 4, 40) ; ^ftso, to finish,ftfWJsitah,
5toa; *TTma, to measure, ftlft (*ii"l!
rnzYa/^, mitvd; l"l sthd, to stand, f"Tftl
sthitah,
f^Tr^Tsthitvdj VT rf^a,to place,f^cf:
AzYa^,f^T Ai^a (Pan. vn. 4, 42); ^T M, to

leave (^*T:Mwa^), f^r=lTAz^a (Pan. vii. 4, 43).

" 435. to sharpen,and ""t
'JJTWo, chho, to cut, substitute ^ i,or take the regular^TT a.

$ftso, %JT:AVa^ or sdtah,f^JHI

^TTrT: si'^a or $llrilsa^a (Pan. vii. 4, 41).
" 436. Exceptionalforms :

"JTda, to give,forms ^: dattah^, c^STTdattvd (Pan. vii. 4, 46).

sphdy,to grow, forms ^FRii'KJ
sphitah(Pan. vi. i, 22).
ai,to call (with Tt pra),forms Mfeilri:
prastitah(Pan. vi. i, 23) and Trert??:
prastimah
(Pan. vin. 2, 54).
/ai,to curdle,forms ^ft"Tt
sinah,and ^ftrT"
s^a^, cold ; but 'H^flT^Jsamsydnah, rolled

up (Pan. vi. i, 24, 25).

,
to grow, forms fft^lpinah;
but "OfR: pydnah after certain prepositions(Pan.
vi. i, 28).
" 437. The verbs which take Samprasarana before Kt tah and WT taahave been mentioned

* See verbs without intermediate 3[t. (" 332, 13, and 16.)
ending in vowels, ^ da may
t After prepositions be dropt,and the final 3[" and ^ w of a

prepositionlengthened. H^rtl pradattdh,fffil prattah; "Q^'*sudattah,^^J suttah.

210 PARTICIPLES, GEKUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. " 443-

an ^rt o; ^W bhuj (^ftbhujo,Dhatupatha 28, 124),to bend,

indicatory
^T7f:bhugnah.
6. Verbs beginningwith a double consonant, one of them being a semivowel,
and ending in ^1 d, or J? e, T* at, ^ o, changeableto ^n d (Pan.vin. 2,

43) 5 fl^fl*"JJW gldnafy,

faded. Except ^ dhyai, to meditate, w?r:
dhydtah (Pan.viu. 2, 57); ^TT "%^, to proclaim,WTW: khydtah. In

^(trai,to protect,TRghrd, to smell,the substitution is optional; grot

trdnah or ^nr: fr*a/0#(Pan.viu. 2, 56.)

7. Miscellaneous in
participles "T: wa/L- ^S: ptirnah,only if derived from

and
*""pilr, then with an optionalform ^fTTHptiritah(Pan.vii. 2, 27);
said to be trS:purtah (Pan. 57);
while the of
participle T^priis viu. 2,

^far:kshinah, from % "s^, to waste; ^R: dytinah,from f^.dit;,

to

*
play,(notto gamble, where it is inn dyutah) ; cIP^Tt lagnah,from c^T

/a^,to be in contact with (Pan.vii. 2, 18); also from

c*^ laj,to be

ashamed; ^fhr:
sinah and 9^H: but $ffa:s^a^, cold;
sydnah,coagulated,
^Nr: hrmafy or hritah, ashamed
^tlf: (Pan.viu. 2, 56).
" 443. Native grammarians enumerate certain words as which, though by
participles
their meaning they may take the place of participles,
are by their formation to be

classed as adjectives
or substantives rather
"T^itpakvdh, ripe; than as participles.Thus
dry
^^ilsushJcah, (Pan.vi.i, 206); "tflRtkshdmdh,weak', H tctl
T"$Kkrisdh,thiYi', 1 1prastimdh ,

crowded; "J^:phulldh,expanded; isffat

kshivdh,drunk, "c.

J 444. By adding the possessivesuffix "^vat ("187) to the participles

in w ta and "T nay a new of
participle very common occurrence is formed,

being in fact a perfectactive.

participle Thus ^K\ kritdh,done, becomes
kritdvdn,one who has done, but generallyused as a definite verb. ^

sa katam kritavdn, he has made the mat ; or in the feminine *rr

sd kritavati,and in the neuter fTrepTT^^kritavat. They are regularly

declined throughout like adjectives
in

Gerund in "q ya.

j 445. Compound verbs, but not verbs precededby the negativeparticle

^T a, take IT ya (withoutthe accent),instead of ?^T tvd. Thus, instead of
*"3\bMtva,we find H*$$sambMya; but ^rftfi^T
ajitvd,not havingconquered.

j 446. Verbs ending in a short vowel take m tya instead of if ya. f*f
to conquer, fartijitva,
having conquered; but f%fww vijitya. ^ bhri,to
carry, vp^T bhritvd ; but TOfFIsambhritya, having collected. Except frsy
kshi,
which forms having destroyed(Pan.vi.
TRsfaprakshiya, 4, 59).

* Pan. viu. 2, 49, allows tJ"Tcfywwain all senses of the root f^ div,except in that of
gambling; see Dhatupatha 26, i. ?J"Tdyuna and "4P".^H(
paridyuna, pained, come from

a different root, f^f div, to pain,Dhatupatha 33, 51.

-"453- VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 211

" 447. Causative bases with short penultimatevowel, keep the causative suffix^H{ ay
before T ya (Pan.vi. 56): WlWlfrisahyamdyati,
4, *l"i*i"H sunyamdyya,having caused to

assemble. Otherwise the causative suffix is,as usual,dropt

: ifiMifii nn\*\pratarya,
tdrdyati,
having caused to advance. UHnifffprdpdyati
forms UTO prapya and HIM*** prdpdyya,
having caused to reach (Pan.vi. 4, 57).

$ 448. The verbs called ghu (" 392

"*J *),*TT md, to measure, WT "thd,to stand,*TT gd,to
singor to go, TJTpd,to drink or to ^T hd, to leave,?ft*o,
protect, to take ^JT d, not
finish,
^ ( (Pan.vi. 4, 69). ^ do,to cut, ^H^TO avaddyaOT ; sthd,HWR prasthdya.
But TRpd,

to drink,may form Jim*f prapaya or wf\ftpraptya(Sar.).

" 449. Verbs endingin which do not admit of intermediate ^ not
^m, ", may or may

droptheir *Tm. Ex. to

"T^"am, bow, Vk*$+*\prandmya
or H"u m pru ndtya ; T^^am, to go,

^SMIW| agamy a or WMIi^ dgdtya.Other verbs endingin nasals, of intermediate

not admitting

\i, or to the Tan

belonging drop their final nasal. Ex. ^Aan, Tf"lprahdtya;
class,always
"ifr^
tan, nnm pratdtya^.?f"^khan and v"[janform ^n^I khdnya or ^TT khdya,
or "SfR j/ya.
" 450. Verbs ending in ^n change itto fr tr,and,afterlabials,
into "3Rdr. Ex.

havingcrossed ;
vittrya, ^p sampurya, having filled.
" 451. Certain verbs are irregular
in not taking Samprasarana. Thus % ve, to weave,

forms Wmpravdya; upajydya ^vye,to cover, H"**m pravydya,

"^\jyd,to fail,
d M N
-rt| ;

but after ijftpari ^ f^^M

optionally I*1parivydya ^ft^^IparivJy (Pan.vi. i, 41"44). or a

" 452. Some verbs change final ^ i and ^" into ^TT d. Thus *ftmf, ^liifff he
rntndti,
and fH mi, f*l"l\fff
destroys, nimdya; ^ ctf,
mindti,he throws,form f"i*ii*i to destroy,

upaddya;
c5^/I,to melt,optionally or f=ic4l*lt?i%a
f"lc6l*Ttn/tfya (Pan.vi. i, 50-51).

CHAPTER XVII.

VERBAL ADJECTIVES.

Verbal in
Adjectives cf^: ^tfhi:aniyah,a/w/ IK yah
tavyah(ortavyah),
k " 453- These
adjectives verbal
(called Kiitya)correspond
(oryah
in meaningto the
and yah).

Latin participlesin ndus,conveying the idea that the action expressedby the
verbs ought to be done or will be done. "*ri^: kartavyah,"*uul4Ukaraniyah,
cfir":
kdryahJ, faciendus. Ex. VHMm "F^: dharmas tvaydkartavyah,right
is to be done by thee.

t Versus memorials of these verbs : ifH3(*H*i1 irfHHfn:I rPJ

^fcTCg^rWT

% Another suffix for forming verbal adjectives

is ^cOT which is,however, of
eliinah,
rare occurrence; to
Tf^pach, cook, wf"?J*n TRiC pachelimdmdshdh, beans fit to cook;
brickie,fragile.
bhidelimali, (Pan.in. i, 96,vart.)

E e 2
 212 VEEBAL ADJECTIVES. $454-

J 454" In order to form the in

adjective ffst,: tavyah, take the periphrastic
future,and instead of KT td put risq: tavyah.

Thus ^T c?o,
to give ^THT ddtd ^TW^ft ddtdvyah
n gai,to sing TTtfT gdtd TTrf^J gdtavyah gdniyah 'TO ^eyaA
f^Tjz,
to
conquer STcT^K jetavyah *m*f\q:jaya
*".bhu,to be *?ferTT
bhavitd bhavitavyah t bhavaniyah

of kri,to do : kartavyah karantyah : kdryc

/rl,
to grow old

kshvid,to
sweat kshveditd kshveditavyah kshvedaniyah kshvcdyah

budh, to
^J"I know bodhitd H'"MJ bodhitavyah "ft
"Hf^l V*t1**ibodhaniyah

i,to draw

meeze kuchitd P"iri**|:kuchitavyah ^^l"fl"4t

'^i kuchaniyah uchyc
mih, to sprmkle T^T medhd medhavyah

,
to go 'TTfT Crania gantavyah
"nV,to see rashtd drashtavyah darsaniyah
hs, to bite ^FT damshtd damshtavyah " damsaniyah
Caus. ,to

cause to be bhdvayitd bhavaniyah bhdvyah

I^bubhush,
to ^rcfhr. I^T:
wish to be bubhushitd bubhushanfyah bubhushyah

bobhuyitd bobhuyaniyah bobhuyyah

Int.-sft^bobhu ^riH"f"f)^; "nH"qt

bobhavitd bobhavaniyap, bobhavyah

Int. ^fftrir
bebhidy ^i^^rflu:
bebhiditd bebhidaniyah bebhidyah

"455. In order to form the adjectivein ^Trfhj:aniyah, it is generally

sufficient to take the root as it appears before inq: tavyah,omitting,
however,
intermediate instead. Guna-vowels before
^ i, and putting ^"rfa: aniyah
^nl^t aniyah have, of course, the semivowel for their final element, and

there be intermediate The of the

can no occasion for the 3[ i. ^n( ay
causative and the after consonants of intensives and other derivative
^ y

verbs are, as usual, rejected, '^^budh,^tvqfif bodhayati,^tVTfat bodhani-

yah

; f"?"*
bhidy"srftrenr bebhidaniyah.
bebhidyate, "3rf*r"*rffan
" 456. In order to form the adjectivein irt "c.) it
yah (i"jinyat, is

1 2 3
karshtd or krashtd. karshtavyahor krashtavyah. " 456, 3.
4 which have
Never takes Guna (" 345, note),except before terminations or

This termination is
-$ 456- VBKBAL ADJECTIVES. 213

generallysufficient to take the adjectivein ^nffar.aniyah and to cut off

ani. Thus HqHl*T. bhav-am-yah becomes H*n bhavyah; ^rfffffar.

chet-ani-yah,
%W: chetyah; qq"flq: vay-ani-yah,$n: veyah; "f|i|Hl"j:
bodh-ani-yah, ^m:
bodhyah. A few more specialrules, however, have here to be mentioned :

1. Final ^TT a, * e, $ cz, *ft o, become * e. ^T rfd, to give, ^itfdeyah ;

itaai, to sing,*m: geyah. (Pan.in. i, 98; vi. 4, 65.)

2. Final ^i and ^z take Guna, as before vpfaaniya; filji,^W.jeyah,
to

be conquered, different from ^m: jayyafy, conquerable; f% kshi, to

destroy,^^: ksheyah, different from Tspzn kshayyah, destructible (Pan.
vi. i, 81). Final T u and 15 ^, under the same circumstances, are
changed to *r^ avy or, after wsr^r avafya, when a high degree of

necessityis expressed,to ^n^ dv; H*i: bhavyah or ^^^m"": avasya-

bhdvyah ; f^w m^
^friHl viprena "uchind bhdvyam, a Brahman must

be Final 7 u if it appears uv before VMl*J anfya, appears

pure. as
T^
^ before "nya; to sound, 'NHl guvaniya, i^Qguya.
as u
i^gu, ^

3. Final ^ n and ^"r" before *r: ya/t,but not before w"fN: aniyah, take
Vriddhi instead of Guna. wA: kdryah ; trnfc pdryah. (Pan,in. i,

120, 124.)
4. Penultimate ^ ri, which takes Guna before vfiMlq:aniyah, does not take

Guna before ^: yaA, with few exceptions; ^m: vridhyah, "%$m dri"yah
(Pan. in. tf^krip,
i, no).
to do, forms W"T. But
kalpyah; ^(^chrit,to

kill,^5: chartyah (Pan.in. i, no) ; ^vrish, to sprinkle, ^q: vrishyah

or ^q: varshyah (Pan.in. i, 120), Penultimate ^re becomes ^^;
ferity"|i^: kirtyab.
c|7^
5. Penultimate ^e and g'w take Guna before ij: ya/^,as before w?ffan aniyah;

fs^vid,^ivedyah; $fta:soshyafy.
yj^tush,
6. Penultimate ^r a, prosodiallyshort, before m yah, but not before WH*N:

aniyah, is lengthened,unless the final consonant is a labial (Pan. in.

i, 98; 124); ^ has, to laugh, *TRm: hdsyah ; ^ vah, TRH vdhyah.
But $r^ s"jo, to curse, ^"0^ sapyah ; cyK /a6A, c?"i: labhyah. The ^J a

remains likewise short in ^pw: fakyah, from ^a^, to be able ; in

^
*T?T. sahyah, from ^sah, to bear (Pan.in. i, 99),and some other verbs*.

^f^khan forms WTt kheyah (Pan.in. i, in), which, however, may be

derived from ^ khai, to dig ; ^ hant W. vadhyah or Tmq: ghdtyah.

* Panini (in. i, 100) mentions char, 1H if used without

only 1^ gad, T^ mad, ^^ yam,

preposition. The Sarasvati (in. 7, 7) includes among the Sakadi verbs, $T^ s'ak,^ sah,
214: VERBAL ADJECTIVES, " 457-

" 457. The followingare a few derivatives in *tt yah, formed againstthe general rules:
guh, to
3Ji| hide, may form iTS'.guhyah or llt^K gohyah (Pan. in. 1, 109, Kasika);
to cherish,^fmijushyahj ?J^graJi,to take, *l^l grihyah, after TTHT prati and

op*/ ^ vad, to speak, 73TJ udyah, in composition (Pan. in. i, 106; 114.

"Jf*TT brahmodyd kathd, a story told by a Brahman) ; *J,bM, to be, "JIJbhuya, in

composition (Pan. in. i, 107. ^T^ TH* brahmabMyamgatah,"Yr\.ved atBrahmahood) j

^T^sas, to rule, f^T^T*

s'ishyah,
pupil.
We find IT " inserted before *l" f/a$,in analogy to the gerunds in 1 jra, in the following
verbs :

^ i, to go, ^mt ityah; ^ S^M" *" praise,^JW* stwtyah- "3^vri,

to choose, ^WJ vrityah;
c?n, to regard, ^Wt drityah; *[ Z"^ri,to bear, ^m: bhrityahj *" kri,to do, ejfiq:
"""
krityah. But many of these forms are only used in certain senses, and must not be

considered supplanting the regular verbal adjectives.Thus and

as ^TJ guhyah
*fltjn
gohyah both occur ; g^i:duhyah and "ftT?n
dohyah, "c.

" 458. Verbs ending in ^T ch change their final consonant into cF A: 'T ^ if the
or
"^./ or

following 1 ya requiresthe lengtheningof the

(nycit) vowel. "^Spach, Hin"w pdkyamj ^pT
bhuj, to enjoy,"rW bhogyam, but ";ft5*f
bhojyam, what is to be eaten (Pan. vn. 3, 69).
There are, however, several exceptions. Verbs beginningwith a guttural do not admit

the substitution of gutturals. Likewise the following verbs: ^^^fl/,TR^ydch,^T^rMcA,

TR^ pravach, ^^ricJi,m*{tyaj,'%*{puj, ^^vanch(to go).
^H^ aj, '3*{vraj, Thus

Mii^iydjyam, *TRT ydchyam, Xt^T rochyam, n"4 \ "*! pravdchyam, W3? archyam, wirq tydjyam,
(Prakriya-Kaumudi,p. 55 b).

Infinitive
in W turn.

J 459. The infinitive is formed by adding g to", which has no accent.

The base has the same form as before the KT ta of the periphrastic
future,or
before the K*n\ tdvyah of the verbal adjective. "|*rbudh, ^ftfVTJ
bodhitum.

(See J 454.) Ex. ^

^ratf ^affrr krishnam drashtum vrajati,he goes to see

Krishna ; "f "RTc5: bhoktum kdlah,it is time to eat.

Verbal Adverb.

J 460. By means of the unaccentuated suffix ^f am, which, as a general

rule, is added to that form which the verb assumes before the passive^ i

(3rdpers. sing.aor. pass., J 403),a verbal adverb is formed. From

*p^ bhuj,
to eat, *hr bhojam ; from in pd, to drink, irnipdyam. Ex. ^ vfof 33Tfcf

agre bhojam vrajati,having first eaten, he goes. This verbal adverb is most

frequentlyused twice over. Ex. *ThT "rftf

?T"ffiT
bhojam bhojam vrajati,having
eaten and eaten, he goes (Pan.in. 4, 22). It is likewise used at the end of

compounds; %VcfiTt
dvaidhamkdram, having divided ; TincRTt uchchaihkdram,
loudly.
-" 46"- CAUSATIVE VEBBS. 215

CHAPTER XVIII.

CAUSATIVE VERBS.

J 461. Simple roots are changed into causal bases by Guna or Vriddhi
of their radical vowel, and by the addition of a final ^ i. The root is then

treated as followingthe Bhu class,so that ^i appears in the specialtenses as

^Tir ay a. Thus \^bM becomes mfa bhdvi and ^T^Trrif bhdvdyati,he causes to

be ; ^V budh becomes ^fv bodhi and qtaiifribodhdyati,

he causes to know.

The accent is on the a of dya.

" 462. The rules accordingto which the vowel takes either Guna or Vriddhi are as

follows :

1. Final \i and \i,'Su and "31 tf,^ ri and ^ri take Vriddhi.
Thus f*3Hsmi, to laugh,wi"4"*fcismdyayati,he makes laugh.
"ftm, to lead, niMMPn ndyayati,he causes to lead.

^plu,to swim, "i i q "4 fff

pldvayati,he makes swim.

V^bhu,to be, ^m^ffl bhdvayati,he causes to be.

kri,to make, cBK^fn kdrayati,he causes

"8f to make.

kri,to scatter, cFK^frtkdrayati,he causes

cjT to scatter.

2. Medial ^", TM, ^n, ""5" followed by a singleconsonant, take Guna; ^rf becomes

Thus t?fc?,
to know, q^n vedayati,he makes know.

fU budh, to know, "uv*4rn bodhayati,he makes know.

^Tff to cut, ^R"4ifl kartayatiy

A;ri/, he causes to cut.

to be able, "n"4Mfnkalpayati,
JSj^klip, he renders fit.

3. Medial ^T a followed by a singleconsonant is lengthened,but there are many exceptions.

to sit,*u^*ffn
sac?,
TfffJ sddayati,he sets.

,
to fall,^TTHifir
pdtayati,he fells.

Exceptions:
I. Most verbs endingin W^aw do not lengthen their vowel :

^TPTgram,to go, 'i*mfiigamayati, he makes go.

"aW kram, to stride,ai^MPn kramayati,he causes to stride.

Verbs in ^X^am which do lengthen the vowel are,

to desire,4rH^?f kdmayate, he desires; Caus. cFTTTfiTkdmayati, he makes

cli^Jtam,
desire.

^SW am, to move, wiTn amati, he moves ; Caus.

^i*iMPndmayati,he makes move.

^*T cAam, to eat, ^nrfTTchamati,he eats ; Caus. SIH*lfHchdmayati,he makes eat.

,
if it means to see, ^IIWjflT
sdmyati,he sees; Caus. ^n*mf" sdmayati, he shows;
but ^nPjflrr
samayati, he quiets.
,
unless it means to eat, Caus. ""i*iMfiiyamffyaf"*,
Tf^fftyachchhati; he extends;

but *IH*|(Hyamayati, he feeds.

216 CAUSATIVE VERBS. $462-

"TH nam, to bend, optionally

lengthens its vowel if it is used without a preposition
;

*f1*1*4fr ndmayati or "i*f^Pff

namayati, he bends. If preceded by a the
preposition,
vowel always ought to remain short (Dh. P. 19, 67).
^^vam, to vomit, optionallylengthens its vowel if it is used without a preposition;
q"*i"4Pn
vdmayati or ^*T*tfrf
vamayati, he makes vomit. If precededby a preposition,
the vowel always ought to remain short (Dh. P. 19, 67)*.
II. A class of verbs collected by native grammarians, and beginning with ftf ghat (Dh. P.

19, i),do not lengthentheir vowel. The same verbs may optionallyretain their short
vowel in the 3rd pers. sing,aorist of the causative passive(" 405). The followinglist
contains the more important among these verbs :

CAUSATIVE.
Eoot. 3rd Pers. Sing.Pres. Par. 3rd Pers. Sing.Aor. Passive.

1 .
THf ghat ,
to strive ghatayati aghati
2. ^T^T vyath,to fear vyathayati avyathi
'

to be famous
3. Tf^prath, prathayati aprathi

4. mrad,
TEf"2[ to rub mradayati amradi

5. "a^ro;), to pity krapayati akrapi

6. FTC "yar, to hurry tvarayati atvdri

7. W^j^"r,to burn with fever '

jvarayati ajvari
8. "nr nat, to dance natayati

9. to kill
^T*^*rfltfA, srathayati
10. ^prJtMm,to actf pravanayati
11. *3c*jval,to shine "f" prajvalayati or H 1 5e|"I fc^prdjvali

12. W smn, to regret smarayati asmari

13. ? (notto tear)

c?n,to respect, ";""4fa
darayati or ^i. adari

14. ^IT sra, to boil srapayati or ^TOTnJ asrapi

to slay,to please,
15. '^TTjna, to or %i9rftf
ajnapi
sharpen (?),
to perceive

1 6. T^ cAa?,to tremble chalayati or achali

17. T^ mac?, to "c.

rejoice, madayati or amadi

1 8. sound,
"el^c?^aw,to to ring dhvanayati or adhvani

dalayati(optional) adali
19. ^"^ dal,to cut or

20. ^W vaZ, to cover valayati(optional) or avali

21. to drop
Hdc^skhal, skhalayati(optional) or 'iHjaiPco
askhali

22. W^trap, to be ashamed trapayati or ^TGtlPM atrapi

23. "^ kshai,to wane "jM"4flT

kshapayati or ^HJtP'if
akshdpi

*
Dhatupatha 19, 67.
-^ '""riM ^MHI*i5IT^ft)It
"iIT^ .
seems indeed that the verbs without prepositions
only, are mit
optionally (i.e.short-voweled),while with prepositionsthey are mit, and
nothing else. See, however, Colebrooke, Sanskrit Grammar, p. 317, note.

t Without a and
preposition, optionallywith a preposition.See note *.
218 CAUSATIVE VEKBS. " 463-

6. fa chi, to chinoti; Caus. *nnqP7T chdpayati,or

collect,f^nftfif regularly
^rqqPd chdyayati,he causes to collect. (Pan.vi. i, 54.)
7. ^ chho, to cut, "SFlfw
chhyati; Caus. ^m^Prf chhdyayati,
he causes to cut.

8. to be awake, W*tf%jdgarti;
*R*[jdgri, Caus. *wwfajdgarayati, he rouses.

9. -ftr/i,
to conquer, *wfajayati;Caus. vWFtfnjdpayati,
he causes to conquer.

10. ^fr^Tdaridrd,to be poor, daridrdti

^ft^rfrT ; Caus. ^(X.$qfr
daridrayati,
he makes poor.
1 1 . ^hftc?^2, to shine,^hflrf
didhite ; Caus. ^fanifrr he
didhayati, causes to shine.

to sin,g^fff
dushyati; Caus. ^^qfcf
dushayati,he to sin ;
12. "j^dush, causes

also ^faqfif
doshayati,he demoralizes. (Pan.vi. 4, 91.)
to shake, "JrftflT
13. i^dhu, dhunoti ; Caus. VfT^rfwdhunayati,he causes to shake.

14. JJTjoa,to drink, ftRfiff

pibati; Caus. TTTPptrfTT
pdyayati,he causes to drink;
also vpai, tfTOfwpdyati, to be dry.
15. to protect,mfa pdti;
iCTjt?^, Caus. W5*lfTT pdlayati,he protects.
1 6. to love, Tfanfir
iftpri, prindti; Caus. iftTprfif he delights.
prinayati,
1 7. ^R3^bhrajj,to roast, ^J^5rflT ; Caus.
bhrijjati ^r^irflTbhrqjjayati,
he makes

roast, or "TWTfif bharjjayati,

from
gi^ 6Ary.
1 8. tft bhijto fear5f^Hfirbibheti; Caus. "rrT^ bhdpayate or NlquH bhishayate,
he Hl^^lfdbhdyayati. (Pan.vi.
also regularly
frightens; I, 56.)
19. f?Tm^ to throw, fa^Tilminoti, and iftmi, to destroy,PHHlfrimindti, form
their Caus. like *TT m"^.

^o. T:tri, to flow,or to go, ufaffriyate;Caus.\cnrflT

repayati,he makes flow.

2,1. ^ ruh, to grow, T^frrrohati; Caus. "|^qPffrohayati, ft^rfffropayati,

he causes to grow. (Pan.vn. 3, 43.)
22. 3ftU, to adhere,Poifflfif
lindti and ctftawUyate; Caus. oilH H Pd linayati,
and riH^Pri Idyayati;and, if the
Idpayati, root takes the form c5T /a,also
f7Te?niffTM/0y"^(Pan.vii.3539).
The meaning varies ; seePan.vi. 1,48;51.
23. ^T^a, to blow, *%\favdti; Caus. vfi^ ^ PrTvdjayati,
if it means he shakes.

24. "3ft
vz, to obtain,^fk #e^ ; Caus. ^Tq^rfiT
vdpayati or ^nitrfifvdyayati,if it
means to make conceive. (Pan.vi. I, 55.)
25. ^ve, to weave, ^fRvayati; Caus. ^HRfw vdyayati,he causes to weave.

26. ^^t vevitto conceive, ^^^ vevite; Caus. M^nPrf vevayati.

27. ^ vye, to cover, ^^(vyayati; Caus. he
^[T^?(vydyayati, causes to cover.

28. jj^tf/z,
to choose,fjififnvlindti; he causes
Caus.^qqfftvlepayati, to choose.

29. ^ sad, to fall,

^ftrrwsiyate; Caus. ^iri^Pri
$dtayati,he fells ; but not, if
it means to move. (Pan.vn. 3, 42.)
30. $fts"" to sharpen,^irfcf
syati; Caus. ^ll^^Pri
sdyayati,he causes to sharpen.
31. to succeed,"teqfrr
fw^sidh, sidhyati;Caus. Tnwrfifsddhayati,he performs;
but ^hnrfirsedhayati,he performs sacred acts.

32. *f)so, to destroy,^rfr 5y"^; Caus. m^Pd he

sdyayati, causes to destroy.
-$ 466. CAUSATIVE VERBS. 219

sparkle, FJ*f?r
sphurati ; Caus. tuUUlfd sphdrayati and
33. ^pc sphur, to

^Mttmfh sphorayati, he makes sparkle.

34. ^ORnsphdy, to grow, WHTUTT sphdyate; Caus. miiqqfa sphdvayati,he causes

to grow.

35. to smile, w*fb smayate

"fars?tti, ; Caus. WIM^ smdpayate, he astonishes;
also WN^fri smdyayati) he causes a smile by something. (Pan.vi. i, 57.)
36. ^ Arz, to be ashamed, fidjihreti; Caus.
faff! ^Mlfffhrepayati, he makes

ashamed. (Pan. vu. 3, 36.)

37. %Ave, to call,^[^hvayati; Caus. grnHTfo hvdyayati, he causes to call.

38. -^Aa/i, to kill,T$fnhanti; Caus. imnifiT ghdtayati,he causes to kill.

J 464. As causative verbs are conjugated exactly like verbs of the Chur

class, there is no necessityfor giving here a complete paradigm. Like Chur

verbs they retain throughout, except in tfce reduplicated aorist and

^n^ay
the benedictive Parasmaipada ; and they form the perfect periphrastically.
The in
only difficulty causative verbs is the formation of their bases, and the

formation of the aorist. Thus ^ kri, as causative, forms Pres. Par. and Atm.

"ZFUMfrf, kdrayati,-te; Impf. %4"*im^, "J[, akdrayat, -ta;

"7fr, Opt.
kdrayet, -ta ; Imp. cFTC^, "lff,
kdrayatu, -tdm ;
Red. Perf.

kdraydnchakdra, -chakre ($ 342) ; Aor. iH^cfc^, "u ,

achikarat, -ta ; Fut.

uifd, "T^, kdrayishyati,-te; Cond. ^obKf"Mm, "^, akdrayishyat, -ta;

Per. Fut. ^Rfqril kdrayitd; Ben. wtfft\kdrydt
; "*!Ml? kdrayishishta.
J 465. If a causative verb has to be used in the passive,^m ay is dropt (J399),
but the root remains the it would have been with Hence Pres.
same as
^n^ay.
ohliVfr
kdryate,he is made to do ; Clmrt ropy ate, from CT ruh, he is made to

grow. The imperfect,optative,and imperative are formed regularly. The

perfectis periphrasticwith the auxiliaryverbs in the Atmanepada.

J 466. In the general tenses, however, where the n ya of the passive
disappears ($401),the causative
^n^ ay may or may not reappear, and we

thus get two forms throughout (seeColebrooke, p. 198, note):

Fut. ^mfrut bhdvayishye or mfV^ bhdvishye.
Cond. iHmcjfijuJi
abhdvayishye or ^HHifVuj abhdvishye.

Per. Fut. HNfrdlf! bhdvayitdhe or Hlf^ril^

bhdvitdhe.

Ben. MHfrtflJI bhdvayishiya or Mrf^mln bhdvishiya.

p. ^MHfufa
First Aor. 1. 1. abhdvayishi or ^MtfVf^ abhdvishi.

2. p. ^WNfuai: abhdvayishthdh or ^wif^8T: abhdvishthdh.

3. p. ^Wli^ abhdvi.
220 DESIDERATIVE VERBS. " 467-

CHAPTER XIX.

DESIDERATIVE VERBS.

$ 467. Desiderative bases are formed by reduplication,

the peculiarities

of which will have to be treated and

separately, by adding ^ s to the root.

Thus from ^bh49 to be, ^^ bubhush, to wish to be. The accent is on the

syllable.
reduplicative
" 468. These new bases are conjugatedlike Tud roots. ^J^TTfo
bubhu-

shdmiy "gij^fa bubhushati, yj]TO: bubhushdvah,"c.

^"]tflT
bubhtishasi,
$ 469. The roots which take the intermediate ^ i have been given before
("33 Iy 34") as *
we^ as those which take intermediate ^ i. Thus from f%^ vid,
to know, fefef^rvividish,to wish to know ; from TT tri,to cross, finrfT!^
titarish

or to wish
firRfcttitartsh, to cross.

" 470. As a generalrule,though liable to exceptions,

it may be stated that bases ending
in one consonant be strengthened by Guna, if they take the intermediate ^ i. Thus
may
^V budh forms ^r"nfvflPil
bubodhishati u^ ; div,!^P*f*lPiT
didevishati: kri,
"|r also

chikarishati; ^dri, f^fc^flT didarishati. But fa^bhid,Des. f^ftTf^rfk

bibhitsati (Pan. i.

2, 10); 3J? guh, *J"3^frf

jughukshati (Pan. vii. 2, 12). In fact, no Guna without mediate
inter-

?[i"
" 471. But there are important exceptions. In many cases the base of the desiderative

is neither strengthenednor ^^f^^fw rurudishati. Other bases may

weakened ; ^ rud,

be ; lp^ dyut, f^jfrf^fi

strengthenedoptionally didyutishate f^rftflf^TI
didyotishate. or

Certain bases which do not take intermediate ^i are actuallyweakened ;

1. Verbs which do not take Guna, though they have intermediate ^ i.

*$"ritdjto cry, l^jft^frt

rurudishati j T3i$vid,to know, n^Ni^MuTvividishatij*|^mush,
to steal,^rnHfn mumushisJiati. (Pan. i. 2, 8.)

2. Verbs which may or may not take Guna, though they have intermediate 3[*.
Verbs beginningwith consonants, and ending in any singleconsonant, except TI y or
^ v,

and having 3[i or "3"u for their vowel. (Pan. i. 2, 26.)

^(^dyutf didyutishate f^ftfw^Icf

Pt^Prmfl didyotishate. or

But f^ div, r^r"mflf

didevishati or, without^^5^ ^ *, dudyushati(Pan. vii. 2, 49);
f^fiT^TIvivartishate
l^rrif, or fe"JNirrt
vivritsati.

3. Verbs ending in ^i or ^T w, not taking intermediate ^[i,lengthen their vowel; final ^[ ri

and ^ri become t^ir,and, after labials,"3ft ur. (Pan. vi. 4, 16.)
f*{ji, to conquer, Mt'iT^nr jigishati;
^ yu, to mix, ^^HiTlyuyushati.
"fkri,to do, P^iqi^rnchikirshati "
IT tri,to cross, (anl^Ta titirshati.

^ mri,to die, *J*J^nTmumurshatij "^pri,to fill,

*J^*ni pupurshatL
If,however, they take intermediate 3{i,they likewise take Guna.

f^Rsmi,to smile,ftrwftRW sismayishate ^pu, to purify,

fcT^fciUrt
pipavishate; to
t^gri, j

swallow, f*fl[ri^ff[jigarishatij
~"dri,to respect,f^U^ln didarishate.
-
472. DESIDERATIVE VERB" 221

4. *1*{gam,to go, as a substitute for ^", to go, and f^Aan, to kill,lengthentheir vowel
before the ^s of the desiderative.
(Pan. vi. 4, 16.)

IT^yam, ^rfvfn'iitirt
adhijigdmsate,
he wishes to read ; but ftflftncfir
jigami$hati,he
wishes to go.

T^han, f"iMI* fri

jighdmsati,he wishes to kill.

5. 71^ tan, to stretch,lengthensits vowel optionally.(Pan. v. 4, 17.)

fii
"fl^tftn, cii^fcr
titdrhsati or fflrtUfHI
titariisati;but also rrtrtfHMfil
titanishati. (Pan.

vn. 2,49, vart.)

6. ^H^san, to obtain,drops its *^n and lengthens the vowel before the ^* of the desiderative.

(Pan. vi. 4, 42.)

TO^san, ftisi " Pn sishdsati; but (VmfnMfn sisanishati.

7. ?T^3TaA,
to take, 1"{svap, to sleep,and Hi^racAA,to ask, shorten their bases by
Samprasarana. (Pan. I. 2, 8.)

#raA, flT^TKjflT
3"T^ jsgrAfifoAalt. tjjjtifii
*3TR.sca/", sushupsati.
frnjf^a^fif
TX?^prachh, piprichchhishati.

8. The followingverbs shorten their vowel to ^ " before the ^* of the desiderative,
insert

J{t(Pan. vn. 4, 54),and reject

the reduplication.

*ftrni (HTHlfci
mindti,to destroy,and fatitfif
mino/t, to throw), Des. ("miTm mitsati.

m md (TlflT
wia^',to measure, r*i"ilri
mimite,to measure, TTrf mayate, to change),Des.

farwfii
mitsati,l"irwn mitsate.

^ da (^rfk rfarfa^',
to give, c^w, Dh. P. 25, 9, Dh.
rfrfw, P. 22, 32; Iffifc?ya/",
to cut,

do,Dh. P. 26, 39 ; but not ^Tfac?a/",

to cut, dap, Dh. P. 24, 51, because
it is not ghu,

cf. " 392; ^ITfr

day ate, to pity,den, Dh. P. 22, 66), Des. f"{
rW frt f"Jcfhl
ditsati, ditsate.

VT c?A"f (^Vlfir
dadhdti,to place,Vlflfdhayati,to driuk),Des. fVrofn dhitsati.

9. Other desideratives formed without reduplication

:

,
to Des.
begin (T"Trtra""ate), f^Hin ripsate.

,
to take Des.
(77HTTlabhate), fcoti n lipsate.

,
to be able (^T^tflT sakyati),Des. ^151^ sikshati.
saknoti,^r^fif

to fall Des. far" frf

(Wfil^fl^^), pifsa*i.
to go Des. Psro
(T"XH padyate), n pitsate.
to obtain (-*n"flfK Des. ^tifn
dpnoti), (psa/i.

,
to command ^ Prt
(siJIM jnapayati),Des. sflnffn
jfttpsati.
to grow (^flftfff Des. ^rSfrf
ridhnoti), frfsart.
,

,
to deceive dhtpsati fVr^rfk
dabhnoti),Des. vfHrfiT
(^ftft dhipsati. or

,
to free munchati),Des. H^Hfdmokshate
(*J^flT or ^g"|rimumukshate, he wishes

for freedom.
spiritual
to finish (THflfK Des. nfd Oli^fd prati-ritsati,
rddhyati), in the sense of injuring
,

(Pan. vii. otherwise ful r" fd rirdtsati (not f^w Pn riritsati).

4, 54, vart.),

considered belong to the Bhu class are

" 472. Certain verbs which are commonly to

reallydesiderative bases.

it,fafchrHrt he
chikitsate, cures. ^ gup, jugupsate,he despises.
'$*l**M
he bears.
titikshate, Tlt^ man, HlHltlHmimdihsate, he investigates.
222 DESIDERATIVE VERBS. " 473-

^^ badh, "^WTT he loathes.

bibhatsate, ^\^(ddn,^^THn diddmsate,he straightens.
sisdmsate,he sharpens.

Reduplicationin Desideratives.

" 473. Besides the generalrules of given in " 302-319*,

reduplication
the followingspecialrules with regard to the vowel of the reduplicative
syllable
are to be observed in forming the desiderative base :

Radical ^r a and ^n d are representedby ^ i in the reduplicative

syllable
(Pan.vn. 4, 79).
fri
if^pach, films;pipakshati; ^qr sthd, PriKiuPff
tishthdsati.

" 474. ^B^ av and ^TT^dv, standing as Guna or Vriddhi of radical ^ u or "SRw, are

represented
by 5[ " in the providedthey be precededby ^
reduplicativesyllable, p, TR ph,
m, Hy, Tr, ""Z,^t",^j (Pan. vn. 4, 80).

f*l"l(lf
fq"n*r (Red. Aor.
pipdvayishati, "l lflIH i^apipavat.}See " 375.
mrimfri bibhdvayishati,
(Red. Aor. ^nrfaRT^
abibhavat.)

3 yw, "ftnrf^
1 Pn yiyavishati,
and Caus. Desid. *4 1 q f*"
f"f H fif
yiydvayishati.

*"ju,fnni "i P*tq HrjijdvayisJiati,

(Red. Aor. ^^il"i "m^ ajijavat.)
But "5WM, ^j"iIq PqH (n nundvayishati,(Red. Aor. "** See " 375 f.
"j^i"n^antfna0a".)
" 475. Roots f^sru,
to flow, ^"ru,to hear, "grfrw, to approach, "plu,
to run, T"pru, to

swim, ^g cAyw, to fall,

may under similar circumstances take ^
optionally * or T u in the

reduplicative
syllable.
nfrisisrdvayishati
or tjtsmfVHrfi ; but
susrdvayishati the simpledesidera-
tive

^Jt^n susrushati only.

,
the Caus. of ^{svap, forms ^J^TtrfirqfTf
sushvdpayishati.

J 476. Roots beginning with a vowel have a peculiarkind of internal

reduplication,
to which allusion was made in $ 378. Thus (Pan.vi. I, 2)
forms ^f^T5T+ ^fila"is + ishati.

at forms + 5[^fTT
^rfr^ "/^ + ishati.

aA;5A forms ^rf%^ + ^ft achiksh + ishati.

uchchh forms ^fc-cd 4- ^^fll

uchichchh + ishati.

" 477. If the root ends in a double consonant, the firstletter of which is "^w,^d, or ^
then the second letter is reduplicated.

^T^arch, ^nK^^n archich-ishati. "^ und, ^(^r^Hfn

undid-ishati.

o*j\ ubj, " 1*11*1*1111 ubjij-ishati.

In "^Hrs%the last consonant is reduplicated.
Pnirshyiy-ishati or $/Hifi^fii (Pan.
irshyish-ishati. vi. 1, 3, vart.)

In the verbs beginningwith cn^fi Jcanduyati(" 498) the final ^y is reduplicated.

CBSU kanduy, ""^T^fVrMHPcl
kanduyiy-ishati.

*
Exceptionalreduplication occurs in MciiHn besides
chikishati, ^fsin chichishati,
from "N chi (Pan. vu. 3, 58) ; in f^TEThrfTf
jigUshatifrom fi?M (Pan. vn. 3, 56),"c.
~$ 481. INTENSIVE VERBS. 223

CHAPTER XX.

INTENSIVE VERBS.

{ 478. Intensive,or, as they are sometimes called,frequentative

bases

are meant to convey an intenseness or frequentrepetition

of the action

expressedby the simple verb. Simple verbs, expressiveof motion, times

some-

receive the idea of tortuous motion, if used as intensives. Some

intensive bases convey the idea of "c.

reproach or disgrace,
$ 479. Only bases beginning with a consonant, and consistingof one

syllable,
are liable to be turned into intensive bases. Verbs of the Chur
class cannot be changed into intensive verbs. There are, however, some

exceptions. Thus ^T7 at, to go, though beginning with a vowel, forms

he wanders
vui"k|H aldtyate, about ; TO{ a", to eat, VH^ll^ a"dsyate; ^ rt,

to go, "enj 5^ ardryateand 1wrfir

ararti (Siddh.-Kaum.
vol. u. p. 2 16); ifl^
tfrnu,
to cover, **uT"JM^
drnonuyate(Pan.in. i, 22).
$ 480. There are two ways of forming intensive verbs :

1. By a and
peculiarreduplication adding *i yd at the end. This yd has

the accent.

2. By the same peculiarreduplication

without any modification in the final

portionof the base. The latter form occurs less frequently. It has

the accent on the reduplicative

syllable.
Bases formed in the former way admit of Atmanepadaonly.
Ex. ^^J5Tff
v$J)hu} bobhuydte.
Bases formed in the latter way admit of Parasmaipadaonly,though,according
to some grammarians, the Atmanepadaalso may be formed.

Ex. v^bhu, qflHcTird

bobhaviti or 'ql^fribobhoti.
The Atmanepadawould be *ft*J7T
bobhute.

Roots ending in vowels retain the TJ ya of the intensive base in the general
tenses ; roots ending in consonants drop it. Hence ^fojifaiTT
bobhuyitd,
but '-Hto^faHT
sosuchitd. (Pan.vi.4, 49.)
$ 481. When Hya is added, the effect on the base is generallythe same

as in the passive and benedictive Par. ($389). Thus final vowels are

lengthened: fq chi, gather,^rvflu^chechiyate

to ; ^J 6ru, to hear, sft^d
"o"ruyate. ^TT d is changed to \i : VT dhd, to place,^frqrrdedhiyate. ^ ri
becomes $$.ir,
or, after ^i^iir:
labials, W tri,to cross, tetiryate;^prit
TTiTfinr
to tfl^5d
fill, poptiryate. Final ^ ri, however, when following a simple
consonant, is changed to tf rt, not to ft ri : ^ kri,to do, MdHqii chekriyate.
When followinga double consonant it is changed to we ar: m srtiri^
to
224: INTENSIVE VERBS. " 483-

remember, jTimffii
sdsmaryate. These intensive bases are conjugated like
bases of the Div class in the Atmanepada. It should be observed,however,
that in the general tenses roots ending in vowels retain ^ y before the

in off the of
intermediate ^ i, while roots ending consonants throw *r ya
the specialtenses altogether.Thus from ^J?I bobhuya, ^tJjftnrT
bobhu-y-itd;
from bebhidya,^rfaf^iTT
^rfozx bebhiditd.

" 482. When T^ya is not added, the intensive bases are treated like bases

of the Hu class. The rules of reduplication

are the same. Observe, however,
that verbs with final or penultimate^j ri have peculiarforms of their own

($489,
490),and verbs in ^ri start from a base in ar, and therefore have
^
^TT" in the reduplicative tCTjar,cTTTTf*
syllable.J^tri, tdtarmi; 3rd pers. plur.
tdtirati.
IfTfirtfiT
" 483. Accordingto the rules of the Hu class,the weak terminations require
Guna ($297). Hence from ^twtfvr bobodhmi;
ift^^bobudh, but ^fawr: bo-
budhmah. From ^^ bobhu, sftoftfa
bobhomi, TTfwfrr bobhavdni ; but ^t^t
bobhumah. Remark, however, that in 1.2. 3. p. sing.Pres.,2. 3. p. sing.
Impf.,3. p. sing.Imp. \i may be inserted
optionally :

T^ftfl bobodhmi or ^t^ftfo

bobudhimi; ^TtfH bobhomi or ^t*f=flfH
bobhavimi.

And remark further,that before this intermediate ^ i, and likewise before

weak terminations beginning with a vowel, intensive bases ending in sonants

con-

do not take Guna (Pan.vii. 3, 87). Hence ^tyftfabobudhimi,

"^fanJrfVl
bobudhdni, ^{"sfl^^
abobudham. From f%^vid,
PRESENT. IMPERFECT. IMPERATIVE.

or

vevedmi or vevidimi avevidam veviddni

^iw or Tf^tfq ^T^?^ or ^nf%^t: %f^fe
vevetsi or vevidishi avevet or avevidih veviddhi

^%fw or ^f%c(tfir ^T^Ti^^P"|"(lf^

or ^T^ or

vevetti or veviditi avevet or avevidit vevettu or veviditu

^"f^TJvevidvahy "c. ^TTfol1 avevidva ^fc|^|'c(

veviddva

Rules of Reduplication
for Intensives.

f 484. The simplestway to form the is

of intensives,
reduplication
peculiar
to take the base used in the general tenses, to change it into a passivebase
by adding IT ya, then to reduplicate,
according to the generalrules of cation,
redupli-
and lastly,
to raise,where the
possible, vowel of the reduplicative
syllable
by Guna (Pan.vii. 4, 82),and ^{ a to ^TT d (Pan.vn. 4, 83).
fq chi, to gather,^ffarchiya,^^NNrffchechiyate;^%fw checheti.

to abuse, ^[qkrusya,'^Tsfiifft
chokru"yate;^sffaitffc
chokroshti.

trauk, to approach, ^R traukya,TTt^l^dtotraukyate; ff^^ftj

totraukti.
226 INTENSIVE VERBS. " 490-

ending in ^J if used in the Parasmaipada.(Pan.

" 490. The same appliesto roots n,

vii. 4, 92-)
krij ^TTtfiTcha r kariti. ^%fS charkarti.

cha ri kariti. ^ft^ffffcharikarti.

cha ri kariti. ^Tfarft charikarti.
bases peculiarin the formation of their base *.
" 491. A few frequentative are

^P^ svap, to soshupyate; but ttKflPxsdsvapti.

sleep,"hf^*trf (Pan. vi. 1, 19.)
syam, to sound, ^?Ptu-Mnsesimyate;but ^T^TTff samsyanti.

vye, to cover, veviyate;but qi"qiPfl

q"fl*lrt vdvydti- or (" 483) "n*tPnvdvyeti.
T vus, to desire,
'"IN^n vdvasyate; m^Ps vdvashti. (Pan. vi. i, 20.)

,
to regard,^NftiW cheUyate; M*Pn cheketi. (Pan.vi. i, 21.)

,
^fi^jMgrfytife;
to grow, m*MiPn_p^py^". (Pan. i, 29.) vi.

sw, to swell,31)94*1*1}
sosuyate sesmyate; ^nSfflT
^i*yl*4n sesveti. (Pan.
or vi. i, 30.)
A"n, to kill,^Jll-M^
jeghniyate;^TZfajanghanti.
(Pan. vii. 4, 30, vart.)

,
to jeghriyate;ll"iPnjdghrdti.(Pan. vn.
smell, %TTta7T 4, 31.)

,
to blow, ^TWT^lTff
dedhmiyate; ^TWnfff
dddhmdti. (Pan. vii. 4, 31.)
to swallow, ff jegilyate WT^TfS
^HTtiiM jdgarti.(Pan. ; vm. 2, 20.)

,
to lie down, ^H^^Mri sdsayyate; ^t^rfrf
seseti. (Pan. vii. 4, 22.)

$ 492. From derivative verbs new derivatives may be formed, most o1

which, however, are rather the creation of grammarians^than the property

of the spoken language. Thus from HH^Pri bhdvayati,the causal of ^ bM,
he causes to be, a new desiderative is derived, f^HHf^MPlT he
bibhdvayishati,
wishes to cause existence. So from the intensive ^jrnr bobhuyate, he
exists really,is formed ^jfrRfiTbobhuyishati,he wishes to exist really;
then a new causative may be formed, ^^pimrPrf he causes
bobhuyishayati, a

wish to exist really

; and again a new ^jfj-mP^fabobhuyisha-
desiderative,
yishati,he wishes to excite the desire of real existence.

* The formation and conjugationof the Intensive in the Parasmaipada, or the so-called

Charkarita, have given rise to a great deal of discussion among native grammarians.
Accordingto their theory "T^yah, the sign of the Intensive Atmanepada, has to be pressed
sup-

by cj^iluk. By this suppressionthe changes produced in the verbal base by Tj^yaii

would cease (Pan.i. i, 63),except certain changes which are considered as Anangakarya,
phangesnot affecting
the base, such as reduplication.Changes of the root that are to take

placenot only in the Intens. Atm., but also in the Intens. Par., are mentioned
distinctly by
Panini, vii. 4, 82-92. About other changes, not extended
directly to the Intens. Par.,
grammarians differ. Thus the Prakriya-Kaumudiforms *flHlPNsoshopti,
because Pan. vi.

i, 19, prescribes
TFnjpfiT
soshupyate;other authorities form only UUjlPHsdsvapti
sdsvapiti.Colebrooke allows wfff cheketi (p.332),because Pan. vi. i, 21, prescribes
and
chekiyate, the commentary argues in favour of ^fflT cheketi. But Colebrooke (p.321)
declines to form ^rfiffi
sesinte"because it is in the Atm. only that Pan. vi. i, 19, allows
*lPtf"ffl
sesimyate. Whether the Perfect should be periphrastic
or reduplicatedis likewise

a moot point among grammarians ; some forming "sffa^facKTC

bobhavdnchakdra,others
bobhuva,others ^TT^ bobhdva.
-" 496' DENOMINATIVE VERBS. 227

CHAPTER XXI.

DENOMINATIVE VERBS.

" 493. There are many verbs in Sanskrit which are derived
clearly from

nominal bases*,and which have

generally the meaning of behaving like,or
treating some one like,or wishingfor or doing whatever is expressedby the

noun. Thus from ^TR h/ena,hawk, we have 3*H"*M syendydte,he behaves

like a hawk ; from ^ putra, son, yflWrtputriydti,he treats some one like
a son, or he wishes for a son. Some denominatives are formed without any
derivative syllable.Thus from ifm krishnd,;"*nfif he behaves
krishndti, like

Krishna ; from f^pitri,

father,fmnfn pitdrati,he behaves like a father.
These denominative verbs,however,cannot be formed at and
pleasure; many
even of those which would be sanctioned by the rules of native grammarians,
are of rare occurrence in the national literatureof India. These verbs should
therefore be looked for in the rather
dictionary than in a A few
grammar.
rules,
however,on their formation and generalmeaning,may here be given.

Denominatives in ^ ya, Parasmaipada.

" 494. By adding ^ yd to the base of a noun, denominatives are formed

expressinga wish. From iftgo, cow, Jnqfirgavyati,he wishes for cows.

These verbs might be called nominal and they never

desideratives, a
govern
new accusative.

J 495. By addingthe same Hya, denominatives are formed one's

expressing
lookingupon or somethinglike
treating the subjectexpressedby the noun.

Thus from "^fputra, son, fsntf

ijcfhrfa putriyatisishyam,he treats the pupillike
a son. By a similar process imrr^W?f from mn^prdsdda, palace,
prdsddiyati,
means to behave as if one were in a palace; HHU^I^frfffigjf
firer:prdsddiyati

kutydm bhikshuh,the beggarlives in his hut as if it were a palace.

" 496. Before this H ya,

I. Final ^T a and ^TT d are changedto \i;*pTTsutd,daughter,^Jdl^PH he

surfyati, wishes
for a daughter t-
t and ^u lengthened;rfftpati,
are master, McflMfflpattyatiyhe treats like a master;

kavi,poet, "FV)*l fit he wishes to be a poet.

kaviyati,

*
They are called in Sanskrit fc5"{
lidhu,from fc^T linga,it is said,a crude sound, and

^ dhu, for *TfiJ

dhdtu,root. (Carey,Grammar, p. 543.)
t Minute distinctions are made between ^^"^hrfff he
asaniyati, wishes to eat at the proper

time,and ~4i^|11 *fif! asandyati,he is ravenouslyhungry;between "J^ "nTMiff udakiyati,

he wishes

for water, and ^ ^ ^ fri

udanyati,
he starves and craves for water; bet ween V"1l"lffi
dhandyati,he
is greedyfor wealth,and V"ffafHdhaniyati,
he asks for some money. (Pan. vii. 4, 34.)
G g 2
 228 DENOMINATIVE YERBS. " 497-

3. ^ri becomes ^ rt,^fto becomes *"^av, T au becomes ^TT^Tay; father,

f^pitri,
he
pitriyati, treats like a father; "TT waw, ship,^TRlflf
ndvyati,he wishes

for a ship.
is dropt,and other final consonants remain unchanged; "J"f"^rdjan,king,
4. Final "T n

^1 "flJjfrf he treats
rdjiyati, a man like a king; nm^payas, milk, MM^fK payasyati,
he wishes for milk ; ^^vdch, speech,^T^Tfcfvdchyati(Pan. i. 4, 15); "i"it^namas,
worship, "fHmfiT
namasyati,he worships (Pan. in. i, 19).

Denominatives in if ya, Atmanepada.

$497. A second class of denominatives, formed by adding T* yd, has

the meaning of behaving like,or becoming like,or actuallydoing what is

expressedby the noun. They differ from the preceding class by generally
followingthe Atmanepada*,
and by a difference in the modification of the

final letters of the nominal base. Thus

1. Final ^r a is lengthened; ^frfsyena, hawk, $7)r(m7i he

syendyate, behaves

like a hawk ; $T^ sabda, sound, ^i"^|"Mrisabddyate,he makes a sound,

he sounds ; bhrisa,much,
*jpjr bhrisdyate,he
vpfrnfir becomes much ;

OFF kashta, mischief, oFFnTff kashtdyate, he plots; tfoHr romantha,

ruminating,dH"ITilrfromanthdyate, he ruminates. The final ^ i of

feminine bases is generallydropt, and the masculine base taken

instead; ^pT^t kwndri, girl,'$HKl4ri kumdrdyate,

he behaves like a

girl.(Pan.vi. 3, 36"41.)
2, and 3. Final ^ i and T u, ^ ri,^rt o, ^ au are treated as in J 496 ; ^f%
"uchi}pure, "SJ^t^ he
suchiyate, becomes pure.

4. Final 5^n is dropt,and the precedingvowel islengthened; TTJf^ rdjan,

king, '"M|i|ri rdjdyate,he behaves like a king; ^'fcH^ ushman, heat,
"f"4^THW ushmdyate, it sends out heat.

Some nominal bases in ^s and i(t may, others must (Pan.in. i, n) be

treated like nominal bases in ^j a. Hence from vidvas, wise,

(Vg1^
vidvasyateor Pc|^||i|7i
vidvdyate,he behaves like a wise man ; from

milk, "MU^W payasyate or xnTFTW paydyate, it becomes milk ; from

apsaras, xsmi^i^H apsardyate,she behaves like an Apsaras ; from ^TT brihat,

great, ^^|i|Hbrihdyate,he becomes great. (Pan. in. i, 12.)
" 498. Some verbs are classed together by native grammarians as Kandvadi's, i. e.
beginningwith Kandu. They take *T ya, both in Parasmaipadaand Atmanepada, and keep
it through the generaltenses under the restrictions applying to other denominatives in Tya
(" 501). Nouns ending in ^T a drop it before "*Tya. Thus from ^TT^ agada, free from

* both
Those that may take Parasmaipada and Atmanepada are said to be formed by
^T^ kyash, the rest by ^T^ kyan. Thus from c^tf^W red, c5Vf^rrr^flf
lohita, "fl lohitdyati or

or -te, he becomes red. (Pan. in. i, 13.)

-$ 502. DENOMINATIVE VERBS. 229

illness,vf'itirt aaadyati,he is free from illness ; from *pl sukha, pleasure,*pwftf

sukhyati,
he givespleasure; from W" kandu, scratching,"H|MPn
or "n kanduyatior -te,he scratches.

Denominatives in ^ sya.

" 499. Certain denominative verbs,which express a wish, take ^T sya instead of 1 ya.

Thus from kshira,milk, JSil^t^fn

T5|fa kshirasyati,
the child longs for milk ; from "4*"Q

lavana,salt,wsKUt^fn lavanasyati,
he desires salt. Likewise WH4 fulfill
ascasyati,the mare

longs for the horse ; "jm^fd the

vrishasyati, cow longs for the bull (Pan. vn. i, 52). Some

authorities admit ^HT sya and ^TO asya, in the sense of extreme desire,after all nominal

bases. Thus from *PJmadhu, honey,H^t" Pnmadhusyati or TScHmflTmadhvasyati,he longs

for honey.
Denominatives in "ni**j kamya.
" 500. It is usual to form desiderative verbs by compounding a nominal base with

4IWJ kdmya, a denominative from VR kdma, love. Thus ^"a "* i*"" Pn putrakdmyati,he has
the wish Put. I P*-q
n i putrakdmyitd. Here the
for a son ; "j"a ""
^y, it is said, is not liable

to be dropt. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 222.)

$501. The denominatives in ^ ya are conjugatedlike verbs of the Bhu

class in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada.Pres. y dim ft putriydmi,Impf.

putriydni,Opt. "J^Hnc
aputriyam, Imp. ^l^rrfin putriyeyam. Pres.
kyendye,Impf. 4J$i|HHJ asyendye, Imp. ^Hltj Syenayai, Opt.
fyendyeya. In the generaltenses the base is ^f\\putriyor ^Hl^
but when the denominative is preceded by consonant,
^ y a
TJy may or
may not be dropt in the generaltenses (Pan.vi. 4, 50). Hence, Per. Perf.
putriydmdsa ("325, 3),Aor. xH^lfMM aputriyisham, Fut.
Per.
putriyishydmi, Fut. g^ftinputriyitd,
Ben. ^iMIfi
putriydsam.
From ^nin"S Syendyate,Per. Perf. ^HI^IHI^Ityendydmdsa,Aor.
Fut. ^JHlfrtMsyendyishye,
a"yendyishiy "c.

From samidh, fuel,^TfJTvrfiT

^f?T^ samidhyati,he wishes for fuel ; Per. Fut.

samidhyitdor ^rfJTfVnn
samidhitd,"c. (Pan.vi. 4, 50).

Denominatives in WT aya.

" 502. Some denominative verbs are formed by adding ^SR aya to certain nominal bases.

They generallyexpress the act implied by the nominal base. They may be looked as
upon
verbs of the Chur class. They are conjugatedin the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada, some

in the Atmanepada only. They retain in the general tenses under the limitations
^H^ay
that apply to verbs of the Chur class and causatives (viz.benedictive Par., reduplicated
"c.)5and
aorist, their radical vowels are modified accordingto the rules applying to the

verbs of the Chur class (" 296,4).

Thus from ^TT^Tpdsa,fetter,r^m^iMrnvipdsayati,
he unties; from w*{varman, armour,

he
sathvarmayati, arms, (thefinal "^n being dropt); from ^Smunda,
shaven,

mundayati, he shaves ; from ^P^ sabda, sound, ^i^MPns'abdayati,

he makes

a sound (Dhatupatha 33, 40); from mixed, fii^^fnmisrayati,he

fifW mis'ra, mixes

(Pan. m. i, 21; 25).

230 PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES. " 503 "

Some of these verbs are always Atmanepada. Thus from Tp$ puchchha, tail,
utpuchchkayate,he lifts up the tail (Pan. in. i, 20).
is to be added to nouns formed by the secondaryaffixes*H(mat,^l(vat,
vin, these affixes must be dropt. From tsrf'q^
sragvin,having garlands,
srajayati.
If ^HT aya is added to feminine bases,they are generallyreplaced by the corresponding
masculine base. From T^ffisyeni(" 247),white, 3"4imfn he
syetayati, makes her

white (Pan. vi. 3, 36).

Certain adjectiveswhich change their base before ^" ishtha of the do the
superlative,
same before ^HT aya. ijgmridu, soft, ^*tPn mradayati,he softens ; g^ dura, far,
^cf^fcf
davayati,he removes.

Some nominal bases take ^T^PT dpaya. Thus from WiQ satya,true, ^KMiMMirr satydpayati,
he speaks truly;from ^TO artha, sense, WinnTfr he explains.
arthdpayati,

Denominatives without any Affix.

" 503. According to some authorities every nominal base may be turned into a

denominative verb by adding the ordinaryverbal terminations of the First Division, and

treatingthe base like a verbal base of the Bhu class. ^T a is added to the base, except
where it exists alreadyas the final of the nominal base ; other final and medial vowels take

Guna, where possible,

as in the Bhu class.

Thus from^Wt krishna, effHUfH he behaves

Jcrishnati, like Krishna; from 5RT?ST maid,

*Uc*5lflT
garland, Aor.
mdldti,it is like a garland,Impf. vi*iic5if^ama/a",
amdldsit; from kavi, poet, cRTPrfff
olffe kavayati,he behaves like a poet ; from f^ vi,
bird,^rfffvayati,he flies like a bird ; from pitri,father, PMn ^.fn
fxnj pitarati,he is

like a father ; from TT"f^ rdjan, king,TT"TRflfrdjdnati,

he is like a king (Pan. vi.
4, 15)-

CHAPTER XXII.

PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES.

" 504. The following

prepositions
may be joinedwith verbs,and are then

called Upasarga in Sanskrit (Pan.i. 4, 58"61 ; " 148).

^rfcfati, beyond, ^rfv adhi, over (sometimesfv dhi). ^Tcjanu, after.

^5itj apa, off. ^srftj

api, upon (sometimesft pi), ^rfa abhi, towards.
down (sometimes^va). d, near
'Siw ava, W( to.
T^ ud, up. ^TJ upa,

next, below, g: duh, ill. fVrni, into,downwards, fa: nih, without.

"q^ para, back, away, tjftpari, around, if pra, before. Trfif
prati,
back. f% vi,apart. ^ sam, together. ^ "w, well. They all have the

uddtta on the first except ^rfa abhi.

syllable
J 505. Certain adverbs,called Gati in Sanskrit,a term also
applicable to the

Upasargas(Pan.i. 4, 60),may be prefixed, to certain verbs,

like prepositions,

particularly to be, ^R(as, to be,

to *^bhu, ofkri,to do, and i\p{gam,to go.
-$ 5"7' PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES. 231

achchha ; e. g. fUMIfl achchhagatya,havingapproached($445);

achchhodya, having addressed, ^nj: adah ; e. g. ^:^?l adahkritya,
having done it thus, e.g. ^wftW antaritya,having passed
vrir^antar;
between. ^J?* alam; e. g. ^ic^T1'
olaAkfilya9having ornamented.

^TCcr astam; e. g. Wfei'lflastahgatya, having gone to rest, having

set. ^nfa: dvih; e. g. wfa"|jl
dvirbMya, having appeared, fin::tirafy;
e. g. fir^pjtirobhuya, having disappeared, ip: purafy; e. g.

puraskritya,having placed before ($89, II. i). TRgiprdduh;

e.g.

prddurbhuya,having become manifest. and

*n^ sat ^nn^ asat, when
expressingregard or contempt ; e. g. Wtir^HJ asatkritya,having dis-
regarded.

Uiqif^sdkshdt; e. g. Ul"J!r"sjit"J having made

sdkshdtkritya,
known. Words like suklt,in SJ^l^d
^raft havingmade
suklikritya, white.

(Here the final ^r a ofyr$"ukla is changed to ^ i. Sometimes, but rarely,

final ^BT a or ^TT d is changed to ^n d. Final ^ i and TM are lengthened;
^ ri is changed to "ftri; final lG{an and "W^as are changed to ^1;
e. TT"ri^[rw
g. having made
rdjikritya, king.) Words like iit^ urt, in

*^"jw urikrityay
having assented. Words like imitative
TQRl(khdtt of

sound ; e. khdtkritya,having made

g. i"fir"j"7T khdt, the sound produced
in clearingone's throat.

" 506. Several of the mentioned

prepositions in J 503 are also used with

nouns, and are then said to govern certain cases. They are then called Kar-

mapravachaniya, and they frequentlyfollow the noun which is governedby

them (Pan. i. 4, 83).
The accusative is governed by ^rfirati,beyond; ^rfa abhi, towards;

part, around; ufiff

prati, against;^rg anu, after; ^q upa, upon. Ex.

t govindam ati ne"varah, Is'vara is not beyond Govinda; "

haram prati haldhalam, venom was for Hara ; (4 UMH H ^ d vishnu-

is
manvarchyate, he worshipped after Vishnu ; ^T*J^ft^Ut anu harim surah,
the gods are less than Hari.

The ablative is governedby Tfflf

prati, Tjftpart, ^rcr apat ^rr d- Ex. H%:
U^iT bhakteh praty amritam, immortalityin return for faith; wr d
Jpffc
t.mtyoh,until death; ^R f^TTW^ft ^ ^: apa vrishto devah, it
trigartebhyo
has rained away from Trigarta,or f^TTW: pari trigartebhyah,round
xrft;
Trigarta,
without touchingTrigarta.
The locative is governedby TQupa and ^rfvadhi. Ex. ITT fH^fi4IMIMIU vpa
nishke Mrshdpanam, a Karshapana is more than a Nishka ;
adhi panchdleshu brahmadattah, Brahmadatta over the Pafichalas.
governs
" 507. There are many other adverbs in Sanskrit, some of which may
here be mentioned.

i. The accusative of adjectives

in the neuter be used as an adverb.
may
232 PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES. " 507-

Thus from ^: mandah, slow, ^ $% mandam mandam, slowly,slowly;

^fftrttghram, quickly; g^fdhruvam, truly.
2. Certain compounds, ending like accusatives of neuters, are used bially,
adver-

such as TreT^rfli
yathdsakti,accordingto one's power. For

these see the rules on composition.

3. Adverbs of place:
^rTT antar, within, with loc. and gen. ; between, with ace. WO antard,
between, with ace. SHiTOl antarena, between,with ace.; without,with
ace. WKTi^ drat, far off,with abl. ^fff: vahih,outside,with abl. UH'41
samayd, near, with ace. f^T"F^Tnikashd, near, with ace. Tqft.upari,

above, over, with ace. and gen. "5rih

uchchaih, high,or loud, tft^h
nichaih, low. ^iv: adhah, below,with gen. and abl. ^re: avah, below,
with gen, fro tirah,across, with ace. or loc. ^ iha, here. t(rTpurd,
before. W^samaksham, ^^^(sdkshdt,in the presence. '3"R\^(sakdsdt,
from. ijTSpurah, before,with gen. ^RT amd, ^r^T sachd, *nofT sdkam,
^WT with instr. ^r5T7r:
samd, ^TTV sdrdham, together, abhitah, on all sides,
with ace. 'WTrf: ubhayatah,on both sides,with ace. iwwn^samantdt,
from all sides, gt duram, far,with ace., and
abl., gen. ^rfrTcjf
antikam,
near, with ace., abl.,and gen. ridhak, 1^"* prithak,apart.
"ty\)ch

4. Adverbs of time :

nidi, prdtar,early, ^rnf say f^T diva,by day. -*Hj"|i|

am, ahndya,
at eve.

by day. ^fardoshd, by night. Tfiinaktam, by night. T^T ushd, early.

g7?^ yugapad, at the same time, ^nr adya, to-day. "?r:%"A, yesterday.
^f?r:purvedyuh, yesterday. ^: JvaA, to-morrow, ^glfk paredyavi,
to-morrow. Tzfto^
jyok, long, fqt chiram, "Nr^Tchirena, f^TTR chirdya,
chirdt,fro*T chirasya,long.
fgTTT^ *Hlt^sandt, ^Rl^ sanat,
^RT *awa,
perpetually, ^it "r"m, quickly. -51%:
sanaih, slowly. ^j?r: sadyah, at
once. TOffw samprati,now. 15^j9wwar, gj: muhuh, ^: bhuyah, ^rt
vdram, again, ^r^ sakrit,once. "gtTjowm, formerly. ^ purvam,
before. -gK"urdhvam, after, ^n^ sapadi,immediately. iren^a^M^,
with abl.
after, *rnj./a/w, time, ever,
once upon a ^npn adhund, now.

^inT iddnim, now. ^T 5ac?a, ^mi santatam, ^ifVf^anisam, always.

^Tc5 a/am, enough, with dat. or instr.

5. Adverbs of circumstance :

ipn mrishd, fi^in mithyd, falsely.*nTTojrmandk, |ifi^

^^"/, a little, rranflf
tushnim, quietly. *pn vrz//"a,yn mudhd, in vain. *nfa 5am^, half.
^^TWTTf akasmdt, unexpectedly, -^fsjupdm"u, in a whisper, firo
mithah, together. m*r: pray ah, frequently,
almost, ^nfhr ativa,exceed-
ingly,

cirrtkdmam, aft^josham, gladly, -ei^^ avasyam, certainly.

234 COMPOUND WORDS. " 511-

the sign of the feminine gender in the priorelements of compound

"511. Sometimes a

be retained. This the

is chiefly case when the feminine is treated as an appellative,
may
and would lose its distinctive meaning by losing the feminine suffix :

kalydnimdtd,the mother of a beautiful daughter (Pan. vi. 3, 34); ^*T: kathibhdryah,

Kathi for one's wife (Pan. 41). If the feminine forms predicate,
having a vi. 3, a mere

it generallyloses its feminine suffix ; TjffrR"Tr"t

sobhanabhdryap,having a beautiful wife

(Pan.vi. 3, 34 ; 42).
The phoneticrules to be observed are those of external Sandhi with certain modifications,

as explainedin " 24 seq.*

$ 512. Compound words might have been divided into substantival,

and
adjectival, adverbial. Thus words like Hrg^J: tatpurushah,his man,

blue
"ftcSfaranllotpalam, lotus, f^n^ dvigavam, two oxen, ^rir"pjjft
agni-
dhumau, fire and smoke, might have been classed as substantival ; ^"aH^:
bahuvrihih,possessingmuch rice,as an and
adjectival; iWltyfffi
yathasakti,
accordingto one's strength,
as an adverbial compound.
Native grammarians,however, have adopted a different of
principle sion,
divi-

classingall compounds under six different heads, under the names of

Tatpurusha,Karmadhdraya, Dvigu, Dvandva} Bahuvrihi,and Avyayibhdva.

I. Tatpurusha is a compound in which the last word is determined by the

precedingwords, for instance,Wr^^J tat-purushah,his man, or

rdja-purushah,king'sman.
As a generalterm the Tatpurusha compound comprehends the two

subdivisions of Karmadhdraya (Ib) and Dvigu (I c). The Karmadha-

raya is in fact a Tatpurusha compound, in which the last word is

determined by a e. g. Tfcyfajcfc
precedingadjective, ntlotpalam,blue lotus

The component words, if dissolved,would stand in the same case,

whereas in other Tatpurushas the precedingword is governed by

last,the man of the king,or fire-wood, i.e. wood for fire.

The Dvigu again may be called a subdivision of the Karmadharaya,

being a compound in which the first word is not an in general,
adjective
but alwaysa numeral : figFR dvigavam,two oxen, or fg^j:
dvigufy,
bought
for two oxen.

*
Occasionally
bases ending in a long vowel shorten it,and bases ending in a short

vowel lengthen it in the middle of a compound; 3"("kudaka,water, ^TT^pdda, foot,

.hridaya,
heart, frequentlysubstitute the bases Tf^pad,and ""
T^ udci),
"Z^udan (i.e. hrid.

^t*T:hridrogah,heart-disease, ^^TCto:hridayarogah. (Pan. or vi. 3, 51-60.)

The particle"^ ku, which is intended to express contempt, as ^WTSr^TJkubrdhmanah,
a bad Brahman, substitutes cfftlkad in a determinative compound before words beginning
with consonants : ^r^5Jkadushtrah,a bad camel. The same takes place before T^f ratha,
^ vada, and trina
TJJJT : ^i^^J kadrathah, a bad kattrinam, a
carriage; "*^UI bad kind of

grass. The same is

particle changed to WT kd before ^f^pathin and ^TCf aksha:
kdpathaJi,
and optionally
before ^jTC purusha. (Pan. vi.
3, 101-107.)
-" 513- COMPOUND WORDS. 235

These three classes of compounds may be comprehended under the

generalname of Determinative Compounds,while the Karmadharaya (Ib)

may be distinguished
as appositional
determinatives,
the Dvigu (Ic) as

numeral determinatives.
II. The next class,called Dvandva, consists of compounds in which two words

are the compound takingeither

simplyjoinedtogether, the terminations

of the dual or plural,

accordingto the number of compounded nouns,

or the terminations of the being treated

singular, as a collective term :

^rfr"njfll
agni-dhumau,fire and smoke ; fasa-kusa-paldsdh,
3T$r$3IMr4l$u:
nom. plur.masc. three kinds ofplants,or sasa-kusa-paldsam,
3l$l$3IMc4l3l
nom. sing.neut. They will be called Collective Compounds.

III. The next called

class, Bahuvrihi by native grammarians,comprisescom-
pounds

which are used as adjectives.The notion expressedby the last

word, and which may be determined,forms

variously the of
predicate some

other subject.They may be called Possessive Compounds. Thus

bahu-vrthih,possessedof much rice,scil.^^K desak,country ;

rupavad-bhdryah,possessing a handsome wife,scil.4.1*n rdjd,king.

Determinative compounds may be turned into possessive
compounds,
sometimes without any change, except that of accent, sometimes by
slightchanges in the last word.

The compounds, like

genderof possessive that of conforms
adjectives,
to the gender of the substantives to which they belong.
IV. The last class,called Avyayibhdva,is formed by joiningan indeclinable

with
particle another word. The resultingcompound, in which the

indeclinable alwaysforms
particle the first element, is againindeclinable,
and ends,
generally like adverbs, in the ordinaryterminations of the

nom. or ace. neut. : adhi-stri,for

^rfvfi^f woman, as in

adhistri household
grihakdrydni, duties are for women. They may
be called Adverbial Compounds.

I. Determinative Compounds.
" 513. This class (Tatpurusha)
comprehendscompounds in which generally
the last word governs the precedingone. The last word may be a substantive

or a participle
or an if capableof governinga
adjective, noun.

i. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Accusative:

^Wfw: krishna-frritah,
m. f. n. gone to Krishna, dependent on Krishna,
instead of ^stfftnr: krishnam sritah. duhkha-atitafy,
|:*flrf1d: m. f. n.

having overcome pain,instead of duhkham

JtlsWdld: atitah. "nUfl'"ji

varsha-bhogyahym. f. n. to be enjoyed a year long. JjlHJirff:grdma-

prdptah,m. f. n. having reached the instead

village, of ?jn}UTH: grdmam
H h 2
236 COMPOUND WORDS. " 513-

prdptah : it is more usual, however, to say MlvtiflH: prdptagrdmah

(Pan.ii. 4). Similarlyare formed determinatives by means of

2,
adverbs or such
prepositions, as ^fjrflftL
atigiri,
past the hill,used as

an adverb, or as an '^frffnfX:
adjective, ultramontane
atigirih, ; ^rfaj|^
abhimukham, "c.
facing,
2. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Instrumental :

; dhdnya-arthah,m. wealth (arthaK)

(acquired)
by grain (dhdnyena).
: sankuld-khandah,m. a piece(khandah)
(cut)by nippers(sanku-
ddtra-chchhinnah,m.
Idbhih}.^l^f-gJTC f. n. cut (chhinnah)
by a knife

(ddtrena). hari-trdtah,
^ft^Trf: m. f.n. protected(trdtaJi)by Hari. ^^w:
deva-dattah,given(dattah)by the gods (devaili),
or as a proper name with

the supposed auspicioussense, may the gods give him (Dieu-donne).

fxj^nr:
pitri-samah,m. f. n. like the father,i. e. pitrd samah. ^frl!*^:
nakha-nirbhinnah9 m. f.n. cut asunder (nirbhinnaJi)
by the nails (nakhaih).
visva-updsyah,m. f. n. to be worshipped by all.
svayam-kritah,m. f. n. done by oneself.
Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Dative :

IM^UV yupa-ddru,n. wood (ddru)for a sacrificial stake (ytipdyd).

iftf^TT:
go-
hitah,m.f.n.good (hitaJi)
for cows (gobhyah).(V*H":dvija-arthah,
m.f.n.

object(arthd),
i.e. intended for Brahmans. Determinative compounds,
when treated possessive,
as take the terminations of the masc., fern.,and

neut. ; e. g. finrr^TT
*RT*r: dvijdrthd yavdguh,fern, gruel for Brahmans.
Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Ablative :

chora-bhayam,n. fear (bhayam)arisingfrom thieves (chorebhyah).

r: svarga-patitah,
m. f.n. fallen from heaven. ^TJJJW: apa-grdmah,
m. f. n. gone from the village.
5. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Genitive :

TTTJ^: tat-purushah,
m. his man, instead of tasya,of him, purushah, the man*.

TTafJ^: rdja-purushah,
m. the king'sman, instead of rdjnah,of the king,
purushah, the man. tT5TH^" rdja-sakhah,m. the king'sfriend. In these

is changed to
compounds sakhi, friend, sakhah. cgHcRK:kumbha-kdrah, a

maker (kdrah)of pots (kumbhdndm) .

jft^nr
go-satam, a hundred of cows.

6. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Locative :

*J"Uj"U:
aksha-saundah, m. f. n. devoted to dice. TCfa": uro-jah,m. f. n.

produced on the breast.

* Most words in of this kind.

ending "Jtri or "R ka are not allowed to form compounds
Hence ^TT^T ^TrTT katasya kartd, maker of a mat, not o^oF'STkatakartd; $TT H^T purdm
bhettd, breaker of towns. There are, however, many such
exceptions, as ^""l"lu deva-

pujakah,worshipper of the gods, "c.

 COMPOUND WORDS. 237

" 514. Certain Tatpurusha compounds retain the case-terminations in the governed
noun.

done
T: sahasd-kritah, suddenly(Pan. vi. 3, 3). riiw"tlH": the
dlmand-shashtha/i,
sixth with oneself (Pan. vi. 3, 6). swm; parasmai-padam,a word for the sake of

another, i.e. the transitive form of verbs

(Pan. vi.3, 7,8). $ *4"lgJf krichchhrdl-
labdham, obtained with difficulty.
^SHp*}^'svasuh-putrah,sister's son (Pan. vi. 3,
23). (^eitHCri: lord of heaven.
dioas-patih, qi^rMPn; vdchas-patih,
lord of speech.
l devdndm-priyaJi,beloved of the gods, a goat, an ignorant person.

t learned
gehe-panditah, at home, i.e. where no one can contradict him.

khecharah,moving in the air. tKJVui!sarasi-jah,

born in a pond, water-lily.
touching the heart.
hridi-spris, jfvf^TJ
yudhishthirah,firm in battle,
a proper name (Pan. vi. 3, 9).
" 515. To this class a number of compounds are referred in which the governing
"element is supposed to take the firstplace. Ex. purva-kdyah,the fore-partof the
^[5"bi"";
body, i. e. the fore-body; ^5"lcf!
purva-rdtrah,the first part of the night, i.e. the fore-
night ; JJ^iK rdjadantah,the king of teeth,lit.the king-teeth,i.e. the fore-teeth (Pan. n.
2, i). They would better be looked upon as Karmadharayas; cf. " 517.
" 516. If the second part of a determinative compound is a verbal base,no change takes
placein bases ending in consonants or long vowels, except that diphthongs, as usual, are
changed to ^\d. Hence *Tc$g^jalamuch, water-dropping,
i. e. a cloud; tftHMIsoma-pdt
Soma-drinking, nom. sing,^ffam: somapdh (" 239).
Bases endingin short vowels take
generally a final
J(JtPq*a f"ii(visvajit,
: all-conquering,
from ftfj'i,
to conquer. Other suffixes used for the same purpose are ^T a, ^tn, "c.

I b. AppositionalDeterminative Compounds.
J 517. These compounds (Karmadharaya)
form a subdivision of the deter-
minative

compounds (Tatpurusha).In them the first portionstands as the

predicateof the second portion,such as in black-beetle^

sky-blue,"c.
The followingare some instances of appositional
compounds :

nila-utpalam,
neut. the blue lotus. m,H IrH I parama-dtmd, masc. the

supreme spirit.3llomiPlH;
sdka-pdrthivah,masc. a Saka-king,explained
as a king such as the Sakas would like,not as the king of the Sakas.

SHUd: sarva-rdtrah,masc. the whole night,from sarva, whole, and

is changed
rdtrih,night. Rdtrih,fern., to rdtra; cf. ^trra:
purva-rdtrafy,
masc. the fore-night;*T"lTra: madhya-rdtrah, masc. midnight; yiwu^:
punya-rdtrah,masc. a holy night. i^TTW dvi-rdtram, neut. a
space of

two nights,is a numeral compound (Dvigu). H^Kl"T. mahd-rdjah,masc.

a great king. In these compounds *nr?T inahat, great, always becomes
JT^TwaM (Pan.vi. 3, 46), and {W*{rdjan9king, Tf*fi rajah; as

parama-rdjah, a supreme king : but 4}{j*Usu-rdjd,

a good king,
kimrdjd,a bad king (Pan.v. 4, 69, 70). f!m"4i: priya-sakhah, masc.

a dear friend. *T% sakhi is changed to ?re: sakhah. ^THT^: parama-ahah,

masc. the highestday. In these compounds ^5^ ahan, day, becomes
238 COMPOUND WORDS. " 518-

^Tjf aha; cf. drHl^t uttamdhah, the last day. Sometimes ^r ahna is

substituted for ^^ ahan; ^tr^: purvdhnah, the fore-QOon.

f^^:
Jcu-purushah, masc. a bad man, or cfirg^: kdpurushah,.TTT^T^:pra-
dchdryah, masc. a teacher,i. e.
hereditary one who has been a teacher

before
(dchdryd) or formerly(pro). -*\d\$(W. a-brdhmanah, masc. a non-

Brahman, i.e. not a Brahman. ^T"TO an-asvah,masc. a non-horse, i.e.not

a horse. ^nT^iTW ghana-sydmah,m.f. n. cloud-black,from ghana, cloud,
and sydma, black. ^frXRcS:ishat-pihgalah,m. f. n. a little brown,

from and pingala, brown.

ishat,a little, srrfo^fT:
sdmi-kritah,m. f.n.

half-done,from sdmi, half,and krita,done.

" 518. In some appositionalcompounds, the word

qualifying is placed last.
vipragaurah,a white Brahman; TT^TTVtt rdjddhamah, the lowest king; H^if^ro bharata-

the
freshthah, best Bharata ; ^v^CTTn purusha-vydglirah,
a tiger-likeman, a great man ;

t a prime cow.
govrindarakah,

I c. Numeral Determinative Compounds.

$ 519. Determinative compounds, the first portionof which is a numeral,

are called Dvigu. The numeral is always the predicateof the noun which

follows. They are generallyneuters, or feminines,and are meant to express

aggregates,but they may also form adjectives,

thus becoming possessive
compounds, with or without secondarysuffixes.
If an aggregate compound is formed, final ^r a is changed to ^ i, fern.,or in

some cases to ^ am, neut. Final ^r^ an and ^n d are changed to ^z or ^ am.

Tfarrepancha-gavam, neut. an aggregate of five cows, from panchan, five,

and go, cow. iftgo(inan aggregate compound) is changed to imgava

(Pan.u. i, 23),and tftnau to TTR ndva. tNg: pancha-guh, as an

worth
adjective, five cows (Pan.v. 4, 92). flg^fb
dvinauh, bought for

two ships. ST^cS1 dvy-ahgulam,neut. what has the measure of two

from
fingers, dvi, two, and angulih,finger;final i being changed to a.

"gr^:dvy-ahah,masc. a space of two days ; ahan changed to ahah (Pan.n.

i, 23). ^GRTTTc^: pancha-kapdlah,m. f. n. an offering(puroddsah)
made in a dish with five compartments, from panchan, five,and
kapdlam} neut. (Pan.n. i, 51, 52; iv. i, 88). f"^c5J"*l
tri-loM,fern.
the three worlds : here the Dvigu compound takes the fern, termination

to express an aggregate (Pan.iv. i, 21). f^J^f tri-bhuvanam,neut. the

three worlds : here the Dvigu compound takes the neuter termination.

dasa-kumdri,fern, an
"^$l$HlO assemblageof ten youths, "^fn chatur-

yugam, neut. the four ages.

" 520. The followingrules applyto the changesof the final in

syllables determinative

compounds. Very few of them are generalas requiring

a change without any regardto the
-J 520. COMPOUND WORDS. 239

precedingwords in the compound. The generalrules are given first,

afterwards the more

while
special, rules for the formation of one singlecompound are left out, such compounds
being within the sphere of a rather than
dictionary of a grammar.

1. ^^richt verse, ^pur, town, VT^ap, water, ^ dhur, charge, vfal^pathin,

path,add
final ^ a (Pan. v. 4, 74); "WM1^: ardharchah, a half-verse. This is optional with
nfa"\pathin
after the negative^a; XIM"I aputham or vfai: apanthdJi.
2. king, xi^aAan, day,*rfe sakhi, friend, become
"j*i"\nf)'an, THT rdja,^J^ aha, *Rf

sukha; H^KIH* mahdrdjah. (Pan. v. 4, 91.)

3. 7T^ wr0s, if it means chief, becomes TT^I urasa; Vinftuiascorasam, an excellent

horse (Pan. v. 4, 93). Likewise after TTf?T/"r"/i,

if the locative is expressed; HrfJM"
pratyurasam, on the chest (Pan. v. 4, 82).
4. isf\5f
erArsAt,
eye, becomes ^HSf aksha, if it ceases to mean eye. 'i"fiQftgavdkshah, a
window ; but j^f5J*tlifK|
brdhmandkshi,the eye of a Brahman. (Pan. v. 4, 76.)
5. ^frft^anas,
cart, TOS*^ a*m"w" stone, ^m^ ayas, iron,^TO^sffras,
lake, take final ^f a

if the compound expresses a kind or forms a name. "nicoi"4"f kdldyasam,black-iron;

but sadayah, a pieceof good
*i^"*J iron. (Pan. v. 4, 94.)
6. ""H"\ brahman becomes WCf brahma, if preceded by the name of a country ; *}"jgtf":
surdshtrabrahmah, a Brahman of Surashtra (Pan. v. 4, 104). After ^ ku and TffT

mahd that substitution is optional(Pan. v. 4, 105).

7. n"j"^ takshan takes final ^T a after ?JTH ardma and "FT7 kauta; yrdmatakshaJi,
141*1(1*3*
villagecarpenter. (Pan.v. 4, 95.)
8. iJJ^/tfan,
dog,takes final ^Ta after ^fnT ati,and after certain words, not the names of

animals, with which it is compared ; ^JlafiH^I* dkarshasvah,a dog of a die,a bad

throw (?). (Pan. v. 4, 97.)

adhvan
9. ^Tl"n^ becomes ^TUI adhva after prepositions
; TO*!* prddhrah. (Pan. v. 4, 85.)
and hair, become ^T*T sdma and /owia after Unf
10. *U"1"^sdman, hymn, cOm*^ loman, rtl*i

pro^",^Tg anw, and ^T aray *j^rt\"t*

anulomaJt, regular; ^T"Jo5ta
anulomam, adv.

with the hair or grain,i.e. (Pan.

regularly. v. 4, 75.)
11.
fTP^tamasbecomes !T*TO tamasa after ^T^ a?;a, TTsam, and ^V andha; ^""in*i*i andha-

tamasam, blind darkness. (Pan. v. 4, 79.)

12. H?^ raAas becomes T^TT rahasa after ^"^ anu, ^8ft ava, and 1TR lapta; ^J^T^Tt
(Pan. v.
anurahasah, solitary. 4, 81.)
13. "^^varchas becomes M^H varchasa after *^( brahma and fH^TAasf/;""q^t* brahma-

varchasam, the power of a Brahman. (Pan. v. 4, 78.)

14. 'ft^o
becomes *T3gava, except at the end of an Dvigu.
adjectival M'S'iq panchagavam,
five cows ; but "lt^Jt
ponchaguh, bought for five cows. (Pan. v. 4, 92.)
15. "ft
nau, ship,becomes TTO ndva,if it forms a numerical aggregate; ^^ni^panchandvam,
five ships: not when it forms a numerical ; s^ntt
adjective panchanauh, worth five

ships. (Pan.v. 4, 99.)

16. "n nau, ship, after ^IV ardha, becomes "^mndva; ^T^TT^ ardhandcam, half a ship.
(Pan.v. 4, 100.)
17. ^P^khdrt,a measure of grain,becomes ^tTZkhara as an aggregate; PS"s i "- drikhdram :

also after ^ ardha; ^I^lt ardhakhdram. (Pan.v. 4, 101.)

18. ^"ffc5anjali,
a handful,after f^ dvi or f^ tri,may, as an aggregate,take final ^ a;

dvyafijalain
or si^ltadryarijali,two handfuls. (Pan. v. 4, 102.)
240 COMPOUND WORDS. " 521-

19. ^bjfc5fl%w/i,
finger,after numerals and indeclinables,becomes *Te3 ahgula;

dvyahgulam, a length of two fingers.(Pan. v. 4, 86.)

20. UlVvjsakthi,thigh,becomes "QW*l saktha after "Z^^uttara, iplmriga, and *$"purva;

^N optf
purvasaktham. (Pan. v.
U 4, 98.)
21. night, after "*f%sarra,
^rf^ra^ri, after partitivewords, after ti"?Min sankhydta,
punya, likewise after numerals and indeclinables,becomes TTc? rdtra; ^fW^T^ft sarva-

rdtrah, the whole night; ^^TT^I the

purvardtrah, fore-night;VST'Ucf
dvirdtram,two
nights. (Pan.v. 4, 87.)
22. ^C%*[ahan,day,under the same circumstances, becomes ^1^ aAwa; 4HI^$! sarvdhnah

the whole day : but not after a numeral when it expresses an aggregate; 3R"* dvyahah
two days. Except also ^'^H^punydham, a good day,and JJoFI^
ekdham, n. and m

a singleday. (Pan.y. 4, 88-90.)

II. Collective Compounds.

" 521. Collective compounds (Dvandva)are divided into two classes. The

first class ^tftrR

(called comprisescompounds
itaretara) in which two or more

words, that would be

naturally connected by and, are united, the last taking
the terminations either of the dual or the plural,accordingto the number

of words formingthe compound. The second class (called

MHI^K samdhdra

comprisesthe same kind of compounds but formed into neuter nouns in the

singular. ^frt'y!
hasty-asvau, an elephantand a horse,is an instance of the

former, ^WS[ hastyasvam, the elephantsand horses (inan army),an instance

of the latter class. Likewise ujll sukla-krishnau,white

91 "fioh and black :
4 *

gavdsvam, a cow and a horse.

If instead of a horse and an elephant,^f^yjihastyasvau,the intention

is to express horses and the compound

elephants, takes the terminations of

the plural,
^4-KJHji:hastyasvdh.

" 522. SQme rules are given as to which words should stand first in a Dvandva pound.
com-

Words with fewer should

syllables stand first : (Vqon^nisiva-kesavau,S'iva and
Kes'ava;not W^r^ftfT^T
kesavasivau. Words beginning with a vowel and ending in ^? a should

stand first: "!lt

$"(ep fs'aand
isa-krishnau, Krishna. Words ending in ^ i (gen.Ut eh) and
"3" u (gen.^uJ o#) should stand first: *?fenCThari-harau, Hari and Kara ; also

the
bhoktri-bhogyau, enjoyerand the enjoyed. Lastly,words of greaterimportance should
have precedence: "^^m the god
deva-daityau, and the demon ; cns("J.i5ir"a"ii
brdhmana-

kshatriyau,
a Brahman and a Kshatriya; TTrTlftniTr
mdtd-pitarau,mother and father,but
in earlier Sanskrit 04 rRl*f father and
IriTT pitard-mdtard, mother. (Pan. vi. 3, 33.)
" 523- Words ending in ^J ri, expressiveof relationship,
or sacred titles,forming the
first member of a compound, and being followed by another word ending in ^ ri,or by
putra, son, change their ^J ri into W d 25). TTiJmdtn-\- f^fff
(Pan. vi. 3, pitriform
T mdtdpitarau,
father and mother; pitri+1gW putra form f"4riIyytpitdputrauj
"faj
potri^orm ^^T^^Tfj hotdpotdrau,
fil the Hotri and Potri priests.
" 524. When the names of certain deities are compounded, the first sometimes lengthens
its final vowel (Pan. vi. 3, 26). Thus fry N ^H(!mitrdvarunau, Mitra and Varuna;
agmshomau, Agni and Soma. Similar irregularities
appear in words like
242 COMPOUND WOKDS. " 529-

3. head, substitutes
Igfi^murdhan, final ^T a after "% dm and ffctrij %^VJ dvimurdhah,
having two heads. (Pan.v. 4, 115.)
4. ojta^/omaw,
hair,substitutes final ^T a after ^TcT^antar and ^f^tvahih; ^iic5i"t!
antar-

lomah,having the hairy part inside. (Pan. v. 4, 117.)

5. Hir"H"*lwasz7;a,
nose, becomes "^^nasa, if it stands at the end of a name ; *nntt! gonasah,
cow-nosed, i. e. a snake; but not after *?$" sthula; "^cO"llftloK
sthiila-ndsikah,

large-nosed,i.e. a hog. The same change takes place after prepositions;

unnasah, with a prominent nose. (Pan. v.
4, 118, 119.)
6. After ^ ", g: duh, or tf su, f?fc3kali,furrow, and tffflrq
sakthi,thigh,may substitute

final ^a; ^T^cSt ahalah or ^("cotahalih. (Pan. v. 4, 121.)

7. After the same particles,
JHU pro/a, progeny, and HVTmec?Aa, mind, are treated like

nouns ending in ^H(asj g^ITt

durmedhdh. (Pan. v. 4, 122.)
8. VT dharma, law, preceded by one word, is treated like a noun ending in
kalydnadharmd. (Pan. v. 4, 124.)
9. ifaljambhd,
jaw, after certain words, becomes ^^TTsujambhd.
'^fo^jambhanj
10. SfHJ./awM,
knee, after Tlpra and IT 5aw, becomes ^Jnw^ U3J prajnuh(Pan. v. 4, 129).
This is optionalafter ttkurdhva (Pan. v. 4, 130).
11. *3\W(udhas,
udder, becomes "3W^ w^aw ; ^$nftkundodhni. (Pan. V. 4, 131.)
V^[ dhanus, bow, becomes ^^^dhanvan; pushpadhanvd,having bow of
12.
^TV^T a

flowers (Pan. v. 4, 132). In names this is optional.

13. iRRljdyd,wife, becomes iHfajdni;^JH^TTf^TJ
subhajdnih. (Pan. v. 4, 134.)
14. *TV gandha, smell, substitutes $rawS/M
*tfVf after certain words; ^nfvtsugandhih.(Pan.
v- 4" 135-1370

15. ^l^pdda, foot,becomes after

""n^^ac? certain words; "=qi"Mi^ (Pan. v.
vydgJirapdd. 4,

138-140.)
^

16. "fiT
danta, tooth, becomes ^c?a# after many words; flT^dwe/an, having two teeth,

(signof a certain age) ; fern, fk^cft

d vidati. (Pan. 4, 141-145.) v.

kakuda, hump, becomes after certain words and in certain

'"h^^kakud senses

ajdtakakudja young bull before his humps have grown. (Pan. v.

i46-i48.)X
1 8. '3T^ uras and other words belongingto the same class add final ^i kaj

vyudhoraskah,broad-chested. (Pan. v. 4, 151.)

19. Words in ^t'n add final cR"a ih the feminine; ^^iHcM bahusvdmikd, having many

masters, from Wffo*{svdmin, master. (Pan. v. 4, 152.)

20. Feminine words in ^",like ^T^ nadi, and words in ^J ri,add final ^ ka;

bahukumdrikah, having many maidens; ^J"roBJbahubhartrikah, having many

husbands. (Pan. v. 4, 153.)

21. Most other words may or not add final cfi"a; "N$*i Ic4 "*u bahumdlakah
may
bahumdldkah or bahumdlah.
^Jittc*: (Pan. v. 4, 154.)

IV. Adverbial Compounds.

$ 539. Adverbial or indeclinable compounds (Avyayibhava)
are formed by
joining an indeclinable particlewith another word. The resultingcom-
pounds,

in which the indeclinable particleforms always the first element,

are again indeclinable,and generallyend, like adverbs, in the ordinary.

terminations of the nom. or ace. neut.
-J 531. COMPOUND WORDS. 243

Examples : vifij^fi:
adhi-hari,upon Hari, instead of *ftf f adhi harau,
loc. sing, ^froj Vishnu, anu~vishnu, after instead of ^Tejfaujj
anu

vishnum, ace. sing. 3M"J"uuupa-krishnam, near to Krishna. fVrtfgpii

nir-makshikam, free from flies, flylessly.^ffff^Hati-himam, past the
winter, after the winter, instead of ^HlT f^f ati himam, ace. sing.
M^fKJilJ
pradakshinam, to the right. Vfrj^q anu-rdpam,after the form,

i.e. instead
accordingly, of OTJ ^q anu rupam9 ace. sing, 'Jjvji^ifa
yathd-
Sakti,accordingto one's instead
ability, of ^if^vjibaktir yathd. inptt
sa-trinam with the grass; ugmtjfe
satrinam atti,he eats (everything)
even the grass, instead of ipg*i^ trinena saha,with the grass, ^N^l*
ydvach-chhlokam, at every verse, amukti, until
^rr^f^i final delivery.
vicjJNi
anu-gahgam, near the Ganga. TT^TC]^
upa-saradam,near the

autumn; from ^TO sarad, autumn (Pan.v. 4, 107). "5M^i^*upa-jarasam,

at the approachof old age ; from old
iRQjaras, age (J167). 4MHPH^M/?a-
samit or "5MHPH^ upa-samidham, near the fire-wood ; from *rfir^
samidh,
fire-wood. ^m"T upa-rajam, near the king.
king; from tr*F{rdjan,
" 530. There are some Avyayibhavasthe first element of which is not an indeclinable

particle.Ex. fn8"tishthad-gu,at the time when the cows stand to be milked ; M'S'i'i

at the
pancha-gahgam, place where the five Gaiigasmeet, (near the Madhav-rao ghat at
Benares); McM'^m pratyag-grdmam, west of the village.
" 531. The followingrules apply to the changes of the final in
syllables adverbial

compounds :
1. Words endingin mutes chh,j,jh, t,th"dy dh, t, th, d, dh,p, ph, b, bh)
(k,kh, g, gh, cji,
may or may not take final *8a; ITRTfW upasamidham or zwfal^upasamit, near

the fire-wood. (Pan. v. 4, in.)

2. Words endingin ^^an substitute final ^B?a; ^"rnT adhydtmam, with regardto self.
one-

(Pan. v. 4, 108.)
3. But neuters in ^f^an may or
may not; ^M^H upacharmam or ^"'H upacharma, near
the skin.(Pan. v. 4, 109.)
4. "T"^nadf, *il"5*il4ll ^iiiisi^"u1
paurnamdsi, dgrahdyani,and mR^irt may or
may not

take final ^ "; ^mf^ upanadi or "im^ upanadam, near the river. (Pan. v. 4, no,

and 112.)
final ^
5. Words belongingto the class beginningwith STC^sarad take a ; 3*431 45

upasaradam,about autumn. (Pan. v. 4, 107.)

1 l
 APPENDIX I.

DHATUPATHA OR LIST OF VERBS.

Explanation of some of the Verbal Anubandhas or Indicatory Letters.

^T a is put at the end of roots ending in a consonant in order to facilitate

their pronunciation.
Accent. " The last letter of a root is accented with the acute, the grave, or

circumflex accent, in order to show that the verb follows the Parasmai-

pada, the Atmanepada, or both forms.

The roots themselves are divided into uddtta, acutely accented, and anuddtta,

gravely accented, the former admitting, the latter rejecting the mediate
inter-

^ i.
d prohibitsthe of the intermediate formation of the Nishthas
^TT use 3[Hn the

("333" -D. 2), Pan. vii. 2, 16. Ex.

TJ^: phullah from niphald.
fHMicftI

^i requires the insertion of a nasal after the last radical vowel, which nasal

is not to be omitted where a nasal that is actually written would be

omitted ($345, 10),Pan. vii. i, 58 ; vi. 4, 24. Ex. *f^f?f

nandati from

nadi3 Pass. tfera nandyate; but from ih^ or

Hr^ month, Pres.

manthati, Pass. Hs-MH mathyate.

ir shows that verb take the first second aorist in the Parasmai-
^ a may or

pada ($ 367), Pan. in. i, 57. Ex. ^r^l^achyutat or

from "Vjfw^chyutir.
\ i prohibits the use of the intermediate ^ i in the formation of the Nishthas

(" 333" D. 2),Pan. vii. 2, 14. Ex. "33: unnah from -$$ undi.
renders the admission of the intermediate optional before the gerundial
^ u
^ i
tttva (" 337, II. 5), Pan. vn. 2, 56; and therefore inadmissible in the

(Pan.vn.
past participle 2, 15). Ex. ^rfai^Tsamitvd or ^nFTT sdntvd from

^ig samu; but ^ifw:sdntah.

renders the admission intermediate optional in the general
"" u of the ^ i
tenses before all consonants but (" 337, !" 2), Pan. and
\y vn. 2,44;
therefore inadmissible in the past participle(Pan. vii. 2, 15). Ex. ^T
seddhd or iffwr sedhitd from fa\t^sidhu
;
but ftr^t siddhah.

^ ri prevents the substitution of the short for the long vowel in the cated
redupli-
aorist of causals ($ 372*), Pan. vii. 4, 2. Ex. ^aftoin^alulokat
from fjfftilokri.
 CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 245

75 li shows that the verb takes the second aorist in the Parasmaipada($367),
Pan. iji. i, 55, Ex. *Pl*n{agamatfrom ng ffamfi.
* e forbids Vriddhi in the first aorist ($348 *),Pan. vn. 2, 5. Ex. inrTfyawa-
thit from if^ maths.
^ o indicates that the is formed
participle in tf na instead of n ta (J442, 5),
Pan. vin. 2, 45. Ex. Tffa:pinafyfrom ^ffarnft
opydyi.
^" shows that the verb follows the Atmanepada(Pan.I. 3, 12).
*T/* shows that the verb follows both the Atmanepada and Parasmaipada,

the former if the act reverts to the subject(Pan.i. 3, 72).

f*T ni shows that the past has
participle the power of the present (Pan. in.
2, 187). Ex. TJ^:phullafy,blown, from fowl niphald.
H w shows that the vowel is not lengthened in the causative ("462, note),
Pan. vi. 4, 92; and that the vowel is lengthenedin
optionally the aorist

of the passive(Pan.vi. 4, 93).

Bhu Class (Bhvddi,I Class).

I. ParasmaipadaVerbs.
i. ^J)huyto be.
Parasmaipada: P. i. *mfa Ihdvdmi, 2. H^ftr bhdvasi, 3 Ihdvati,
4. *^R: Ihdvdvah, 5. HTO bhdvathah, 6. Witt Ihdvatah, 7. bhdvdmah,
8. *r^*T Ihdvatha, 9. H^fif bhdvanti, I. i. ^nrt dbhavam, 2. : dbhavah,
3 ^ava/, 4. ^M^TR dbhavdva, 5. ^M^ff dbhavatam, 6. dbhavatdm,
7. ^IHTR dbhavdma, 8. ^W^Trf dbhavata, 9. ^w^a^avaw, O. i. "i^ Ihdveyam,

2. VR: bhdveh, 3. H^i/iav^,

4.
H^ Ihdveva,5. "m bhdvetam, 6. *^rribhdvetdm,
7. H^T"Mvema, 8. "TWlf Ihdveta, 9.^^:Ihdveyuh,l.i.*Fnfolhdvdni3
2.*"lhdva,

3. "T^g bftdvatu,
4. H^T^ bhdvdva, 5. H^TT bhdvatam, 6. *T^nf bhdvatdm, 7. *TqTR

bhdvdma, 8. H^ff bhdvata, 9. "T| Ihdvantu \\ Pf. i. "^^5 babMva^ (seep. 175),
2. ^jfT*TbabMvitha, 3. *nj"rbabMva, 4. ^f^ babhuvivd,5. ^pTj: babMvdthuh,
6. T$]snj: babMvdtuh, 7. ^f^iT babMvimd, 8. ^"J5 babMvd, 9. ^ijj: babhdvuh,
II A. i. ^r^ dbhdvam (seep. 1, 2. ^ij: azA, 3

5. ^*$$dbhutam, 6. ^JlffdbMtam, dbhuma, 8

7. ^TJJIT

F. i. HP^uflfH bhavishyami, 2. Nfcuifo bhavishydsi,

3. bhavishydti,
4 5. HfrtTO
bhavishyavafi, bhavishydthah,6. bhavishydtah,
7 bhavishydmah, 8. bhavishydtha,9. bhavishydnti,
C. i T dbhavishyam, 2 t dbhavishyafy,3. dbhavishyat,
dbhavishydva,
5. dbhavishyatam, 6. dbhavishyat6m t

dbhavishydma^ 8. dbhavishyata,9. dbhavishyan^

t The reduplicative ^6a

syllable is instead
irregular, of base, too, is irregular

(Pan. i. 6) ; the regularform would have been ^^ bubhdoa.

2,
246 BHU CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

P. F. i.vrfacTTftR
bhavitasmi, 2. bhavitdsi, 3. tf^TTTbhavitd,4.
Hfaffrftr

bhavitasvah, 5. ^f^iTT^r:bhavitdsthah, 6. Hf%WT" bhavitdrau,

7. ufarfiw: bhavi-

tdsmah, 8. "rfVriHW bhavitdstha, 9. ^forTO bhavitdrah, B. i. JJITO bhtiydsam,

2. *gn: bhuydh,
3. ^fi-^bhuydf,
4. ^rns bhuydsva, 5. "m*T bMydstam, 6. $inw

bhuydstdm, 7. JJ5TRR bhuydsma, 8. "J?n^r bMydsta, 9. ij^ng: bhuydsuh \\ Part.

Pres. i?^ bhdvan, Perf. ^^T^ babhuvdn, Fut. HfmM^ bhavishydn, Ger.
bhdtvd or "ijTr-bhuya, Adj. Hf^n^r: bhavitdvyah,H^"fti: bhavaniyah,
bhavyah (J456).
Atmanepada'""
: P. i. "r^bhdve, 2. VR*i bhdvase, 3. *r^ffbhdvate, 4.
bhdvdvahe, 5.^^ bhdvethe, 6. H^ bhdvete, y.HTR^ bhdvdmahe, 8.H"T

vadhve, 9.
H^W bhdvante, I. i. ^SM^rdbhave, 2. ^nnvji; dbhavathdh, 3.

dbhavata, 4. ^nm^f^ dbhavdvahi, 5. ^WT*TT dbhavethdm, 6. ^TH^Hf dbhavetdm,

7. ^M^THf^ dbhavdmahi, 8. ^T"WEJ dbhavadhvam, 9. ^WRTT dbhavanta, O. i.

bhdveya, 2. HT*n: bhdvethdh, 3. ^Tif bhdveta, 4. ^^rf^ bhdvevahi,

bhdveydthdm, 6. HTTTTlfbhdveydtdm, 7. *RJ*ffbhdvemahi, 8. ^*4 bhdvedhvam,

9. "TTO^ bhdveran, 1. 1. *t bhdvai, 2. HW^ bhdvasva, 3. *R7TT bhdvatdm, 4.

bhdvdvahai,5. H^JT bhdvethdm, 6. *TTfl7 bhdvetdm, "j.*f3TP^bhdvdmahai}

bhdvadhvam, 9. i.'f^ babMve
vr^irtbhdvantdm (seenote f, page 245), \\ Pf.

2. TT^f^ babhuvishe, 3. "^^ babMve, 4. ^ijf^t babhuvivdhe,5. "sn^rre babhu-

vdthe, 6. ^^5m Idbhuvdte,7. ^Jjf^m%babhuvimdhe,8. ^f^i^ or "^ babhuvidhve
or -^Ave (seeJ 105),9. ^jfft babhdvire,I A. ^wfaft dbhavishi, ^^f^?r: i. 2.

dbhavishthdh,3. ^nrf^? dbhavishta,4. ^swf^f^f^ 5. ^swi^TTf

dbhavishvahi, a"Aa-

vishdthdm,6.^wf^Tcrf dbhavishdtdm,7. ^Mfr^rf^dbhavishmahi, 8. ^wfe4 or "^

dbhavidhvam or -dhvam, 9. ^wf%mr dbhavishafa,F. vrfr^ bhavishye "c.,
C. ^THftrsir
dbhavishye "c., P. F. i. *fa!TRf lhavitdhe, 2. Hf^TTO bhavitdse,

3. HfVtfTbhavitd,4. ^f^ril^^bhavitdsvahe,5. ^f^dWR bhavitdsdthe,6. HfaflW

bhavitdrau,
7. "TfVffTWf
bkavitdsmahe, 8. Hf^TTT^bhavitddhve,9. ^fViTR* bhavi-
tdrah,

B. i. HMfar lhavishiyd,2. HW^Tt lhavishishthdh,3.

shishtd,4. ^ fmd^f^ bhavishwdhi, 5. ^f^Ml^ll^i bhavishiydsthdm,
6.

7. ^rf^^^f^bhavishimdhi, 8. HP^"D^4 or 0S" lhavishidhvdm or

-dhvdm, 9. Hf^hj^ bhavishirdn \\ Part. Pres. H^TRt bhdvamdnah, Perf.

babMvdndh, Fut. yfarq'*^: bhavishydmdnah.

Passive P. ^
lMye\9 ^PW bhuydse,3. Jjrra1Ihdydte,4. Jjm
: i. 2.

ydvahe, 5.^^ Ihuyethe,6."J^bhuyete,7. ^TT^ bhuydmahe, 8.^W bMyddhve,

9. $?firbhuydnte, ^^ bhuyeya "c., I. ^ ^%az "c. u
I. aM%e "c., O. Jj^ij

be used in the Atmanepada after certain Even

prepositions. by itself it is

used in the sense of : *T f^R

obtaining *T^ sa sriyam bhavate, he obtains happiness. (Sar.
P- 4, 1. 3-)

in means to perceive,
and may yielda passive.
 BH" CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 247

Pf. *n*"$babMve
"c., like Atmanepada,I A. i. wfofo or ^wrWw dbhavishi,
2. ^swfatfi:
or ^wrftm: dbh"vilhjhdb,
3. *wrfa dbhdvi,4. ^wf^fif dbhdvtihvahi
"c., like Atmanepada,F. *f?n" or mf^ bhdvishye
"c., C. wfro or

dbhavishye "c., P. F. bhavitdhe"c.,

Hfadl^or mfcirfig B. Hfrifa or

bhdvishiyd
"c. II Part. Pres. tgiJHM: bhdydmdnah, Fut. HfqqjHm: bhdvishyd-
mdnaJi) Past $TT. bhutdfy.
Causative, Parasmaipada: P. Mi^ifa bhdvdydmi, I. ^XFTQ dbhavayam,
0. HN^ii bhdvdyeyam, I. HIMmfH bhdvdydni\\ Pf. HN^i^^iTC bhdvaydiichakdr
II A. wr^T^ dbtbhavam, F. UNfamifa C. WHnf'nQ
bhavayishyanii^ dbhdvayi-
shyam, P. F. WNf^rilfw B. HT*TW
bhdvayitasmi^ bhdvyasam.
Causative,Atmanepada : P. nm bhdvdye, I. mm dbhdvaye,O.
bhdvdyeya, I. HT^I bhdvdyai \\ Pf. HR*d'*n* bhdvaydiichakre,
II A.

dbibhave, F. m^fTO bhdvayishyt,C. ^TMNfauj dbhdvayishye,P. F.

bhdvayitdhe,B. HNf-M ifl^bhdvayishiyd.

Causative,Passive : P. HT^ bhdvye,I. ^MT^ dbhdvye, O. m*nr bhdvyeya,
1. HT^ Ihdvyai \\ Pf. HN^I^rii, "^^, "TT^,Ihdvaydiichakre,
-babhdve,-dse,
I A. ^WRftrfa dbhdvayishi or ^rmf^ dbhdvishi,F. HTCfirofr
Ihdvayishyeor
bhdvishye, C. ^wreftr^ dbhdvayishye or wrfa*T dbhdvishye,P. F.

bhdvayitdhe or Hlf^ril^bhdvitdhe,
B. Hreftnfal bhdvayishiydor

bhdvishlyd.
Desiderative, Parasmaipada
: P. lulhushdmi,I. ^ryjw
"yj^rfa dbulhu-

sham, O. "^J^Wbulhusheyam, "J^mftTbubhushdni I.

u Pf.
^JJ5T^BR bubhtishdii-
chakdra, I A. ^rygfw dbubMshisham^ Y.^^f^snf^bubhushishydmi,
dbubhilshishyam, P. F. ^^fMrfifiHbubhushitdsmi, B. *^)jTxn^bubhushydsam.
Desiderative,Atmanepada: P. ^$5 bubhushe, I.^^5a"MtAz(5A6, 0.

bubhusheya, I. g^5 lubhushai \\ Pf. ^%MN*ft bubhushdiichakre, I A.

dbubhushishi, ^^jwr: dbubhushishthdh, 3. ^R$ftF dbubhushishta,

2.

bubhushishye, C. ^ijf^ dbubhushishye, P. F. gflfafn^

bubhushitdhe, B.
^ijfq^ bubhushishiyd.
Passive
Desiderative, : I. ^"f^
P.-z^bubhiishye, O.
dbubhtishye,
lubhushyeya,l.^-^lubhushyaiu Pf.^^f^raiiwiA^A^icAaArre, I A. i.

dbubhushi
dbubhushishi^ ^^jjwr: dbubhushishthdh, 3. ^TJ^jf^
2. (see J 406),
F. 5^^ bubhushishye,C. ^*jfaiqdbubhushishye,P. F. ^fwf^ bubhushitdhe,
B. ^fq^rhrbubhiishishiyd.
Intensive,Atmanepada
: P. -sft^bobhuye,^ivg"lobhuydse,
i. 3. ^t$inr 2.

6. ^^fffbobhuyete,
bobhuydvahe,5. ^t^J^ bobhiiyethe,
lobhuydte,4. ^^JirT^t
7. "sftjJTT'R^ 9.^$^ bobhuydnte,I.
bobhuydmahe, 8. ^t^TO bobhiiyddhve, i .

2. dbobhiiyata,
dbobhuye, ^t^-q^n:dbobhuyathdh, 3. ^nrfr$5iT 4.

5. ^t$5*U dbobhuyethdm,
bhtiydvahi, 6. '3nft"inri
dbobhdyetdm, 7.

dbobhuydmahi,8. ^R^JjW dbobhuyadhvam, ^^^?T O.

dbobhiiyanta,
9.
248 BHfi CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

lobMyeya "c., 1. -aft^rr

IdbMyat, lobhdydsva,3. -sfhjTnri
*ft"JTO 1.
lobhuydtdm, 2.

lobhuydvahai,
4. wfojTjret
bobhuyethdm, 6. ^^in
5. *ft$ifcrf lobMyetdm^
bobhuyddhvam, 9. sftiJTriri
lobhuydmahai) 8. "sfrj^"sj
7. ^*J5Tm|
lobhdydntdm \\
PF. I A.
-sfr^^bobhuydmchakre, i. dbobhuyishi, ^rsft^ftrsr.
^pfrjlfafa dbobhu- 2.

yishthdh,3. ^nft^ftrf
dbobhuyishta,
dbobhdyishdthdm,
8. WTtijftrsor
or "cT dbobhtiyidhvamor -dhvam, 9. ^l^iflfwiT
dbobhuyishata,
F. "sftsjnra C. ^t^ft^ dbobhuyishye,P.
bobhiiyishye, F. ^frnn^ bobhuyitdhe,
B. bobhuyishiyd.
-sftsftpfta
Intensive, Parasmaipada: P. i. ^"^f"T bobhomi or ^ffartf*?bobhavimi,

2. ^^ft bobhoshi or ^ftaTfrfa

bobhavishi,3. ^tvrVlTf
bobhoti or TmrtilT bobhaviti,

4. bobhuvdh, 5. ^t^: bobMthdh, 6. *frp:bobhutdh, 7. ^t^: bobhumdh,

"sft$5:
8. *fh"*T bdbhuvati, I. ^RtH^ dbobhavam,
bobhuthd,9. "sftg^fiT ^ftnt: dbobhoh i. 2.

or wqto^h dbobhavih, 3.
dbobhot
^iwt"Th^ or ^Rfarh^dbobhavit,4. ^TWt^JWa^o-
bhuva, 5. ^?^t)Jlf
dbobhutam, 6. ^t^Jjrrf
dbobhutdm, 7. ^t^"T dbobhuma, 8. ^^JJT
dbobhuta, 9. ^nfta^t
dbobhavuh, O. ^^ bobhuydm, I. i. ^HWTf^T bobhavdni,
2. Tfrsftbobhuhi,3. ^^5 bobhotu or sftarfc|
bobhavitu, 4.
^H^ra bdbhavdva,

5. ^t^Jrf
bobhutdm, 6. "sft^HT
bobhutdm, 7. ^T^TH bdbhavdma, 8. ^t^FTbobhutd,
9- ^J^l bobhuvatu \\ Pf. i.^fa^HroFTT bobhavdmchakdra, 4. ^fa^N^1 bobha-

vdmchakriva, 7. ThT^f^fRbobhavdmchakrima ; also i. '"fiHm bobhdva or

bobhuva, 2. ^hff^T bobhuvitha, 3. '"rt)?R bobhdva ^$^ bobhuva, 4. or

bobhuvivd*,5. Tt^T^: bobhuvdthuh, 6. Wt^J^tbobhdvdtuh, 7. ^t^f%JT

bobhuvimd,
8. Wt$5 bobhdvd, 9. ^^jg:bobhuvuh, II A. i. ^TTt^5 dbobhuvam,^[^ dbobhufy 2.

or ^T^)J5^:dbobhuvih, 3. ^nft$^dbobMt or dbobhuvit,4. ^nsft"5

^T^t^Ttl^ a"o-

^Mv", 5. ^R^ijif
dbobhdtam, 6. ^I^ft^ifrf
dbobhutdm, 7. ^nA^5 dbobhuma, 8.

dbobhuta,9. ^rwt)J|:
dbobhilvuh (not^TT^5^ dbobhuvan), I A. i.f ^r

dbobhdvisham,4. ^rwtHTf^B^ dbobhdvishva, 7. ^^Trfa1^ dbobhdvishma, F.

"^fafranftbobhavishydmi,
C. ^r^t^fVa} dbobhavishyam,P. F. 'sjfaf^rilfw
bobha-

vitdsmi,B. ^rijtrr^
lobhuydsam.
Note " Grammarians who allow the intensive without Tya to form an Atmanepada,
give
the followingforms : Pres. ^ft$%
bobhute, Impf. ^sft'JW
dbobhuta,Opt. Tt^hf bdbliuvita,
Imp. ^ftjlTT
bobhutdm, Per. Perf. Aor. 'SI^Tf^ dbobhavishta,
Tta^teTfibobhavdmchakre,
Fut. WNTfrHnT bobhavishydte,Cond. ^rwVHf^Efif dbobhavishyata,Per. Fut.

Ben. TtHf^^ bobhamshishtd.

, (See Colebrooke, 194.) p.

* The form t$^ bobhuviva is not sanctioned by any rule of Panini.

t The first aorist is the usual form for intensives,

but in ^5M it is superseded by the
second this being enjoinedfor
aorist, the simple verb. Some grammarians, however, admit
the first aorist for
optionally ^5M (Colebr.p. 193). The conflicting
opinions of native
grammarians on the conjugationof intensives are fullystated by Colebrooke, p. 191 seq.
250 BHfr CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

,
J 99" not

with lingual^, as Carey gives it) u Pt. -fftmr,

II Pass, "fWff,Caus.-fTrefir,
Int.
Des. ^faitfTT,
Adj.-ffzm^i:

ftn{ and fav sidh,to command

sidA, to go (ftox),
7. (fan*).
P. *vfn (fMwftf *),I. ^^ " pf- ft**" ftrefw, 9. fttfw, I A. 1. 2.

F. P. F. ftftrar,
irftrofir, B. ftnsr^.

In the sense of commanding or this

ordaining, root is marked by technical

the intermediate be omitted. Thus Pf.

"gj (f^v),and hence ^ may 2.

or ftre^, 4. ftrfafireor fafasT "c., F. itfvnrfir

or %wfiT, P. F. irfVnnor
I A. (as before),
^T^rtl^ or i. ^T%W, 2. ^rentfh,3. 4. viSr*3,
^Srtt'lf^, 5.

8. ^rite,
'sitr^T, 'srirg:
n Pt. Ger. irftn^r
ftr^.% or ftr^r,"ftnff,
Adj.
, 7. 9.

or TO^i: II Pass, Caus. ihnrfw,

ftnflff, Des. ftrefVmfif
or ftff^rfiT("103),
Int. ^fTOff,H^fe
8.
^ khad, to be steady,to kill,to eat.

P. ^fff H Pf. i.^^T^ (a), ^^ft^r,3. 2. M'"l^, 4. ^^f^, 5. ^^^t, 6. -q^gt,

7. ^^f^fT,8. ^^, 9. ^^:, I A. ^^T^^ or W^(fi), (Pan.vn. JJ, 7; f 348),

F. ^^rfif, P. F. ^HT, B.
^Em^ u Pt. ^rf^ir:,
^T^TT^, Ger. ^f^r, "^Rr, Adj.
U Pass. ^?rw, Caus. yi^fii,Des. f^^f^flT,Int.

9. IT^ gad, to speak.

I. O. TT^, I. n^g Pf.
P. T^fw (nftpr^frr),*"I?T((THRITT^), u i.

2. I A. ^nn^or ^SR^(a),(Pan.
*fTf^r,9. "SFTg:, vn. 2, 7; $348),F.
C. F. nf^wr,B^nim^ w Caus. Int.
in^rfw,Des. ftFrf^fir,
^rnf^n^,
P.

10. T^ rad, to trace, to scratch.

P. ^fifII Pf. i. TTT"? ("),2. V^T, 9. ^ I A- ^H or ^K (")"(J

n. r^nad,to hum, (^.)

9. ^j:,
P. (iro^fir,
"T^f7r wfim^fif)
u Pf. i. H"II^ ("), Hf^'M,
2.
I A. vfi" or

12. ^rf ard, to go, to ask, to pain.

P. ^rffif,
I. ^nfirii Pf. i. wfrrf 2. ^Tfjrff *r, 9. 'sri'Tjt, F. ^rf^'orfiT
I A. wnfFf^, u
,

Pt. ^f^jtt,
not ^rra*, see also p. 166 II Caus. -si^fw, ^nf^TJ,Des.
13. ^ ind, to govern,
P. ^fir,1."^,O. ^, I. ^rg u Pf. ^pq^R (I325) or ^m( or

* The change of ^ into ^ is forbidden by Panini vin. 3, 113, when

ftfV means to go.
It is admitted by the Sar. The Anubandha "T is sometimes added to "ftr^ to go, but is

explained to be for the sake of pronunciation only. Colebrooke marks it as erroneous.

Its proper meaning would be that intermediate is optionalin the gerund,and forbidden
^
in the (" 337, II. 5). The
past participle forms without intermediate ^ belong properlyonly
to ftr^
to command. This verb must change its initial
^ after prepositions
;
 BHU CLASS, PARASMAJPADA VERBS. 251

IA. i.FfH, a^W:, F. fomfr,C.Vf^nf, P.F.^in, B.jim^n Pt. jfijTn,

Perf.

or Wlf"4|1^,
Perf. Pass. ^Nftuu: or "^JTR: or

14. ffanind,to blame, (fiffft.)

P. fchjfir
(uftfrsT
or nM""i,J 98, 8, 2)u Pf. frfrfc,
I A. ^fHTfyF.
P. F. B.
fctfsWT, fTOT^.
15. "Pro niksh, to kiss,(fiin^.)
P. faH|fa (R^^ITT, not $ 98, 8, 2)
RffffSffrr, II Pf. fHfHHf,I A.
F. f"irKJU4Pn,
P. F. f^Tf^TTT,
B. frltt^m.

16. TGukh, to go.

P. vftwfrf(litarrf,
43),I. "
II Pf. i. T^T
y"U44|^ (J314)) 2. J^favj,3.
7. I
JlflSH, A. F. ^finwu^frf,
'sriWlc^, C. VHrf^mf^,P. F. ^f?HfT, B.

Pass. ^lUjd, Caus. ^n^fH, Des. ^ftf%f^nrfTT.

17. w*l andi, to go, to worship,(^^ and ^rfv.)

The Anubandha "7 w of ^^ aficAu allows the optionof intermediate 7 i in the gerund,
anchitvd or "wm\ aktvd, and its nasal remains, except before weakening forms (seemonth,
but the Anubandha ^t of ^Tfafac/iirequiresthe
nasal throughout(Dhatupatha 7,6).
PNo.5);
P.^fff n Pf. i. ("313),9. ^rnf^t(butsee No.
'srnH 5, note),I A. w
F. qjpqmfw, C. P. F. "iPMd!,B. ^TT^ (may
wf^tir^, he worship),

(may he go)," 345, 10.

Pass. ^^TT and Des. ^

^NjTT,Caus. ""(1Mnf7f,
Distinguish between "^faff!worshipped, Ger. vPqr"ii having worshipped, and

moved (Pan. vn. 2, 53; vi. 4, 30); ^T never seems to lose its nasal when it means to

honour: Pass. "a*MH he is honoured, iH^Mri he is moved. The two roots, however, are

not always kept distinct.

1 8. ^r^dnchh,to stretch,farf%.)

P. WSrfTT II Pf. ^Ml^ w^

or (J313), I A. Wflfli^ F. ^nTamfd u Caus.

^ii^Mfn,Des. viiP"ir"a.Hrn.
,

19. mruch, to go, (33.)

^tafir n This and other verbs enumerated $ 367 take optionally
the first

or second aorist ; mtfiWli^Wj*l^ or II Pt.

^5:, Perf.
^^^|t^, Ger. HfBR^T,
(Pan.i. 2, 26),or ^IRT.
20. j% hurchh, to be crooked, (5%.)
P. fAfir(J143)H Pf. ^|*, I A. wpefitn Pt. jf*r |* (j431, 2).
or

"snjwz/,
21. to go.

P. ^rsrfiT
ii Pf. i. ^nr (a), 2. ^finT (f 328), I A. "n"fl^or
F. "q Hn""fif.
22. to go.
^ vrq;,

P. TnTft n Pf. i. ^niT (a), ^^ftriT,I

2. A. w*mrX ("34^*) " Pt

Caus. ^M^fd, Des. (^1^^, Int. ^id^fj

K k 2
252 BH# CLASS, PAKASMAIPADA VERBS.

23. ^T5T"/,to go, to throw.

substituted in the general tenses before
P. *mfw, I. ^n*fi^II tf must be

terminations beginningwith vowels. Before all consonants except ^(Pan.

substitution i.e. both
is optional, and ^ be used
u. 4, 56,vart.)
this ^ may II

Pf. i. f^nmr (a), f^j 2. or ftnrftro(I335, 3), [jsrrftnr],

3. f^ro, 4. fafere

8. fa*r, 9. f^j:,I A.
($334),[^iftre], 7. fafai* [^TTftnr],
6. faaiij:,
5. f^i^r:,

^%^ ["nrX]"9. nty, F. TOfir (1332, 3), C. ^nn^, P. F. Tin, B.

[F. ^rf^TfTT,C. ^rf^ni;,

P. F. ^fw?n] n Pt. tfir: ["ftTff:],
Perf.

Ijsnftnn^],
Ger. ^terr [^ftr^r], "Thr, Adj. ^ff^r:[^ftnr*i:], -cf^H^:,w: u

Pass. ^7T, Caus. Des. f^Wrr

-qTHJ^frf, [^ftTf^frr],Int. ?3tTR (WlT is not

sanctioned by Panini).

24. fs?^Ai, to wane, /r"/i*. to diminish,(Colebrooke.)

P. H^fff u Pf. i. f^^Tir (a),2. f%T5pror f^^ffiT^r, I A.
9. fafofft, -si ^ tflr^,
F. -^BTflT, ("390)
B. ^tinr^ II Pt. ftp: or -^tan U Pass. Caus. 3JH4Hfri,
'HjT^H,
Des. %%fif.
fq^lMfrf,Int, ^Sjfaffir, The Caus. ^qnfrt belongs to "% (f462,
II. 23)*.
25. oFT kaf, to rain,to encompass, (oF7.)
The Anubandha 1J e preventsthe lengtheningof the vowel in the aorist.

P. -sreffT
II Pf. ^^TJ, I A. *oh^(no Vriddhi, $ 348 1).
26. T"{(/up, to protect, (n^.)
The verbs ^J^^M^,to guard,W^dMp, to warm, ftr^
vichh,to go, "^TTT^an, to traffic,
tJ^ JJOTI,
to praise,take WI aya in the specialtenses, and take it in
optionally the rest.

(Pan. m. 1,28; 31.)

P. jfarrafir, I. 'ftTnrg
I. wftum^, O. *i\m*n^, H Pf- i^m^i^auK ("325^ 3)
or I A. ^TTfhrnft^
"spfhr, ^RViffy
or ^H'itmlrt
(J337, ,
1. 2),6. "snmr, F. TrVqiftrofff,
or Tft^FrfiT, ^ftftnrr,
P. F. jfimrnHi, or B. jplm^iri or
Tf^rr, u
^"ur^
Pt. Trttrrftnr:
or nir:, Ger. jilMif^Hi,
nVftrf^T,
or
JTRT,Adj Tft .

or TU^K II Caus. JTfairflT

or JntjTHnfjT,
Des. WnfxjwTfTj
^'ItsPrt, 'T'TTnT^nT, or

*FftTTftrefff,
Int.

27. W^dhilp,to warm.

P. vtmrfir U Pf. vqmNcFTC or ?WTJ (no Guna, because the vowel is long),
I A. ^JqFffa or

28. if^ tap, to burn, (J332, 14.)

P. rmfw II Pf. i. ffiTTxr (a), 2. rTH^ or wfxR ("335, 3),3. I A.
cfffTtT, i.

2. wrwt:, 3. ^nn^il^, 6. ^nrTrrt(f351),F. -ax^rfiT,

P. F. wm, B. n
TfTam^ Pt.

*
The causative cannot have short a, and though both Westergaard and Boehtlingk
Roth give the short a, they produce no authorityfor it. The Hjf^ri:
participle is equally

impossible,and should always be changed into

 CLASS, PAKASMAIPADA VEKBS. 253

Ger. mjT, Adj.FTO:, TO: (short,

because it ends in ^, " 456, 6) u
Pass. rUMff, Caus. Des. fffn^fn,Int.
ATM"lfff, nin"M?T9 fimfw.

Note "
With certain prepositions
TH^ takes the Atmanepada(Pan. I. 3, 37) ; THHTTf,
fTfUTffit shines. It has an active sense in the passive(i.e.Div Atm.), if it refers to

Iftj: austere devotion ; n*Mri nmxtiH": the devotee performs austere devotion. In the

sense of regretting(being burnt) it forms the Aor. ^tnw ; ^i"*iqinN MIMI ""*""ui he was

distressedby a sinful act. (Colebr.)

29. Vf cham, to eat, (*nj.)

The followingverbs lengthentheir vowel in the specialtenses (Pan. vn. 3, 75, 76): ^T cham,
if precededby ^TT d, to rinse,iMi'^iHfri
dchdmati ; f^^shfhivt
spit,iThlfiff
shthtvati
to

(seeNo. 35) ; H5^ kram, to fliT*tffT

stride, krdmati (see ^No.30) ; ^H^kfam,to tire,"JITTfiT
kldmati. ^ #wA, to hide,JJffrf
guhati,follows a different rule,lengtheningits vowel

throughout, instead of taking Guna, when a vowel follows. (Pan. vi. 4, 89.)
P. *Rfw, but after the prep, ^n, WMIHfr II Pf. i. ^TTR (a),2. ^ftro "c., I A.

(J348^) u Pt. ^ifw: ("429),Ger. ^fr^r or ^farff,Adj. ^ftnw

(Pan.in. i, 126)u Caus. ^IHMfri (J462).

30. W1 kram, to stride,("^55.)

JK$ kram, to stride,W5T bhrds, to shine, "TT5T 6^/"w,to shine,tfJJ

bhram, to roam,

to Gflfttras, to tremble,
fail, ^T trut, to cut, c5^?asA,to desire,may take 1 ya in the

specialtenses. Hence ^IW^fd bhrdmyati or WTftfbhramati. (Pan. in. i, 70.)

P. fRTHfiT
or -jRTJsifr,
I.
^^T^ or ^^i^^ u Pf. *nRT*, I A. ("348*),
-sniiirl^
F. P. F. -afar, B. -ai^T^n
-aifinqfif,
"aw lengthensits vowel in the generaltenses (sit)
of the Parasmaipada
(Pan.vii. 3, 76). Hence jMHfrf,but wti. It takes no intermediate ^ in
the Atm.; Fut. "a$*IF, P. F. Aor. ^T^cT; but
"^TTT, some grammarians admit

intermediate ^.
Pt. -afar,Perf. ^^TRTT^, (a)or ^fHr^T ("429),Adj. a fadm: n Pass.
Ger. ^f^T

"affq^r,
Caus. prep, also ailHqffl),
WRflf, J 461, (after Des. f^aif*T^flT
or f^^^d,
Int. v*w"^, ^Tfifif .

Note "
It has been doubted whether "3RH in the Div class also lengthens its vowel. It is

not one of the eightS'am verbs (Pan. vn. 3, 74); and in Pan. vn. 3, 76,tyan is no longer
valid. The Prasada 'gives a^Pii ; but adds, ^jPTiT "" ^44x4 fs ^": j^i^nlfriI The

Sarasvati decides jnu-qPn,

giving the generalrule (n. i,
for ql^iH^fTT McniV
145) ^i"ii"{l"ii
"Rl and enumerating as ^ITrf^,
^IJT^^HH^^'^'aiHR^. But "aWis not a Samadi at all,
and instead of "a"*Twe ought to read UW. Taranatha in the Dhaturupadarsagives ffMjffl,
Rajaramas'astri
supports jni*^fff.
31. HH yam, to stop.
The roots T*T gam, to go, THT yam, to cease, and to wish, substitute
"S^ish, ^5 chchha for

their final in the specialtenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 77.)

P.-rarfir,
I. XS^HII Pf. i.irow(5),ir^for ^f"ni,
9. %:,
I
2.
A. ^wh^($359)"
F. Tfcqfir,
p. F. iJTn,B. TH " Pt. ^nr:, ^^RT^, Ger. *I^T, "^^ or "TTW, Adj.
 254 Bffft CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VEfcBS.

TOT: (fifinwr:)
u Pass, *iT*rff,Caus. Tmnfa (a),("461),II A.

Des. finfafiT,
Int. TfanajTT
or iRfiT.
Note " *PT may be used in the Atm. with the prep. ^TT, if it is either intransitive,
t the tree spreads,or governs as its objecta member of the agent's body ;
he puts forth his hand. Likewise with the prep. ?T,"3^,if it is used
^5?T,

; ^"od.H 'ril^l*^
reflectively he heaps together his own rice. Likewise after 1"*T,when it

means to espouse ; TTTt *f)ril*JMH4ttf

Rama married Sita: here the Aor. may also be OMIMH;

like ^"JNrt he divulgedanother's faults. (" 356.)

32. TH nam, to bow, (*PT.)

P. -^fw n Pf. i. "^n* ("), 2. -JR^T or ^firo,
9. %,
I A. ^Hfi^ (f359),F.
P. F. tfiTT,
B. like
Tfnrn^"c., H"T. On the Causative,see $ 461.
" "qi?may be conjugatedin the Atmanepada. (Pan. in. i, 89.)
The Anubandha ^ given to it by some grammarians is declared wrong by others.

33. TTH^aw, to go, (IT*.)

P. n^fiT II Pf. i. ^TITR (a),2. -STHrfVpz?
or ^rf^, 3. ^17??, 4. "*fn^ (J328, 3),
5. 3T"rg:"c., II A.
^riT^ ("367),F. TrfrofiT(J338, 2),P. F. TTFT, B. JTWT n

Pt. inr:, Perf. ^fn^n^ or ^TTP^T^, Ger. JTRT, "TT"I or OJTTT,Adj. TTTTO:,
Pass. J|Hjrl, Caus. j|*Hfn,Aor. ^^l^*iri,Des. firnfH^fiT,
Int. ^J|*^rior

Note "
With prep.
^ it follows the Atm.,if intransitive. The Caus. too, with the prep.
follow the Atm., if it to have patience; ^I'i"i1^ little. In
S5TT,
may means
TTT^wait a

.
the Atm. the final *T may be dropt in the Aor. and Ben. ; twin or ti^'iw,^Urtilgor
(See " 355.)
34. to burst, (fHMWI.)
TKcfphal,
|| Pf.
P. tfic5fff i. -qTRTH (d), ^ffTC (f336, II. 2), 3.
2. TTOc*, 4-

I A. (I
^nfiTc^ 348*),F. TfifoTirfH
II Pt.
ipr: (Pan. vin. 2, 55),Ger. MifaHl II

Aor.
TBTT^irfff, Des. f^tfifj^fiT,
Pass. TB^TW, Caus. ^IifliMr^ Int.
qij^ri,TT^foff.
(Pan.vn. 4, 87-89.)
35. f?^shthiv,to spit,(fi^.)
P. -sWff n Pf. ftnhr or ftH I A. "3nNfyF. ^f%^?fiTn Pt. "g: u Pass.

({143),Caus. ^^fiT, Des. fff^f^fk or (Pan.vn.

g^T^fff 2, 49),Int.
No Intensive Parasmaipada.
Vowel lengthened in specialtenses (seeNo. 29). Initial sibilant unchangeable (" 103).

36. f^ji, to excel.

P. nMPffn Pf. i.f^rrnr("),2. f"|j|vr

or 4. r5ff"?"=r,
3.f*nrnr,
f^Jifiivi, 5. ftn^rjt,
6.f^nrg:, 7. ftrfnur,
s. ftrnr,9. fsrg:, A. ^^^
I (J350),F. imfr, P. F. inn,
B. 'sfhlTfl;
II Pt. flTff:,
Perf. fuDNl^, Ger. flfSrT,Adj. %rf^T:,^HRhi:, ^H, and
: (f45^" 2)9ftw* only with ^fe: (Pan.in. i, 117) II Pass, iftnw,Aor.
Caus. ^TTRfff,Aor. ^nf^HTi^, Des. ftfnWff, Int. ^ft^, ^%fif. It
follows the Atmanepadawith the prepositions
TO and fw.

The change of l^into

Txin the reduplicated anomalous (" 319). It does
perfectis
 CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERB*. 255

take placein 7*n to wither ntllT, although the rule of Panini might seem to comprehend
that root after it has taken Samprasarana. i*n forms perfectflT"*ii.
its reduplicated

37. ^HS( aksh, to obtain,(v^.)

^^uksh follows also the Su class,Vt^jllftOl
akshnoti "c.

P. ^TE|fTT
II Pf. i. -viiiGf, 2. vj|fiPB|X4
or xii"tK, 3. ^TPTSf, 4. VMfyq OF

5. vnisj^, 6. -winsjg'j7. ^sTRfepror *uri""f, s. wr"rcr, 9. "Mgr, I A. i.

or ^rref, VHIVSJ'):,
2. 4. VNI(H|Hor
3. ^msfri^, ^ror, 5. ^rrfsr*
or ^m?, 6. ^rrf^jfor
7. vHifHf1*!
or ^rrep, 8. wrftf^ or ^BTTF, 9. ^wrfiejg:
or VTTJ:, F. vfujviffl
or

r, P. F. mftsfri! ^??T II Pt. ^T?:, Ger. ^?ft|?^T Pass.

or ^T or n V^T?T,
Caus. SH^Mfri,
Aor. Des. vnf^nsjMfk(J476).
*snfa"t|i^,
K^, to hew, follows W^ throughout,also in the optionalforms of the

Su class.

38. ^ krish) to drag along,to furrow.

P. ^fr u Pf. i. *n*t, 2. "q^ft^,3. ^it, 4. ^fVre (f335, 3),I A. i.

2. viomefT;,
3. ^nirnsflfi^,
4. ^IcRn^, 5. *t*iS, 6. ^M"WKT, 7. V"CIIIQ"I, 8. ^K"ii,9.
or ^nsr?| "c., or I A. 4. *?^rsf
"c. If used in the Atmanepada,
the two

forms would be,

I A. 2. i.WfflSf, 2.W""n, 3-

I A. 4. i. id. 2. *i$KfV|i:, 3.

I A. 2. 4.^ejT^f^r, 5. ^cyGlixif, 6. Vf H||(ff,

I A. 4. 4. ^T^VSINf^, 5. id. 6. id.

7. ^^fif,
I A. 2. 8. ^S?^f , 9.

I A. 4. 7. -"Hc(ilSJIHflf,8. ^p|l4, 9.

F. ai^frf or ^fw, P. F. TOT or ?R|T11 Pt. f Bt, Ger. ^T " Pass. ^nr?r,Caus.

Aor. xM^ohMH or Des. f^Effff,

^T^^i^i^, ^0*1?
Int. ^O^f^lrt, or

The peculiarGuna and Vriddhi of ^, viz. ^and TT, instead of

^T^and WIT, take place
to emit, and
in '"*{,
necessarily "^ST, to see (Pan. vi. i, 58) j ^T"T, "JFT, ^9T^TT^,
and

V^UJjIlToptionallyin
: verbs with penultimate^, which rejectintermediate ^ (Pan. vi. i,

59) '"

71 to rejoice,
"3TTTor tT^T,
Aor. 'STWT'^rh^
vtni-^flTi^, or

39. ^^rush, to kill.

P.tt^fwu Pf. i.^d*, 2.^df^r, 9.^^:, lA.^CiMX, F.dft^fir, P. F.

or df^n (I337, II. i).

"
40. "S^ush,
to burn.

P. I. "sfrm^
^ft^tlr, u Pf. i. ^fteNoRn: or "gr^r^(J326), 2. ^fmy, 3.

"c., lA.'sftrh^, P. F.^"ftir,

F.'sftfTOfrr, B. 11 Pt. ^ir. or
^qr^
("425) u Des. 'sftfafinrfiT.

41. t^;mih, to sprinkle.

Mr iiPf. fifWT"2. f^f^zr,I A. ("360),F. TCjrfrr,
P. F. "TT
P. i. "*f*ren^ u
256 BHU CLASS, PAKASMAIPADA VERBS.

Pt. Perf.
*fte:, jf^T^(fafaa^), II Caus.
Ger. jft^T *f trfrr, Des.
Wifift^,
Int. Westerg.)
*fWff, wfe, (*frfe,
dah, to burn.
42. ^
P. ^ft II Pf. i. ^T*r ("), \f^ 2. or ^iv, F. vsgfr (J118),P. F. "pvr, B.

"mir1, I A. i. 'srvTEf,wrcfttj 3. ^visf)^4-

2. ^rorw, 5. ^FV, 5. ^PVT, 7. ^nn^r,

8. (seep. 185) u Pt. ^nsr. u Caus. ^qfw, Aor. ^^^, Des.

^mr, 9. ^rorer:

Int. ^3ff, ^fTV.

f^rayfir,

43. T% glai,to droop ; also J mlai, to fade.

O.
P. TcSnrfiT, r"3T^II Pf. i. W"t (I329), 2. STfroFZIor !Tc5T^, 3.
^Tc^,
^irfrc^r,5.^0^5:, 6.^755:, 7. irfrcW,8.^c7, 9. ^r^:, I A. i."u?5Tftw (J357),
2. 5. ^r^cyrfti'?}
^P"c5nT^,3. ^ri^nT^fTj 4. ^f"5Tftr^=r, 7. ^^^TftT^Tj
6. ^PTSTftreij

8. ^T"3Tftre, F.
9. ^Tcjrftr-q:,T^i^rfF,
P. F. TOnrT, B. ^Hrmi^or THU^ (J3921) n
Pt. TOJPT:, Ger. r^TF^T, "'c5T^, Adj. THTW^:, TcSlWhKj ^WT. M Pass, (impers.)
Caus. Te^rinrfkor T^q^rcT (Dh. P. 19, 68), Des. fuFcsrefrf Int. "n-
, ,

44- *tffai, to bark, % kai, to

to sing; also "\rctf, croak.

P. '1T*lftf
II Pf. "Hn, I A. P.
F. Jlimfrt,
^TTCrfa^, F. Jllril, B.
"mir^ (" 392)'
Mark the difference between ^ and T"" in the Bened. u Pt. *ffa:,Ger. jf)HI"
T, Adj. JTTtTSJ^ TT^T^:, ^rm U Pass. ift^H,Aor. Caus. Tl^nfrf,Aor.
"HJ||f^,

45. w shtyai)to sound, to gather; also TO styai,the same. ($103.)

(^103)?!" ^TPrnTW
P. KMiMfifT II Pf. ?TB"Tr,I A. F. KMitMfn,
^STWT^T^IT, P. F. KMirti)

B.
wiHlr^ or
INMIr^H Pt. ^mi"TJ, HWlTt
Trcrt7fl, (J443).
Note "
With regard to the initial lingual sibilant,the Prasada quotes the Varttika to

Pan. vi. i, 64, as ^SkTT^W^'Kfif^^T

^r^frf^Vi I A marginal note says, ""*ii^r"Mbrtit
til"i im (*jtT*T^"?J"^1
HT^i'mopr^^^^3TTw*"i ^^fira "i i m flT W 31 "^*i
M in MI K.fn MC*"n

imr

"

46. dai, to cleanse,

This verb is distinguishedby a mute ^ p from other verbs,like "fTda "c. It is therefore

not comprised under the ^ ghu verbs (" 392*); it takes the first aorist (3rd form),
and does not substitute \i or TJ e for ^ST a.

P. ^nrfff
u Pf. ^, I A. i. ^rftnr, 2. ^T^ft: "c., ^r^frr,P. F. ^m, B.
F.

^RTf^II Pt. ^Trf:II Pass. ^TOW, Caus. Des.

^HnrffT, f^T^fk,Int. ^T^n^,^Tfif.
47. V 6?^e,to drink, (TIT.)
This verb is one of the six so-called **"
ghu roots (" 392),roots which in the general tenses
have for their base ^T da or VT dA"l

P. vrrfif
u Pf. i.^, 2. ^mor ^VTO, 3. ^, 4. ^ftw,5. ^Tj:, 6. ^"Tg:, 7
8.^V, 9.^:. It admits I A. 3. ($357),
II A. ($368),
and Red. II A. ($371):
258 BHU CLASS, PARASMA1PADA VERBS.

9. ^[^t,II A. "^^^fi, F. P. F.
^i(t"fPfl, Tjr^T, B. tysim II Caus. $(lrtHfirf
(^fl^'Mfa
he

drives),
Des. O^lrMPrt,
Int. ^i^iejn, $|l$(Pr(.

52. ?re sad, to perish,('*"")

P. tflqPn(Pn^l^Pn)
u Pf. i. TOTT^ ("), ^f^*ror
2. ^rarr'zr,
9. $^:,II A. ^srnfff

('MH^r^),
F. tutttPft,
P. F.
TOTn^ u Pt. ^r^t u Pass. USM, ^T^T, B. Aor. ^T^rrf^,
Caus. ^TT^ilfir,
Aor. ^re^R^,Des. "ftr^wflT,
Int. TtU("lri,"T^rf%.

53. tn pd, to drink.

P. ftRfrr u Pf. i. ^nTTj 2. ^rf^^ior Tqrer, 9. ^ijjjII A. 'SRTIT, F. mmPrf, P. F.

inirr, B. M*in^ (j392) u Pt. Ger.

"iffan, iflni,"^nr, Adj. tnTT^rt, mnl^it,"^rtu
Pass. tfhfF,Aor. ^Rlftr,Caus. mnijOT (or"^ to swallow),
Aor. qlm ^
-fl (Pan.
Vii. 4, 4),Des. fVnrwfir, m^iPn.
Int. i|i(1^ri,

54. in ghrd, to smell,to perceiveodour.

I. "itPii"f^,
P. r^'iifrf) I. f^yg
O. ftnn^, u Pf. i. *fw, 2. "iPiivi
or ^vi^, "nrr,
9.

II A. I A. til (j368, 357)5F. Tn^rfw, P. F. r, B.

^irn^j or ^ * i
i^ nid ymiri or

392 1) H Pt. TTTiT: or UTOt, Ger. TTTr^T U Pass. ITR^",

Aor. "Jj*j|p{{,
Caus.
^rP5rn?^TfT
or vi P^i
pjj|
4 n (Pan vu. . 4? 6),Des. nisiiuPfi,
Int. ^'ifl^rf,
^fTMlPri.

55. IRT dhmd, to blow.

P. vrfrr n Pf. ^w? I A. F. im^jPd, B.

"HMiin1i^, urnni^ or ^TTTH u Pt. i*mf* u
Pass. "WTRff, Aor. ^TWTTftr,
Caus. iRm'Tfrr,Aor. ^Tfi*unTH, Des. f^urrafff, Int.

56. ^n sthd)to stand, (FT.)

P. firefr u Pf. K^ (^rfVfir^),
II A.
Tsn"m (**"0" 9- ^:" F- ^rr^fw, B.
392) u Pt. f^Tr^T,
f^znr:, "OT*?, Adj.^mr^:, wnl^:, ^i: n Pass,

Caus. Frm^fii,Aor.
Aor. -?H^j|ftr, ^fdfs^r^,
Des. Int. ri^/l^rf,
Pd8rf"rri,
Note " After W^", TT,and f^T,
*t, ^TT is used in the Aim. ; also after if it means
"33T, to affirm;
with "3"^,if it means to strive,not to rise ; or with "3^1,if it means to worship, "c. : Pres.

f?r"W,
Red. Perf. "jf^r,
Aor. ^rfWiT,
9. ^ftfif^rf,
Fut. WT^?ff, Ben. WRfte.

57. ^T mnd) to study.

II Pf.
P. T"TfiT i. *TW? 2. *ir"xfor T^R, 9. TOt, I A. B.
^rwWlf^, ^rnrn^or#m^ II

Pt. OTiT. U Pass, ^pm, Caus. OTTCfr, Aor.^rH^M, Des. fH^iqfff,

Int. HltiNri,

58. ^r d", to give,

n Pf. ^,
P. ^aiiT* (Trftr^^fw) II A.
^r^, B. ^in^(f392) u Pt. ^r:, Ger.
(seeNo. 200, Pan. vu. 4, 46),"^T, ^q: H Pass. ^hlW,
Adj.^nT^t, ^TTftiT:,
Caus. Des. f^rHfri,
^IMMfrf, Int. T^fanr,
^T^rfH1.
bend.
59. 5^ hvri, to
P. d^fW II Pf. i. ^d^K 0), 2. ^T^ (J335),3- W*, 4- ^fe (J330, 334),
* After the preposition*T it may be used in the Atmanepada.
 CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 259

9. iT5^:, I A. "a*rffy 9- **rf:, F. ^fr^fir (f338), P. ^r, B. F.

($390) u ^rr:,Ger. 2^, "^w, Adj.^a:,

Pt. 3^fl^n, *ni: u Pass,
Des. 'rSfl!',
Caus. s^mrfff, Int. *lldgqrf,

60. "^ skand, to approach

P. ^f?r (tfba^fwor 74) u Pf. P4n.
Trfccfr^fir, vm. 3, 73,
or *n"fi?zr,9. *n"fi*: or *raj: (seeif^,No. 5), I A. TOKrafl^, 6.

9. *mifRr: ; or
II A. ^r^f, F. Jsfcwfir,P. F. ^swr, B.
^urn^ ($345, 10)u Pt.

("103, 6), Ger. ^RH ("438) u Pass. ^sir", Caus. ^qfr, Aor.
("374)"DGS' r*ll"ir^rH, Int. ^Hl^MI'ri (J485),^Hl**ffl.

61. TT M, to cross.

u Pf.
P. tfrfiT (a),2. Ttfnr,3. ?K^, 1 A.
i. tnm: w?nt, 4. ^nnr^, F.
or irrNfTT ("340), P. F. wftin or inihrT,B. TrtSnj. In the Atmanepada
we generallyfind the verb used as Tudadi, P. firo, Pf. ST, Aor.

or ^mto or ^nnrte, F. Kftw^ (?),

B. wfW? or ifWft? u Pt. irWh, Ger.
0Ht" u ifHiw,Aor. ^nnft,
Pass. Caus. dimfa, Des. rrtdfimfif
or frirtOMfdor
irnrfS.
Int. wrft^w,
finrfrtfir,
62. t"^ ranji to tinge.
This verb and ^(dams,to bite, ^3^saf?j,
to stick, and T?T5{svafij,to embrace (Pan.vi.
4, 25, 26),drop the penultimatenasal in the tenses (" 345, 10)
special and in the weakening

forms (" 344, 395, note).

P. Mfri, I. ^t"n^, O. t^, I. T"fiJII Pf. i. TT3T, 2. lAP"fV|or tt"pzr,
3. TT"T,

4. ttftm, rig:,I A. mdvsfl^,

9.
F. i^iflT,P. F. t^r, B. 7^11^. Also used

in the Atmanepada: P. Tinr, Pf. TT^, rtfW^,I A. i. 2. 3. ''st^i,

9. ^l"fd u

Pt. T3i:, Ger. TW or TUT (Pan.vi. 4, 31, $ 438) II Pass. n^TT (Pan.HI. i, 90),
Caus. M^Pri or M^frt to hunt (J462, 26),Aor. ^Oi"f^or VHU"if^,Des.
Int. iK^^l,TTtf^i
fM.Hj(H, .

63. f^ kit,to cure, (faff.)

This and some other verbs which are referred to the Bhu class always take the desiderative
if
terminations, used in certain senses. "fau^JhV,
if it means to dwell, belongs to the
Chur class,or, accordingto Vopadeva, it may be conjugatedas
regularly a Bhu verb ;

but if it means to cure, it is

P"iPenw Pn chikitsati.

\ P. fatorfir, I. ^fawn^ "c. n Pf. f^fawrNsRK, I A. .niVcMn^,F. fa-

P. F. r*i 14111*1 ril.

,

In the same way are conjugated(J472):

i . IJT^(toconceal), he despises.
"jJjmrf
2. (tosharpen),
fir^ ffffrr^TT
he endures.

Htaitiri
3. *TF( (torevere), he investigates.
4. "^ (tobind),"{tarUrihe loathes.

5. "^ (to cut),^1^1U(H he straightens.

6. ^rr^ (tosharpen),^ft^rNrfif
he sharpens.

L! 2
 260 BHU CLASS, ATMAKEPADA VERBS.

64. r^pat, to fall,

P. tnrffffaftnTrrfff)
II Pf. i. Wff, 9. %", II A. WW (f366),F. "qflT^fff
R

Pt. trfrnr:n Pass. tjmff, Aor. ^nrrfw, Caus. inrRfir,Des. ftrofirefir

or

("337, H. 3).
65. ^wz$, to dwell.

II Pf.
P. 'cJ'uPri i. 44144 (a), "^ftr^T or
2. T3W5 3. "HIU, 4. '^ifta,
5.

6. dufw, 8. irer, 9. I A. i. 'snntf ($132),2. -sHirHl:,

"3n|i,
"3^:, 7. 3.

6. ^qi%ri (J351), F. ^wfif, P. F. WT, B.

-s^ni^II Pt. -3-faH:,
Ger.

"T^I II Pass. T$, Aor. ^imftr,Caus. MltmPrf,Aor. ^m^^T^, Des.

Int. ^Nf^Tf, mqftct.
66. ^vad, to speak.
P. ^fir u Pf. i. T^ (a), ^f^zr, 2. 9. -95:, I A. ^nn^^, F. tfiptfa,B.
u Pt. Ger. Tf^r^TU
Tf^TT:, Pass. ^IW, Aor. ^^rf^9 Caus. Tr^fw, Aor.

,
Des. Int.
n=Ni^MfH, TI^OT? *^R%.

67. f*$ svi, to swell,("4?)

fry.)
P. *y^Pri II Pf.
"^TR (")or %y"j||i|(a), "Sprf^Ior
i. f^mrMM, 2. 3.

or f^P^T'T?
4. 5J5jP=|^
or f^rf^f^W,5. ^^"^i or f^lf^M^t, 9. "^1* "r

P. F.
I A. ^T^^l^,II A.
^ren^ or and
^T%f^R(^ ^T^Tji1^,F. ifffquiftr,
B.
^nm( u Pt. ^15: u Pass, -gnr^,
Caus. Tgn^fff,
Aor. ^f$n3R^,
Des.

Int. 'md^H or

II. AtmanepadaVerbs.
68. T"s^edh,
to grow.

P. Wff, I. ^VJT,
O. l^W, I. *TTHT II Pf. UVmm*, C. $fVHHT,
F. JjfVnqTT, P.

T, I A. i. ^fvfw, $fwr:, 3. SrfvF,4. ^f^^f^, 5. ^(VtTqi,6.

2.

7.^fv^rf^, 8. "fafor "i4, 9. ijftnfiT,

B. ^fVpft^ n Pt. irfMrr:
u Pass, umw, Aor

$fv, Caus. Pres. Tj"nri7r,

"ff, Perf. JJWTm, F. ^r^mPri, "7T, Cond.

"ir,P. F. Tjvfinrr,
II A. $f^"^,
"Tf,B. uvMte, Des. ^f\^w.
69. ^ iksh,to see.

P. ^^w? I. $^IT, O. ^?f, I. f[3nri

n Pf. ^^rf^;,I A. $%?, F.

C. "Pqmri,P. F. ^%in, B. |f^F u Pt. ^f^ff:u Caus. ^ufr, Aor.

Des. ^PeiftjfMH.
70. ^ to give.
c?0c?,
P. ^9 I. ^^r, O. ^r, I. ^rf ,, pf. 3. ^ (j328, i),6. ^*r?r, 9.

(Pan.vi. 4, 126),IA.^f^, F. ^nnr, P. F. ^WT, B. ^^ n Pt.

Pass, ^srff, Aor. ^Tf^, Caus. ^TrfTr,Aor. ^^c, Des. f^c(P^Mri,

Int.

and ^^J5 are used in the Parasmaipada,^"35 in the Atmanepada. It is only in

the passivethat ^n*T and ^$5 take Atmanepada
terminations.
 CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 261

71 .
shvashk, to go.
ctrta^
P. *!p3inr, T. qMm"rt " Pf. *i"nair,I A. **cfair*,F. "rfV*"nr,
P. F. mrt*di,
B. "*|Pi.3|i*fltf.

Note" The initial ^is not liable to become ^. (See No 45 ; Pan. vi. i, 64, i. Colebrooke,
p. 219.)
72. ^y^ rij,to go, to gain,"c.
P. ^nSr,I. *rr^?ru Pf. wnpfr,I A. *nftre,F. ^f^nnr, p. F. *f^r, B.

"^ II Pass. ^-i*Jd (wi-r^ri),

Caus. ^T^rfr,Aor. W|f3*1^,
Des. vf

73. ^Hr wanj, to embrace.

T drop their nasal in the special

dams, '^safij,f*T*{svaflj tenses (Pan.vi. 4, 25). See No. 62.
P. ^nrfr,I. ^H^nnr u Pf. TO^ or *^nr (Pan.i. 2, 6, vart.),
I A. i.

2. ^^JofV/i:,
3. ^T^^J, 4. ^h^f^, 5. ^HHK|l^i,6. ^HBfldf,7. ^^VJ^f^, 8.
9. vi *s "| if,
F. *^'"rHn,
B. t"f"|l^II Pass, ^-rtlri, Caus. ^'iMPn, Des. fa HUM,
Int. flll^Tt|H, H|f"jr*.

74. g^/ro/7, to be ashamed, (^p.)

P. crnr, I. ^RW u Pf. 3. w^ (Pan.vi. 4, 122),6. ifar*,9. "ftft,I A. i.

"w^rqfM or ^?cff"tf,
2. ^Tcffwn or ^Tcf'-'m:,3. VH^fm; or XICIM, F. c^TMUjdor

B. ^fMMlg or dufly.
75. f?T5^
^y, to forbear.

P. fTTfffT|K
n Pf. frifdKfi^^.
I A. xMfdfrimv, F. fdfdfymri,B. rflfdP

Caus. H"nrfif.

Note " See No. 63. The simple verb is said to form if"Tcf he sharpens.

76. TTCT pan, to praise.

P. WRff, I. ^TWTCH II Pf. miimNlfi or TO (without^TT^).Thus likewise

Aor. ^mnjTftn?or ^rtrJT^rg1,

F. Miilif^uiii
or B. Miuif^^K
'Mftyujri, or Ruimltf H Caus.
Aor.
^iiiy*"riT, xN L/1
mil rj, Des. Int. ^M^n.
fimflUMrl,
Note " This verb (see No. 26) takes ^TR, but, as it is mentioned by Panini HI. i, 28,
togetherwith T^, with which it shares but the meaning of to praise,it is argued that it does

not take WT, unless it means to praise. It is likewise argued that ^T, if it takes WTTf,

does not follow the Atmanepada, because the Anubandha, the Atmanepada, applies
requiring
only the
simple verb, "^P^,
to mtM he traffics. Other grammarians,however, allow both

the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada. The suffix ^TR may be kept in the general tenses.
(Pan. ITI. i, 31.)
77. W\ kam, to love,(w%.)
P. -SBTO^,I. ^reT*nra n Pf. ^nrqf^
^OR^,I A. ^sr*rtai*ra
or
or (without*ni)
(Pan.in. i, or^FmfWr, B. chfHMlg or ofimftnft?
F. -SF^rHiTr
48, vart.), II

Pass, oh'ujri ("),

Aor. Caus. "*l*^fd,
XS"*I(H(Pan.vn. 3, 34, vart.), Des.

Note " This verb in the special

tenses takes ^HT, like a verb of the Chur class,and Vriddhi
(Pan. in. i, 30). generaltenses ^H^ is optional. Or, if we admit two roots, the one
In the

^W would be defective in the specialtenses,while the other ^RTH^isconjugatedall through.

262 BHU CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS.

78. ^nr ay, to go.

P. ^nrff, I. ^ntnr u Pf. ^nrNn* (Pan.m. i, 37), I A. i.^nftrftr,
2.

3. 'snfag'j
4. ^Tlftr^f^j 8. ^nftflc}or
5. vnPMm'qi,6. ^nfqmrfl, 7. ^nftr^Rfi^, "^,
9. ^ i PMH7T, F. ^rftnmfjB. -"(P*("flg Des. wftrfir^.
U Caus. *5"|imPri,

With tflCT it forms *Ic3T*nf he flees (Pan. vin. 2, 19),Ger. ^c*5l"f ; with H, JTTTif J and
with TTfr,m^i^n".
79. i^;ih,to aim.

P. ^, t*Nfc" I A. ^ff?,F. ^m,

I. ^tf " Pf. B. |f^" u Caus. t^rfif,
Aor. Jjftnr?^,
Des. ^ftrf^ff.

80. SRTST Ms, to shine, (^BTST.)

P. SRT^TW || Pf. ^GRT^T
or ehl3rMa ("326),I A. F. ^T%BTff U
^TSRTf^re, Caus.

Int.
^M^mffT,Aor. ^^chi^i^,Des. f^firf^ff,

8 1. SRT^Ms, to cough,
P. "Sfimff II Pf. "SRmf^ ("326) II Aor. SJM"hWr^(f372*).
Caus. "SRHRfiff,

82. fa^siv,
to serve, (^.)
P. ^ (TTf^w) u Pf. ftr^, I A. ^f^, F. ^PmMH ii Caus. "Rfr, Aor.

^rftr^?^,
Des. "ftref^w,Int. ^^q?r.

83. ITT yd, to go, (m^.)

P. 3. TTff, 6. TTTTT,9. irm, ist pers. sing,ft,I. imrt,ist pers. sing,it,O. 5nr,
I. ^1'iiff II Pf. 3. ^TT, 6. "i'iin, "rfhT, I A. i. L"a*riftf,
2. ^TTTWTJ, "si'iiw "c.,
9. 3.

F. TT^W, B. TTRrt? ii Pass, Aor. '^iiTf^Caus. TTItmfif,

jffafif, Aor. Des.
^^IJIM^?
i) Int. ^TTtinf.

84. ^ ru, to go, to kill (?),

to speak, (^.)

P. T3% II Pf. 3. ^^, 6. wriff?9- ^^Nt 9

I A- ^ffe? II Caus. iHJiPir,
Aor.

85. ^ ^e, to protect,

P. ^ II Pf. i. f^ (Pan.vn. 4, 9), f^frift,
2. 3. f,
I A. i. ^ft, 2.

3. -^r^rf,
F. ^i^Mtf,B. ^T^H^ u Pt. ^w: u Pass, ^fanr,Caus. ^m^Pn, Des.

Int. ^^Hff.
Note " It is one of the
1|verbs ; ^, to protect,forms ^RTT in the present,but follows ^
in the generaltenses.

86. to shine, (uiT.)

tt(^dyut,
P. tftaK U Pf. f^re (Pan.vn. 4, 67),lA.'^rertfTTF or mSJrit^
367: Pan. i.

3, 91; 55),F.sftfinirff,
in. B. ?ftf?r^ u
i, Caus. sftiRfiT,
Aor. ^^7T^, Des.
P^aiirtfK
or ^|^, Int. ^i"mff,
P^silPn ^eftfw.
Note " ^The verbs beginning with admit
^T^ optionally the II Aor. Parasmaipada(" 367).

87. ^vrit, to be, (^.)

P. ^ II Pf. *FW, I A. ^nrfre or ?n, F. ?rfff*nr
or ^flf, B. ^fNte u Caus.
 CLASS, ITMANKPADA VERBS. 263

or *nnrff (Pan.vn. 4, 7), Des. ftRfihw or f^pwfir,

Int.

Note " The verbs beginningwith ^, i.e. ^, ^, 3|V,^^, ^, are Parasmai-

optionally
pada in the desiderative (Pan.
aorist,future, conditional, i. 3, 91"93). The same verbs do
not take ^ in their Parasmaipadatenses (Pan. vn. 2, 59) ; as to J^, see Pan. vn. 2, 60,
and i. 3, 93.
88. ^^ syand) to sprinkleor drop, (FIJ.)
P. ^TTT II Pf. i.tKH^, 2. "*"JP"^
or *U4rt),4. "**iP""!"
or *mbr?. I A. 3.

6. ^^r^MMT ; or ^hf (6.^fMrWIdi),

or II A.
*TO^ (notw*q^), F.
or ^tenr or (Pan.vn.
j-MimPri 2, 59; see No. 87), B.^pftF or wnrfte u Pt.

t, Ger.Tqf^T or ^TWT (Pan.vi. 4, 31) u Caus. Tg^Trfir,

Des. frwrf^TT or

or ffc^TWfiT.
89. ip^krip)
to be able, (^g.)
P. "*^ II Pf. ^|"^)I A. 3. ^cfcfVjyor ^TR, 6. ^r*mirtl, 9. ^5*ffif,or II Aor.

Par. w"|Mi^, F. off^mrt or 4h"tmiH or P. F.

cfc^^iifrf, 2. "+f^4riIWor "fc-Hl" or

B. chfgMMl? or ^ft^ u Pt. ^rw: u Caus. 4-^ fa, Des. p^^rrMMff or

Int. ^Tc9nmT or ^f^eR^orn or

"i^ vyath, to fear,to suffer pain.

90.
P. srznr n Pf. f^g^ (Pan.vn. 4, 68),I A. *mfvjK,F. ^ftnqTT n Pass,
Aor. ^nqfa ("),(J462),Caus. uiviqfri1, Int. ^r^^r^,m^P^.
Des. fcf^nqMrf,

91. ^"T ram, to sport, (T"J.)

P.TH^; fa, ^TT, trft,T^, optionallyParasmaipada; fanrfTT (Pan.i.
with

3, 83) u Pf.^R,I A. ^TOT, after prepositions F. tsnr U Pt. ^ir:, Ger.

9|l"1^,
^r, "THTor"Tjq II Caus. fRftf, Aor. Des.frt^TT,
^CkHi^, Int.tcwjTT,
92. r^T tvar, to hurry, (PHH^I.)
The verbs *^jvar, r^ tvar, ffer^m",
^T^av, iT^mat?,substitute ^/iir, TJJtur,
"3\ u, l^mu (Pan. vi. 4, 20) before weakening terminations beginningwith consonants,
except semivowels,and if used as monosyllabicnominal bases. Hence "3JT":
jurnah,
7nihturnah, ^JfH srutaft,"^Rfftutah, ^TH mutah.

P.iror n Pf. rfi^t,

I A. 3. ^Hft.g,8. 15n^ft"4or *wfi^*,F/nPiniri'ii Pt. TJ^:

432) or wftlT: H Caus. H^frt ("462, II. 6), Aor. ^dH^ ("375 1), Des.
lf^"i|fw.
Hri.Mrd,Int. TTTrW^if,
93. sah, to bear, (^.)
P. ^w n Pf. it ,
I A. P. F. ^in
^raf^r, F. *f^ni7r, or *ter (J337, II. 2) n
Pt. *fte:,
Adj.*r?r: (^456, 6) u Pass, ^nprff,Caus. TnfrfiT,
Aor. ^*"!M^,Caus.
Des. Des. ftr^f^M^,
fTOT^ftr^fir, Int. ^I^^H, wr^ftf^1.
Note " ^T? and ^? change ^T into 'Sn when ^ would be followed by ^T,the result of the

amalgamation of ?[ with a followingdental (" 128). Pan. vi. 3, 112.

III. Parasmaipada and AtmanepadaVerbs.

94. ?^ rdj\to shine, (*T*|.)
P. Tnffff,
"?T II Pf. T^HT, XTT^ or "^ (Pan.vi. 4, 125),I A.
264: Birfr CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ITMANEPADA VERBS.

F. TTf*i "n? B.
*MflTj II Caus. tT*nrfJT,
Aor. 41 UN 1^9Des. f
"ff,Int. miW?
95. ^f^ khan, to dig.
P. JjRfff*II Pf-3.-"WI"T, 6.^3:, (f328, 3),I A. 4r"tfli^(a), ($348), 9. ^:
but Atm. m"Pf|g only,F. ^fVfiqfir,
B.
T3"Hffi^
or ("391) II Pt. TfTiT:,Ger.
^T*TTi^
or Adj. ^q: ("456, 6) u Pass. ^RTff or ^n*?T (f391), Caus.
JsrfVrrTT,
r, Aor. 'g^ffcRTT) Des. "ff, Int. ^MH
fVftlPHtPfl? or ^n?rmw (" 391)9

96. "" An, to take,

P. ^cfTTU Pf. i. Tf^TT (a), "T^^,9. "Tj:,I
2.
A. ^T^T^, Atm. ^T"W (J351),
F. P. F. -^T, B.
fficoifrr, Pgmi^ii Pt. ^TT:, Ger. ^^r, Adj. ^: u Pass.

Aor. Des. ftT^^fif,

^nrfft,Caus. ^rciflfj "rT,Int. ^^H^, irff^"c.

before terminations beginning with vowels that would ordinarily

^f guli takes "3i u

require Guna.

P. J^Prl
|| Pf. I.
^^9 2. ^7jf^^I
Or "pft"?,
3. ^^9 4' "55^^'5' 'J'vJ^*^C"'
Atm. i. "^^9 "^"5% ^|]f%^
2."c., I or Aor. J 362, F. JjP^uiPrt
see or

P. F.^rf^JHor 77^19Ben. Atm. nff $% or gHfl^(J345) n Pt. JT^:,Adj.n^n or

jft^l(^457) II Pass. ^plF, Aor. Caus. ^qPir,Aor.

^I1jf^9 "H"JJJ^H,Des.
^jWtfe.
("470),Int. "sft'j^fn,
98. f^r sri,to go, to serve, (fa^.)
P. ^irfir u Pf. i. frjpsrrpf
("), Pijpjrftpzr, 4. f^jforftR,
3. f^i^jnr, 2. 5.
II A.^r%f^ir^("371),F. -^fimfif,
B. ^ftim^ Aor. ^rerrfr,
u Pass, ^fturr, Caus.

Aor. ^ff^T^^Tr^9
TSITI^rflf, Des. f^l^rfn^PrJ f^T^ft^flT(J471, 3; jj3379 H" 3)5 or

Int. ^P^ffafiT.
99. TT"T y"/9 to worship.
P. inrfflr
u Pf. i. ^rr"f("),(^311), or ^ir? (^
2. ^iftnj 335^ 3)?4- ^Pi^9 5.

5. ^nn?9 6. s. ^MIK,
^i^rr"T9 7. v*"*ii"*f, 9. ^Hnwt, I Aor. Atm. i. ^?^f%, 2.

3. ^*n?, 4. ^my P^, 5. ^H^ii^i,6. '^mnfirii,

7. ^nrBstrf^j
8. ~"f*rse' (not
r, F. ^^rfw, P. F. ITFT (J124),B. ^fi^ (^393) u Pt. ^:, Ger. ^,
II Pass. ?^Tff, Caus. *{\^ Des. ftnj^flf,
nftr,Aor. ^j^fli(5fffT, Int.

100. ^t^vo/?, to sow, to weave,

P. II Pf. i. (a), ^fi|V| or

2. ^ cjisj,9. "35^:,I A. Atm.
F. P. F. B. u Pt. -TO u Pass.
, ,

* forms of
The Atmanepada will in future onlybe given when they have peculiarities
their own, or are otherwise difficult.
266 TUD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

107. ^ much, to loosen,

Certain verbs beginning with *|^[much take a nasal in the specialtenses. They are,

If^much, cf^/Hjp,
to to paint,fa1^
cut, f^ vid,to find, fc5^/"p, sich, to sprinkle,
^ff(kritt
to khid, to pain,ftsipi"
cut, f^TrJ to form. (Pan. vn. i, 59.)
P. *hrfffu Pf. *pfN,I A.
^ripn^, Atm. ^^ (}367),Des. ff^fffor jftspr
C$471!9)-
108. f^ vid, to find, (f^f.)
P. %fw u Pf. ftR?,II A.^ft^, Atm. vftnr,F. TOfif or ^firvrfk
(f332, 1 1)u
Pt. ft*.

109. fc"^fej",
to paint.

P. f^ft u Pf. fo^t?,II A. ^rfc5^(J367),Atm. II A. vaifaMW or I A. ^rfo*

(53*7).'
II. Parasmaipada Verbs.

no. ^"nf, to cut, (^ift.)

(seeNo.
P. f rTflf 107)n Pf. ^FW, I A. F. ^fd^fff or
^Toinff^, cF^flT (J337,
II. 2),P. F. B.funi^UPt. if*: II Pass.^m^,
SfifffrTT, Aor. ^-qohS^
Caus. omrfff,

or Des. f^^ifS^ftT f^^rfk (J337,

^r*fhfin^9 or II. 2),Int. ^T^mTT.
in. ^ kut, to be crooked, to bend.
Certain verbs beginningwith ^7 kut (Dhatupatha 28, 73"108) do not admit of Guna or

Vriddhi, except in the reduplicatedperfect, and

the causative, the intensive pada.
Parasmai-

(Pan. i. 2, i ; " 345, note.)

P. P.F. ffrinu
2."3ffH IA."*^fy F.^fradTT,
f*fw II Pf. i.^pite, Caus.

112. 'Z^vrasch,
to cut,
P. ^jfir(seeNo. 105) u Pf. "^af^^ I A.
i. T9^, 2. or TOr, ^d^fl1^
or

(f337,
rcfh^ 1. 2),F. wft^rfif or giv^Pir,
B. 'jw^ n Pt. ^ro:.

113. OF W, to scatter.

P. f%^ II Pf. 3. ^cfin:,6. "^rWTTj:, (Pan.vii. n), I A. *"hlOr^

F.
9. ^^F^: 4,

or (f340),B.
"onrhiflf wftr^U Pt. -sifhS:
u Pass. -SR^W, Caus.
Des.

Note " After ^^T and Tlflff,

cF takes an initial ^ if it means to cut or to strike : 3 M

he cuts, oM'qtaK. 5 UfTT(VpfHJV

he cuts or he strikes (Pan. vi. i, 140, 141). Also

he drops (Pan. vi. i, 142).

1 14. ^q^T spris,to touch.

u Pf. i|44|$i,
P.^Sfrfrr I A. ""n^HiBfl'?^or
"nwiHjTr^or F.
^trM"i^,
B. ^q^li n Pt. ?: II Des. ftFflT Int. qO^^rt

115. H^prachh, to ask.

P. ifSjfw(seeNo. 105) II Pf. i. ^JFSS, 2. *TlTfe*ror trfflF,9' MM'-^J(}3^)"

,
F. TT^rfw,
B.Tj^nr^n Pt. yv; u Caus.
Pass, ipa.q'ff, Trssnrfrr,
Des.

Int. V
 "PI

DIV CLASS, PARA8MAIPADA VERBS. 267

1 1 6. *JH*n/,
to let off.

u Pf. i. TOrif,2. *mP$"i or TOU

P. *J"^PiT (see F. umfn
No. 48),I A. wuiuflj^ \\

Pt
1 t. mr
*1 C " .

117. Hl^ m""/,to sink, (TOrt.)

(Div)insert a
^T^majjand *n^na.9 nasal before strengthening with
terminations beginning
consonants, except nasals and semivowels. (Pan. vn. i, 60.)

P. H-njfrt
II Pf. i. HH-nJ, 2. HHP"|VJor HH4-VJ, I A. 3. (J345)16. WlifW,
^HJK/1^
9. *mrsr:, F. nv^fd, P. F. ifar n Pt. ijnr:, Ger. "hfl or TOT ($438) n Caus.

*n5nrfff,
Aor. 'snPTWcT? Des. Int. 11*1
P*iH"jPrt, TJ*J

1 1 8. ^ ish9to wish,
P.
$*dPfl No. 31),
(see I. il^AdII Pf. ^^, ^fMV|,3. ^fa,4. ^f^T,5 i. 2.

6. ^j|*, 8. ^Tj9. ^H*"^ "^L"

7. ^^*T, ^*^fl" P. F. FFT or ^iMrti (^337"
F. ^fmHffl,
II. i) u Pt. ^?: Ger. ^yr or ^?n u Pass, ^q^,Aor. %ftr,
Caus. smjfa,Aor.

III. AtmanepadaVerbs.
119. ^Twn, to die,(*J^.)
^[mri, to die,though an Atmanepada verb,takes Atmanepada forms only in the special
and benedictive. (Pan.i. 3, 61.)
tenses, the aorist,

P. fa*m*, I.^rftnnr, I. ftnl u

O. f^t^n, Pf. i. **"m., 2.1^, 3. *nrrc, 4. "iUif ,

5. *WK? I A. i. ^njfa, ^^V|it,3. ^HJIT,F. HfVmfrf,P"

2. F. B. Jpcn?u
*inifw? Pt.

^TTJII Pass, ftnfif,

Caus. HK^frt,Des. ig^Ori,
Int.

1 20.
"jdri,to observe,
P. f^ u Pf. ^, I A. P.
^|Tr, F. ^fbRff, F. ^r, B. -^rt?u Pass.

Caus. ^Kqfd,Des. ^ft^ff("332, 5). It is used

chiefly with the preposition
'WT to regard,
to consider.

Div Class (Divddi, IV Class).

I. Parasmaipada Verbs.

121. f^ div9 to play,(f^J.)

P. ($143)u
^faifiT Pf. f^^"I P. F.^PMHI,
A.^n^ir, F. ^f^uifH, B. ^1"mj^
n

Pt. ^tf: or ("431, i)

(J442, 7),Ger.ijr^T ^K: or u Caus. ^^Prtj
^Pcfrii Des.

(j474)5 ^HliT.
f^^P"=mPng"*"Pir Int" or

122. to dance, ("Jlft.)

ifl^nrit,
P. II Pf. 3.
"Ji"|Prf ffHri, 9. I A. "i!Hrt7^,
*T"J3J" F. HPRvjPnor *if^Tn(}337"
II. 2) II Pt. TO: n Caus. ^ifir,Aor. ^T^TWrT or mlddii, Des. Pn^fdNPrior

* Final ^ is changed to ft(" no) in the special

tenses of Tud verbs,likewisebefore the
*T of the and benedictive (Pan.vn.4, 28). Afterwards ftagain
passive becomes ft^,
according
to Pan. vi. 4, 77.
M m 2
 268 DIV CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

r*i to grow old,

P. *Mfir* u Pf-s-^nrn:,9. snrs: (Guna, " 330) or w^: (f328, 2),I A.

or II A. (f367),F. irfbufir ^rcftafir(f340)5B. -sffii^

^nro^ \\ Pt. or

"fhS: n Caus. srcqfcr(J462, 25),Des. firaFoifrf firWlSPir

(J337? II. 3). or

124. $ftJo, to sharpen.

Verbs ending in ^fto drop ^fto before the *T ya of the Div class (Pan. vn. 3, 71); e. g.

^ftchho, to cut, ^U 50, to finish,"ft

do, to cut.

P. ^rfk, I. SET^, O. ^, I. 3115 3i^ (}329),I A. x^ruO^ II A.

n Pf. or

VTQITI,F. srrafiT,
P. F. snwr, B.
smn^ (J392) n Pt. $nw: %r: (j435) u or

Pass, ^rnrffj Caus. Des. f^n^rfrf,

tylJWffi, Int. ^TT^nTff.

125. BV 50, to finish.

P. ^ifr u Pf. *rcft,
I A.
^mr^, II A.
^m\9 F. ^r^fw, P. F. *nn, B. ^mi
("39^) u Pt- ^^ Ger- "^nir II Pass, ^(hm (" 392), Caus. ^N^fri, Des.
f^rafFj Int. ^H)i(ri.
1 26. tqv vyadh, to strike.
P. frofir (seeNo. 105) n Pf. 3. f^qm (J311),9. f%ftv:,I A. i.

2. ^r^rn^ft*,
3. '^i^uWli^,
4. *i"mr*9, 5. ^^mi, 6. %t"m^|i,
7. -"i"mr9T, 8.

9. W3ffi":, F.^TWfrT, P. F. ^|^T, B. f?nnr^

" Pt. f^t II Pass, f^m, Caus.

Des. fcj
'Ull'imfifj Int. ^f^ziff.
^4 rH Pff,

127. ^"Hp? to delight.

P. q^fn II Pf. i. 7nr",2. TTiTf^Tor rnn^r or rid1^ 3- Tnrt54. nqTMHor
I A. (J337,
^HHMTc^^wmflPi^ or I.
3) or ^Tdl^lf^(seeNo. 38) or II A.
F. or in^flT or
-rTfcNrffl1 ^x^fir, P. F. ITf^WT,
WWT or ^WT, B. ^Tr^ II Pt.
Pass,
-^w, Caus. irthrfir,
Aor. ^snr^tfi^Winh^,Des. frijHtfri
or or

Int. flOg"Hfl*
128. mw^, to be foolish.

P. u Pf.
g^rfir i. yft^, giftfi^
or
2.gjftmor yf^, II A. ^rp^ (J367,^rf^)t,
F. Hl^fri or iftf^BTftr,
P. F. Jf"vr or jffer("129)or iftfigHT
II Pt. yv: or ^: u

Caus. *ft^TfWj
Pass. *J?fiT, Des. Jj4jHjf7,^^P^Pfl"r *i^^4^?Int.
or

* Final and
^, changed to ^, lengthened before ^.
t The Sarasvati gives besides the second aorist the optionalforms of the first aorist

Wlsfh^
(" 337, I. 3, OTf^) or ^^ (" 360). According to Pan. in. i, 55

(" 3^7),the forms of the first aorist are allowed in the Atmanepadaonly; but later gram-
marians

admit
frequently forms as optionalwhich are opposed to the grammatical system
of Panini. Sometimes the evasion of the strict rules of Panini be explained by the
may
admission of different roots, as, for instance,in No. 130, where the first aorist Parasmaipada
^TSPfti^
given in the which
Sarasvati, is wrong in the Div class,might be referred to the
Kri class.
 DIV CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 269

129. tTJI nas, to perish,(*U3T.)

P. "f^Pd ii Pf. 3. ?T?TO 9. %^j:,
II A.
*R^ (ynfi?)
or w^n^ ("366),F.
?Tf?nqfff
or HVSflfd(seeNo. 117)II Pt. TO, Ger. ?Tyi or ^T ("438).

130. Tflir6am, to cease, (313.)

Eight Div verbs, fp(4am, Ip^dam,Vfi($ram,W{bhram,'^^kgham,
IC^tam, Jf^klam,
*V^mad,
lengthentheir vowel in the specialtenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 74.)

P. ^rmifffii Pf. 3. ^rro, 9. $3:,II A.

*^nn^ F. P.
^rfTOfir, F. jrftnrr
11

Pt. sitm ("429),Ger. 5TTRT or ^rfar^T

II Pass. ^TOW, Caus. ($462)
Jinqfif he

but
quiets, $TT*nnr or "ftrhe sees. (Dhatupatha19, 70.)

131. f^midf to be wet, (fH(H"l.)

f^mtrftakes Guna in the specialtenses. (Pan. vii. 3, 82.)

P. ^irfirn Pt. fro: wet, or aflpi:

(J333, D. 2*).

II. Atmanepada
Verbs.

132. ^^jant to springup, (*n

an substitutes in the special
IfTj'tf tenses. (Pan. vii. 3, 79.)
P. ^TOW n Pf. ^ (f328,3),I A. ^irfng or ^rftr (f413),F. irf^rir,
P. F.

,
B. "rf"iMl8 u Pt. irnn, Caus. HITITITT,
Des. r^HrnMd, Int. HMIMH or

133- *$Pa*9 t0 g"'

P.-quir ii Pf.^, I A. 3.wnf^(^4i2),6.^nrwnfff, P.F.^nrr,

9.^nrwir,F.TTWTr,
B. Tntfte n Pt. TO u Aor. ^MlM^, Des. fqwir ($471,9), Int.
Caus. in^nfrt,

tnrtasra (J485).
134. 'jv budh, to perceive.
P. yz" u Pf. ^v, I A. i. *$fw, 2. wj^rr:, 3. ^3^ or ^fHv, 4. ^p^,
5. 7. ^Jrwf^,
^JrMI^I,6. ^JrWIril, 8. ^T^, 9. ^RtHf, F. HWff. P. F. ^ST, B.

^Ert? U Pt.
^5: II Caus. ^"nrfw,Aor. '^T^sr^,Des. "J^TOTT(3^of the Div class

can never take intermediate 5, see J 332, 12; see also Kuhn, Beitrage,
vol. vi. p. 104),Int.

III. Parasmaipadaand AtmanepadaVerbs.

J35- "T^ nah, to bind, (^.)
P. TRrfTTor "|^ n Pf. i. TpfTf, 2. "TT3 (J130)or ^f^T, Atm. ^t, I A. i.

2. vfTtlwIt)
3. vtrnr^li^?
4. ^l^Tr^j 5. ^f"Ti^,
6. viniSl, 7. v""llr9Tj 8.^""i!", 9

Atm. i.^nrfw? 2. xsn^i:, 3. ^H^J? 4. wrfr^f^, 5. vvirai^Yy 6.

F. Hi^fri,P. F. TCT Pt. TC:, Ger. Pass.

8.
^Rf , 9. ^nranr, u "rfT,"?T?T u

Aor. Des. fHHrHF?

Caus. "fr^rfir,
^fr((r^, Int.
270 CHUR CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS ONLY.

Chur Class (Churddi,X Class).

Parasmaipada Verbs only.
136. ^ chur^ to steal.
u Pf.^torhnRR, I A. ^, F.^f^rfir, P.F.^fkftnn,B.
(J386) n Pt. Ger. ^frrTT
"*ftn;:, ll Pass. ^"?T,Caus. ^frfr, Des. "f*rkftrefi
No Intensive (f479).
137. fa cfo',
to gather,(fa*r.)
The changes which roots undergo as causatives,take likewise placeif the

same roots are treated as Chur verbs. Hence accordingto f 463, II. 6,
f% as a Chur verb, may form P. ^tprfTT or -mmCd, the vowel, however,
remaining short because, as a Chur verb, fq is said to be f*n^($
462, note)u
I A. B.
^Ml^Mr^or 'sreffa^, ^TOTr^.
-OHHII^or
Note "
Several Chur verbs are marked as folj,
i. e. as not lengtheningtheir vowel, some
of which were mentioned in " 462, among the causatives. Such are sf^to know, to make

known ; ^t^to pound ; to pound ; *HT, if it means to feed ; ^c to live.

to praise.
138. Wi^krit,
P. (j 463, 2) II I A.
qflfafrf ("377)-
^NtfTfr^ 'SrfagftS^ or

Su Class (Svddi,V Class).

Parasmaipadaand Atmanepada Verbs.
I.

(*pT.)
139. ^ su9 to distil,

P. ^fw, 1. 33 (j321 *)ji Pf. ^^, Atm. g^, I A.

2.
'^mTTh^jJ
332, 4);
cthe Sarasvati allows also ^PEutfh^(but againstPan.vn. 2, 72),Atm.
the Sar. allows also ^raf^^ (but see Pan.vn. 2, 72); F. ^ffrqfif,
P. F.

B. rTT ll Aor. ^wrf%, Caus.

Pass, ^iffi, ^R^fir,Aor. ^, Des. 40, Int.

Note The ^ of "Jmay be dropt before terminations beginningwith *f, and

"

^ or not

Guna
requiring ; but this is not the case if "Jis preceded by a consonant. This explainsthe
double forms ^J*J^"and and
^*^"5 ^J*jTt and
^f^J"J^
tj""Hj, and
^TCp^,^TCJ"T*T ^TCp^T; and

Atm. tj^^ or j 53^^

'p'^sf or ^nJ^f*"or
^p*l*r? ^*J*^Vji"^"jHf^^TCprf^.
The or

same rule applies

to the Tan verbs.

140. "N chi, to collect,

(f%"^.)
P. f%*ftf7r
U Pf. 3. f^R or 2. "N^^I or
N chili, (V^nfor, accordingto Bharadvaja
("335) 3)?fM^fMM or f^oRfrnzTj
9. f^^J*
or f^Pjt,
Atm. f^f'O)
or f^"^ (Pan.vir.

3, 58),I A. Atm. ^r%^,F.

vN^fcli^, ^ifiT, P. F. ^irr,B. "sffarn^
u

Caus. -^r^nrifor -qm^fn (j463, II. 6, and No. 137)9Des. f%^NfiT or

(Pan.vii. 3, 58),Int. ^chrir.
141. ^cT stri,to cover, facT"T.)
v '
e e \

P. ""ui fn II Pf. riWK. Atm. H^CK,

I A. ^^n^fif Atm. ^Mfl^y (not
,
 SU CLASS, PABASMAIPADA VERBS. 271

if wrfty or ^rwff ($332, 5, a rule which appliesto the Atmanepadaonly),

F. T*rfb*fir 332, (" 5),P. F.*tfr,B. *rfT^, Atm. *jprfa
or *rfWfr ("332, 5) u
Pass. ^riffi,Caus. WKljPri,DCS. PflfefliiPd,
Int.

142. ^ vri, to choose,

P. ^ftftr
n Pf. i. TOt (a), ^nr*,a.
3. ^TT, 4. ^r, 5. TW^, 6.

7. *pp, 8. TO, 9. *n|:, I A. wufti^($332, 5), Atm. wfty or *rofa ($340) or

(J337, II. 4), F. tcfYurPff
or qOmPfl, P. F.^ftin or *flwr,B. Atm.
ftnrn^,
(not tf'Oiflv,
Pan. VH. 2, 39) II Pass, ftnrif,
Aor. ^nrft, Caus.
Des. r"fqRMfrt,
P^clOMffror Mfrl,Int.

II. Parasmaipada Verbs.

143. f^ Az,to go, to grow.
P. f^ft II Pf. ftnrR (Pan.vil. 3, 56), I A.^H^, F. l^fTT,P. F.
B. ^hrn^n Caus. ^N^ri!,Aor. *H*fl^iix
(Pan.vn. 3, 56), Des. foiflMfii,
Int.

144. ^nfi 6ak, to be .)

able,(^rf
n Pf.3.^n^, 9.$^:,
lA.^rarn;,
F.^nsnir,P.F.^HRT n Pt.^r": n
Pass. $r^rff (^rw^T^Tff it can be done),Caus. $M*^frt, Aor. ^^0^1*^,Des.
%8(riT,Int. 3!i3("mri.
145. ^ "ru, to hear.
This verb is by native grammarians classed with the Bhu verbs, though as irregular. It
substitutes 5T sri for ^ s'ru in the specialtenses.

P. 6. 3ngir:,9. ^TTRfiT
sjwtfw,3. ; 4. spg^: ^?p: or u Pf. i.
5j^N (5), 2.

(?334"8),
3. ^5TR, 4- '^^, 5- UTHP' 6'^^:' 7"
I A. VH^Itfl^,
F. -^ft^TfTT,
P. F. -^sftin,
B.
T^Tr^ Pass. ^Tfr, Aor. *mifa, II Caus.

Aor.
,^IT^Rif ^r%^Ti^(J 475),Des. ^*"Mri(Pan. 3, 57),Int.
or I.

146. *rm dp, to obtain,(^TTJ.)

P. 3. ^TntftfTT,
4. ^TTR^I, 9. VHI"j"ifH, O.
I. "snNli^, ^i^*iir\,
I. 3.

Aor.^TT^,F.^r^^Pri,P.F.^TTTT H Pt.^mr: ll Pass.

Aor. Des. ^fir.

^rrftrm^,
III. Atmanepada Verbs.

147. ^T^ as, to pervade,(^1^.)

P. 3. ^^, 6. xM^mri^ VMIJgP^,^TCpn:, 3.
9. ^T^TT, 4. ^^t, I. i. 2.

7. ^i^nf^,8.^rrgj4,
O.
5. ^Hiiycuvjf,
4. ^Hi^cjP^, 6. ^TTg^nff, 9. ^i^c,rt,

I. ^rwl, ^f"N,
i. 3. ^renri,
2.4- '^w^i^tj 5- ^^^i^i,6. "^i

f n Pf. i.^r^ir, ^T^R 2. or ^rro, I A. i.

*
According to Pan. vii. 2, 13, we might form ^T" ; but Pan. vn. 2, 63, would sanction

j. The however,
specialrestriction, of ^^ to the Veda in Pan. vn. 2, 64, is sufficient

fix "HPi;t|
as the proper form in ordinarySanskrit. .
"
.
272 TAN CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS.

3. ^rn?, 4. 5. ^rrerrcrf,
^nivyfV, 6. ^rreprrf,
7. ^U4*ii\r,
8. ^rr^4,
9. vmsjn ; or i.

2.
P. F.
wf^rBK,3. ^rrfifre, ^rei or F.^ujirior ^fyWffjB. ^reffa?
^tfyrft, or ^rf^i'tfh?
u

Pt. *re: II Pass. ^5R7, Aor. ^n%, Cans. ^fRfr, Aor. Des.
^nf$|$li^,
Int. ^li^Mn.

Tan Class (Tanvddi,VIII Class).

All verbs belongingto this class are Parasmaipadaand
Atmanepada Verbs.

148. Tf^ tan, to stretch,(fT*J.)

P. rirflTri,
I. ^nnftf^,
O. I.
TT"prn^, if ; Atm.
*ftg I. vin^n, O.
P. TT^JfT,

I. ft-jnrn Pf. 3. Tnrre, 9. ^g:,I A. WR^ or ("348),Atm.

vriCHl^ 3. 'anrftre
or

^TrTiT ("3^9), 2. ^Trrf^r^T:

or w*n:, F. TTf^rfw,P. F. Tif?nrT,
B.
fr^rr^,Atm.
^ II Pt. cfff:,Ger. cT^n or TrfVn^TII Pass. TTnTff or in?m (J391),Caus.
Aor. Des. fffTfffiMfrf
^snftlfrl1^, or Int. HTnmf.
finrf^fiT,
Note " Verbs of the Tan class may raise their penultimate short vowel by Guna;
to go, TOfffWor ^ftflT. TnTT^^VTTr
:[TTrft
^TT "faffr,
Sar. n. n, 3.

149. TSfUTkshan, to kill,(^^.)

P. T^ftfw n Pf. ^m, I A. (J348*),Atm. 3.^reyftre
^Hjiifl^ or ^^9 2.

vnsjPiyBit
or
vf"t;x4n.

150. fspn kshin,to kill.

P. fopsrVfrr
or ^'iinfrr
u I A. -^ ^ iiil
H ,
Atm. ^Hfftiiy
or ^rftjw.

151. "Q^san, to obtain,(^.)

P. ^nfrfk II Pf. **R, Atm. %^, I A. ^"M^ (a),Atm. ^^f"T? or ^T^rnr (Pan.
11.4,79; vi. 4, 42).
153. f ^ to do, (sopr.)
^ A:n before weak terminations becomes kar,
"fi^ but before strong terminations ^^ kur.

Before "^vand Hm, and the *f y of the the Vikarana

optative, 7w is but
rejected, the

radical "3"u is not lengthened.

P. i. ^dfa? 2. wfiftr,3. ^rdfrr,4-

ft'? 5- f ^n, 6. f ^ir:5 7. f H:, 8

9. ftfw, i.^i^t^, ^rard:,3. ^R?d^,4. wf%, 5. ^ ^if,6.

I. 2.

8. ^Tf^ir, 9. ^5T^, O. -^$r, 9. -^|:5

vt 1. "grwftir, 2. f ^,
i.
3. 1.

5- f ^" 6- f ^f" 7- ^t3W, 8. f ^TT, 9. f % II Pf. i. ^^5R (a), 2.

4. ^^ 5. ^afg** 6. ^asg:, 7. ^^JT, 8. ^^a?, 9. ^"g:,I A. L^rar!, ^oRr^f:,

3 2.

4. ^?^rn%,5.^r^T",^r^T'fr,
7. ^GFI^,8. ^ToRrf,
9. ^rar^:, 4^^,
6. F. P. F. CRTT, B.

i. f^^TTO, "farer:,
'3.f^^Tf, 4. f^vTrer,
2.
5. f^^nw, 6. f^Miwi, 7

Atmanepada : P. i.f%", 2.

8. f ^, 9. I.i. ^Jf ft,

f%7T, 2. ^Tf^lT:, 3. ^If ^F, 4. ^Tf , 5

6. tinf,7. "KT^wt,8. ^i4, .

trrf u Pf. i.
274: KR! CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND iTMANEPADA VERBS.

to take.
157. q^;grah,
This root takes Samprasarana in the specialtenses and before other weakening terminations.
(Pan. vi. i, 16.)

P. Atm. Jl^lS,I. ^J]^lf^ Atm.

Jl^slPri, O. '"%i1""if^,
^]^"lri, Atm.

I. -M^sig (2. Atm.

*J^TO), J]^1rti
u Pf. i. *rarn" (")"
2. n^P?^ 3- *t"4's" 4-

5- 6.
*fJ1^3*" *PJ^iJij 8. "5PT^, 9. 'fjf*i I A.
7. *TJT(Vi, i. "HiJ^H("341 and $ 348 *),

Atm. Jf^iflsII Pt.

B. JpjffiT,
UlffaTj J^ld't, II Pass.
Ger. '"^lr"n
"^n,
Aor.

Fut. ij^luuior iJlP^uif) Int. lO'^n,

Des. PuM^fifT,
"c., Caus. ijl^^lPri,
(not"Tnrfe),
II. Parasmaipada Verbs.

158.*wjyd, to grow weak.

This root takes Samprasarana in the specialtenses and before other weakeningterminations.
(See No. 157.)

P. P**HIPrt,
I. I. Pn"iIg
O. ftnffaffi^
^n"i"in^ II Pf. i. PITH?,2. P*iPa*"xf
or Hn-rm^,

3. P;I[TMT, I A. ^TTmttlfl
4. f^ffsRT^T,
F. TMitrMirT, B. II Pt.
?i{l"4iii "n"TJ (i lift "S
9

would
participle be wrong, see Pan. vin. 2, 44 ; but it occurs in the sense

of old (Am. Kosha, ed. Loisel. p. 135),and in the Vedic Sanskrit; see Kuhn,
vol. vi.
Beitrage, p. 104), Ger. yqVll,"sirR n Caus. ^imjfd, Des.
Int. Wiflqri.

1^9. ^TT jndy to know.

This verb substitutes ^Rjd in the specialtenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 79.)

P" I. Vj^flHillTj
llllPlI, O. ^irl^mfl,I. *T1r('t3
" P^' 15v? I tf I fl 5 F.
I A. TBf'^i

IRT??^
P.F. gtifT,B.frnrn^or u Pt. $rrif!u Pass.^rnWj Aor,^^Tf^, Caus. $"iwPri("),
(see" 462, II. 15)*Aor. ^rPH$m^, Int. ^I^I^H-
Des. HHsilUrt,

1 60. ^V fiandh,to bind.

P. ^rtrPflj
I. ^ramTTTj O. ^nft^rnijI. ^m^ ll Pf" i. ^^V, 2. ^^(V^ or ^^^f or

I A. i. ^THirtf, 2. ^MTi^t) 3. ^THiiWln,4. ^n4ir^*r55. %i"n-s9 6. ^H^T^ITj 7. ^WTr^?,

9. ^wh":, F. 4wfnr, P. F. -snr, B. w"n^ 11 Pt. TO:, Ger. ^T n Pass.

T, Caus.*4"Rfrf,
Aor. ^R^fVfT, Des.fwwfk, Int.

III. AtmanepadaVerbs.
161.
^ vri, to cherish, (f^.)
P. ^Tjfft,
I. ^rpjifhT, n Pf. ^,
O. ^ftw,I. ^iftui I A. ^Rfts or ^^i!t" or
F. c(^ttTrior ^PCtaft,
P. F. ^ftjH or B. ^ft^Nf
^ftlfT, or ^tF II Pt. ^H: II

Pass. (VnH, Caus. "K4|fri(a),Des. fcmfmrt or f^OMW, ?%fff"c.

Int. ^ifl^rf,

Contracted forms of the Des. and Int.,^f"fwand ^t^jft.

 AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 276

Ad Class (Adddi,II Class).

I. Parasmaipada
Verbs.

162. W^ ad, to eat.

P. i.wfa, 2.wf?R,3. wf%, 4. wy:, 5. WTO:, 6.ww:, 7. win, 8. WTO, 9.wi(f7r,

1. i.Wfi*,
2.WT^. (Pan.vii. 3, 100)*,3. WT^, WT*, 6. WHlf, 7. WTO,
4. 5. WTW,
8. wrw, 9. WT?^J O. wirn^,I. i.w^rfVf,
2. w%t, 3. wij" 4. W^PI, 5. ww, 6. wwf,
7. WI"TR, 8. WW, 9. W^IJII Pf. i. WTS, 2. wrfi^T
"c., or substituting
^||, i. WTOI (a),
2. ^iMf^v,3. *IMI", 4. "iPB|"c,
5. "n^:, 6. insrij:,7. HOsi1*,
8. "nsr, 9. f^[:, II A.

i. WTO, 2. WTO:, 3. WTOT^, F. vid^fd,P. F. wwr, B. WVTH u Pt. wrrlf, Ger.

(Pan.ii. 4, 36) u Pass. wtHT, Caus. Des.

Aor. wrfi^TT,
tll^ilftv,

163. **\ psd, to eat.

9.w^rr^or w^: ($322!), I.WTJ n

O.^rnrn^,
I A.
w^rnrfh^,
F. ^I^PH, P. F. ^mn, B. ^rnm^ or ^m u Pass, ^ernnr, Caus.
Int. mmm^.
Des. riimi^Prt,
"^i^**rir,
164. ITT md, to measure.

P. 1. 3.
nrfir, 9. WTF^ or wg:, O. imm^i I.wr^n Pf. iw, I A. vmiul^,
xi"iif^,
F. m^rfw, P. F. iTTin, B. ^n^ u Pt. Ger. fa^r, "JRR
ftnr:, n Pass, iftirfr,
Aor.

^1*1 1 P*i, Int. ^RN^, HPflfTI

Caus. ^m^Tif,Aor. finl^Mri Des. ftw fff, or
,

165. m yd, to go.

P. irfw,1. 3. ^nrn^,9. wn"^ or
wg:, O. tiNi^, I. in^ H Pf. ^Sr,I A.
F. P.
in^rfir, F. wr, B. u Pt. inn: Pass, uro, Caus. m^O, Aor.
imm^ n

Des.
WT^nT7^" rMMitifn,
Int. *"i*4i*4n.

A:%a, to proclaim.
"i66. P.
^nfir, *TPTT^, I. O.
wnn^,
^n

I. ^n^ n Pf. ^^Wh II A.

wwi^, F. wr^ifw,
P. F. OTT7TT, B. or ^TTTHII Pt. ^TTif : II Pass. WHW, Aor. WWlfo, Caus.
^\m^
,
Aor. iBrfa^niT,
Des. Pm"Ml^fd)Int. KJIJUJIIM.

167. "^ vas, to desire.

This foot takes Sampras"ranabefore the strong terminations tenses, and in the
of the special

weakening forms generally.

P. ("125, 120),3. "ffV,4-'^w"
i.^fipr, "^rfty 2. 5-^5 6. TF:, 7. T^n, s. IT,

9. "^rftf,
I. ^R$t, ^r^, 3. ^nr^, 4. w?j, 5.
i. 2. WP, 6. wrrf, 7. Wr^"f,
9. xil^f^,
O. j^i, 1. 1. N^iifH,
2. 7, 3. ^j 4. ^^n^j 5- ^" 6- ^" 7-

*
'W^ inserts ^T before terminations consistingof one consonant.

t When f^ is added immediately

to the final consonant of a root, it is changed to
(Pan. vi. 4, 101); " 321, note I.

||In the tenses where ^KJ is "^is used instead.

deficient,
IF This is formed from WS to eat, a form
reduplicated of "^. (Pan. n. 4, 36.)
N n 2
 276 AD CLASS, PAKASMAIPADA VERBS.

8. fv, 9. -rshj
n Pf. 3. -3^, 9. grg:,I A.
,
F. ,
P. F.

B. tfli II Pass. ^qff, Caus. 413111ft,Des. Int.

1 68. frj;han, to kill.

This verb drops its final "^% before the strong terminations tenses, and
of the special in the

weakening forms if the

generally, terminations begin with any consonants except nasals
or semivowels (Pan. vi. 4, 37). Before strong terminations beginning with vowels,
^*^ han becomes f^ghn (Pan. vn. 3, 54). In the aorist and benedictive ^{vadh is sub-
stituted.

The desiderative,intensive,and the aorist passiveare derived from TEff^ghan,

the causative from '^^gJiat.
P. ffsJT,2. tfa? ^fff"4- f^Kj 6- 7- f*^ 8- Iffy !"
i. 3. 5- ^? ^o ^9 9- J-

^si^f,2. ^rj;, 3. ^^5 4- 'Wf^Tj 5- ^^TJ "~-^l"rfj 7- ^T? 8. ^TT, 9.

0.
f^TTf^,I. i. ^flftr,2. *ff^ (Pan.vi. 36),3. ^, 4. ^TFT, 5- ^
4, 6-

7. "^UT, s. ^ir, 9. ir$n Pf. i. "siTrnT (")?(Pan.vu. 3, 55), Hvfaq 2. or

3. "nrpT, 4. wftR, 5. wjrg:9 6. ^rcni:, 7. "rftr"T5

8. "nr, 9. ^t, I A. F.
^snnrtny
^Pnuirrf,
P. F. ^m, B. ^uni^ u Pt. ^in, Ger. ^FIT, "^m (J449) u Pass, ^am,

Aor. V5nnr"for -sr^fv(^407),Caus. inw^fir,Aor. ^nrhnn^,Des. nHiiiufd,Int.

^fil^ri or ^fHlnd(Pan.vn. 4, 30, vart., he sHfjT.
kills),

169. g yu, to mix.

Verbs of this class ending in 7 u take, in the specialtenses,Vriddhi instead of Guna before

weak terminations beginning with consonants. (Pan. vn. 3, 89.)

P. 2."5^f^,
i.Tfrfor, s.^tfw, I. i.
4.3^*? 5-3^*" 6.gm, 7.5^:, s.g^r,9.g^fir,
2.^1^:,
3.^!^,4- 5-^3^5 6. ^TfiTf,7-^1^9 8. ^fcT, ^3^"
1. 1. Hqifi, gff 3. ing, 4. ITR, 5. $w, 6. girf,
2. 7. irem,
,
8. gw, 9. ^^ u Pf. 3.

J A- ^^Nlt^,F. ^temPd, P. F. irf^in, B. Pass.

9- Si!*" "^n^ u Pt. IT: n

,
Aor. ^nnf^, Caus. TU^nrfir,
Des. ^fcT or ftRf^fff,Int.
170. "?5ru, to shout.
The verbs (Jtu, ^ ru, ^ stu may take "^ z before all terminations of the specialtenses

beginningwith consonants. (Pan. vn. 3, 95.)

P. i. THH or iXlfa,2. "^faor "cflfM,
3.
^f?Tor "tflfd,
4. ^: or ^Hrt, 5.

or ^t^n, 6. TETiTJor ^'"4ldt,

7. ^flftor ^Tc(lHt,
8. ^T or ^fa, 9. ^^fw, I. i.

2. ^wt or "W"fl'!,
3. ^Tul^or 41^11^,
4. ^1^ or ^ ^'^l"^,
5. ^T^ff or -"f^"ilw,
6.

or iH^ptflff,
7. ^T^R or ^I^1"T,8. ^r^ff or "mgjlti, O. ^TTf^or
9. ^H|v"c|^,

I. i. cm 2. ^f^
Pill, or ^Tlf^, 3. TU^ or Ijfhj,4. T^T^, 5. ^TT or ^Thr, 6. ?r or

^Thrf, 7. T^T^T, 8. ^7T or ^hf, ^5 U Pf. 3. ^TT^5 9- ^1*, I A. "

9.

F. tfrofir,P. F. tf^in,B. ^n^ u Pt. ^w: n Pass, ^nr, Caus. -n^fir, Des.

Int. rt^^nr.
^s^rfifj
Note "
The Sarasvati gives ^t'Slflfj
'STn^l^j and diTT; but see " 332, 4. It likewise

extends the use of ^ to "Jto praise.

171. 5 i,to go.

P. i. itf*,2. ufa, 3. ufir,.4.^:, 5-^rc" 6.^:, 7.5^:, 8. ^r, 9. 4fw, I. i.^wrf,
 AD CLASS, PARA8MAIPADA VERBS. 277

2. , 3., 4-" 5'W" 6.7l, 7. **T, 8. *W, 9.

3. *TJ, 4. WTR, 5. ^TT,6. ^?rf,

7. ^in*r, 8. ^?r,9. *nj n Pf. i. ^m (a),2. ^jftroor
^f" 3- ^rnr, 4. t^" 5- 1^:" 6- ^HJ:"7- 1^11'8- t*"9- tS:"* ^ i. wri (Pap.n.
4,45), 2. WTT.*,3.^nrn^, 4. ^BTTFT, 5. vnw, 6. ^rrrnrt,
7. wrw, 8. WTTW, 9. w*j:
($368),F. P. F. *cn,
*igfiT, B. ^n^ n Pt. JIT:,Ger. ^T, "^q n Pass, $irir,
Aor.
vunfa (J 404), Caus. Jmfr (Pan.n. 4, 46), Des. ffnrftrefir
(Pan.n. 4, 47).
But see " 463, II. i, and f 471, 4, with regard to this and cognate verbs if
precededby prepositions.
172. fo[ vid,to know.
P. i. *rfa,2. %fw, 3. ^ffc,4. "fry:, 7. fr?n, 8.
5. "faro,6. fVnrr,

I. i.*H 2.^: 75),3. ^

or ^ ($ 132^),4. (Pan.vin. 2,
6. ^if^nf,7. wf^^, 8. ^rf"w,9. "fa"^ or ^f^:,O. fwnj, I. i.^^if*!
(orf^hi
"c., Pan. in. i, 41), f^%, 3. ^, 4. ^T^, 5. f^W, 6. ftnrf,7. ^T*" 8.
2.

9. f^" n Pf. f^ or f^f^rn: ("326), I A. ^fh^, F. ^qfir, P. F.

B. fron^u
Another form of the Present is,i. $^,2. ^W, 3. ^, 4. "fa*,5. f^T^:,
6.

7. fr?r,8. f^, 9. f^: u Pt. f^Tft, Ger. faf^HI n Pass. fTOK, Aor. w%ft, Caus.
%^qfif, Des. fcfc^Hfri
Aor. ^^lfc""^, (Pan.i. 2, 8),Int.^fWff,
^ftr.

173. W(as, to be.

P. i. saftn,2. ^srftr,
3. ^ri%, 4. ^:, 5. ^r:, 6. ^r:, 7. w, 8. w, 9. *rfk,1. 1.

2. ^utilt,
3. 4. "ri*!*"5. ^rrer, 6. ^rrerf,
'iti^'if^, 7. wsr, 8. wref, 9. ^iti^, O. i.

2. ^n:5 3. w^, 4. ^TR, 5. WIT, 6. ^rnrf,7. WR, 8. **rnr, 9. ^:, 1. 1. ^rarrftr,

2.

3. 4. ^st^lq, 5. W)
^TCFJ, 6. Wj 7. 'Sfttiij 8. ^tT, 9. ^ II 'Pf. i. Wre, 2. *llftlV|,
4. ^nf^"4,5. ^sTRT^t,
6. ^rrcnjt,
7. ^H i fan, 8. ^TTO, 9. ^n^: ; Atm. i. ^r^, 2.

3. ^rw, 4. vnftm^, 5. xutu^i, 6. ^rr^Tif, 7. ^1^*15, 8. ^rfroi,9. ^nftRt.

174. if^mrij,
to cleanse, (ifSj^.)

This verb takes Vriddhi instead of Guna (Pan. vn. 2, 114); it may takeVriddhi likewise

before terminations that would not requireGuna, if the terminations beginwith a vowel

(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 122).

P. 2.mft|,3. TrfS ("124),4-^^"

i.HTftS, 5'W:" 6-^:" 7-3PIT:"8-^" 9-

or iTTsrfiT,
I. i.^Hi"f, 3. ^HI^,
2.^nrr^, 4.^npf, 5.^?, 6. ^npf, ;.^ip"T, 8.
9- "^pn^ or ^Hl^" I.
O. IT"III^, i. H'l^lfH,
2.
^, 3. TTf , 4. ITHTR, 5. Jp, 6.

7. HT^i^f,
8. ^, 9. iJafTJ
or inifgU Pf" i.HHI^,2. *i*iifnMor JRHT?, 3. "I"II*T, 4.

or *i*fifn^,
5. 'T^'f^tor H*TT^^I,6. ^W^' "r TTT^gt,7. "i"jn"i"i
or Pn"i,8. #1*11

jwrif:,
I A. wn*ff^ F. mf^rfir Hrafff,P. F.
or *nrm, 9. ^^t or or ^HinfT^, or

or inf T, B. ij5*TT U Pt. ip:, Ger. mfHHl or

iffT,"^ST, Adj.JRTPSrt"q:
or

t The perfectboth in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepadais chieflyused at the end of

the perfect.
periphrastic
278 AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VEEBS.

"pr: or *rnh (Pan.m. i, Aor.^srorfS,

113) u Pass.iprfr, Caus.

Des. ftii$|Pri
or Int. *iO*jTqn,
frmP"mPfl, *i*iife.

175. ^ vach, to speak.

P. i. ^fs*r,2. ^fsy,3. ^%, 4. ^^:, 5. ^3*r:, 6. ^s, 7. T^JH, 8. ^*r, 9. ^fir or
,
I. I. ^T^,
4H'"^93. Viqe^, 4. 4Hxcf, 5. ?T^N?,6. VSNchl,
2. 7. iSHVI, 8.

1. 1. q-qifri,
9. -*H"^*,O. ^TaiTt^, 2. ^fNr, 3.
^R, 4. ^TC1, 5. ^Ifi, 6. ^f? 7.

8. ^", 9. ^3* u Pf. 3- TWTO 9. ira:,

II A. *N^ (J366),F. ^rfif, P. F.
B. "fxMi^u Pt. T3": n Pass, ^nsqw, Aor. ^mfrl, Caus. m^^fri, Aor.
Des. Int.
fqms|fWj qiq-oin.

176. ^ rud, to cry, (^C.)

The verbs ^rwc?, W*{svap, ^^svas, ^^an, *i^jakshtake ?[i before the terminations

of the tenses beginningwith

special consonants, except ^ y (Pan. vn. 2, 76). Before

weak terminations consistingof 6ne consonant, ^ I is inserted (Pan. vii. 3, 98); or,

according to others, *" a (Pan. vn. 3, 99).

P. i. 3. Or^fn,
Ttf^fa, dfc(fa, 2. 9. ^fri,I. i.swO"i,
4. ^P^^:, 2.^0"1:or
3. ^T^I^,4. -si^r^,9.
sHCi"{tf^ or
^"$vi"
^- ^rf" i" !" ^*r"i,2. ^r^r^,3.
4. ^[TO, 5- ^^^ 6- ^Tfri"7- ^W, 8. 9. ^[
^fi[Tf, U Pf. ^d^, I A. ^Ttfefhor
P. F. df^in,B.
ftf^rfir,
F. u Pt. ^rr: u Pass. ^r", Aor.
^r^i^, ^m^
Caus. Aor. -*l^^^, Des. fv"^'r^*4fii
Clt^fd, or Int.
^ttft[^flf,

177. ?(^jaksh,
to eat) to laugh ||.
Seven verbs,^T^jaksh, to wake,
'3RT[jdgn, ^fX'"l
daridrd, to be poor, 1ftft(chakds,
to shine,

$n^ didht,to shine, T^ft ve^, to obtain,

sds, to rule,"c(Nt are called WTCcf abhyasta
(reduplicated).They take ^ifw ati and 'Snj atu in the 3rd pers. plur. present and
imperative,and ^l uh instead of ^fi^an in the 3rd pers. plur.imperfect(" 321 f).

P. 3. 9. *icjfn,
nf"ifPif, I. -wn^lf^ or O. if^ni^j
^nf^fr^, I. 3. "lifVS/li^
or

9. *nrw: ($321 1) " Pf. snrcy, I A. ^^HfT^, F. nfqmfri.

to wake.
178. *R*lJagrii (Pan.vi. i, 192, accent.)
P. i. miR,
*ii'i("ij 2. 3. in'ifS,
4. "rnpt,5. "n*pn,6. "srpprtj
7.

9. "iii|fri,
1. ^nrmt, 1. 2. ^rwnr:, 3. ^nrRt? 4. ^""MI"*, 5. w"n'ji
8. ^i"iiMn5 ^^I'l^J? O. I. i. ni'mfiu, 2. au^P^,3. "TTT594.
9. ni'jMii^j
5. STPTif, 6. "ii'|ni9
7. ni'Ki*i9 8.
ni'jflj9. '"II"K^H Pf. 3. ^IHNIK or TiiM"i-q"=tiK
(Pan.
in. i, 38),9. mrm^:, I A. (seepreface,p. ix),F.
Wfm'O'i^ ^TMlft.mPH,
P. F.

Mi"i(Vifi9
B. Pt. "ii'iPi.n! Aor. %i"iHiiP".
U Pass, vu'i^kn, Caus.
^iHiMit^ U .

Des. nriHinnC'iPif.No Intensive.

* The 3rd pers. plur.presentof ^does not occur (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 120); accord-
ing

to others the whole pluralis wanting ; accordingto some no 3rd pers. plur.is formed
from "T^.
||*TSTto eat, from ^; "STWto laugh, from ^.
 AD CLASS, iTMANEPADA VERBS. 279

179, ^ft^Tdaridrd, to be poor. (Pan. vi. i, 192, accent.)

In ^(V."l
daridrd the final ^T? d i* replacedby ^ " in the specialtenses before strong termi-
nations

beginning with a consonant (Pan. vi. 4, 114). Before strong terminations

beginningwith vowels the WT d is lost (Pan. vi. 4, 112).

^ftfclfa, e^fVgifti,
P. i. 3. sfVfcifw,
4. {OJgq:, 9. ^ft^fif,
2. I. 3.

9. w^fi:, O. ^frf^n^
6.^ftf^?fT, I- i.^V$if"u" 2.

5. ^jfl, 6. ^cfcfl, 7. qgitf, s. ^fcd, 9. ^pj " f' 5" "r

(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 125),I A. n^fljfl^or

"j"*(X$itfl^(Siddh.-Kaum.
vol. n.

p. 126),F. qftjftmrd (Pan.vi. 4, 114, vart.),

P. F. qfljfrdl
(not

1 80. to command,
jTT^"fo, (^n^.)(Pan.vi. i, 188.)
^H^ yds ia changed to fifl^
sis before weakening terminations beginningwith consonants,
and in the second aorist. (Pan. vi. 4, 34.)
P. $11(\W,2. ^llfw,3. ^llfw,4. f^T^t,9. ^iitifn,
I. i. VIJIIJJ,2. ^T|Tn or
i. Vjm^,
3. ^[\\ ("132),4- *%^5 6. ^Huei, 7. ^n%^,
5- ^ffifTF, 8. ^fifTF,
9. ^n^:, O.
1.
f^i'Mif^, 1. ^ntufn) 2. ^iifv($132),3. ^rraj,4. ^n"iq, 5. %?, 6. fifref,7.

8. f^r?,9. ^iitig II Pf. 3I3IIU, II A. F. 511^1^^,B. f^p"ni^

^ff^rm^, II Pt.

Pass, f^rir,Caus. ^m^ffl,Des. njf^nftmrH,

Int.

II. Atmanepada Verbs.

181. ^T8J chaksh, to speak,

P. i.^$, 2.^T$,3.^?, 4-^S%5 5. ^icn^,6. "qtsjiff, 7. -swti^,
8.

1. 3. ^n?, 9. w"T8jTf, O. ^nfld,I. ^?f n Pf. 1"^%.

The other forms are suppliedfrom ^n or "FJTT,the Red. Perf. optionally,
(Pan.n. 4, 54, 55): Pf. ^ft a II A.
^^ or "w, F. *nim(ri or "w, B. ^rnm^
or ^i|1^, or Atm. ^l"1".
182. $^", to rule.

The root t^i"take" ^* before the 2nd pers. sing,present and imperative(Pin. vn. i, 77).
^ id and IT^jan do the same, and likewise insert ^ i before the and pers. pliur.
present, [imperfect,]
and imperative(Pan. vn. 2A 78). The commentators, however^
extend the latter rule to $3" See notes to Pan. vn. 2, 78.

P/x.^a.^,3.$M.*(^t3.H^

183. ^TT^ ds, to sit.

P. *n^, I. ^rrer, O. wrfhr, I. ^rcrt " Pf. ^nrrN^ (part,

^nf^, Pan. vn.

2, 83),I F. ^ftr"r".
A. "*rftre,

!84. ^^, to bear, fa.)

P. ^, I. ^W, O. I.
f^fhr, i.
^ (Pan.vn. 3, 88), ^, 2.
3.^TT, 4-

5. ^nrr, 6. ^nrf, 7. ^TR|, 8. ^i4,9. ^irf " P" g^, I A. ^wf^" or

280 AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ^TMANEPADA VERBS.

("337" I- *)"F- *fo*ft or B. *farrte or *"trte II Pt. *pr: (Pan.vin.

*farft, 2,

45) II Pass. ^Tff, Aor. ^rarfa, Caus. ^T^nrfcTj

Aor. "3WJT^, Des. ^{JM^(Pan.
vin. 3, 61),Int. ^frTOf.

185. 3ft si, to lie down, to sleep,(tfH^.)

The verb Tffts*
takes Guna in the specialtenses (Pan. vn. 4, 21), and inserts ^r in the 3rd
pers. plur.present, imperfect,and imperative.

P. i. $nr, 2. tre,3- W, 4- sfat?5- snn$, 6. ^iw, 7. $*!, s. $d, 9. $t^ (Pan.

vii. i, 6), I. i. ^njrfa,2. ^fan, ^%?r, 4. ^r^NfV, 5. ^ruivji,6.
3.

7. 8. ^r%i4,
-"ii$Hr^, 9. ^ncw,
O. 1.
yriftTr, SR, %^, 3. ^nrf,
1. 4- snrra^, 5. 2.

6. 3NMI, 7. 8. ^?4, 9. ^cTf II

"5nTTH|, Pf. f^^, I A. ^ff^, F. ^l^mri,B. ^nftlfII
Pt. ^rfinr:n Pass, ^i^w (Pan.vn. 4, 22),Aor. ^^!Tft?,
Caus. tymqPri,
Des.

f^rftn^rT,
Int. ^(i^("^7T,^i^ifn.

1 86. ^ i, to go, (^.) (Pan.vi. i, 186, accent.)

This verb is alwaysused with^SrfVa^i,
in the sense of reading. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 1 18.)

P. ^rifir,
I. 3. ^^w, 6. "swmri (Sar.n. 5, 8), 9. ^wnr, O. I.
^nrtifhf, i.

2. ^svhsf,3. "t*fl'nfj
4. ^rwm^%, 5. ""t*n"4i'qi,
6. ^?^hrnrf, 8. ^nftt^j
7. ^itq*ti"t^,

II Pf. ^ftnfit (Pan.n. 4, 49), IA. 3. ^F, 6. ^T^nTTT,9. ^iffi,or '

3. ^fiflift^(Siddh.-Kaum.
vol. n. p. 119), 6. ^rapffar?rf,
9. ^UJJ^MH,
F.

Cond. ^!W5fiT or ^?upfNlT, P. F. ^ WT, B. ^iWte u Pt. ^^TT: ll Pass.

Aor. ^iqinftl or Caus. ^mnmjfir, Aor. ^rtqifqxCfor

^nfllftr, ^wrifhrrc, Des.

or

III. Parasmaipada and AtmanepadaVerbs.

187. fsr* dvish, to hate.

P. i.^rfrT)
2. s f"4f
"
s-iffe?
4. r""f:,
I.
9. rsr^ffl, i.^r^? 2.^5?s7,3. ^r"r, 4.

9. ^ifir^ or ^rf?"jt (J321 j), O. (Vmir^,I. i. ir^T'fiir,

2. firfr,3. ^g, 4.

5. fin?,6. %irf,7. ifanr,8. fe?9 9. feMg u Pf. f^^r? I A. ^iV^f^jF.

P. F. iter, Atm. fir^te u
B. "fe'Hrn^, Pt. fgr: n Pass, fem ij,Aor. ^ft, Caus.

1 88.
^ c?w^,to milk.
P. i. ^tftr, vrf% 2. 3. ^ffrv,4.55^9 5. g7^ 6.
grv:, 7.5^:, 8. |?v, 9.

I. I. ^n(l'55
2. ^Wto^,3. ^ImoFj 4.
O. d^llri I.
^fl^SI'j ,
I. (fl^lfWj
2. 5^^J 3'

"^I'^i^j
5. 3?^) 6. "{Tf"i*f, 8. 5^3 "^^'5^^5 -^A.*^nr^Tf "c. (see
4. ^VT, 7. 5^5 9- "

^ 363),F. Vl^frt.
189. 5f|stu, to praise,(l^T.)
P. i. wf*T or ""{l("i(seeNo. 170)?2. ^n(V or ^cilPM,3. wfw or ^sNtfrf,
4. ^J^J

or
^qi^J, 9. ^^nfT, I. i. ^?^rT^T,2. ^Wr. or vi'tciqlt,
3. ^"wlii or ^'W "jlTT4. ^t^,
or

r, 9. ^ta^^, O. ^tPffif Atm. ^5^ftw,I. i. ^KNiPtij

2. ^3f^ or ^ti^r^,9.
,
282 HU CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS.

194. # hri, to be ashamed. (Pan.vi. i, 192, accent.)

P. 3. 9. ftf"fn (Ino),
fnifr,6. ftrrhr:, I. ^fn^, O. ftr^mf, I.
r^NdiK, I A. ^fhffy
F. jvfo, P. F. fTTT,
Pf. 3. ftfFTO, 9. ftffig:
6. ftrfFfij:, or

B. ^far^ u Pt. ^Nr: or jft: (Pan.vni. 2, 56) u Pass, -g^im,Caus. t^^fif,

Aor. ^(W^ii^, Int. %]ffaiw.
Des. ftrgfafcf,

195. TJpri,to fill,

to guard.

This verb,and others in which final ^ri is preceded by a labial,changes the vowel into

"3^ur,except where the vowel Guna

requires or Vriddhi. (Pan. VIT. 1, 102.)

P. 3. ftnift,
i.fanfS, ftreft, 2. 7. fn^:, 8. ftr^S,
5. f^":, 6. ftr$w:,
4. ftr$%:,

9.
1. 1. -^rmu, 2.^rfTO (or^rftro, Sar.),
f^tfrr, 3. ^rftR: (or'srftnro^j
4.

5. ^ftr^w,6. ^rf^wi,7. ^rf^H, s. ^PM^W, 9. ^rftnr^t, fM^MFi^,

O. I. i.

3. ft1*!, 5-^^ 6.fl^WT,

4-"fr1|rcre,
, 7. frlRIH, S.ftr^S,
9.f^fC3II Pf. i.

("), MMfi.%3. TTW, 4. ^itf"^,5. 4Hvg: "r ^fr^:,6. sn^g: or T"ni^:,

2. 7. trqfbr,

8. TTMT, 9. -q^: or
ijj:(Pan.vn. 4, n, 12), I A. ^RTTh{,F. "qftwfk (0,P- F.
^ftcTTor TtftaT, B. ^"T^u Pt. ^w: (Pan.vni. 2, 57),^":,and ^fbr:are referred

("442, 7),Ger. fjtr,

to TJT "f^ n Pass, ^ffir,
Caus. ^R"lOr,
Aor. ^M)^, Des,

y^frr filMf^fri(?),
or Int. M^Sn, ^mfS.
derived from
Several optionalforms are another root ij,with short ^j.

Thus, P.
3. 6. fmjrit,
faxrfff, I.
9. Pnufri, 3. ^fqM:,6. ^rfrpjlff,
9.^rftnT^t,
O. fuTJ^m^
U

I A. B. ftnm^
^mtff^, u Pass, fma ("390),Int. ^hm ("481).
196. fT hd, to leave,(^ft^Tcjr.)
Reduplicatedverbs ending in ^TTa (exceptthe Jlghuverbs,see " 392 *) substitute \ifor ^TTa

before strongterminations beginning with consonants (Pan.vi. 4, 113). The verb ^T hd,
however, may also substitute ^i (Pan. vi. 4, 116).

P. i. "i^ir"i,
2. "fi"Tftr, 4. ir^N* ("),
3. 'STfrfrT, 5. "5?^^:("), (?),
6. "snrfrrf: 7. *\%\*:

(*),
8. "nrfa (z),
9. "fffff,
1. ^r"r^t, 1. 2. w*ff n, 3. ^nr^n^, 4. ^"i^1^ (z),9. ^nrj:,
O.^ni^ (Pan.vi. 4, 118),I. t.iffTf^, ^f^ 2. (?)or ir^rf^(Pan.vi. 4, 117),
3. 4. ST^TW,
"TfTiJ, 5. W^TT (?), (f),
6. '^liii (?),
7. "ST^TH,8. '^^Trf 9. "5T^ U Pf. i. "T^I,
2. *if^xfor 5fin% 3. "ST^,
4- *tf"" B- "5^^""6- '5^*" 7- 'T^'T,8. "5Tf, 9. I
"Tj:, A.

,
F. gimfri,P. F. frwr, B. ^ITT^
u Pt. ^hr:, Ger. f^n (Pan.vn. 4, 43),
II Pass. ^hTff,Caus. ^nwfrf,Aor. '^"5^^, Des. fiTfmfff,
Int.

,
1.
3. TO (or^ro^),
6.

1. ^rcrftr,
2. 5^, ^r|,4. ^^o^, ^, 6. s^rif, s.
1.
3. 5. 7. ^^TH, ^f, 9. ^ u

Pf. i. ^TR, *nfH I A.

2.
'STK^,9. ^nt^ (1 3^4),F. ^^rtaifTT,
P. F. ^rtr,
B.

II. Atmanepada
Verbs.

198. HT md, to measure, (TTT.)

4. (HH)"I^,
P. far, 2. fwt^r,3. fa*ftw, 5. f^TT^,
i.
7. (*"HlH^,
6. "ftTTTff, 8.
 HU CLASS, PARA8MAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS. 283

9. f*i*ifl,
1. 1. v 1*1 1*1, 2. ^rn-nffan;,
3. *s 1*1*1 in, 4. TtmHlqff , 5. 6.
^ti*f*ii*"i,

3. f"i*i1
y.ufHNlnfig, O. f*i*fliT,
9.*i(*i*in,
S.^lfinftttf, I. i.fira,f*fHl*J, "i,4 2.

5. ("iir^i, 7. ("i*ii*i9"
6. famiii, 9. fa*infn
8. f*i*i1l4, Pf. i. *TO, a. iffim,
3. *TO,

5. *TOT^, 8. *rf*ii",
6. *r*rnr,7.*rf*7*i^, 9. "rf"TT,A. i.^nnftf,
I a. ^nrrwr:, 3.

4. W4l440g, 5. ^HHIWll, 6. xi *i i"i ml, 7. xWlwfjg, 8. xWIUf, 9. WHI4A, F.

P. F. mwr, B. inwtY n Ger.

Pt. fair:, "*TTO (not.rhr,Pan.
ftrwr, vi. 4, 69) u

Pass. "frtw,
Aor. wnfa, Caus. Int. ^*T^iri^.
Hm^fd, Des. "ftn^rifr,

III. Parasmaipadaand AtmanepadaVerbs.

199. ^ bhri,to carry, (ypr.)
3. f%"rfS,
(V"if*i,"ftwf^, 8. ^p?,
P. i. 2. 4. ftnj^t,
5. fw*pn, 7. ^*prt,
6. fw*jirt,

Atm. i.fw,
f^"ifiT, 2. fa*j^,
3.f^T*i7r, Atm.
9.wfir*T^:,
L3.^ff*r:,6.^ir*pn,
9.

3. 6. wf^"jnrf,
^sf"f*jrT, 9. -wfW*j?r,
Atm. ^^ftw,1.
O. f^^^ifl, 1. 2. fw*jfr"
fwH^ilVi,

3. fwt n Pf. i. WR (5),2. W^, 3-^n:, 4- fr*p tf334J P^n. vn. 2, 13) or
fir*Kh"*ii? Atm. yfa n
I A. ^HT^, Atm. ^ryr, F. HiX^fy,P. F. *Sr,B. f*jnrr^,

Pt. ^jw: u Pass, ftnnr,Caus. HrCTflf, if it follows the

or fwft^fir,
Des. "yjtrfir,

Bhu class (Pan.vn. 2, 49),Int. Twhnfr,^*"f".

200. ^T da, to give,(^T^)

The verbs (" 392*) drop
^J^Att WT d before when
strong terminations, other reduplicated
verbs (seeNo. 196)change "VI d to ^f. (Pan. vi. 4, 112, 113.)

P. i. ^rf*r, "^tfa,
3. ^rfff,
2. 4. ^s1*,5- ^*K" 6. ^:, 7. "f?n,8. ^ro, 9. ^fw, Atm.

i.^, 2. ^W, 3.^, 4- ^Sft,5-^T^" 6. ^TF, 7.^W%, 8.^|,

9. ^7T, I. i.

a.^^r:, 3.^^, 4-^sr, 5-^^" 6- ^[^t, 7- *5*r, 8. ^r^, Atm.

9.^*^5:, i.

2. vf^fm;, 3.^?^, 4. ^pgrfl^,

5. ""^|Vj|, 7. VH^r*, S.V^f,
6. SH^^Irtl, 9.

O.
^rr^, Atm. ^TT, 1. 1. ^Tftf,2.^ff(Pan.vi. 119),3. ^TiJ, 4. ^T^,
4, 5.

6. ^rf,7. ^T*T, S.^tT,9. ^, Atm. i. "" 2. 4-^'^t,5-^"t 6-

^r^T, 3-^rf,

7. ^Rt, 8. ^, 9. ?[^n II Pf. i. ^, 2. ^T or ^TO, 3. ^, 4. ^f^, 5.

.^,9.^5:,Atm. i.^, 2.^f^,3.^, 4-^%t, S-'tT^*

9-^C, II A. i. ^f, 9. ^j:, Atm. ^f^(see p. 184),F.
,
P. F. ^TTTT,B. ^T\9Atm. ^nrte n Pt. ^: (J436),Ger. ^T, "^T n Pass.

r, Aor. ^rftr,Caus. ^Ttnrfir, Int.

Aor. \H^!^M, Des. f^wfir,

201. VT^M, to place,

This verb is conjugatedlike It should be remembered, however, that
^T.
the aspiration
of the final v, if lost,must be thrown forward on the initial ^;

hence 2nd pers. dual Pres. vw: "c. ("118,note). The Pt. is f^in,Ger.

O O 2
284 KUDH CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND iTMANEPADA VERBS.

.
"fairnij,to cleanse,

The verbs f^T

f"T^wy, vij,to separate,and f^^vish,
to embrace, take Guna in their

(Pan. vn.
syllable.
reduplicative 4, 75.)
if) having short medial vowel do not take Guna before
Reduplicatedverbs (abhyasta," 32 a

weak terminations beginning with vowels in the specialtenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 87.)

P. i. ^frFT, %%ft|,3. %%fo,

2. 9. ^ftnrfcT,
I. i. ^H(HJT, 2. ^R^T, 3.

7. ^Rfar*, 9.
I.
O. ?rft5*n^,
"3Rfa*j:, ^fcnnfil, ^Tf*I, 3. %^{ i. 2. II Pf.

Atm.
I A. ^r%^ or II A. wftnr^,F. %^r, P. F. TPJT, B. ftrwiTr,
Caus. ifinifiT, Int.
Aor. ^cftftnn, Des. frriiTT^fff,

Rudh Class (Rudhddi, VII Class).

I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

203. ^^rudh, to shut out, (^fv^.)

P. ^rfs, I.
^^^, O. %"m^, I. ^| u Pf. i. ^dv, 2. ^df"rzr,3
7. ^ftm, 9. ^^:, I A. mhtfh^or
II A. W^"T^, Atm. ^^, F. P.
TtwfiT, F.

B.
^UTT?^,Atm. ^ft^ II Pt. ^gr:, Ger. r, "ui u Pass, w, Aor.

Caus. dv^rfw,Des. ^^^rfiT,

Int.

II. ParasmaipadaVerbs.
204. f^rs"'s^,to distinguish,
P. i. f^nrf^j 2. f^Rfsj,3. f^Rfi?j4- f^ftj 5. f$s*5 6. f^r?:,7. f^far:,
8.

9. frfr^frr,
I. i.^rf^Rw,2.^r%^7, 3.^r%"T7,4. ^if^r^,5-^ff^? 6.

8.^rf^F,9. ^rf^fa^,
O. f^T^TTi^,
I. f^R^rfirr, f^ifj(orf^fe),3. %"Tf i. 2. II

fTO^, II A. ^%^, F. ^T^TfTf,

P. F. $FT, B. f^TTr^
II Pt. %* : n Pass.

Caus. ^N^fif,Des. f^rfjfTW^T?

Int- $%^W? $^rf?.

hims, to strike,
P. ff^%, 1.
^r^ri", ^T%H: or ^rf^r^,
1.
3. ^rfi^n^(J
2.132),4. ^rf^^, 5
6. ^r^wl, 7. 'srf^Rj 9. ^rf^TF^, f^^rn^,
8. ^rf^^r, O. 1. f^H^ifn,2. fi?fa,
3. P^HI^
u 1.

Pf. ftrf^r,I A. ^^, F.

f^ftnn,B. f^^nr^u f^ftnqfir,
P. F. Pt. f^ftnr:n
Pass, f^qw, Caus. f^WrT,
Aor. ^rftff^^,
Des. ftrf^ftRflf,
Int.

206. H"^ bhanj, to break, (n"5ft.)

P. wrfti, I. ^TVROF, o. 45?n^,I. *?rf n Pf. ^r^nr, I A. F.
"3wreffy "

P. F. H^ir, B. ^5^ u Pt. *nr: u Pass. HT^, Aor. "gwftr Wftr (J407),
or

Caus. "RPTfw,Des. f^l^frr,Int. "W^Tff, ^H%.

^^ anj,to 207. anoint, (^^.)

P. ^Rf?R, I. ^TT1?^,
O. ^5^? I- Pf. ^TPTW, I A. ^iftmflf
^R^l U ^TTWfyF.
or ^flfif,B. ^^n^TH U Pt. ^TSRt, Ger. ^rflTi^nor ^RT or ^TW (Pan.vi. 4, 32;
J 438), 0:5r5?Tn Pass. ^5*Tff, Aor. ^rff"r, Aor. ^srffinrf,
Caus. 4*T*lTif, Des.
 RUDH CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 285

208.
Tft trih, to kill,

This irr instead ofHSna before terminations with

verb inserts ne
weak beginning consonants.

(Pan. VH. 3, 92.)

P.
i.
if^a, 2. yiHVr, 3.
ipbfz, 4.
^3f:, 5. 37:, 6. ^n, 7.
^r:, 8. ^r, 9.

I. 2.^5^, 3-'"l^"" ^TT,

i.WJ?rt, 4-^J3^* 5. ^TJ7, 6. 7.W?pr, 8. ^Hpf, 9.

O. ij'Ul^, 1. 1.
J51^if"i, 2. "jfT, 3.
"5^ ii Pf. inf%, I A. v?nff?^or v^nn^,
F.

ff^frf, P. F. frftur Trtr, B.

J[m\ H
Pt.
77: n
Pass, Aor. ^nrff, Caus.
or or
-^nr,

Aor. Wdrt or "Wffl"i, Des. fflflflMfrtor fdi^frf, Int.

III. Atmanepada Verbs.

209. ^ indh, to kindle, (fa^ft.)

or ^, 1."^ or"Vv, O.^rhr, I. i.^A, 2.^T, 3.^f or ^ n

Pf.

(or ^, Pan. i. 2, 6), I A. VfV*, F. ^n^T, P. F. ^ftmr, B. ^nrfr n

Pt. n
Pass, Caus. nrfff, Des.
^f: ^um,
 APPENDIX II.

On the Accent in Sanskrit.

" i. Although in Sanskrit the accent is marked in works belonging to the Vedic period
only, yet its importance as giving a clue to many difficult points of grammar is now so

generally acknowledged that even an elementary grammar would seem imperfect without at

least the general outlines of the system of Sanskrit accentuation. I determined therefore

in this new edition of my grammar to mark the accent in all cases where it seemed to be

useful,but
practically in order not to perplex the beginner with the marks of accent, I have

added them in the transliterated words only, so that a student may still learn his grammar

and his paradigms in Devanagari, unconcerned about the accents, until the accents selves
them-

attract his notice, and enable him at a glance to see cause and effect in grammatical
operations which otherwise would remain unintelligible. Thus if we look at trdyah, tres,
but tribhih,tribus, and tertius
tritiya, j at emi, I go, but imdh, we go ; at bddhdmi, I know,
but tuddmi, I strike ; at vdktum, to speak, but uktdh, spoken, we see at once how the position

of the accent, either on the radical syllable

or on the termination, influences the strengthening
or weakening of the base, and how this strengtheningand weakening rested originally
on a

rational and intelligible

principle.

" 2. The accent is called in Sanskrit Svara, i. e. tone, and according to the description
of native grammarians there can be no doubt that it was reallymusical. It meant the

actual rising and fallingof the voice, produced by the tension, the relaxation, and the wide-

opening of the vocal chords; it was a musical modulation peculiar to each word, and it

corresponded to what we call the singing or the cantilena of the speaker, which, though in

modern languages most perceptible in whole sentences, may also be clearlyperceivedin

the utterance of single words.

Ex. Maria! A
j
^F=L
but

Ma ri a Ma ry.

Whatever the accent became in later times, its very name of prosodia, accentits, i. e. by-

song, shows that in Greek and Latin, too, it was musical,

originally that tonos meant pitch,

oxys, high pitch,barys, low pitch, and that perispomenos, drawn round, did not refer origin-
ally
to the sign of the circumflex,but to the voice being drawn up and down in pronouncing
a circumflexed syllable.
" 3. For grammatical purposes we have to distinguishin Sanskrit two accents only, the
uddtta and the svarita. The uddtta is pronounced by raising the voice, the svarita by a

combined raising and fallingof the voice. All vowels which have neither of these accents

are called anuddtta, i. e. without uddtta, though they might with equal justicebe called
asvarita, without the svarita. The anuddtta, immediately preceding an uddtta or svarita

vowel, is sometimes called anuddttatara or sannatara*. (Pan. i. 2, 29-31.)

*
Bopp, following Professor Roth (Nir. p. LVIII), calls this accent sannatatara, as if from

sannata, depressed ; it is, however, derived from sanna, the participleof sad, to sink.
" ;. ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT. 287

In transliterated words I mark the uddtta by the acute, the originalsvarita by the

circumflex.

Every syllablewithout either the mark of uddtta or svarita has to be considered as

grammaticallyunaccented ; and an unaccented before

syllable an uddtta or originalstarita,
as anuddttatara.
phonetically If the unuddtta must be marked in transliterated words, it
can be marked by the grams. Thus in tt avardhanta, they grew, t" has the uddtta, a the
anuddtta. If the two words coalesce into te 'vardhanta, then e takes the svarita,tf 'vardhanta.
srucht+\va
Similarly, become sruch?va;tri+ambakam become trySmbakam.
" 4. In Sanskrit the accents are indicated in the followingway :

The uddtta is never indicated at all,but onlythe svarita,(whether originalor dependent,)

and the anuddttatara i. e. the anuddtta
(sannatara), immediately preceding an uddtta

or svarita syllable.The sign of the svarita is "

that of the anuddttatara is __.

,

Whenever we find a marked

syllable by the sign of the anuddttatara, we know that
_,

the next syllable,if left without any mark, is uddtta; if marked by "

,
it is svarita.

Hence ^f'"itis agnfh, "R*U is kanydf.

A monosyllabicword, if uddtta, has no mark at all. Ex. ft ydh, "Jnu.

A monosyllabic
word, if anuddtta,is marked by .
Ex. ^t vah, T nah.

A word,
monosyllabic if svarita,is marked by "

.
Ex. *" svdh.

" 5. As a general rule every word has but one either

syllable uddtta or svarita,the
rest of the syllables
being anuddtta. the accent. But if an uddtta
Any syllablemay have

is
syllable followed by an anuddtta its
syllable, anuddtta is changed into what is called the

dependent svarita. Ex. VlOtHl agnind. Here

^^ ag, anuddtta,is pronounced
originally
and marked as anuddttatara; f^Tni is uddtta,and is therefore without any mark; TT ndf

originally
anuddtta, becomes svarita, and is marked accordingly. In transliteration this

dependent svarita need not be marked, nor the anuddttatara. Both may be treated as

anuddtta, i.e. without grammatical accent, while their exact in Sanskrit, to be

pronunciation
described hereafter,is of importance to Vedic scholars only.
" 6. If a word standingby itself or at the head of a sentence begins with several anuddtta

theyhave
syllables, all to be marked by the sign of anuddttatara. Ex.
'MI^Mi dpnuvdnah;
S"V"i"4l
hridayydyd.
" 7. By observing these simple rules,no doubt can remain as to the grammaticalaccent
of any word in Sanskrit. The followingis a list of the classes
principal of accented words

in Sanskrit :

1. A word of
consisting one which
syllable has the uddtta, is called uddtta. Ex. T" yah,

"Jnu, ^ kdm.

2. A word which has the uddtta on the last is called

syllable, antoddtta. Ex. *tT'^: agnty,
janitd.
^ifarti

3. A word which has the uddtta on the is called ddyuddtta. Ex.

first syllable, ^ (ndrafi,
^tlft
hdtd.

4. A word which has the uddtta on the middle is called madhyoddtta.

syllable, Ex. *d*nni

agn{nd,^fir*ffil
agnibhih.
svarita.
5. A word consistingof one syllablewhich has the originalsvarita, is called
Ex. 1$ kva, ^ svah.

6. A word which has the svarita the last is

syllable, called antasvarita.
original on

Ex. cn"q|kanyd.
 288 ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT. " 8-

7. A word which has the originalsvarita on the middle is called madhyasvarita.

syllable,
Ex. "J^"i"4i
hridayyayd.
8. A word which has the originalsvarita on the first is
syllable, called ddisvarita.

Ex. T3"*!]R svarnare.

9. A word without uddtta or svarita,is called sarvdnuddtta. Ex. ^t vah, "Tt nah.

10. A word with two uddtta is called

syllables, dviruddtta; i^tHPit:
brihaspdtih.Here the

first is uddtta,and
syllable is therefore not marked at all. The second syllableis
anuddtta, and according to rule would become svarita. But as the next syllableis
uddtta again,the anuddtta becomes anuddttatara, and is marked accordingly.The
third is uddtta, and
syllable the anuddtta,becomes
last,originally svarita.

In msfNtjxuT mitrdvdrunau,the first syllable but becomes

is anuddtta, anuddttatara, because
an uddtta follows. The second is
syllable uddtta,so is the third,and hence neither
of them has any mark. The fourth being anuddtta,
syllable, becomes svarita,
because it follows an uddtta. The last is anuddtta and,
syllable as nothingfollows,
is left without a mark.

11. A word with three uddtta is called

syllables, triruddtta ; ^^ii^tflin
indrdbnhaspdti.
" 8. If words come together in a sentence, the same rules apply to them as to single
words. Thus if a word ending in uddtta is followed by a word beginningwith an anuddtta

the
syllable, anuddtta is pronounced
syllable as svarita. Thus *K + ^, i. e. yah -j-cha,
become *P5T ydscha,where the mark of the dependent svarita on ^ cha shows that *T ya
has the uddtta.

If a word ending in an anuddtta is followed by a word beginningwith an uddtta or

svarita,the anuddtta becomes anuddttatara. .

Ex. vt*in*i^ djanayat+ F tarn become

^I*1"l*m djanayattdm.
If a word ending in a svarita,which replacesan originalanuddtta, is followed by another
word having the uddtta on the first the general rule requiresthe svarita, being
syllable,
originally
an anuddtta, to become anuddttatara, so that we have to write *T5T Jft^yds
cha tat.

Here we see that *K yah has the uddtta, because otherwise,at the beginning of a sentence,
it would have to be marked with anuddttatara. As ^ cha has the anuddttatara, we see that
it was anuddtta, and
originally became anuddttatara,
because the next syllable has the
Jfi^tdt
uddtta, which need not be marked.

If instead of FIT tdt,which has the uddtta,we put ^I" hydh,which has the svarita,
we should

have to write *P3T ^h yds cha hyah, the sign of the svarita on ^K that
hydh showing first,
*?hhyah cannot be uddtta, for in that case it would have no mark, and would requiresvarita
on the next ; and
followingsyllable that
secondly, it cannot be anuddtta, for in that case it
could not be preceded by an anuddttatara.

If an originalsvarita follows after a final uddtta, it retains the sign of the svarita,but it
is then the originalor the dependent svarita.
impossibleto say whether that sign marks

Ex. SBHilJIffidtmd+kva(Rv. I. 164,4). Only,if an uddtta followed after Hi kva, its svarita

would remain (see" 9),while the dependent svarita would become anuddttatara.

If a word such as ^^Ijf^HJarunayugbhih,having the uddtta on yug, stands by itself,

it

must have the anuddttatara sign, not only under TO na, which immediatelyprecedes the
uddtta but
syllable, likewise under ^ a and ^ ru. But if preceded by -stfri:
agnih,which
has uddtta on the takes the svarita,the second requires
last,the first syllable no mark at all,
and the third keeps its anuddttatara mark ; '^Tfri^sTOjJ'foT:
agnirarunayugbhih.
290 ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT; " II-

nvmdra. ^ +
^T^T JJWT i3*f evd+hi+asya + = = evd hydsya (Rv. i. 8, 8).

Also, "T^ nadt, plur."T?hnadyah, but gen. sing."T?nt nadydh,

because in the former

the termination is anuddtta, in

originally the latter uddtta.

c. If an uddtta e or o coalesces with an (elided)anuddtta a, it takes svarita (Prat.188).

Ex. W + ^raVff = "ffS^Pkhf
te+avardhanta = te \ardhanta.

According to Mandukeya all uddtta vowels coalescingwith another anuddtta vowel,

become svarita. This is also the case in certain Brahmanas ; see Kielhorn, Bhashika-

sutra, I. 5.
The accents produced by the coalescence of vowels have the technical
following names,

taken from the name of the Sandhi that gave rise to them :

1. the
Praslishta, accent of two vowels united into one (samdvesa,ektbhdva).
2. Abhinihita, the accent of two vowels of which the second is the elided a.

3. Kshaipra,the accent of two vowels of which the first has been changed into a semivowel.

4. Tairovyanjana,the svarita,replacingan anuddtta, if separatedby consonants from the

precedinguddtta. Ex. ^ ft"i*jQa

agnim ile.

the svarita,replacingan anuddtta,if separated by hiatus

5. Vaivritta (orpadavritta], an

from the precedinguddtta (Prat.204). Ex. 1 ^" 2/a/

indra*.

6. Jdtya, the svarita in the body of a word, also called nitya, inherent. It is always

precededby either y or v, and points to a period in the historyof Sanskrit in which

these semivowels retained something of their vowel nature. It may, in fact,be treated
as medial kshaipra; and it is important that where the of
peculiarpronunciation the

different svaritas is described,that of the jdtya and the kshaiprais said to be identical

(Vaj.Prat. I. 125).
" ii. By applying these rules we can with discover which
perfectcertainty in
syllable
each word has the grammaticalaccent, whether uddtta or svarita. Unfortunately many
words lose their accent in a the verb which, in
sentence, particularly a direct sentence, is
considered as a mere enclitic of the noun to which it belongs. Only in relative and

conditional sentences, or when a verb begins a sentence, and under some other restrictions

which are fullydescribed by native grammarians, does the verb retain its independent accent.
Vocatives also lose their accent, except at the beginning of a sentence, when they have the

accent on the first syllable

f. With these exceptions,however, every student,by following
the rules here given,will be able to determine what is the real grammaticalaccent of any

* call the
Besides the tairovyanjanaand the vaivritta,which we should dependent
svarita,other subdivisions are mentioned by some authorities. Thus if compound words

are divided (in the Padapatha) by the avagraha, the tairovyanjanais called tairovirdma.

Ex. *ftStimg6 'patau. If a word is divided in the Padapatha, the first half ending in a

svarita preceded by an uddtta,and the second half beginning with an uddtta,the svarita is

called tdthdbhdvya.Ex. TTrJ^Scflffi^.

ta Here is uddtta,nu is svarita,then follows the

avagraha or pause of division,and after that na, which is again uddtta. Here a kind of

kampa takes place,and the svarita is marked accordingly. Though the name tdthdbhdvya
is not mentioned in the first the peculiaraccent
Pratisakhya, which it is meant for is fully
described in Sutra 212. In the commentary on the Vaj. Prat. (120)it would perhaps be

better to write asamhitdvat instead of svasamhitdvat j Weber, Ind. Stud. vol. iv. p. 137.

t See Bhashika-sutra,ed. Kielhorn, II. 1-31; Whitney, in Beitragezur vergleichenden

Sprachforschung,
vol. I. p. 187.
-J 12. ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT. 291

word occurringin hymns of the Rig-veda. The system of marking

the the uddtta and
svarita in the Satapatha-Brahmanais slightlydifferent,
as be seen from Professor
may
Weber's remarks, and
introductory particularly
from Dr. Kielhorn's learned notes on the
Bhashika-sutras.

" 12. Quite different from the determination of the grammatical accent is the question
how the accents should be pronounced or intoned in a sentence, and in the
particularly
hymns and Brahmanas of the Vedas.
principal This questionconcerns the student of the
Veda only,and different authorities differ on this point. The followingshort remarks must
be sufficient. Accordingto the (187 seq.),the
Rig-veda-Pratisakhya uddtta is high, the
(in in/tiff
a low ; of the svarita one portionis higher than uddtta,the rest like uddtta, except
if an uddtta or svarita follows, in which case the voice sinks down to the anuddtta pitch.
This sinkingdown is called kampa, shaking. All anuddtta following
syllables, after svarita

(whetheroriginal
or dependent)
are pronouncedwith uddtta pitch(195), which
except the last,
is followed againby either uddtta or svarita,and takes the low pitchof anuddtta (196).This
pronunciationof anuddtta with
syllables uddtta pitch is called the Prachaya accent (205).
We have therefore only three kinds of pitch,(no special
anuddttatara pitchbeingrecognized
in the Pratis'akhya,)
which in their relative positionmay be represented
by

anuddtta, uddtta, svarita, prachaya.

Thus in *II^M*S ^*OT mdddyasva svarnare, *TT md is anuddtta,^dais uddtta,^ ya is svarita,

is anuddtta, ^T^svar is *!TCnare, both anuddtta, but pronounced like uddtta.
svarita,

J,
J*3 ,
J*J J J |
JJJJ*ggj
ma d"" ya sva svar nare.

In ""f^*"M*irflMUfrft
ddabdhapramatir vdsishthah,TO a is uddtta,^W dab is svarita,

dhaprama are anuddtta, but pronounced like uddtta, fitti is anuddtta,^T ra is uddtta,

sish is svarita,7! "^a$ is anuddtta, but pronouncedas uddtta.

O j j j
P
d dab dha pra ma tir vd sish (hah.

Other Sfokhas vary in the pronunciationof the accents, as may be seen from their respective

Much
Pratis'akhyas. confusion has been caused by mixing up these different
systems,and,
in by
particular, tryingto reconcile the rules of the Rig-veda-Pratis'akhya
with the rules

of Panini. According to Panini (i.2, 29 seq.)the uddtta is high, the anuddtta low, but the
svarita is half high and half low, and the anuddttas followingafter svarita (original
or

dependent) are while

pronouncedmonotonously (ekafruti), the last of them, immediately

*
Long after this was written I saw Dr. Haug's descriptionof the accents in the

Zeitschrift der D. M. G. vol. He givesthe intervals much smaller, so that if

xvn. p. 799.
the anuddtta is c, the uddtta would be d, and the svarita would rise to e. This is no doubt

right,and it will be easy to transcribe own notation accordingly.I only retain it because
my
it is clearer to the eye. What is very important,as confirming my view, is Dr. Haug's
remark that in listening
to the recitation of the Pandits he could not perceiveany difference

between the uddtta and the anuddttas if pronouncedwith prachaya svara.

P p 2
292 ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT. " 12.

preceding a new
uddtta or svarita, is lower than anuddtta, and hence called sannatara by
or,

the commentators, anuddttatara. This system, too, though different from the former, gives

only three kinds of musical pitch, which be approximately represented by

us may

P
anuddttara, anuddtta, uddtta, svarita, ekafruti.

Ekafruti is described without definite pitch (traisvarydpavdda), and might therefore

as any

be intended for mere monotonous recitative*.

* It is commonly used as synonymous

with prachita; e.g. uddttamayam pracJiitam

ekasrutiti parydyah, Vaj. Prat. iv. 138.

 INDEX OF NOUNS.

NOTE" The figuresrefer to the ", not to the page.

akkd, mother, 238. dpahjwater, 149, an.

akshi, eye, 234. is,blessing,

172.

^P i, face,214.
w^agnimath, fire-kindling,
157.

^M fn atichamu, better than an army, 227. dsya,face, 214.

""i"jv
atilakshmt, better than Lakshmi, "n, 203.

227. */,such, 174.

better than
'sfrt, a woman, m.f.,229. -iyas,206.

eating,182. reciter of hymns,

3"*^\\*{uktha6ds, 177.
,

n, 191. "j ";"* udaka, water, 214.

anadud, ox, 210. (, upward, northern, 181.

anaroan, without a foe, 189. water, 214.

^st n anehas,time, 168. unnf, leading out, 221.

^
181.
TSF^^anvach,following, updnah,shoe, 174.

^n^o/), water, 211. y, nom. prop., 169.

SwfW"ni ambikd, mother, 238. ushnih, a metre, 174.

,
fire,149. urj, strength,161.

aryaman, name of a deity,

201. priest,161.
ritvij,

w5i^an?a",
horse, 189. ^J^J^*^
ribhukshin,Indra, 195.

vHf^arflaw, hurting,foe,189. ^T$"T kakubh, region,157.

"lrfw
kati,how
^H"iMi^ avaydj,priest,163. many, 231.

^W"M-"I avdch, south, 180. (, nail,221.

avt,f. not desiring,

225. kavi, poet,230.

blood, 214. "UTiT kdnta, beloved,238.

,

161, 214. ifHTkdntd,fern, beloved,238.

;, blood,
How
t'yaf, much ? 190.
xt^ asthi,bone, 234.

ahan, n. day, 196. 164.

kir,scattering,
vf^
the end of compound, kudhi, m. f. a bad thinker,221.
Tf^-aAan, day,at a

197, 198. kumdri, m. girlish,

227.

vi^'iiijr kri,m. f. buying,220.

ahargana, month, 196.

soul,self,191, 192. i, curlew, 159.

,
294 INDEX OF NOUNS.

kroshtu,jackal,
236. J ddrdh,wife,149.

khanj,lame, .163. didhaksh, desirous of burning,174.

,
heavier,206. iv and ^ dyu, sky,213.
,
voice, 164. "HpJTdis,showing,174.

,
guardian,157. T dis,country,174.

covering,
174. duh, milking,174.

j^rO, OX, 2l8. duhitri,

daughter, 235.

iftf^goraksh,
cowherd, 174. ,
thunderbolt,221.
%\miftgrdmani,leader of a village,
221. seeing,174.

chakds, splendid,
"*|flmt( 172. ,
worshipper,162.

chakdsat,shining,184.
""|o|,|Uj^ doshan, arm, 214.

desirous of acting,172. arm, 172, 214.

,

156.
chitralikh,painter, ^ dyu and fl^div,
sky,213.
eating,184.
WQl^jakshat, tftdyo,
sky,219.
jagat, world, 184.
"TJIi^ ^ druh, hating, 174.

jaganvas,havinggone, 205. 'gT^dvdr, door, 164.

jagmivas,having gone, 205. dviddmnf, havingtwo ropes, 194.

1 ^ jaghanvas,having killed,205.
*i """!
,
hating,174.
"f PH"i *Hjaghnivas,havingkilled,205. ^fn"Xdhanin, rich, 203.
"RT jard,old age, 166. VTJ dhdtri,n. providence,
235.

m. f. a buyer of water,221. VT dhtjm.f. thinkuig,220.

,
cloud,158. tf dM, f. inteUect,224.

waking, 184.
*(\"Hi{jdgrat, l|)"iOdMvari, wife of a fisherman,193.

paring,174.
'tt^taksh, ,
falling,
173.

n -tsfntakshan, carpenter,191. nadi, f. river,225.

iffrf
tati,so many, 231. naptri,grandson,235.
"T1|
H^fttantri,f. lute,225. "T5T nas, destroying,
174.

infttart,f. boat, 225. "T^wa5,nose, 214.

iryach,tortuous, 181. "f?rnah, binding,174-

turdsdh,Indra, 175. ndman, name,
"1l*i"t, 191.

r?^ tvach, skin,158. ndsikd,nose, 214.

tvish,splendour,1 74. ninivas,having led,205.

,
tooth, 214. nirjara,ageless,167.
t, giving,184. nri,man, 237.
dadhi, curds, 234. m. f. dancer, 222.

rish,bold, 174. "ftnau, ship,217.

"if danta,tooth,214. low, 181.
"**'*fnyacJi,

t,poor, 184. m., ^T^pangu,

fern, lame, 230.

ddtri,giver,
235. ti,lord,233.

, rope, fern.,179, 193. m, m. path,195.

 INDEX OF NOUNS. 295

foot, 214. ironj brahman, creator,193.

trflpapt, m. f. protector,
222. ,
Your Honour, 188.

TTCRfft
paramanl, m.f. best leader, 221. ,
161.
physician,
H (X4 |l^
parivrdj,mendicant, 162. *ft/////,
f. fear,224.

,
leaf-shedding,
173. , being,221.
f. earth,224.
joint,
191. ,

dut m. f. n. pale,230. ^ bhtir,

atmosphere, 149.

foot,207.
-prfrf, ^Jl^bhrijj, 162.
roasting,
foot,214. , shining,162.

,
lump-eater,170. bhrdtri,brother, 235.

,
father,235. i,f. brow, 224.

,
desirous of maturing,1 74. *IM"""\ maghavan, Indra, 200.

w, wishing to read, 171. diving,161.

f;',
ifa$ pilu,m. n. a tree and its fruit,230. ,
187.

,
fat,fern. ntaO pioari,194. matt, thought,230.

u, re-born, 221. mathin, churn ing-stick,

195.

, man, (pums), 212. madhulih, bee, 174.

,
town, 164. 191.

,
Indra, 168. , great,186.

,
an 176.
offering, ,
meat, 214.

name of a deity,201. *rNfmdthsa, meat, 214.

army, 214. t, mother, 235.

pritand,army,
*pT"TT 214. ,
month, 214.

f, deer,185. muh, confounding,174.

,
having cooked, 205. ,
head, 191.

lord
prajdpati, of creatures, 233. ;, cleaning,162.

pratidivan,sporting, mridu, m. f. n. soft,230.

192.

,
western, 181. an, liver,214.

HVfl"
pradhi, m.f. thinking eminently,
221. liver,214.
ri'f,

fern.,223. ,
162.
sacrificing,

,
quieting,178. sacrificer,
192.

eastern, 180.
Ttt^prdch, Ufa ya"",as many, 231.

f. road,
W"prdchh, asking, 160, 174. ,
222.

worshipping,
159. young, 199.

badi,dark fortnight,149. pea-soup, 214.

having many kings,194. pea-soup, 214.

"l ? W *4^H bahusreyast,

auspicious,227. ,
shining,162.

^^"Tbahurj,very strong,161. ,
king, 191.

, knowing, 157. rajftf,

queen, 193.

t,great, 185. ,
light,158.
296 INDEX OF NOUNS.

ruj,disease,161. "uddhadhi,a pure thinker,221.

^^ rurudvas,crying,
204. sufruvas, having heard, 205.

^^ rush, anger, 174. sushki, 222.

"^rai,wealth,217. ^TT sri,f. happiness,224.

lakshmi, f. goddessof prosperity,

225. , dog, 199.
laghu,m. f. n. light,230. svetavdh and HJrHt^svetavas,209.
fro? lih,licking,174. year, 149.

"g lu,m. f. cutting,220. ^rf^T sakthi,thigh,234.

vanij,merchant, 161. sakhi,friend, 232.

t, 187. us, friend, 172.

,
f. wife,225. ! sadhryach,accompanying,181.

191. ,
right,181.

J varshdh,rainyseason, 149. j, sovereign,162.

, frog,221. sarvasak, omnipotent, 155.

-vas, part,perfect,204. sdnu,ridge,214.

vdch,speech,158. tufa sdmi,half, 149.

vdtapramt,antelope,222. J sikatdh,sand, 149.

^T^!vdr,water, 164. sukhi,wishingfor pleasure,222.

"nftvdri,water, 230. Tf sugan, readyreckoner,154.

carrying,208. suchakshus, having good eyes, 165.

,
knowing, 205. 165.
is,well-lighted,

a river,174. suti,wishing for a son, 222.

,
drop of water, 174. , well-sounding,
170.

f^RJT"T
vibhrdj,resplendent,162. sudhi,m. f. having a good mind, 226.

vaksh, desirous of saying,

174. zs, well- walking,170.
wishingto enter, 174.
iviksh, ,
m. f. having good brows, 226.
? vis,entering,
174. sumanas, well-minded, 165.

msvapd, all-preserving,
239. susri,well-faring,
221.

universal monarch, 162.

visvardj, susakhi, a good friend,232.

creator,162.
visvasrij, suhimsf well-striking,
172.

ish,ordure, 174. *J^ suhrid, friendly,

157.
181.
vishvach, all-pervading, .
/,creating,162.

tree-hewer, 222.
vrikshalu, somapd, Soma drinker,239.

risck,cutting,159. stri,woman, 228.

3("h"^sakan, ordure, 214. snih,loving,174.

it,ordure,214. snu, ridge,214.

sankhadhmd, shell-blower,
239. spueing, 174.

,
commanding, 184. is,touching,174.

suchi, m. f. n. bright,
230. ;, a garland,161.

suddhadhi, thinking pure things,221. sras, falling,

173.
 298 INDEX OF VERBS,

kri,to scatter,113. to grow weak, 158,36, 105.

rft, to praise,138. *$"jvar, to suffer,
92.

WT kram, to stride,30, 29. 7TEJ1taksh, to hew, 37.

jftkri,to buy, 153. 1T^ tan, to stretch,148.

"HW^klam,
to tire,29, 30, 130. W^tap, to burn, 28.

tpff fcsfom,to kill,149. TfT tarn, to languish,130.

ksham, to bear, 130.
T5f*T fcnrft)', (fii
to forbear, fdHffttitikshate),
75, 63.
f^TArsfo',
to wane, to diminish,24. 5 *w, to grow, 1 70.

fop^fo^m, to kill,150. ]J^tud, to strike,104.

^ khad" to eat, 8. to delight,
l[*{trip, 127, 38.

^"^ khan, to dig,95. Jf^trih,to kill,208.

f^ khid, to vex, 107. TT tri,to cross, 61.

^3TT khya, to proclaim,166. i, to be ashamed, 74.

Trf gad, to speak, 9. ', to tremble, 30.

TFR 0aw, to go, 33, 31. c|""?

"rM", to cut, 30.

TT 5-0, to go, 83. r^ tvar, to hurry,92.

*n^"Mp, to protect,26, 63. "f$T
dams, to bite,62, 73.

*J|guh" to hide, 97, 29. "^ dad, to give,70.

*t gai,to sing,44. ^ dam, to tame, 130.

?T|#r"A, to take, 157, 105, ^fin^T

daridrd, to be poor, 179, 177.

*""%#?az,to droop, 43. "^Tdah, to burn, 42.

"5$^w-class,46, 47, 200. ^T rfa,to give,58.

TTT ^r^ra,to smell,54. "^Tc?a,to give,200.

^3FT^ ckakds, to shine,177. ^rafif

diddmsati,
to straighten,
63.
^TJT chaksh, to speak, 181. Trfw, to play,I2i.

,
to pound, 137. rfl,
to decay,154.

cJiamy to eat, 29 "

iftdtdMy to shine, 177.

ohah, to pound, 137. ^A, to milk, 1 88.

c^",to collect,137, 140. "^c?n,to observe, 120.

it^to think, 2. is,to see, 48, 38-

(Vj(pa4)t
T chur, to steal,136. | dri,to tear, 156.

chyut,to sprinkle,3. ?T de, to protect, 85.

cMo, to cut, 124. c?"",

to cleanse,46.

,
to eat, 177, 176. ^ c?ai,to protect, 85.

aw, to spring up, 132. i, to cut, 124.

Jdgri,to wake, 178, 177. ;, to shine, 86.

*{ji,to excel, 36. ;, to hate, 187.

*t jri,to grow old, 123, 156. ',to place,201.

,
to know, to make known, 137. \dhu, to shake, 156.

./na,to know, 159. i, to warm, 27.

 NDEX OF VERBS. 299

$ dhe, to drink,47. TT md, to measure, 198.

VTT dhmd, to blow, 55. TI"^man, nwfcfl to search,63.
mtmdriuate,

,
to hum, n. f*fmi, to throw, 154.

t, to bow, 32. fa^mirf,to be wet, 131.

ina" to perish,129, 117. T*T?T rttiA,

to sprinkle,
41.

nah, to bind, 135. *ftmf, to kill,

154.

5T niksh, to kiss, 15. ^^ much, to loosen, 107.

ny, to cleanse,202. *^ wiuA,to be foolish,

128.

nine?,to blame, 14. ^ win, to die,119.

"p^nnV,
to dance, 122. fS^wiry, to clean,174.
*nff pan, to traffic,
26. OT mnd, to study,57.
mJTpan, to praise,76. ^^mrwcA, to go, 19.

,
to fall,
64. 1"^ yaj,to sacrifice,
99.

to go, 133. TP(yam,to stop, 31, 58.

,
to praise,26, 76. ", to feed,137.

,
to see, 48. to go, 165.
^T pd, to drink,53. 3 yu, to mix, 169.

's,to form, 107. to tinge,62.

)',

,
to purify,
156. rad, to trace, 10.

"rT,to fill,
195, 156. ram, to sport, 91.

UC^prachh,
to ask, 115, 105. ;, to shine, 94.

TITT psd, to eat, 163. ^j ru, to go, to kill,84.

1R^ phal,to burst,34. ^j rw, to shout, 1 70.

*V badh, "tflHrUr)
bfbhatsate,to loathe,63. ^j^rud,to cry, 1 76.
"^V bandh, to bind, 160. ?S^rudh, to shut out, 203.

to perceive,134. i,to kill,39.

to speak, 190. lash,to desire,30.

j, to break, 206. to paint,109, 107.

'ip,
bhi,to fear, 193. ", to break, 107.

,
to be, i. "5 M, to cut, 156.

^J6Ar",to cany, 199. ^T vach, to speak, 175.

^R1^bhrajj,to fry,105. [/,to go, 21.

WT bhram, to roam, 30, 130. racf,to speak, 66.

r 6Ara",to shine,30. ", to sow, to weave, 100.

T 6^Z"5,to shine,30. to go, 105.

to sink, 117.
mo;)', ^ val, to h've,137.

1^ mad, to rejoice,
130. ^51 vas, to desire,167, 105.

*T^manth, to shake, to churn, 5. ^^t?as,to dwell, 65.

T^Twap, to bind, 92. ^ vah, to carry, 101, 93.

TT ma, to measure, 164. vichh, to go, 26.

Q q 2
300 INDEX OF VERBS.

"y, to separate, 202. saw, to obtain,151.

r""vid,to find,108, 107. sah, to bear, 93.

[^ vid, to know, 172. sich,to sprinkle,107.

vish,to embrace, 202. sidh, to go, and "ftW sidh, to mand,

com-

Tt vi, see ^HTfl/. 7.

^ cri,to choose, 142 ; Parasmaipada. r^sw,to serve, 82.

to
*[vri, cherish, 161; Atmanepada. 1JSM, to distil,139.

to be, 87.
"^H^vrit, to bear, to bring/orth, 184.

^V vridh, to grow, 87. sri, to go, 50.

i, to choose, 156. rij,to let off,116,38, 48.

ve, to weave, 102. so, to finish,125, 124.

vevi,to obtain, 177. skand, to approach, 60.

^^ vyach, to surround, 105. TsfiH skambh, to support, 155.

^T^T vyath,to fear,to suffer pain,90. ^j sku, 155.

?, to pierce,126, 105. ^H" skumbh, to hold, 155.

\j,to go, 22. WH stambh, to support, 155.

tO CUt, 112, 105. JsJstu, to praise,189.

sak, to be able,144. f^ stu, to praise,170.

^ sad, to wither,51. ^^stumbh, to stop, 155.

i, to cease, 130. ^5T stri,

to cover, 141.

44 fri
tyl
in,$() sisdmsati,to sharpen,63. ^ff stri,to cover, 156.

?, to command, 180, 177. *" styai,to sound, 45.

sish,to distinguish,
204. WT s^^, to stand,56.

$fts% to lie down, 185. is,to touch, 114.

Sp^ s'ncZA,
to hurt, 87. syand, to sprinkle,to drop, 88, 87.
Tfft
s'o,to sharpen, 124. sriv,to go, to dry,92.

to flow,4.
^K^schut, svanj, to embrace, 73, 62.
to flow, 4.
TZnj^schyut, to sleep,176.
,

"*5T*T
sram, to tire,130. to kill,168.
,

frSf
s'n,to go, to serve, 98. *TT hd, to leave, 196.

", to hear,145. "H? hi,to go, to grow, 143.

?, to breathe,176. "fi|^
hims, to kill,205.
fats'w,to swell,67. hu, to sacrifice,
J 192.
CT shtyai,to sound, 45. *r^!
hurchh, to be crooked, 20.

fy^shthiv,
to spit,35, 29. "" hri,to take, 96.
^^^shvashk, to go, 71. "^ hri,to be ashamed, 194.
to stick,62, 73.
"afJ/, 3T hvri,to bend, 59.

f,to perish,52. 3" hve,to call,103.

N*.o1